Proteus XRa S.M

PROTEUS XR/a
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS Service Manual

REV 42 DIRECTION 2273022-100
Technical
Publications
Direction 2273022-100
Revision 42
Proteus XR/a System

(32, 50, 65, 80kW)
Service Manual
Copyright © 2000~2020 by General Electric Co.
Service Documentation
1
PROTEUS XR/a
Preface Table of Contents
IMPORTANT STATEMENT……………………………………………………….03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS…………………………………………….... 05
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)………………………………………... 06
WARNING………………………………………………………………………….. 12
REVISION HISTORY………………………………………………………………20
LIST OF CHANGED PAGES…………..………………………………………… 26
CHAPTER TABLE OF CONTENTS……………………………………………..29
2
PROTEUS XR/a
Direction 2273022-100
Revision 41
Proteus XR/a System

Service Manual
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-Ray equipment if not properly the operator to take adequate The equipment is sold with the
used may cause injury. precautions to prevent the understanding that the General
Accordingly, the instructions possibility of any persons Electric Company, Medical
herein contained should be carelessly exposing themselves or Systems Group, its agents, and
thoroughly read and others to radiation. representatives have no
understood by everyone who responsibility for injury or damage
will use the equipment before It is important that everyone which may result from improper
you attempt to place this having anything to do with x- use of the equipment.
equipment in operation. The radiation be properly trained and
General Electric Medical fully acquainted with the Various protective material and
Systems Group, will be glad to recommendations of the National devices are available. It is urged
assist and cooperate in placing Council on Radiation Protection that such materials or devices be
this equipment in use. and Measurements as published used.
in NCRP Reports available from
Although this apparatus NCRP Publications, 7910 CAUTION: United States
incorporates a high degree of Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Federal law restricts this
protection against x-radiation Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of
other than the useful beam, no the International Commission on device to use by or on the
practical design of equipment can Radiation Protection, and take order of a physician.
provide complete protection. Nor adequate steps to protect against
can any practical design compel injury.
3
PROTEUS XR/a
If you have any comments, suggestions or corrections to the information in this document,
please write them down, include the document title and document number, and send them to:
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS

MANAGER – INFORMATION INTEGRATION,
AMERICAS W–622
P.O. BOX 414
MILWAUKEE, WI 53201–0414
4
PROTEUS XR/a
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
This product conforms with the requirements of Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices
when it bears the following CE marking of conformity:
0459
5
PROTEUS XR/a
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
This product conforms with IEC 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2004 EMC standard for medical devices.
Note: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. The equipment
may cause or subject to radio frequency interference with other medical and non–medical
devices and radio communications. To provide reasonable protection against such
interference, the Proteus XR/a System (32, 50, 65, 80kW) complies with emissions limits for a
Group 1, Class A Medical Devices and has applicable immunity level as stated in IEC 60601-
1-2:2001+A1:2004.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Special precautions and other information regarding EMC provided in the accompanying
documents of this equipment shall be observed during installation and operation of this
equipment.
Note: If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by switching the
equipment on and off), the user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to correct the
problem by one or more of the following measure(s):
• Reorient or relocate the affected device(s).

• Increase the separating space between the equipment and the affected device.
• Power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device.
• Consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions.
Use of accessories, transducers, cables and other parts other than those specified by the
WARNING manufacturer of this equipment may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of
the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused either by the
use of interconnect cables other than those recommended, or by unauthorized changes or
modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Note: To comply with the regulations applicable to an electromagnetic interface for a Group 1,
Class A Medical Device, and to minimize interference risks, the following requirements shall
apply:
• All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly

grounded. Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the
equipment causing radio frequency interference in violation of the European Union
Medical Device directive and FCC regulations.
• All of those recommended guidance regarding electromagnetic environment shall be

followed.
Note: Do not use devices which intentionally transmit RF signals (Cellular Phones, Transceivers, or Radio
Controlled Products) in the vicinity of this equipment as it may cause performance outside the
published specifications. Keep the power to these type devices turned off when near the equipment.
The medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients, and others.
6
PROTEUS XR/a
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions
The Proteus XR/a system is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The
purchaser or user of the Proteus XR/a system should assure that it is used in an elec-
tromagnetic environment as described below:
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment
The Proteus XR/a system uses RF energy only for
RF Emissions Group1 its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are
CISPR11 very low and are not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.
RF Emissions Class A The Proteus XR/a system is suitable for use in all
CISPR11 establishments other than domestic and those
Harmonic emissions Not directly connected to the public low-voltage power
IEC 61000-3-2 applicable supply network that supplies buildings used for
Voltage fluctuations/ Not domestic
flicker emissions applicable purposes.
IEC 61000-3-3
7
PROTEUS XR/a
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity (1)
purchaser or user of the Proteus XR/a system should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic
environment as described below:
Immunity Test IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance Electromagnetic Environment
Test Level Level
Electrostatic 6 kV contact 6 kV contact Floors are wood, concrete, or ceramic
discharge (ESD) 8 kV air 8 kV air tile, or floors are covered with synthetic
IEC 61000-4-2 material and the relative humidity is at
least 30 %.
2 kV for power 2 kV for
Electrical fast supply lines power supply
transient/burst lines Mains power quality is that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV for commercial and/or hospital environment
input/output 1 kV for
lines input/output
lines
1 kV differential 1 kV
Surge mode differential Mains power quality is that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV common mode commercial and/or hospital environment.
mode 2 kV common
mode
Voltage dips, Mains power quality is that of a typical
short < 5 % UT 0 % UT for 5 commercial and/or hospital environment.
interruptions (> 95 % dip in UT) sec If the user of the Proteus XR/a system
and voltage for 0.5 cycle requires continued operation during
variations on power mains interruptions, it is
power supply 40 % UT recommended that the Proteus XR/a
input lines (60 % dip in UT) system be powered from an
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles uninterruptible power supply or a battery.
70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT)
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s
Power Power frequency magnetic fields are at
frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m levels characteristic of a typical location
(50/60 Hz) in a typical commercial and/or hospital
magnetic field environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
Note: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
8
PROTEUS XR/a
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity (2)
purchaser or user of the Proteus XR/a system should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic
environment as described below:
Immunity IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance Electromagnetic Environment
Test Test Level Level
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment are used no closer to any part of the
[EQUIPMENT and/or SYSTEM], including cables,
than the recommended separation distance
calculated from the equation appropriate for the
frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance

Conducted RF 3V
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to [V1 =] 3 V d= 1.2
80 MHz
d= 1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d= 2.3 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
Note: P is the power rating of the transmitter in

Radiated RF 3 V/m
watts (W) according to the transmitter manufac-
IEC 61000-4-3 80 kHz to [E1=] 3 V/m
turer and d is the recommended separation dis-
800 MHz
tance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey,*
are less than the compliance level in each fre-
quency range.**
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equip-

ment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
*Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for cellular telephones and land mobile radios,
amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be estimated accurately. To assess the
electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be performed. If
the measured field strength exceeds the RF compliance level above, observe the Proteus XR/a system to
verify normal operation in each use location. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the [EQUIPMENT and/or SYSTEM].
**Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths are less than 3 V/m.
The Recommended Separation Distances are listed in the next table.
9
PROTEUS XR/a
Recommended Separation Distances for Portable and Mobile RF Communications

Equipment and the Proteus XR/a system
Frequency of
Transmitter
150KHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
Equation
d= 1.2 d= 1.2 d= 2.3
Rated Power of
Transmitter DISTANCE DISTANCE DISTANCE
(W) (meters) (meters) (meters)
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a power not listed above, the DISTANCE can be estimated using the
equation in the corresponding column, where P is the power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Product Essential Performance
10
PROTEUS XR/a
Prob./Appl. Severity Test

Level Name Essential Performance of Failure of Failure Req’d Test Methord Pass/Fail Criteria
Exposur; Exposure
See subsystems
System Proteus system parameter display and set; See below See below Yes See subsystems below
below
Positioner movement.
Monitor exposure No unintended exposure;
Fix exposure parameter that No Incorrect exposure （the
Subsystem Acquire expectant dose MEDIUM MEDIUM Yes
AEC displaied on system exposure results is not meet
console. product registration standard）
Monitor unintended No unintended motion or motion

Table vertical motion MEDIUM MEDIUM Yes
motion. stop during immunity test.
Subsystem Positioner movement
Table and OTS
Check EM-lock after The EM-lock function work as
electromagnetic lock (EM- MEDIUM LOW Yes
immunity test. intended after immunity test.
lock) function.
Observance
No exposure parameter change
Exposure parameter;
System console and Exposure parameter display during immunity test;
Subsystem MEDIUM LOW Yes Set exposure
OTS console Exposure parameter set . Exposure parameter set as
parameter after
intended after immunity test.
Immunity Test.
System able to turn on and boot
Provide power to sub-
Subsystem Power Distribution Unit LOW LOW Yes Turn on and boot up. up successfully after immunity
systems.
test.
Monitor grid
No grid Oscillating aborted
Component Bucky Oscillating Grid MEDIUM LOW Yes Oscillating during
during immunity test.
immunity test.
Check FOV size after

Component Collimator Acquire expectant FOV size MEDIUM MEDIUM Yes No unintended FOV change
immunity test.
Check Emergency No unintended Emergency stop;
Disable table power during
Component Emergency stop LOW MEDIUM Yes stop function after Emergency stop function work
emergency situations.
immunity test. as intended after immunity test.
11
PROTEUS XR/a
WARNING
WARNING
LANGUAGE
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ • ТОВА УПЪТВАНЕ ЗА РАБОТА Е НАЛИЧНО САМО НА АНГЛИЙСКИ

ЕЗИК.
(BG)
• АКО ДОСТАВЧИКЪТ НА УСЛУГАТА НА КЛИЕНТА ИЗИСКА ЕЗИК,
РАЗЛИЧЕН ОТ АНГЛИЙСКИ, ЗАДЪЛЖЕНИЕ НА КЛИЕНТА Е ДА
ОСИГУРИ ПРЕВОД.
• НЕ ИЗПОЛЗВАЙТЕ ОБОРУДВАНЕТО ПРЕДИ ДА СТЕ СЕ
КОНСУЛТИРАЛИ И РАЗБРАЛИ УПЪТВАНЕТО ЗА РАБОТА.
• НЕСПАЗВАНЕТО НА ТОВА ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ МОЖЕ ДА ДОВЕДЕ
ДО НАРАНЯВАНЕ НА ДОСТАВЧИКА НА УСЛУГАТА, ОПЕРАТОРА
ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ В РЕЗУЛТАТ НА ТОКОВ УДАР ИЛИ МЕХАНИЧНА
ИЛИ ДРУГА ОПАСНОСТ.
警告 • 本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果维修服务提供商需要非英文版本，客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修人员，操作员或患者造成触电、机械伤害或其他形式
的伤害。
VÝSTRAHA • TENTO PROVOZNÍNÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.
(CS) • V PŘÍPADĚ, ŽE EXTERNÍ SLUŽBA ZÁKAZNÍKŮM POTŘEBUJE NÁVOD
V JINÉM JAZYCE, JE ZAJIŠTĚNÍ PŘEKLADU DO ODPOVÍDAJÍCÍHO
JAZYKA ÚKOLEM ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NESNAŽTE SE O ÚDRŽBU TOHOTO ZAŘÍZENÍ, ANIŽ BYSTE SI
PŘEČETLI TENTO PROVOZNÍNÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.
• V PŘÍPADĚ NEDODRŽOVÁNÍ TÉTO VÝSTRAHY MŮŽE DOJÍT
K PORANĚNÍ PRACOVNÍKA PRODEJNÍHO SERVISU, OBSLUŽNÉHO
PERSONÁLU NEBO PACIENTŮ VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP PROUDU,
RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM MECHANICKÝCH ČI JINÝCH RIZIK.
ADVARSEL • DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.
(DA) • HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG
END ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR
OVERSÆ TTELSE.
• FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL HAR VÆ RET KONSULTERET OG ER
FORSTÅET.
• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN
MEDFØRE SKADE PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER
ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
12
PROTEUS XR/a
WAARSCHUWING • DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

VERKRIJGBAAR.
(NL)
• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST,
DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING
ERVAN.
• PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT
DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN
BEGREPEN IS.
• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU
HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT
GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE
SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.
WARNING • IF A CUSTOMER'S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE
(EN) OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER'S RESPONSIBILITY
TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES.
• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS
THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS
UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE
SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR, OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC
SHOCK, OR FROM MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
HOIATUS • KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE
KEELES.
(ET)
• KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE
KEELEST ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE
OSUTAMISE EEST.
• ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT
KÄESOLEVA TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU
SAAMIST.
• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA
TEENUSEOSUTAJA, OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST
ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.
VAROITUS • TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.
(FI) • JOS ASIAKKAAN HUOLTOHENKILÖSTÖ VAATII MUUTA KUIN
ENGLANNINKIELISTÄ MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KÄÄNNÖKSEN
HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.
• ÄLÄ YRITÄ KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI
LUKENUT JA YMMÄRTÄNYT TÄMÄN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.
• MIKÄLI TÄTÄ VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI
OLLA HUOLTOHENKILÖSTÖN, LAITTEISTON KÄYTTÄJÄN TAI
POTILAAN VAHINGOITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN
TAI MUUN VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.
13
PROTEUS XR/a
ATTENTION • CE MANUEL DE SERVICE N'EST DISPONIBLE QU'EN ANGLAIS.

(FR) • SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE
AUTRE LANGUE QUE L'ANGLAIS, C'EST AU CLIENT QU'IL INCOMBE
DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE.
• NE PAS TENTER D'INTERVENIR SUR LES EQUIPEMENTS
TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N'A PAS ETE CONSULTE ET
COMPRIS
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER
CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L'OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES
BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES
OU AUTRES.
WARNUNG • DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER
SPRACHE.
(DE)
• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE
BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE
ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.
• VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT DIESE ANLAGE ZU WARTEN,
OHNE DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG GELESEN UND VERSTANDEN ZU
HABEN.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU
VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES
BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH STROMSCHLÄGE,
MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΔΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ.
(EL) • ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ
ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ, ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ
ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ.
• ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ
ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ
ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ.
• ΕΑΝ ΔΕ ΛΑΒΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΥΤΗ, ΕΝΔΕΧΕΤΑΙ
ΝΑ ΠΡΟΚΛΗΘΕΙ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ,
ΣΤΟ ΧΕΙΡΙΣΤΗ Ή ΣΤΟΝ ΑΣΘΕΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ,
ΜΗΧΑΝΙΚΟΥΣ Ή ΑΛΛΟΥΣ ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΥΣ.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS • EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL
(HU) NYELVEN ÉRHETŐ EL.
• HA A VEVŐ SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉRŐ NYELVRE TART
IGÉNYT, AKKOR A VEVŐ FELELŐSSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS
ELKÉSZÍ TTETÉSE.
• NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍ
GA
KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍ RTAKAT NEM
ÉRTELMEZTÉK.
• EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A
SZOLGÁLTATÓ, MŰKÖDTETŐ VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS,
MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT
EREDMÉNYEZHETI.
14
PROTEUS XR/a
AÐVÖRUN • ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.

(IS) • EF AÐ ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNAS
TUNGUMÁLS EN ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ SKYLDA VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ
SKAFFA TUNGUMÁLAÞJÓNUSTU.
• REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ AFGREIÐA TÆ KIÐ NEMA AÐ ÞESSI
ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK
HEFUR VERIÐ SKOÐUÐ OG SKILIN.
• BROT Á SINNA ÞESSARI AÐVÖRUN GETUR LEITT TIL MEIÐSLA Á
ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS FRÁ
RAFLOSTI, VÉLRÆ NU EÐA ÖÐRUM ÁHÆ TTUM.
AVVERTENZA • IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE E DISPONIBILE
SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
(IT)
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS
RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE E
TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
• SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL'APPARECCHIATURA
SOLO DOPO AVER
CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO
• IL NON RISPETTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL'ADDETTO
ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL'UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI
RISCHI.
• このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
• サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業
(JA)
はその業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わない
でください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員
あるいは患者さんが、感電や機械的又はその他の危険により
負傷する可能性があります。
경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.
(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를
제공하는 것은 고객의 책임입니다.
• 본 서비스 지침서를 참고했고 이해하지 않는 한은 해당 장비를 수리하려고
시도하지 마십시오.
• 이 경고에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계상의 혹은 다른 위험으로부터
서비스 제공자, 운영자 혹은 환자에게 위해를 가할 수 있습니다.
15
PROTEUS XR/a
BRĪDINĀJUMS • ŠĪ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.

(LV) • JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZĒJAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORMĀCIJA
CITĀ VALODĀ, NEVIS ANGĻU, KLIENTA PIENĀKUMS IR
NODROŠINĀT TULKOŠANU.
• NEVEICIET APRĪKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES
ROKASGRĀMATAS IZLASĪŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS.
• ŠĪ BRĪDINĀJUMA NEIEVĒROŠANA VAR RADĪT ELEKTRISKĀS
STRĀVAS TRIECIENA, MEHĀNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISĪTU
TRAUMU APKALPES SNIEDZĒJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.
ĮSPĖJIMAS • ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA PRIEINAMAS TIK ANGLŲ
KALBA.
(LT)
• JEI KLIENTO PASLAUGŲ TIEKĖJAS REIKALAUJA VADOVO KITA
KALBA – NE ANGLŲ, NUMATYTI VERTIMO PASLAUGAS YRA
KLIENTO ATSAKOMYBĖ.
• NEMĖGINKITE ATLIKTI ĮRANGOS TECHNINĖS PRIEŽIŪROS, NEBENT
ATSIŽVELGĖTE Į ŠĮ EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVĄ IR JĮ SUPRATOTE.
• JEI NEATKREIPSITE DĖMESIO Į ŠĮ PERSPĖJIMĄ, GALIMI
SUŽALOJIMAI DĖL ELEKTROS ŠOKO,
• MECHANINIŲ AR KITŲ PAVOJŲ PASLAUGŲ TIEKĖJUI, OPERATORIUI
AR PACIENTUI.
ADVARSEL • DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.
(NO) • HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET
SPRÅK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
• IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.
• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN
SKADES PÅ GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER
ANDRE FARER.
OSTRZEŻENIE • NINIEJSZY PODRĘCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĘPNY JEST JEDYNIE
W JĘZYKU ANGIELSKIM.
(PL)
• JEŚLI DOSTAWCA USŁUG KLIENTA WYMAGA JĘZYKA INNEGO NIŻ
ANGIELSKI, ZAPEWNIENIE USŁUGI TŁUMACZENIA JEST
OBOWIĄZKIEM KLIENTA.
• NIE PRÓBOWAĆ SERWISOWAĆ WYPOSAŻENIA BEZ ZAPOZNANIA
SIĘ I ZROZUMIENIA NINIEJSZEGO PODRĘCZNIKA SERWISOWEGO.
• NIEZASTOSOWANIE SIĘ DO TEGO OSTRZEŻENIA MOŻE
SPOWODOWAĆ URAZY DOSTAWCY USŁUG, OPERATORA LUB
PACJENTA W WYNIKU PORAŻENIA ELEKTRYCZNEGO,
ZAGROŻENIA MECHANICZNEGO BĄDŹ INNEGO.
16
PROTEUS XR/a
ATENÇÃO • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE

ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
(PT-BR)
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA
TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS
NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE
FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
• NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER
CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM
PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU
PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS
OU OUTROS.
ATENÇÃO • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE
ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
(PT-PT)
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA
TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS
NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE
FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
• NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER
CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE COLOCAR EM
PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, DO OPERADOR OU
DO PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELÉCTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
ATENŢIE • ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN
LIMBA ENGLEZĂ.
(RO)
• DACĂ UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENŢI
NECESITĂ O ALTĂ LIMBĂ DECÂT CEA ENGLEZĂ, ESTE DE
DATORIA CLIENTULUI SĂ FURNIZEZE O TRADUCERE.
• NU ÎNCERCAŢI SĂ REPARAŢI ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT
ULTERIOR CONSULTĂRII ŞI ÎNŢELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL
DE SERVICE.
• IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA
RĂNIREA DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU
PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA PERICOLELOR DE
ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALTĂ NATURĂ.
17
PROTEUS XR/a
ОСТОРОЖНО! • ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ

ПРЕДЛАГАЕТСЯ ТОЛЬКО НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ.
(RU)
• ЕСЛИ СЕРВИСНОМУ ПЕРСОНАЛУ КЛИЕНТА
НЕОБХОДИМО РУКОВОДСТВО НЕ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ, А НА
КАКОМ-ТО ДРУГОМ ЯЗЫКЕ, КЛИЕНТУ СЛЕДУЕТ
САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНО ОБЕСПЕЧИТЬ ПЕРЕВОД.
• ПЕРЕД ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ
ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬНО ОБРАТИТЕСЬ К ДАННОМУ РУКОВОДСТВУ
И ПОЙМИТЕ ИЗЛОЖЕННЫЕ В НЕМ СВЕДЕНИЯ.
• НЕСОБЛЮДЕНИЕ ТРЕБОВАНИЙ ДАННОГО
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ МОЖЕТ ПРИВЕСТИ К ТОМУ, ЧТО
СПЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ, ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ
ПАЦИЕНТ ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ,
МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ.
• OVO SERVISNO UPUTSTVO JE DOSTUPNO SAMO NA
UPOZORENJE ENGLESKOM JEZIKU.
(SR) • AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTEVA NEKI DRUGI JEZIK,

KLIJENT JE DUŽAN DA OBEZBEDI PREVODILAČKE
USLUGE.
• NE POKUŠAVAJTE DA OPRAVITE UREĐAJ AKO NISTE
PROČITALI I RAZUMELI OVO SERVISNO UPUTSTVO.
• ZANEMARIVANJE OVOG UPOZORENJA MOŽE DOVESTI DO
POVREĐIVANJA SERVISERA, RUKOVAOCA ILI PACIJENTA
USLED STRUJNOG UDARA ILI MEHANIČKIH I DRUGIH
OPASNOSTI.
UPOZORNENIE • TENTO NÁVOD NA OBSLUHU JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V
ANGLIČTINE.
(SK)
• AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEĽ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ
JAZYK AKO ANGLIČTINU, POSKYTNUTIE
PREKLADATEĽSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE ZODPOVEDNOSŤOU
ZÁKAZNÍKA.
• NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA O OBSLUHU ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI
NEPREČÍTATE NÁVOD NA OBLUHU A NEPOROZUMIETE
MU.
• ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTIŤ DO
ZRANENIA POSKYTOVATEĽA SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJÚCEJ
OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA ELEKTRICKÝM PRÚDOM, DO
MECHANICKÉHO ALEBO INÉHO NEBEZPEČENSTVA.
18
PROTEUS XR/a
ATENCION • ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SOLO EXISTE EN INGLES.

(ES) • SI ALGUN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS
SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLES, ES
RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO
DE TRADUCCION
• NO SE DEBERA DAR SERVICIO TECNICO AL EQUIPO,
SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL
DE SERVICIO
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR
LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL
OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES
PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O
DE OTRA NATURALEZA.
VARNING • DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG
PÅ ENGELSKA.
(SV)
• OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT
ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR
ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.
• FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM
DU INTE HAR LÄST OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR
SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN
DET RESULTERA I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN,
OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FÖLJD AV
ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA
FAROR.
DİKKAT • BU SERVİS KILAVUZUNUN SADECE İNGİLİZCESİ
MEVCUTTUR.
(TR)
• EĞER MÜŞTERİ TEKNİSYENİ BU KILAVUZU İNGİLİZCE
DIŞINDA BİR BAŞKA LİSANDAN TALEP EDERSE, BUNU
TERCÜME ETTİRMEK MÜŞTERİYE DÜŞER.
• SERVİS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKİPMANLARA
MÜDAHALE ETMEYİNİZ.
• BU UYARIYA UYULMAMASI, ELEKTRİK, MEKANİK VEYA
DİĞER TEHLİKELERDEN DOLAYI TEKNİSYEN, OPERATÖR
VEYA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇABİLİR.
19
PROTEUS XR/a
REVISIONHISTORY
REVISION HISTORY
REVISION DATE OF ISSUE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 24AUG2000 FIRST RELEASE
1 25SEP2000 • Add table lubricant boxes replacement procedure.
• Add new table control board schematics and table control board adjusting
procedure.
• Update System Schematics and Tomo-link Schematics.
• Supplement tomo (option) installation procedure.
• Add collimator bulb replacement procedure.
• Modify touch screen calibration procedure.
• Update FRU parts list.
2 10NOV2000 • Update page i, 4-6, 4-7, 10-12 and 10-14
3 20NOV2000 • Add collimator mounting screws’ torque requirement. Chapter 2.
• Update renewal parts list and illustration. Chapter 9.
• Add collimator bulb replacement notes. Chapter 3.
• Update Schematics page numbers. Chapter 10.
• Add a note on removing vinyl protective films. Chapter 2.
• Add a note on ESC key in Service Software. Chapter 3.
• Add a trolley stud picture. Chapter 2.
• Add a torque requirement to Trunion screws. Chapter 2.
• Add a Trunion installation warning. Chapter 2.
4 05FEB2001 • Update renewal parts list. Chapter 9
• Update system console mounting Job Card. Chapter 2.
• Add printer mounting Job Card. Chapter 2.
• Add system console replacement Job Card. Chapter 3.
• Add notes. Chapter 2, 3, 4, 8.
• Add OTS console schematics. Chapter 10.
• Add DOSE Calibration Job Card. Chapter 4.
• Add collimator alignment Job Card. Chapter 4.
• Add printer cables connection. Chapter 2.
• Add collimator update Job Card. Chapter 3.
• Add a maintenance item about ‘LAT bar’. Chapter 8.
5 28SEP2001 • Update room dimension in Chapter 2
• Add collimator D1&D2 trouble shooting and replacement in Chapter 3
• Transfer the Job Card SW JEDI 7-4,7-3,7-2 from Chapter 3 to Chapter 4
• Update touch screen calibration and AEC calibration in Chapter4
• Add new error code in chapter 7
• Add new Job Card PM010 in Chapter 8
• Update renewal parts list in Chapter 9
• Add schematics in Chapter 10
6 16NOV2001 • Update collimator mounting procedure in Chapter 2
• Update PM010 in Chapter 8
7 21JUN2002 • Update renewal parts in Chapter 9
• Update 90WS SW installation in Chapter 4,Grip adjust/EMC in Chapter2
8 03NOV2002 • Update renewal parts in Chapter 9
20
PROTEUS XR/a
• Update Job Card for Table motor replacement in Chapter 3

9 25JUL2003 • Update renewal parts in Chapter 9
• Add Job Card IST 008, 012, 014, 016 for SG100 Wall Stand and MX100
X-ray tube assembling in Chapter 2
• Add Job Card IST 033 for Spanish language labels in Chapter 2
• Update Job Card CAL 002, 006, 007, 008, 010, SW JEDI 7-4,7-2, IST
JEDI 5-2 in Chapter 4
• Add Functional Check contents for SG100 Wall Stand in Chapter 5
• Add Collimator error codes in Chapter 7
• Add Planned Maintenance contents for SG100 Wall Stand in Chapter 8
• Update schematics in Chapter 10
10 28JUL2003 • Recover the contents for RAD21 tube
11 15SEP2003 • Change the database file name for MX100 tube
12 09APR2004 • Update renewal parts in Chapter 9
• Update Job Card IST 16 in Chapter 2
• Update Job Card CAL 2 in Chapter 4
13 29OCT2004 • Update regulatory requirements
• Add Job Card IST 009, 016, 017 for SG120 Wall Stand and Eclipse
Proteus Collimator in Chapter 2
• Update IST 020, 021, 022, 023, 025, 033 for SG120 Wall Stand and
Eclipse Proteus Collimator in Chapter 2
• Update Job Card 006, 008, SW JEDI 7-2 in Chapter 4
• Add SG120 Wall Stand in Chapter 5
• Add Eclipse Proteus Collimator error codes in Chapter 7
• Add SG120 Wall Stand Planned Maintenance in Chapter 8
• Update renewal parts in Chapter 9
• Add SG120 Wall Stand Schematics in Chapter 10
14 25JUL2005 • Update Proteus System Console Software to V2.14
• Update IST 002 in Chapter 2
• Add notes in Chapter 2
• Add Caution in Chapter 3
• Update CAL 002 in Chapter 4
• Update Eclipse Proteus Collimator Error Codes in Chapter 7
• Update PM 004 in Chapter 8
• Update Table Schematic 221-3000 in Chapter 10
15 12DEC2005 • Add requirements of warning label in Chapter 2
• Add rotation limit screw in Chapter 2
• Delete a picture and add a section in section 5-3-3
• Change a warning and a picture of cable connection, add a note in
Chapter 2
• Add the content in Chapter 2
• Add 2 notes in Chapter 2
• Add a Job Card in Chapter 4
• Add a note and a tool in Chapter 8
• Change part No. in Chapter 9
21
PROTEUS XR/a
• Change 2 picture in Chapter 9

16 15FEB2006 • Add description of GEHL Reciprocating Bucky and AID Ion Chamber in
Chapter 2 and Chapter 9
17 20JUN2006 • Update warning label to meet HHS requirements in Chapter 2.
18 10OCT2006 • Add LOTO contents in Chapter 1
• Add Notes and Warnings in IST 011 in Chapter 2
• Update Warning and add bucky jumpers pictures in IST 009 in Chapter 2
• Update motor replacement in Chapter 3
• Add Warning in system console replacement in Chapter 3
• Add Warning in Chapter 5
• Add bearing and shaft check procedures In PM004 in Chapter 8
• Update PDU Schematics in Chapter 10
19 15DEC2006 • Add Note in IST 015 in Chapter 2
• Add Note in Replace whole collimator in Chapter 3
• Update Replace collimator lamp assembly in Chapter 3
• Update Eclipse Proteus Collimator error codes in Chapter 7
• Update GPCP NO. and Description of OTS in Chapter 9
20 05JUN2007 • Introduce in new endcaps in Chapter 2 and Chapter 9
• Update language information
21 20FEB2008 • Update safety door and door light connector information in Chapter 2
• Add Korean rating plate descriptions in Chapter 2
• Update software version information in Chapter 3
• Add VA site software descriptions in Chapter 4
• Update table related contents with 560 mm detent in Chapter 4, 5, 7, 9,
10
22 25JUL2008 • Update Language Statement in page ix~xvi
• Add Cone Retainer during Mount Proteus XR/a Collimator to MX100 X-
ray Tube in Chapter 2
• Add Note in Chapter 2
• Update the IST019 in Chapter 2
• Add clean foot pedal in PM
• Update item 73 in page 9-2
23 05AUG2009 • Page 4-11 Update table min height from 500mm to 550mm.
• Page 4-11 item 3, update 550mm-810mm.
• Page 4-12 update item 3.
• Page 4-14 update item 9.
• Page 5-3 update the picture.
• Page 5-4 update description of section 4-1-3 and Illustration 5-2 of table
height.
• Page 8-1 update the information of clear foot pedal and the information of
Transversal rods and bearings
• Page 8-7 item 1 (a & b), update with double click and depressed.
• Page 9-1 update item 22 part number to 5336380.
22
PROTEUS XR/a
• Page 9-2~3 update FRU list.

• Replace part number 2260354 by 600-0301.
• Page 9-14 add inhibition button warning label picture item 83.
• Page 9-6 add Bucky FRU list.
25 19AUG2011 • Revise EMC standard version
26 12APR2012 • Page 1-1: Add warning: Do not modify this equipment without
authorization of the manufacturer. Upon request, MANUFACTURER will
provide circuit diagrams, component part lists, descriptions, calibration
instructions, or other information to assist service personnel to repair
parts
• Page 1-2: Add a new section for audio and visual:""It is the User’s
responsibility to provide the means for audio and visual communication
between the Operator and the patient.
• Page 1-7: Add a new section for symbols
• Page 2-62: Add note: The Maxi-100 tube manual please Refer to
Direction 46-01442"
• Page 5-33 :Add Dose Indication Section
27 14SEP2012 • Page 2-53: Add the third choice for new console to place on the
desktop.
• Page 2-53: Add the third choice for new console to place on the
desktop.
• Page 2-55: Add the method for the third choice.
• Page 2-60: Add the new console with USB in WARNING.
• Page 3-42: Add the APR Recovery method from old console to new
console.
• Add a Note.
• Page 3-43: Add the APR Recovery method from new console to new
console.
• Page 3-45: The software version upgrade to 2.17(2.17VA in VA site).
• Page 4-3: The software version upgrade to 2.17 in NOTE.
• Page 4-4: The software version upgradeto2.17VA in VA site.
• Page 4-28: Add a Note for old console.
• Page 4-30: Add a Touch Screen Calibration method for new console.
• Page 9-2: Change table front and rear pedal PN to 5351755 and
5352805.
• Page 9-9: Change FRU list.
• Page 10-72: Add System Console Illustrations.
• Page 10-73: Add a NOTE Because the diagram show 8 USB ports, but
we only has one USB port in console.
28 25MAR2013 • Correct the revision number for the last three pages of chapter 1
29 13OCT2014 • Correct the PM012 of Chapter 8: Planned Maintenance Section
30 3NOV2014 • Update the Chapter 2: Installation to add Loctite requirement for mounting
the OTS Console
• Add PM014 in the Chapter 8: Planned Maintenance Section
• Corrected the torque requirement for mounting tubes.
31 18DEC2014 • Added the cable inspection procedure in the Chapter 8: Planned
23
PROTEUS XR/a
Maintenance
32 08FEB2015 • Added FMI 17107 & 17108 Procedure in Chapter 8: Planned
Maintenance Section
33 12MAR2015 • Changed the part number for the FMI17107 Lift Tool
34 19MAY2015 • Updated the revision history
35 01SEP2015 • Add Check OTS Cover Mounting item at Section 1 preventive
maintenance action list in Chapter 8 Planned Maintenance
• Changed the interval of PM for NVRAM and lubricant box.
• Add Section 3 preventive maintenance action list in multiple languages in
Chapter 8 Planned Maintenance
• Add Loctite and torque requirement for mounting OTS Console and
system console
• Update FMI 17107 and FMI 17108 Instruction to the latest revision.
36 16JUN2016 • Add Medical Device Classification
37 13JUL2016 • Update pages from Chapter 10: Schematics to be clear and readable
38 18AUG2016 • Page 8-18； Replace 12.5s with 0.125s
• Page 9-33；Add first two parts FRU name and change the right part
number
• Page 10-33；Add the right page 10-35
39 13SEP2017 • PM004: Delete Step 9. move step 10, 11 up and change Step Number to
9 and 10.
• PM004: Delete Step 1-a,1-b. change Time to 30 min
• PM004: Delete Step 6.
• PM005: Reduce time to 20 Min.
• PM005: Added Pictures and notes
• PM006: Delete step 1, step 7, change Time to 35 min
• PM009: Reduce time to 45mins
• PM009: Changed wording of step 3 and added picture for step 4
40 31OCT • Page 49: Add note

• Page 177: Add sentence “and Front Panel Assembly”
• Page 183: Add subtitle 8 and below sentence
• Page 412: Update PM004
• Page 419-420: Update PM004
• Page 495: Change the quantity for part 2348721
• Page 498: Corrected the description for part 2259298-113
• Page 499: Corrected the description for part 2259298-120
• Page 501: Add item 70
• Page 504: Add FRU part 5761170
• Page 518: Add 2 picture and add item70
24
PROTEUS XR/a
41 22AUG2019 • Change copyright 2000-2018 to 2000-2019

• Page 8-4: add Ground Resistance and Leakage Current Tests
• Page 11-1 to page 11-20: Add Chapter 11 Ground and Leakage Tests
• Page 11-10: Grounding Resistance Testing completed and within
specifications of less than 0.1 ohms change to 0.2 ohms.
42 28MAY2020 • Chapter 2 : Collimator waring icon update per INV;

• Chapter 2 : Add a jobcard “IST 036 FINAL CHECK” for EC;
• Chapter 3 : Insert “IST 035 Console main board replacement” ;
• Chapter 4 : Add a jobcard “SW 001-Console Buzzer Upgrade Kit
Installation” ;
• Chapter 8 : Update NOTE in Page 8-1;
• Chapter 9: Change PN ‘2259298-35’ to ‘5844452’ ,change PN ‘5167409’
to PN ‘5449033’, new add PN ‘611-3102’ , ‘5816734’ , ‘611-3133’ ,
‘5832176’ , ‘5832177’ , ‘5813460’ , ‘5772780’ , ‘5494683-1’;
The version of this manual is shown at the upper left corner of this page.
25
PROTEUS XR/a
LIST OF CHANGED PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
i Revision 1 4-38 Revision 7
1-1 thru 1-3 Revision 1 5-11 and 5-14 Revision 7
4-1 thru 4-5 Revision 1 9-4 thru 9-7 Revision 7
6-1 thru 6-9 Revision 1 3-24 Revision 8
10-1 thru 10-11, 13 Revision 1 2-20 thru 2-27 Revision 9
ii thru xii Revision 2 2-63 Revision 9
10-12 and 10-14 Revision 2 2-66 Revision 9
2-11 Revision 3 2-68 Revision 9
2-21 and 2-22 Revision 3 2-74 thru 2-75 Revision 9
2-42 Revision 3 2-78 thru 2-79 Revision 9
26
PROTEUS XR/a

2-54 thru 2-55 Revision 12 xvi Revision 18
iii thru vii Revision 13 2-57 thru 2-58 Revision 18
2-86 and 2-95 Revision 13 9-2 and 9-8 Revision 18
9-3, 9-7 and 9-27 Revision 13 9-8 Revision 19
10-7 thru 10-9 Revision 13 ix thru xvi Revision 20
8-1, 8-7 to 8-10 Revision 14 2-97 and 2-117 Revision 21
9-2 thru 9-3 Revision 14 121 thru Revision 21
9-13 thru 9-14 Revision 14 4-4 thru 4-5, 4-12 Revision 21
2-63 and 2-66 Revision 15 9-8, 9-11 thru 14 Revision 21
2-94 and 2-95 Revision 15 10-7 thru 16, 10-20 Revision 21
2-116 Revision 15 ix thru xvi Revision 22
2-23, 2-27, and 2-35 Revision 16 1-563 Revision 23
9-2, 9-5 thru 9-6 Revision 16 8-3 and 8-64 thru Revision 35
9-16 and 9-22 Revision 16 8-75
27
PROTEUS XR/a
8-4,11-1 thru 11-20 Revision 41
28
PROTEUS XR/a
Chapter Table of Contents
Chapter
1 BEFORE YOU START
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2 - OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL
2-1 Installation Plan
2-2 Interconnection
2-3 Presentation
SECTION 3 - ON-SITE REQUIREMENTS
3-1 Tools and Test Equipment
3-2 Documentation
3-3 MIS Maps
3-4 Audio and visual
SECTION 4 - DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
SECTION 5 – LOCK-OUT & TAG-OUT (LOTO)
5-1 System Power
5-2 LOTO Procedure for System Power
SECTION 6 EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATION
SECTION 7 SYMBOLS
7-1 Special Notices
7-2 X-ray Tube Operational Symbols
7-3 System Power On and Reset
7-4 Electrical Type
7-5 Electrical Current
7-6 Ground
7-7 Collimator
2 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
SECTION 1 - PHYSICAL INSTALLATION SEQUENCE GUIDE
SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION JOB CARDS
3 SYSTEM UPGRADE OR REPLACEMENT

SECTION 1 – TABLE OF JOBCARDS CONTENTS
SECTION 2 – JOBCARDS CONTENTS
4 CALIBRATION AND CONFIGURATION

SECTION 1 – TABLE OF JOBCARDS CONTENTS
29
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2 – JOBCARDS CONTENTS
5 FUNCTIONAL CHECK
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2 - TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
SECTION 3 – SYSTEM POWER UP
SECTION 4 – TABLE
SECTION 5 – WALL STAND, SG100 WALL STAND, AND SG120 WALL STAND
SECTION 6 – CASSETTE TRAY
SECTION 7 – OTS SUSPENSION
SECTION 8 – JEDI GENERATOR
SECTION 9 –ANODE HEAT INTEGRATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST
SECTION 10- DOSE INDICATION
6 JEDI GENERATOR THEORY AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

SECTION 1 – THEORY OF OPERATION
SECTION 2 – THEORY PRESENTATION
7 EXCEPTION HANDLING AND ERROR CODES

SECTION 1 - TABLE
SECTION 2 – JEDI EXCEPTION HANDLING
SECTION 3 – ERROR CODE, DIAGNOSTICS & TROUBLESHOOTING
8 PLANNED MAINTENANCE
SECTION 1 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ACTION LIST
SECTION 2 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE JOB CARDS
SECTION 3 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ACTION LIST IN MULTIPLE LANGUAGES
9 RENEWAL PARTS
SECTION 1 – PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM RENEWAL PARTS LIST
SECTION 2 – JEDI GENERATOR RENEWAL PARTS
SECTION 3 – JEDI GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
10 SCHEMATICS
SECTION 1 – PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM MIS MAP
SECTION 2 – JEDI GENERATOR ILLUSTRATIONS
SECTION 3 – JEDI GENERATOR CENTRAL LISTING
SECTION 4 – OTS CONSOLE ILLUSTRATIONS
SECTION 5 – SYSTEM CONSOLE ILLUSTRATIONS
30
PROTEUS XR/a
11 GROUND AND LEAKAGE TESTS

SECTION 1 – GROUNDING RESISTANCE TESTS
SECTION 2 – LEAKAGE CURRENT MEASUREMENTS
31
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 1 BEFORE YOU START

DO NOT MODIFY THIS QUIPMENT WITHOUT AUTHORATION OF THE MANUFACTURER.
WARNING UPON REQUEST, MANUFACTURER WILL PROVIDE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM, COMPONENT PART
LISTS, DESCRIPTION, CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS, OR OTHER INFORMATION TO ASSIST
SERVICE PERSONNEL TO REPAIR PARTS.
.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION…………………………………………………………………………………… 33
SECTION 2 OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL…………………………………………………33
2-1 Installation Plan…………………………………………………………………………………….. 33
2-2 Interconnection…………………………………………………………………………………….. 33
2-3 Presentation………………………………………………………………..……………………….. 33
SECTION 3 ON-SITE REQUIREMENTS……………………………………………………………………….34
3-1 Tools and Test Equipment……………………………………………………………………….. 34
3-2 Documentation……………………………………………………………………………………... 34
3-3 MIS Maps…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 34
3-4 Audio and visual…………………………………………………………………………………… 34
SECTION 4 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM…………………………………………………………………….. 35
SECTION 5 LOCK-OUT & TAG-OUT (LOTO) ……………………………………………………………….. 36
5-1 System Power………………………………………………………………………………………. 36
5-2 LOTO Procedure for System Power……………………………………………………………. 37
SECTION 6 EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATION……………………………………………………………… 38
SECTION 7 SYMBOLS………………………………………………………………………………………… 39
7-1 Special Notices…………………………………………………………………………………….. 39
7-2 X-ray Tube Operational Symbols……………………………………………………………….. 40
7-3 System Power On and Reset…………………………………………………………………….. 41
7-4 Electrical Type……………………………………………………………………………………… 41
7-5 Electrical Current…………………………………………………………………………………... 41
7-6 Ground………………………………………………………………………………….................... 42
7.7 Collimator ………………………………………………………………………………….............. 43
32
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
The goal of this document is to guide the service representative through an entire X-ray
room installation.
The following On-site Requirements must be accounted for prior to beginning installation of
the system.
SECTION 2 OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL
This direction will lead you in a correct sequence through the manuals needed to install the
equipment. Following the suggested sequence will result in an orderly installation. However,
extenuating circumstances may dictate a deviation from the recommended sequence. Feel
free to deviate, but keep track of your progress by checking off the tasks in the flowchart as
you complete them.
Check equipment according to the packing list (Product Delivery Instructing) for your
system against the main catalog numbers in the “System Listing Chart.” Also, verify that all
manuals are present in the binders according to the Table of Contents.
All interconnection cables are furnished in variable, preselected lengths from the “Cable
Data Packet.” Before starting to install your system, identify all the cables and check their
length to verify that they are long enough. If you find a short cable, contact us immediately
so we can send the required length cable to you and thereby, not delay the installation.
2-1 Installation Plan

The main steps in the installation plan are easily seen by looking at the Table of Contents
for this document. The plan objectives are to:
1. Give a logical installation order which recognizes mechanical and electrical interface
areas
2. Test and adjust each subsystem independently.
To obtain a good overall view of how these objectives are to be achieved review the Table
of Contents for this document before beginning the installation work. Then, if it is necessary
to deviate from the stated plan, you will be aware of the essential interface areas. This will
give you the information required to make another effective plan which applies to our
particular situation.
2-2 Interconnection
Interconnection of products by furnished cables or contractor supplied wiring is indicated by
numbered MIS runs in the installation sections. Run interconnect charts are available which
describe the connection and function of each wire.
For Proteus XR/a system, refer to the following:

• Proteus XR/a system Cable Maps (Chapter 10)
2-3 Presentation
The procedures in this steering manual are presented in job card form.
33
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 3 ON-SITE REQUIREMENTS
3-1 Tools and Test Equipment
There are additional tools and test equipment besides the standard service representative
tool kit which must be available before installing the Proteus XR/a System. Refer to each
subsystem service manual for details.
3-2 Documentation
Directions are necessary for correct installation of the Proteus XR/a system. Procedures
from each document will be used and reflect the latest information available at this time.
Not all procedures in this manual apply to all sites. Before you begin installation, cross out
the procedures that do not apply to your site.
3-3 MIS Maps
The proper system cable interconnect map is necessary for correct installation of a
Proteus XR/a system. Refer to:
• Proteus XR/a system MIS Maps (Chapter 10)
3-4 Audio and visual
It is the User’s responsibility to provide the means for audio and visual communication
between the Operator and the patient.
34
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 4 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
Illustration 1-1
BASIC CONFIGURATION
7
8
9 / 10
1 2
The Proteus XR/a System is divided in to basic components:

1. System Console 7. Generator Cabinet
2. Elevating Table 8. X-ray Tube
3. XT radiographic Suspension 9. Proteus XR/a Collimator
4. Wall Stand (GPCP No.: 600-0301) 10. Eclipse Proteus Collimator
(optional) (GPCP No.: 2379827)
6
5. SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No.: 11. Tomography (optional)
2225849) (optional)
6. SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No.: 12. Printer (optional)
2402562) (optional)
35
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 5 LOCK-OUT & TAG-OUT (LOTO)
5-1 System Power
Name Of Equipment: Proteus

Number Of Locks: One per person, working on the system
Title(s) of Employees Authorized to Perform LOTO:
Those trained in Lockout Tagout (LOTO)
Title(s) of Affected Employees and How to Notify:
Hospital Personnel; notified by verbal communication.
Energy Source Yes No Location of Energy Magnitude of

Isolating Means Energy
Electrical X System’s Main “A1” 320-480VAC,
Power Disconnect 3 Phase
Pneumatic X
Hydraulic X
Gas/Water/Steam X
Chemical X
Mechanical Motion X
Motion X
Gravity X
Springs X
Thermal X
Stored Energy X
Air Under Pressure X
Oil Under Pressure X
Water Under Pressure X
Gas Under Pressure X
Steam X
Other X
Type(s) of Equipment and/or Method(s) Selected to Dissipate or Isolate

Stored Energy:
Allow 3 minutes for stored energy to dissipate.
Type(s) of Equipment and/or Method(s) Used to Ensure Disconnection’s:

One Lock & Tag for Main “A1” Disconnect.
36
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2 LOTO Procedure for System Power
Name Of Equipment: Proteus
Step Lockout/Tagout Procedure

1 Prepare for shutdown of equipment by notifying affected personnel
working in the area that lockout/tagout is being performed.
2 Bring system software down.
3 Locate main power supply (Service) disconnect feeding System Cabinet.
4 Lock Out / Tag Out the main power disconnect.
5 Using an insulated voltmeter, measure the incoming power connection to
the system cabinet at the circuit breaker.
6 If no voltage is present at the system cabinet’s circuit breaker; place the
power switch on the PDU to the OFF position and service equipment as
required.
7 After service has been performed, notify affected personnel that
equipment will be reenergized and LOTO devices are being removed.
8 Assure the safety of the area and that all safety devices and guards have
been replaced.
9 Return system functions to a preset state.
10 Remove Lock-Out Tag-Out equipment from main disconnect.
11 Locate main power supply (Service) disconnect feeding System Cabinet
and re-apply power.
37
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 6 EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATION
The following equipment classifications are applicable to the product:

• Equipment classification with respect to protection from electric shock: Class I
• Degree of protection from electric shock: Type B
• Degree of protection against ingress of liquids: Not classified
• Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anaesthetic mixture with air or with
nitrous oxide
• Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading.
38
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 7 SYMBOLS
7-1 Special Notices
Symbol Description
Dangerous voltage. This indicates an avoidable, dangerous,

high voltage hazard.
This symbol on the equipment indicates the operating

instructions should be consulted to ensure safe operation
Hand crushing hazard. This symbol indicates that serious

injury to the hand may occur.
Follow operating instructions. This symbol directs you to

consult this manual for more information.
No stepping or standing on unit. The component on which

the symbol appears cannot support the weight of a person.
Damage to equipment or injury may occur if the unit is
stepped or stood upon.
Maximum load. This symbol indicates that the component
has a maximum weight limit. Damage to equipment or injury
may occur if the maximum weight is exceeded.
Operating temperature. This symbol indicates that the

component must be within a minimum and maximum
temperature range in order to operate. Damage to
equipment may occur if equipment is used at temperatures
outside of the specified range.
39
PROTEUS XR/a
7-2 X-ray Tube Operational Symbols
Symbol Description
X-ray emission is used to indicate the X-ray tube head is
emitting X-rays. Take adequate precautions to prevent the
possibility of any persons carelessly, unwisely, or
unknowingly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
X-ray source assembly is used to indicate a reference to an

X-ray source assembly.
X-ray tube is used to indicate a reference to the X-ray tube,

e.g., to mark the surface of a grid, which is to be oriented
towards the X-ray tube.
Identif ies controls or indicators associated with normal

rotational speed of the X-ray anode.
Identifies controls or indicators associated with high

rotational speed of the X-ray anode.
Identifies controls or indicators associated with the selection

of a small focal spot or the connection for the corresponding
filament.

of focal spot or the connection for the corresponding
filament. When used with the small focal spot symbol, this
symbol applies to the larger focal spot. When used with the
large focal spot symbol, this symbol applies to the smaller
focal spot.
of a large focal spot or the connection for the corresponding
filament.
40
PROTEUS XR/a
7-3 System Power On and Reset
Symbol Description
A SYSTEM RESET button is used to reset the system. The
button is located on the RCIM.
A POWER ON button is used to turn on the power to the

system. The button is located on the RCIM.
7-4 Electrical Type
Symbol Description
Type B Equipment indicates the equipment provides a

particular degree of protection against electrical shock
regarding leakage current and protective earthing per
IEC60601-1.
Identifies refer to instruction manual/booklet Note: on me
equipment " Follow instructions for use ".
7-5 Electrical Current
Symbol Description
Alternating Current indicates the equipment is suitable for
alternating current only.
Direct Current indicates the equipment is suitable for direct

current only.
Both direct and alternating currents indicate the equipment is

suitable for both direct and alternating current.
41
PROTEUS XR/a
7-6 Ground
Symbol Description
Functional Earth (ground) Terminal indicates a terminal

directly connected to a point of a measuring supply or
control circuit or to a screening part, which is intended to be
earthed for functional purposes.
Noiseless (clean) earth (ground) identifies any terminal of a
specially designed earthing system where noise from earth
of leads will not cause a malfunction of the equipment.
Protective earth (ground) identifies any terminal which is

intended for connection of an external protective conductor
to protect against electrical shock in case of a fault.
Frame or chassis identify the frame or chassis terminal.
42
PROTEUS XR/a
7-7 Collimator
Symbol Description
Control for indicating radiation field by using light.
Identifies controls for opening the collimator blades, or indicates

partially or fully open state.
Identifies controls for closing the collimator blades, or indicates

closed state.
Indicates the collimator blades are closed. The controlled blades

are shown in thicker lines.
Indicates the collimator blades are open. The controlled blades

are shown in thicker lines.
Indicates the use of laser radiation.
his page intentionally left blank
43
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION SEQUENCE GUIDE………………………………………………… 045

SECTION 2 INSTALLATION JOB CARDS……………………………………………………………………….. 048
IST001 Reception Check, Unpacking………………………………………………………………………….. 048
IST002 Assemble OTS Carriage………………………………………………………………………………… 050
IST003 Connect OTS Cables on Carriage Side………………………………………………………………. 055
IST004 Positioning the Table……………………………………………………………………………………. 056
IST005 Mount Grid………………………………………………………………………………………………… 058
IST006 Install Table Top…………………………………………………………………………………………. 059
IST007 Install Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) …………………………………………………………….. 063
IST008 Install SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849) …………………………………………………….. 065
IST009 Install SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No.: 2402562) ……………………………………………………. 073
IST010 Mount System Console and Printer…………………………………………………………………... 095
IST011 Warning Signs and Labels………………………………………………………………………………102
IST012 Mount RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube………………………………………………………………………….. 104
IST013 Mount MX100 X-ray Tube………………………………………………………………………………. 106
IST014 Mount Siemens collimator to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube……………………………………………… 109
IST015 Mount Siemens collimator to MX100 X-ray Tube…………………………………………………... 112
IST016 Mount Eclipse Proteus Collimator to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube…………………………………….. 117
IST017 Mount Eclipse Proteus Collimator to MX100 X-ray Tube…………………………………………. 121
IST018 Assemble Tube Cover to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube…………………………………………………… 126
IST019 Assemble Tube Cover to MX100 X-ray Tube………………………………………………………... 132
IST020 Electrical Connections………………………………………………………………………………….. 139
IST021 Align Table Bucky with Proteus XR/a Collimator / Eclipse Proteus Collimator……………… 151
IST022 Align Wall Bucky with Proteus XR/a Collimator (for Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) and
SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849)), Eclipse Proteus Collimator (for SG120 WallStand
(GPCP No. 2402562)) …………………………………………………………………………………….152
IST023 Mount Anchor bolts……………………………………………………………………………………… 153
IST024 Tomo-Link Assembly……………………………………………………………………………………. 156
IST025 Installation Check………………………………………………………………………………………... 157
IST033 Spanish Language Labels……………………………………………………………………………… 164
IST034 Korean Language Labels……………………………………………………………………………….. 167
IST036 FINAL CHECK…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 170
44
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION SEQUENCE GUIDE
Each system is installed in the sequence that will insure the safest and most time
efficient installation. The installation sequence performed at most sites is as
follows:
DONE
RECEPTION
STEP CHECK, PERFORM IST 001 JOB CARD
1 UNPACKING
ASSEMBLE
STEP OTS PERFORM IST 002 JOB CARD
2 CARRIAGE
CONNECT
STEP PERFORM IST 003 JOB CARD
OTS CABLES
3
POSITIONING
THE TABLE
4
MOUNT
GRID
5
INSTALL
STEP TABLE TOP PERFORM IST 006 JOB CARD
6 AND ENDCAP
PERFORM IST 007 JOB CARD

FOR WALL STAND
(GPCP No. 600-0301)(optional);
STEP PERFORM IST 008 JOBCARD

INSTALL FOR SG 100 WALL STAND
7
WALL STAND (GPCP No. 2225849)(optional);
PERFORM IST 009 JOBCARD

FOR SG120 WALL STAND
(GPCP No. 2402562)(optional).
MOUNT
STEP SYSTEM PERFORM IST 010 JOB CARD
8 CONSOLE &
PRINTER
45
PROTEUS XR/a
WARNING
STEP SIGNS AND PERFORM IST 011 JOB CARD
9 LABELS

FOR RAD 14,21 X-RAY TUBE
MOUNT X-RAY
STEP
TUBE
10
FOR MX100 X-RAY TUBE

MOUNT
SIEMENS
COLLIMATOR
STEP
OR
11

MOUNT FOR RAD 14,21 X-RAY TUBE
ECLIPSE
PROTEUS
COLLIMATOR PERFORM IST 017 JOB CARD

ASSEMBLE
STEP
TUBE COVER
12
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
13
ALIGN TABLE
STEP BUCKY WITH PERFORM IST 021 JOB CARD
14 COLLIMATOR
46
PROTEUS XR/a
ALIGN WALL
STEP BUCKY WITH PERFORM IST 022 JOB CARD
15 COLLIMATOR
MOUNT
STEP ANCHOR PERFORM IST 023 JOB CARD
16 BOLTS
TOMO-LINK
ASSEMBLY
17
INSTALLATION
CHECK
18
APPLY
STEP SPANISH PERFORM IST 033 JOB CARD
19 LABELS
KOREAN
STEP LANGUAGE PERFORM IST 034 JOB CARD
20 LABELS
STEP FINAL CHECK PERFORM IST 036 JOB CARD

21
Note: If your country requires the product rating plate label to be in the
language of that country, follow the instructions on document
#45474336. Paste the appropriate language label over the English
rating plate. The rating plate labels are: 2379361 (Spanish),
2379361-2 (German), 2379361-3 (French), 2379361-4 (Italian).
Note: Spanish Label Kit (2382506), Focus Label (46-23972P2), and Console Label
(610-3089) are in the OPEN ME FIRST box in Crate #4-6.
47
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2 INSTALLATION JOB CARDS
PROTEUS XR/A 1/2 IST 001
Subassembly: Reception Check, Unpacking

Purpose: Prepare for installation Version no. 0
Date: 20/12/99
NF No. Production date Serial No. Personnel: 2
From / / From Time: 2h
To / / To
1. Pre-installation Check
1) Verify all required cable ductwork, conduits, and raceways are installed according to Site Plans.
Ensure Customer supplied cables/wires are in place for connection to the system.
• Ensure that High Voltage and power cables are separated from signal cables as
much as possible.
• Verify that 3-phase power and ground lines can be placed in the same trough or
conduit.
2) At this time, the “Sales/Service Pre-installation Checklist,” provided in the applicable planning direction,
should be reviewed and signed off by the salesman and the Service Department representative.
Mark exact positions of components on the floor, wall and/or ceiling.
2. Unpacking
The PROTEUS XR/a system is shipped in four crates to facilitate transport and installation. Crates
dimensions and weights are shown in Table 1-1 below.
Crate dimensions & weight

Content Length Width Height N.W. G.W.
mm mm mm kg kg
Table Top and 1065 1100 2410 200 350
Base
Cabinet 1955 690 790 150 200
Wall Stand 620 800 2360 100 250
(GPCP No.
600-0301)
(optional)
SG100 Wall 880 840 2280 186 280
Stand (GPCP No.
2225849)
(optional)
SG120 Wall 940 890 2410 220 300
Stand (GPCP No.
2402562)
(optional)
Accessories 1270 1100 1220 50 120
48
PROTEUS XR/a
• Do not discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes, bags until all parts
are accounted for against the packing list.
• Check the mechanical condition and external appearance of all parts for possible
• damage or missing items.
• The distribution center or factory must be notified immediately of any damage or

shortage of parts.
Note: Do not use the capacitors in the Accessories crate #4 for installation. Please pay attention to pick
out and dispose the capacitors in the Accessories crate #4. Ensure the eco-friendly disposal of
the capacitors.
49
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Assemble OTS Carriage

Purpose: Installation Procedure Version no. 1
Date: 25/07/05
From / / From Time: 4hour
To / / To
1. Install the Stationary Rails according to the procedure

outlined in Direction 46-019639, Advantx XT Stationary Rails
Installation & Adjustments.
2. Unpacking
Remove Cardboard box and wood shipping support.
Cardboard box and wood shipping support
Note: If the system is equipped with TOMO link, please

insert the two TOMO driver cables (2124056 and
2132261) into the cable drape hose before lifting the
OTS bridge into position. Refer to Job card IST 025 on
page 3-25.
3. If the system is equipped with a Siemens Manual Collimator

(2259989), replace the existing field light transformer on top of
the OTS carriage with the 2143622-2 transformer provided with
catalog S3918KP. Re-use the existing mounting hardware.
Refer to OTS service manual for transformer location and
replacement, Refer to CAL 015 to calibrate lamp voltage.
50
PROTEUS XR/a
4. Install Overhead Bridge onto Shipping Dolly.
Bolt Bridge Carriage to Overhead Bridge
Note: The six bolts must be installed and tightened.

Apply Loctite 242 or 243 and torque to 33.6 ft-lb (45.6Nm)
on these six bolts.
Be extremely careful not to pinch cables between

dolly & carriage when tightening bolts.
5. Remove the eight bolts from the front crosstie.
Move the crosstie towards bridge center about 10cm.
6. Remove the six shipping bolts on both sides of Carriage.
On both sides
51
PROTEUS XR/a
7. Attach OTS Lifting Fixtures A to Overhead Rails
Fixture position refers to Direction 46-019803 Advantx VHLZ

XT Inboard Suspension Installation.
8. Attach OTS Lifting Fixtures B to Overhead Bridge
Note: Make sure the crank handles are both on the

same side of the bridge.
On both
sides
9. Route the straps outside of bridge rail.
Attach the strap ends to OTS Lifting Fixtures A on Overhead

Rails.
Note: The bolts should be fastened.
52
PROTEUS XR/a
10. Rotate the two cranks on Lifting Fixtures B on Overhead

Bridge evenly to raise the Carriage.
With OTS partially raised, remove 2 metal shipping brackets

(both sides of Carriage), 4 bolts each.
11. Remove metal Shipping Brackets.
Note: Make sure the crank handles are both on the

same side of the bridge.
Be extremely careful not to pinch cables between

dolly & carriage when tightening bolts.
53
PROTEUS XR/a
12. Bridge Installation
a) Raise bridge up to stationary rails with cables hanging to

the floor. Place bearings of rear crosstie into rear
stationary rail.
Gently move Overhead Bridge until bearings fall into

bearing track in Aluminium rail.
b) Place the front crosstie into position on bridge and bolt the
crosstie to the bridge.
c) Center front and rear crosstie bearings on wearstrips and

tighten eight screws securing front crosstie to bridge.
Note: Be sure bearings ride on the center of the

wearstrips over the complete range of OTS travel.
If bearings travel off center, the stationary rails
and crosstie alignment must be checked.
d) Lower bridge until roller bearings contact wearstrips.
e) Remove Lifting Fixtures B from the bridge and lower to

the ground.
f) Adjust upper bearings on both crossties for .02 gap to

upper part of rails. (Adjustment made with Allen wrench
from bottom of crosstie)
g) Remove Lifting Fixtures A from the stationary rails.
54
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Connect OTS Cables on Carriage Side

Date: 20/12/99
From / / From Time: 10min
To / / To
1. Connect OTS Console locks power cable (2258381;for

MX100 tube, apply cable 2391020). Refer to system
MIS chart in page 10-1.
Note: The OTS I/F PCB PWR Supply cable

(2268131) is factory connected.
2268131
2258381/2391020
2. Connect cables to OTS control board. (J1, J101, J4,

J3, J100, J6). Refer to system MIS chart on page 10-1
and Job card IST 020 in this Chapter.
3. Connect Collimator Power & CAN cable (2391024),

OTS Console Power & CAN cable (2259867; for
MX100 tube, apply cable 2391017), OTS CAN cable
(2258389 or 2258389-2), and AC power cables. Refer
to system MIS chart on page 10-1 and Job card IST
020 in this Chapter.
55
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Positioning the Table

Date: 20/12/99
To / / To
1. Turn the handle clockwise to lift table base.
2. Mount the trolley wheels on the bracket and fasten the four
screws.
CAUTION
Note: The trolley wheels are in box 1-7.
3. Turn the handle counter-clockwise to make the wheel load

the table weight.
4. Take off the wood stoppers. Then take out the shipping base.
5. Rotate the four trolleys wheels to parallel position with table

longitudinal axis.
WARNING
Don’t put your feet under the table base. The

table is very heavy and may hurt you.
56
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Position the table as close as possible to the center of the

collimator light field.
Note: When positioning the table base, ensure that the

minimum clearance on either side of the table from
the table base center to the wall is 3600mm:
If the room dimension is smaller than the specified

size, mount the table top before positioning the
table.
3600 3600
7. Repeat procedure (1).
8. Remove the trolleys.
9. Turn the handle counter-clockwise and put the table base on

the ground, then disassembly the trolley bracket.
57
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Mount Grid

Date: 20/12/99
From / / From Time: 10 min
To / / To
1. Remove right side two metal tabs and keep left side metal Metal
tabs loose enough. tabs
2. Position the Ion grid evenly under the tabs.
3. Reinstall the removed tabs and fasten four screws.
4. Remove the shipping bracket.
5. Put the screws back on braking plate.

Note: These two screws are used to fasten braking
plate also. Must to be screwed.
6. Reinstall the table top.
58
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Install Table Top

Date: 05/06/07
To / / To
Table Top and Endcaps Assembly/Installation
The following procedures describe how to install the table top and endcaps on the table in those cases
where removal is required.
Table Top Installation

The table top is installed as follows:
1. Remove the end trim piece from one side of the table top
assembly. This consists of removing the two pan head screws,
which sit in the counter bores on the face of the trim piece.
End trim
2. Slide the table top assembly onto the bearing assemblies from one end.
Anti-collision
Note: Pay attention to the anti-collision
switches. Table top frame may collide
switch
with the switch.
3. Re-attach the trim to the table top assembly.
To obtain the smoothest and most quiet ride of the table top, adjustments may be made if necessary to the
table top bearings. These adjustments are made to precise specifications at the factory prior to shipping, but
shipping and handling may make minor “fine tuning” adjustments necessary after the table is assembled.
Note: Ensure that there is no lubricant, dust or other feculence on the slide rod.
59
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/A TABLE TOP 2/4 IST 006

Table Top Adjustments
Note: Before adjusting, remove table top, then turn the table top around to opposite side. If the table
top still does not ride smoothly, proceed as follows:
While viewing the underside of the table top, move the table top back and forth. Check the bearings that ride
horizontally (eccentric bearings) for looseness or tightness. If eccentric bearings are loose, adjust eccentric
bearings out. If bearing is too tight, adjust eccentric bearings in.
Adjusting Eccentric Bearings Out

1. Remove end trim bracket.
2. Slide rail until eccentric bearing is visible.
3. Adjust eccentric bearing out using T-handle
Allen wrench.
Adjusting Eccentric Bearings In

1. Remove end trim bracket.
2. Slide rail until eccentric bearing is visible.
3. Adjust eccentric bearing in using T-handle Allen eccentric
wrench. bearing
Note: After the table is assembled, an operational

check is performed with adjustments made to
the Up/Down Limit Board if a correction in
table height is necessary (this check is
required only for the Elevating Tables).
Endcaps Installation
The endcaps are installed as follows:
1. Push the table top to one side.
60
PROTEUS XR/a

2. Mark a line to indicate the hex nut’s location.
3. Loosen the bearing screws.
4. Knock the outside of the shaft to leave a space about 3 mm.
5. Install the Rubber Bumper, make sure it’s in the direction as below.
Broad
Side
Narrow
Side
61
PROTEUS XR/a

6. Fix the hex nut to make sure the marked line’s location not changed, and tighten the screw.
7. Repeat step 2) to 6) to install the other three rubber bumpers.

8. Press on the switches to move back the table top.
9. Install the two end caps with the 6 screws.
10. Install the screw caps.
62
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/A WALL STAND 1/2 IST 007
Subassembly: Install Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301)

Date: 20/12/99
NF No. Production date Serial No. Personnel:2
To / / To
1. Remove the transport bolts of the counterweights. See

illustration.
2. Place the wall stand to proper position according to OTS.

Refer to page 4-4,4-5 in Proteus XR/a Pre-installation
manual for wall mount dimension and page 5-2, 5-3 in
Proteus XR/a Pre-installation manual for Room Layout.
3. Remove the transport block plates from wall stand rail top
end. See illustration. Transport
block
4. Remove the transportation clamps on both bucky rails.
Note: The content with a star is only for the wall stand
with a knee spacer. *
* Fix the carriage at a lower position.
63
PROTEUS XR/a
* Mount the Bucky and knee spacer assembly to the

carriage. *
* Fix the cables with the cable retainer.

*
* Mount the LAT bar.

Remove the protective cover on the knee spacer. Insert the
LAT bar into the hole, turn the flange to make the keys on the
flange insert the slots, then, lock the release bar.
Note: apply grease between the flanges.
*
* After the counter weight calibration, remove the foot cover,

tighten the anchor bolt in a proper position, reinstall the cover
finally.
*
DANGER
THE WALL STAND IS HEAVY. AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE REQUIRED TO MOVE AND
ERECT IT TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
THE FLOOR WHERE THE WALL STAND INSTALLED MUST BE FLAT AND LEVEL TO PREVENT
THE WALL STAND FROM FALLING DOWN.
64
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Install SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849)

Date: 10/10/06
To / / To
THE SG100 WALL STAND MAY BE FACTORY SET FOR 110VAC OR 220VAC. THE
WARNING MISMATCH BETWEEN THE VOLTAGE SETTING OF SG100 AND THE POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FROM SYSTEM PDU CAN RESULTS IN THE BROKEN POWER FUSE AND
LEAD TO THE FAILURE OF SG100 BUCKY. PAY ATTENTION TO CHECK AND
ENSURE THE SG100 WALL STAND LINE VOLTAGE AND BUCKY VOLTAGE TO BE SET
220VAC AND 230VAC RESPECTIVELY (SEE STEP 9,10 IN THIS JOB CARD) ON THE
INSTALL SITES BEFORE POWER ON.
DANGER
THE WALL STAND IS HEAVY. AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE REQUIRED TO MOVE AND
ERECT IT TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
Note: The floor where the Wall Stand installed must be flat and level to prevent the Wall Stand from
falling down.
Note: Before installing the SG100 Wall Stand, the X-ray tube supports and table must firstly be
installed.
Note: The procedures in this section are concerted with the revision 6 of SG100 Wall Stand Service
Manual (GPCP Number 2150297-100). For the reason of the update and change in that
manual, it is recommended to see also the latest Service Manual of SG100 Wall Stand for
reference.
1. Move the SG100, in the shipping container, to the installation area. (Refer to page 5-2, 5-3 in Proteus XR/a
Pre-installation manual for Room Layout). Leave the container in the horizontal position. Unpack the SG100
from the shipping container.
2. Using two people, carefully raise the SG100 to an upright position.
65
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Stand the SG100 against the wall and attach to the wall using the locally provided 6 wall anchors.
4. Align the SG100 laterally across the wall, to the X-ray Tube Suspension beam or table centerline using the
centerline marks on the wall and floor or the Laser Alignment Tool.
Note: The SG100 must be level on the wall with no more than 1/16 in. (1.5mm) deflection to
ensure that the anchors holding the SG100 to the wall does not come loose over time.
Use the shims provided with SG100 to ensure this requirement.
5. Verify the SG100 level across wall to ensure that no more than 1/16 in. (1.5mm) deflection exist, laterally or
vertically. See Illustration for recommended placement of the levels.
6. Insert supplied shims, as required, between the SG100 and the wall.
7. Tighten the six SG100 anchor bolts according to the torque specifications for the anchors.
8. Check the Counterweight and Bucky Carriage Counterbalance, and add or remove Counterweight when
required. (See SG100 Service Manual, GPCP Number 2150297-100)
66
PROTEUS XR/a
THE SG100 WALL STAND MAY BE FACTORY SET FOR 110VAC OR 220VAC. THE
WARNING MISMATCH BETWEEN THE VOLTAGE SETTING OF SG100 AND THE POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE FROM SYSTEM PDU CAN RESULTS IN THE BROKEN POWER FUSE AND
LEAD TO THE FAILURE OF SG100 BUCKY. PAY ATTENTION TO CHECK AND
ENSURE THE SG100 WALL STAND LINE VOLTAGE AND BUCKY VOLTAGE TO BE SET
220VAC AND 230VAC RESPECTIVELY (SEE STEP 9,10 BELOW) ON THE INSTALL
SITES BEFORE POWER ON.
9. Check the lock board jumper according to the table below to ensure the line voltage setting is 220VAC. Set
the TS-6 jumpers to 220VAC when necessary.
To access the lock board, remove the angulation support trim cover (behind the Bucky panel, at a 45 angle
facing the floor.). Remove the four screws. (See following Illustrations.)
The SG100 Wall Stand line voltage may be factory set for 110VAC or 220 VAC. Pay
CAUTION attention to check and ensure the line voltage to be set 220VAC on the install site via
jumper settings on its lock board.
Check and set the jumpers when necessary according to the following table:
LINE VOLTAGE Board: 45433412
TS-6 JUMPERS
220 VAC 2-3 & 4-5
110 VAC 3-5 & 4-6
67
PROTEUS XR/a
10. Set the Bucky voltage jumpers to the appropriate position for 230V. The Bucky voltage jumpers are
located next to the signal transformer in the electronic compartment behind the front panel (see
following illustrations).
The SG100 Wall Stand Bucky voltage may be factory set for 115VAC or 230 VAC.
CAUTION Pay attention to check and ensure the Bucky voltage to be set 230VAC on the install
site via Bucky voltage jumper.
To access this electronic compartment, turn the large knurled screws located underneath the front panel
counterclockwise. Tilt the front panel up and secure it with the prop on the right hand side. Then loosen,
without removing, the three flathead screws on the bottom of the lower panel, remove the two top roundhead
screws and slide the black cover plate up and out to access the jumpers.
220/110 Caution Label
Knurled
Screws-Loosen
to open Bucky
front panel
Lower Trim Covers
68
PROTEUS XR/a
11. Route and connect system cables to the I/O panel at the top of the SG100 (see table below).
Cable Name Cable SG100 end (stick to connectors on Other end
Part the I/O panel at the top of the
Number SG100) (See illustration “SG100
connectors” below)
SG100 Ion Chamber Cable 2145642-2 J40 Jedi connector AEC2 (refer
to page 2-92 in Job Card
IST 020 “Electrical
Connections”)
SG100 Auto Tray Cable 2145644-2 J41 System I/F Board
connector J124 (See
illustration “System I/F
Board connector J124” in
next page)
SG100 Bucky Cable 2145641-2 J42 Jedi Wall Bucky (J6)
connector (refer to page
2-92 in Job Card IST 020
“Electrical Connections”)
SG100 Power Supply 2151729-2 Power (See illustration “SG100 PDU connector TM4
Cable connectors” below) SG100 Power (See
illustration “PDU connector
TM4 SG100 Power” in next
page)
SG100 Ground Cable 2140362-2 Ground PDU ground
Illustration : SG100 connectors
Connect the two

black wires of
SG100 Power
Supply Cable into
these two
connectors.
69
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration: System I/F Board connector J124
J124
Note: Pay attention to ensure the marked side of the

cable plug to face to you when connecting.
Illustration: PDU connector TM4 SG100 Power
TM4 SG100 Power
12. Attach the self-adhesive height correlation scale to the SG100 Wall Stand so it corresponds with the height
scale on the x-ray tube hanger or stand.
70
PROTEUS XR/a
13. Perform Microswitch Adjustment (Automatic Collimator Option only)

Five microswitches indicate the position of the Bucky (Refer to illustration below). The microswitch activator
cams for S4 (upper, near discrete SID point) and S5 (lower, far discrete SID point) may need slight
adjustment at installation time.
Microswitches S4 and S5 are located in the vertical brake assembly on the side opposite to the vertical lock
handle. The activator cams for microswitches S4 and S5 are located on the vertical column. Verify that the
activator cams actuate S4 and S5 as described below:
Note: This operation is carried out with the Bucky angulated to full horizontal position
Check that the activator cam for microswitch S4 actuates S4 when the Bucky is at the same level as the top of
the x-ray table (near discrete SID point). Reposition the cam actuator if necessary.
Check that the activator cam for microswitch S5 actuates S5 when the Bucky is in the lowest vertical position
(far discrete SID point) with the foldable legs extended and touching the floor. Reposition the cam actuator if
necessary.
Note: Vertical Bucky Wall Stand not equipped with the automatic collimator option do not have
positioning microswitches.
Check and ensure the parameter value in System Console to be the same with the actual distance between
Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto Exposure position. (see parameter 9 “High, low POS. distance”,
Job Card CAL 002)
The default value of the distance between Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto
CAUTION Exposure position set in System Console (see parameter 9 “High, low POS. distance”,
Job Card CAL 002) is 40cm, which is different from the default distance set on SG100
Wall Stand (44cm). So it’s a must to check and ensure the parameter value in System
Console to be the same with the actual distance between Low Auto Exposure position
and High Auto Exposure position when performing the SG100 SID calibration (refer to
Job Card CAL 006 in Chapter 4), even if the positions of the Microswitch S4 Activator
Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam are not modified and be on the default position
in the upper step.
71
PROTEUS XR/a
14. Warning and Specification Labels

Warning labels are shipped with the SG100 for the foldable legs. The labels are written in three languages:
English, French and Spanish.
Locate the warning labels and attach the label of the appropriate language to the right-side folder leg (leg with
lock release knob).
Specification labels in four languages (French, German, Italian, Spanish) are shipped for adapting the SG100
specification label to the corresponding language where the SG100 is installed. The original specification
label, located in the upper lock-handle side of the vertical column, is in English.
If necessary, locate the specification label and attach the label of the appropriate language over the original
specification label.
15. Verify the Bucky grid speed setting.
The Bucky (Medys) must be set for Super speed using a 36L/cm grid. Normally this is done at the factory.
Verify that the switches are correctly set and if necessary change their settings, refer to the procedure in Job
Card LJS02 “SG100 VERTICAL BUCKY STAND MEDYS BUCKY SWITCHES” of SG100 Service Manual
(GPCP No. 2150297).
72
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Install SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No.: 2402562)

Date:10/10/06
To / / To
1. Unpacking
SG120 is shipped in one crate to facilitate transport and installation.
1) Move SG120, in the shipping container, to the installation area. Leave the container in the horizontal
position.
2) Remove the banding and cardboard box that is covering the equipment and clamped to the wooden pallet.
3) Remove the shipping wooden crosspieces holding SG120 to the pallet.
4) Rest the bottom end of SG120 on soft support material outside the shipping container.
2. Standing
1) Before standing, remove the top cover to ensure the pulley chains are on their sprockets. If they are not,
try to set the chains on the sprockets. USE CAUTION.
If the problem cannot be easily corrected, SG120 must be returned as DOA.
2) Using two people, carefully raise SG120 to upright position.
INJURY HAZARD! AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO TURN OR TILT SG120.
WARNING SG120 WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 180 KG (330 LBS) AND CAN EASILY BE TIPPED OR
UNBALANCED.
3. Floor mounting
Tools required:
- Standard service person tool kit
- Drill template
- Wrench set
- Laser alignment tool
73
PROTEUS XR/a
Procedure:
1) Using the drill template supplied with the equipment (included in installation kit), set the position of SG120
taking into account.
- The distance focal dependant to the anti-diffusion grid.

- The minimum recommended distance to the wall indicated on the drill template.
2) Place and align SG120 drill template laterally using the collimator light or the laser alignment tool.
3) Mark the holes using the template.
Note: Set the template to the floor means of adhesive tape to avoid it can be displaced.
4) Remove the template.
5) Drill the holes and place the anchors.
6) Using two people, carefully raise SG120 to upright position and move to the mounting location. Install the
anchor bolts.
7) Level the equipment using the 3 levelling screws and tight the anchor bolts.
Levelling screws
DANGER
Tightness that anchors need to set to is 50 Nm.
8) Recheck the alignment of SG120.
74
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: SG120 Vertical Bucky Stand can be either LEFT or RIGHT loaded. The equipment is
factory LEFT handed configured. The procedure to change the configuration follows.
DANGER
MAKE SURE THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED OFF DURING THIS OPERATION.

DURING THIS OPERATION, THE BUCKY CARRIAGE AND COUNTERWEIGHT CARRIAGE CAN
MOVE.
4. Bucky Reversal Procedure

1) Remove covers and panel
a. Remove the back covers from the bucky support assembly.
b. Remove the front panel from the bucky support.
2) Vertical lock handle
75
PROTEUS XR/a

The handle is located on the left side of the bucky support assembly.
a. Remove the plate below the bucky support assembly to access to the interface board.
Interface Board
b. Release the switch cable from the interface board, J8.

c. Remove with care the four screws that hold the handle.
d. Extract carefully the handle with the switch cable.
e. To assembly the handle on the new side, first remove the white plug for cable insertion and
the four screws.
76
PROTEUS XR/a
f. Pass the switch cable through the hole on the new side and fix the handle with the 4 screws.
g. Connect the switch cable to J8 on interface board and assembly the plate removed in step a
in 2) above.
3) Bucky assembly
To change the configuration of the bucky for the cassette tray insertion, follow the next procedure:
Note: There is some difference between with patient support and without patient support.
Please confirm whether you’ve installed patient support.
a. Extract the cassette tray with CAUTION. THE BUCKY CARRIAGE WILL MOVE UP.
b. Remove the bucky cover protecting the bucky electronic devices.
c. Remove the 8 white plugs (4 on each side) located on the back of the bucky support.
Note: Remove the 6 white plugs (3 on each side) located on the back of the bucky support,
for the other 2 on the top (1 on each side) are covered if the patient support option is
installed.
Four more
plugs on the
other side.
77
PROTEUS XR/a
d. Remove the 7 screws that hold the lateral cover of the bucky: 3 of them are situated on the
bucky frame and the other 4 are accessible from the back of the bucky support through the
holes left uncovered in the previous step.
Note: When the patient support option is installed, one of the 4 holes located on the back of
the bucky support (the one of the top on either side) is partially obstructed by the
magnets that are assembled with the patient support option. To access the four screws
from the back of the bucky support referred in step d, it is first needed to disassembly
the magnets that obstruct the holes.
e. Once the lateral cover is free, move it to the opposite side of the bucky to fix it. To enable the
displacement of the lateral cover, It is needed you cut the flanges that hold the cable to the
bucky frame.
78
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: Since the ion chamber is assembled to the bucky, you can temporary displace it to let
the lateral cover pass through the area between the bucky structure and the ion
chamber. For that, just loosen the screws that hold the ion chamber and move it in
order to facilitate the operation.
f. Guide the cable, making sure that you do not interfere with the internal bucky mechanism
and fix it with flanges to the bucky sheet metal frame.
79
PROTEUS XR/a
g. Make sure about the guiding of the cable. See below bucky for LEFT handed loading
(factory) and RIGHT handed loading.
MEDYS Bucky
cable
LEFT
cable
RIGHT
h. Fix the lateral cover to the opposite side with the 7 screws removed in step c in 3) above.
Note: When the patient support is installed, remember to fix the magnets removed in order to
be able to access the screws.
i. Insert again the 8 white plugs removed in step c.
Note: When the patient support is installed, there are 6 white plugs need to be insert.
j. Assembly the bucky cover removed in step b.
k. In the front panel, change the position of the cover to the opposite side.
Assembly this
cover on the
opposite side.
l. To finish, assembly the front panel and the back covers removed in 4. 1) (Remove covers
and panel) above.
m. Insert the tray using the new configuration.
80
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: Check the Counterweight and Bucky Carriage Counterbalance, and add or remove
Counterweight as following when required.
5. Counterweight and Bucky counterbalance check

Even though the bucky carriage is factory balanced this procedure must be carried out.
1) Remove the column lateral covers.
2) Insert the cassette tray in the bucky.
Cassette tray
insertion
3) Place a medium size cassette into cassette tray.

4) Loosen and remove the fixing square and retaining bar.
Pulley chains
Fixing square Retaining bar
5) Check that the counterweight and bucky carriage are well balanced:
- WITH POWER ON: Release the electromechanical brake and check the bucky carriage can
move easily in vertical direction.
- WITH POWER OFF: Check that the bucky carriage can move freely and smoothly in vertical
direction.
Note: The electromechanical brakes do not lock with power OFF.

If the counterweight and bucky carriage are not well balanced, follow the procedure
detailed below to add or remove counterweights.
81
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Adding or removing counterweights
DURING THIS OPERATION, THE BUCKY CARRIAGE AND COUNTERWEIGHT

WARNING CARRIAGE CAN MOVE.
1) Move the carriage to the lowest position.

2) Remove the metal cover on the front of the column.
Metal cover
3) Remove the second metal cover to access the counterweights.
Metal cover
Counterweights
4) Place or remove the counterweights with care.

5) Reinstall the two sheet metal covers and the column lateral covers.
7. Electrical Installation
1) Power cable connection
Power and ground cables are supplied optionally with the equipment.
a. Connect power supply cable from J1 VAC on the bucky control board.
b. Connect the ground cable to the ground stud on the bucky control board.
2) System cable connection
System Cable Connection (Code: 2145641-2, 2145642-2 and 2145644-2) is supplied optionally with SG120.
82
PROTEUS XR/a
a. Connect Bucky cable (Code: 2145641-2) to J42 on the bucky control board.
ENSURE THAT THE BUCKY IS SET CORRECTLY FOR THE GENERATOR VOLTAGE
WARNING (115VAC OR 230VAC). THE BUCKY IS SET FOR 115VAC OR 230VAC IN FACTORY TO
AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGED. PAY ATTENTION TO CHECK THE VOLTAGE, AND SET
JUMPERS BY REFERRING TO THE VOLTAGE CHANGE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE BUCKY
MANUAL.
b. Connect Ion Chamber cable (Code: 2145642-2) to J40 on the bucky control board.
c. Connect Sensing Tray cable (Code: 2145644-2) to J41 on the bucky control board.
Cable Name Cable SG120 end Other end

Part (stick to
Number connectors
on the I/O
panel at the
top of the
SG120)
SG120 Ion Chamber Cable 2145642-2 J40 Jedi connector AEC2 (refer to page 2-94 in Job
Card IST 020 “Electrical Connections”)
SG120 Auto Tray Cable 2145644-2 J41 System I/F Board connector J124 (See illustration
“System I/F Board connector J124” in next page)
83
PROTEUS XR/a
Cable Name Cable SG120 end Other end

Part (stick to
Number connectors
on the I/O
panel at the
top of the
SG120)
SG120 Bucky Cable 2145641-2 J42 Jedi Wall Bucky (J6) connector (refer to page 2-94
in Job Card IST 020 “Electrical Connections”)
SG120 Power Supply Cable 2410108-2 Power PDU connector TM4 SG120 Power (See illustration
“PDU connector TM4 SG120 Power” in next page)
SG120 Ground Cable 2140362-2 Ground PDU ground
Illustration: System I/F Board connector J124
J124
Note: Pay attention to ensure the marked side of the

cable plug to face to you when connecting.
Illustration: PDU connector TM4 SG120 Power
TM4 SG120 Power
84
PROTEUS XR/a
8. Perform Microswitch Adjustment (Automatic Collimator Option only)

Five microswitches indicate the position of the Bucky (Refer to illustration below). The microswitch activator
cams for S4 (upper, near discrete SID point) and S5 (lower, far discrete SID point) may need slight
adjustment at installation time.
Microswitches S4 and S5 are located in the vertical brake assembly on the side opposite to the vertical lock
handle. The activator cams for microswitches S4 and S5 are located on the vertical column. Verify that the
activator cams actuate S4 and S5 as described below:
Note: This operation is carried out with the Bucky angulated to full horizontal position
Check that the activator cam for microswitch S4 actuates S4 when the Bucky is at the same level as the top of
the x-ray table (near discrete SID point). Reposition the cam actuator if necessary.
Check that the activator cam for microswitch S5 actuates S5 when the Bucky is in the lowest vertical position
(far discrete SID point) with the foldable legs extended and touching the floor. Reposition the cam actuator if
necessary.
S4 BEHIND COVER PLATE
Microswitch S4 activator cam
Note: Vertical Bucky Wall Stand not equipped with the automatic collimator option do not have
positioning microswitches.
85
PROTEUS XR/a
Check and ensure the parameter value in System Console to be the same with the actual distance between
Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto Exposure position. (see parameter 9 “High, low POS. distance”,
Job Card CAL 002)
and High Auto Exposure position when performing the SG120 SID calibration (refer to
Job Card CAL 006 in Chapter 4), even if the positions of the Microswitch S4 Activator
Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam are not modified and be on the default position
in the upper step.
9. Warning and Specification Labels

Specification labels in seven languages (Spanish, English, French, German, Portuguese, Chinese and
Japanese) are shipped for adapting the SG120 specification label to the corresponding language where the
SG120 is installed. The original specification label, located in the upper lock-handle side of the vertical
column, is in English.
If necessary, locate the specification label and attach the label of the appropriate language over the original
specification label.
10. Verify the Bucky grid speed setting.

The Bucky (Medys) must be set for Super speed using a 36L/cm grid. Normally this is done at the factory.
86
PROTEUS XR/a
11. Covers assembly

1) Bucky covers
The bucky covers (1 front cover + 2 rear covers) of the SG120 are factory assembled. Only the next
procedure has to be carried out:
There are cutting operations to be made on some pre-cut areas in most of the types of
CAUTION SG120 covers.
The cutting operation has to be carried out with CAUTION to avoid personal injury or
damage to the cover.
It is not recommended to carry out the cutting work in only one step, but to repeat the
cutting operation carefully and as many times as necessary until being able to remove
easily the cover part to reject.
a. Cut with an appropriate tool the pre-cut slot located on one of the sides of the front bucky
cover for cassette tray insertion. If you wish LEFT hand load, cut the left side of the cover; if
you wish RIGHT hand load, cut the right side of the cover.
Note: The equipment is factory LEFT handed configured, so the LEFT pre-cut side of the cover
should normally be cut, unless you want to inverse the tray insertion. If you wish to change
the hand load configuration, follow the procedure detailed in 4 above.
87
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: To disassembly the different bucky covers, loosen the screws shown below.
b. Connect the ground cable to the ground stud on the bucky control board.
88
PROTEUS XR/a
2) Column covers
The column frontal cover is assembled at factory. If you need to disassembly it, follow the next procedure:
a. Remove the screws (4 in total, 2 on each side) fixing the cover to the squares at the bottom
of the column.
b. Remove the 2 screws fixing the cover to the top of the column.
c. Move the bucky carriage assembly to the lowest position and remove the front cover with
care.
The column lateral and top covers are supplied disassembled into the packing box.
89
PROTEUS XR/a
The procedure to assembly the lateral and top covers follows:

a. Make sure the column front cover is assembled.
b. Cut the pre-cut window for system cables entrance located on the rear side of one of the
lateral covers, depending on the side from where the system cables entrance needs to be
made in your installation.
c. Assembly one of the lateral covers (2 screws) to the plate located on the column top.
d. Fix the lateral cover to the square located on the foot of the column (1 screw).
90
PROTEUS XR/a
e. Take the second cover and make it fits with the cover already assembled.
f. Fix the second lateral cover to the top and foot of the column (steps b and c).
g. Connect the ON/OFF led cable supplied with the equipment and assembly the top cover
(4 screws) to the plate on the top of the column.
Note: Some of the holes to fix the covers have some safe clearance enabling to adjust the
assembly in the best conditions.
91
PROTEUS XR/a
12. Rotation limit screw

a. Localize the Switches S2-1 and S2-2 behind the back bucky support. See Figure Switches S2-1 & S2-2
localization.
b. Loose the S2-1 screws 1, 2, 3 (Figure Switch S2-1) with an Allen wrench number 3.
c. Loose the Limit rotation Screw with an Allen wrench number 4.
d. Take apart the Limit rotation Screw and put in the original position the Switch S2-1 by tighten the S2-1
screws 1, 2, 3.
e. Loose the S2-2 screws 1, 2, 3 (Figure Switch S2-2 & Screws) with a Allen wrench number 3.
f. Tight the Limit rotation Screw (Allen wrench number 4).
g. Put the Switch S2-2 in the original position by tighten the S2-2 screws 1, 2, 3.
Note: In Figure Switch S2-2 & Screws and Figure Switch S2-1 are shown the switch S2-1 & S2-2
without the microswitch only for clarification. Do not touch the electronic component. Only
is necessary to loose the screws as follows.
Figure Switches S2-1 & S2-2 localization
Note: Not to change this screw will cause that cassette tray falls when rotating.
92
PROTEUS XR/a
Figure Switch S2-1
Figure Switch S2-2 & Screws
WARNING THE LIMIT ROTATION SCREW SHOULD BE AT S2-1 WHEN LEFT HAND
CONFIGURATION, AND AT S2-2 WHEN RIGHT HAND. IN OTHER CASE THE
ROTATION (SEE FIGURE LEFT CONFIGURATION AND FIGURE RIGHT CONFIGURATION IN
SECTION 5-3-3-3) WILL BE DONE IN THE WRONG WAY AND THE CASSETTE TRAY WILL
SLIP WHEN ROTATING. HEEDING THIS WARNING MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE
OPERATOR.
93
PROTEUS XR/a
13. Covers for patient support option installation

Note: This item is applicable only if the patient support option kit is going to be installed. See
IST025 of this chapter.
In case the patient support option is going to be installed, the next procedure has to be followed for
NBS2100 covers:
a. Remove the back covers of the bucky support assembly.
b. Cut the pre-cut windows of the lower rear cover lodging the patient handgrips. Leave the cover ready for
further assembly.
c. Take the upper rear cover included in patient support option kit.
d. Cut the pre-cut windows of the upper rear cover (the one chosen in previous step) lodging the patient
handgrips. Replace the old upper rear cover by this new cover and leave it ready for further assembly.
e. Discard the old upper rear cover.
f. Follow the procedure described in IST025 of this chapter, referring to installation of patient support option.
g. Assembly the new upper and lower rear covers.
Figure: Look of rear bucky covers with Patient Support OPTION installed
94
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Mount System Console and Printer

Date: 02/05/01
To / / To
Note: There are three types of mounting available for each system. You should choose one according
to the system configuration and customer’s requirement.
Note: Connect the cables according to the job card IST 020.
1. Console with Pedestal

1-1 Mount the console plate (610-3081) on the console
pedestal.
610-3081
1-2 Mount the system console on the console plate and

fasten with the former screws.
1-3 Mount Hand Switch holder with the two screws.
95
PROTEUS XR/a
1-4 Connect console and cable.

Note: When you plug the console cable, make
sure lock the connector securely.
1-5 Mount Connecting Cover (610-3067).
610-3067
2. Console on the desktop
Note: There are Three choices to place console on the desktop.
2-a Only console on the desktop

2-a-1 Please select the Plug Cover Fixer (610-3113), shown as the
pictures below.
010-6006
610-3113
96
PROTEUS XR/a
2-a-2 Mount the part 610-3113 to the console.
Note: Console Surface PROTECTION!
2-a-3 Follow the steps 1-3,1-4,1-5.
2-b Console on the desktop with a bracket
2-b-1 Assemble Connecting Board (610-3091), Hand

Switch Fixing Plate (610-3068) and Bracket.
Note: There are two choices to assemble

610-3068 and 610-3091 according to
either the table or the wall you choose to
mount them on.
610-3068 610-3091
97
PROTEUS XR/a
2-b-2 Mount the assembly to console.
2-b-3 Follow the steps 1-3,1-4,1-5.
2-c Console on the desktop with a rubber pad (Only for bottom touching on the desk).
2-c1 Mount the rubber pad into the console using screws.
98
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Console mounted on the wall

3-1 Mark the mount holes onto wall using the bracket.
3-2 Drill two holes, and insert two M4 expanding bolts
into the wall.
3-3 Assemble Connecting Board (610-3091), Hand

Switch Fixing Plate (610-3068) and Bracket.
Note: The step is the same as the step 2-b-1, except
turning the connecting board (610-3091) 180°
and changing Hand Switch Fixing Plate
(610-3068) placement.
610-3091
3-4 Follow the steps 1-3,1-4,1-5.
3-5 Hang the bracket and console onto the bolts on the
wall.
99
PROTEUS XR/a
A printer is an optional component. Mount a system

console with a printer follows the steps below.
1. Remove the side cover from the system console.
2. Loosen or remove the screws.
3. Connect the system console and the printer with a cable.
4. Insert the printer into the system console.
5. Tighten the screws
100
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Mount a console plate.
Note: Choose a proper console plate according

to customer’s requirement.
If a table top mounting is chosen, follow
the step7, 8, 10, 11, 12.
If a pedestal mounting is chosen, follow
the step9, 10, 11, 12.
7. Assemble the bracket for table top mounting.

8. Mount the printer to the bracket.
9. Mount the printer to the pedestal, see step 1-1.
10. Insert the cable connector into the socket.
11. Mount the cable cover.

12. Follow the steps 1-3,1-4,1-5.
101
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Warning Signs and Labels

Date: 10/10/06
To / / To
Warning Signs and Labels
Note: There four types of warning labels are delivered as accessories in “OPEN
ME FIRST” box.
102
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/A SYSTEM LABELS LOCATION
Note: Please select the appropriate warning label to affix it on

the right bottom of console.
WARNING LABELS SHOULD BE INCLUDED IN

WARNING “OPEN ME FIRST” BOX. IF THEY ARE MISSING,
PLEASE ORDER A NEW CONSOLE (2259976
WITH FLOPPY DISK OR 5462233 WITH USB) IN
CONFORMITY WITH REGULATION
REQUIREMENTS.
103
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Mount RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube

Date: 20/12/99
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for RAD14,21 X-ray tube. For
the assembling of MX100 X-ray tube, please refer to
Job Card IST 013 in this Chapter.
Note: For RAD 14.21 X-ray tube manual, please refer to
the instruction sent along with the system.
DANGER
In order to ensure meeting the security

requirement, below steps must be performed while
installation and FRU replacement of tube,
1. Apply the Loctite 242 glue (or equivalent) on the installed
bolts,
2. Torque the installed bolts to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) each with
torque wrench.
3.Add paint mark(not use red )for visual screw loose check
(4x).
1. Assemble tube bracket. Put the blue cover onto handle

if it is not assembled. Tube bracket
Note: Apply locktite to mount screws.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, there is no

trunion handle.
Upper
Clamp
Screws
2. Loosen the four screws of the upper clamp of tube
bracket.
3. Remove the upper clamp of tube bracket.
Screws
TO PREVENT THE CLAMPS FROM ANY IMPACT.
WARNING
IN CASE IMPACT OCCURRED, IT SHOULD BE
Lock Release
VERIFIED THAT THE CLAMP HAS ENOUGH
STRENGTH BEFORE INSTALLATION.
Lock
Nut
4. Put the X-ray tube on lower support of tube bracket.
104
PROTEUS XR/a
5. Reinstall the upper clamp of tube bracket. Tighten four
screws surely.
Note: Pay attention to the marks on the clamps to put
the left and right clamps into proper position.
The torque applied to the four screws is 6.0~6.4
N.m.
6. Tube bracket has a trunion used to rotate the tube.

Loosen the two set screws and then adjust the lock nut
on both sides of the tube clamp. Make it lock the tube
when moving the trunion forward and release the tube
otherwise.
7. Fasten the set screws again.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, there is no trunion handle,
you just need to fasten clamp screws.
105
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Mount MX100 X-ray Tube

Date: 03/01/03
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for MX100 X-ray tube. For the assembling of RAD14, 21 X-ray tube, please
refer to Job Card IST 012 in this Chapter.
Note: The Maxi-100 tube manual please Refer to Direction 46-014427
1. Assemble the lead cup (GPCP No.: 2379458) to the MX100 X-ray tube output window if the lead cup is not
attached before arrival at the install site.
BECAUSE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF IMPAIRMENT TO HUMAN HEALTH, PLEASE PAY
WARNING ATTENTION TO WEAR GLOVES AND PREVENT THE DIRECT CONTACT WITH HUMAN
BODY WHEN CARRYING OR ASSEMBLING THE LEAD CUP.
Note: The lead cup should only be applied with MX100 X-ray tube (GPCP No.: D2301R) and Auto
collimator GPCP No. 2259298-54 (or Manual collimator GPCP No. 2259989). Do not use Lead cup
with X-ray tubes or collimators of any other types, such as RAD14,21 X-ray tubes.
1) Clean the output window cover of MX100 tube.
Output
window
2) Remove the self-adhesive tape circle cover from the lead cup and attach the lead cup onto the output
window cover of MX100 tube. Apply pressure to attach tightly and ensure the fixation.
Remove the
self-adhesive
tape circle
cover Lead
cup
106
PROTEUS XR/a
2. Attach the spacer to the tube as shown in illustration below with four hexagon socket head bolts (GPCP No.:
46-170498P11, see illustration). Apply locktite to each bolt. The flat side must be away from the tube output
window.
Mount these four bolts to

attach the spacer to the Flat
tube. side
Tube
output
window
DANGER
In order to ensure meeting the security requirement, below

steps must be performed while installation and FRU replacement of
tube,
1. Apply the Loctite 242 glue (or equivalent ) on the installed bolts,
2. Torque the installed bolts to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) each with
torque wrench.
3.Add paint mark(not use red) for visual screw loose check(4x).
CAUTION Pay attention to the mounting direction of spacer. The flat side must be away from
the tube output window.
3. Position the tube with spacer attached as shown in illustration below and secure them to the gooseneck with
four hexagon head bolts (GPCP No.: 001-4060-03, see illustration.). Apply locktite to each bolt.
Mount the four bolts (the

other two bolts are on the
other side of the
gooseneck.) to attach the
spacer to the gooseneck.
107
PROTEUS XR/a
SIEMENS COLLIMATOR 1/4 IST 014
Subassembly: Mount Siemens collimator to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube

Date: 20/6/06
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for RAD 14,21 X-ray tube. For the mounting of Proteus XR/a Collimator to
MX100 X-ray tube, please refer to Job Card IST 015 in this Chapter.
Note: For Manual Collimator, the transformer on OTS also needs replaced for proper lamp power supply,
please refer to Job Card IST002 and OTS service manual, after the collimator installation, please refer
to CAL 015 to calibrate lamp voltage.
Note: This Job Card is only for Siemens Collimator. For Eclipse Collimator, please refer to Job Card IST 016
in this Chapter.
1. Remove the three safety screws with red heads from the collimator (marked with white ellipses).
Transportation safety screw B
Collimator mounting screws
Transportation safety screw A
2. Check collimator aluminium plate quantity,if the collimator For RAD

has two pieces of plates installed, remove one and reserve 14,21 Tube,
only one piece of plate for RAD14,21 tube only
reserve
one piece of
Note: This action in step 2 is only for RAD14,21 Tube.
plate
For MX100 Tube, do not remove any of the
Aluminium plate. (Refer to Job Card 015)
3. Loosen the three collimator mounting screws to their maximum permissible limit.
CAUTION
Remove all 3 transportation safety screws (marked with white ellipses), see illustration A and B, before
applying power to the collimator.
Before transportation tighten the transport safety screws A fully (they have to screw in easily).
Therefore the smallest x-ray field has to be set. For manual setting of the collimator blades replace the
left cover and adjust an opening of the collimator blades of approx. 4.5 mm.
Turn off voltage before fitting or removing the cover.
Mind installation instructions and ESD regulations.
108
PROTEUS XR/a
4. Rotate the tube 180.
5. Mount the collimator mounting flange and the OTS console

bracket with four provided screws.
Note: If the flange has been mounted in the factory, skip this step.
WARNING
USE SOME MATERIAL TO PROTECT TUBE
WINDOW WHEN FASTENING SCREWS.
PAY ATTENTION TO THE DIRECTION OF
FLANGE. THE SLOT SHOULD BE ALIGNED
WITH OTS CONSOLE BRACKET.
WARNING
Apply locktite 242 to flange mount screws.
The force fastening screws is between 10~13 N.m.
6. Be careful not to damage the collimator fingers. Position the collimator on the X-ray tube. Be sure the detent
lever is not preventing the collimator from seating fully. There should be a gap between the lever and collimator
collar when the collimator rotation lever is fully depressed. After the installation, the collimator should be rotated
freely.
109
PROTEUS XR/a
WARNING
The collimator rotation lever must be fully depressed when mounting/installing the collimator to the
mounting flange. Failure to do so could cause the collimator to mount improperly and fall from the unit.
Note: Apply grease supplied to collimator mount flange and
collimator adapter for easy movement.
Apply grease underneath Apply grease on the

the flange edge inside surface
Lev of adapter
er
110
PROTEUS XR/a
7. Tighten the 3 collimator mounting screws in equal number of turns until they lock securely and can not be turned
anymore. Then back out each screw equally by maximum 1/2 turn, so that collimator can rotate freely. Verify
that when the collimator is not in a detent location, the minimum rotate force is 20N.
WARNING
Note: The set screw tail should not projecting outside and have a recess about a couple of millimeters to the
screw hole when the collimator mounting/installing correctly to the flange
8. Turn the X-ray tube back into normal

position.
WARNING
CHECK THAT THE MOUNTING IS CORRECT
BEFORE TURNING THE TUBE BACK TO NORMAL POSITION.
BE SURE THAT THREE THRUST BUSHINGS
ARE SYMMETRIC TO THE CENTER AND HOLD THE FLANGE FIRMLY.
9. Loosen the X-ray tube. Use level gauge to check that the
tube and collimator are in level position, and then fasten the
tube using trunion handle securely.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, there is no trunion handle.
Just need to fasten clamp screws.
Apply locktite to mount screws.
10. Mount the OTS Console.
111
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: If the Proteus XR/a collimator is replaced with Eclipse Proteus Collimator unit, remove the lead cup
on tube side before new collimator installation.
Note: For Manual Collimator, the transformer on OTS also needs replaced for proper lamp power supply,
please refer to Job Card IST002 and OTS service manual, after the collimator installation, please refer
to CAL 015 to calibrate lamp voltage.
112
PROTEUS XR/a
SIEMENS COLLIMATOR 1/4 IST 015
Subassembly: Mount Siemens collimator to MX100 X-ray Tube

Date: 15/12/06
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for MX100 X-ray tube. For the mounting of Proteus XR/a Collimator to RAD
14,21 X-ray tube, please refer to Job Card IST 014 in this Chapter.
Note: This Job Card is only for Siemens Collimator. For Eclipse Collimator, please refer to Job Card IST
1. Remove the three safety screws with red heads from the
collimator (marked with white ellipses).
Transportation safety screw
B
Collimator mounting screws
Transportation safety screw

A
2. Check the collimator aluminum plate quantity, if there is only one plate in the collimator-tube interface, please
order one plate 2383309. Make sure there are two plates installed on the collimator-tube interface.
Note: This action in step 2 is only for Siemens collimator in the MX100 Tube. For RAD14,21 Tube, only
reserve one piece of Aluminium plate. (Refer to Job Card IST 014). For Eclipse Collimator,
please refer to Job Card IST 017 in this Chapter.
Aluminium
plate
3. Loosen the three collimator mounting screws to their maximum permissible limit.
Remove all 3 transportation safety screws (marked with white ellipses), see illustration
A and B, before applying power to the collimator.
CAUTION Before transportation tighten the transport safety screws A fully (they have to screw in
easily). Therefore the smallest x-ray field has to be set. For manual setting of the
collimator blades replace the left cover and adjust an opening of the collimator blades
of approx. 4.5 mm.
Turn off voltage before fitting or removing the cover.
Mind installation instructions and ESD regulations.
113
PROTEUS XR/a

Note: Step 4 to 5 should be performed only when the
OTS console bracket and collimator interface plate are
not assembled with the MX100 X-ray tube when
arriving at the install site. Otherwise, if the OTS
console bracket and collimator interface plate are
already assembled at the factory, skip to step 6
directly.
5. Mount the OTS console bracket.
Note: Apply locktite to OTS console bracket OTS
console
mount screws when mounting.
bracket
6. Mount the tube/collimator interface plate.
USE SOME MATERIAL TO PROTECT TUBE WINDOW WHEN FASTENING SCREWS.
WARNING PAY ATTENTION TO THE DIRECTION OF PLATE. THE SLOT SHOULD BE ALIGNED WITH
OTS CONSOLE BRACKET.
In order to ensure meeting the security requirement, below steps

must be performed while installation and FRU replacement,
1. Apply the Loctite 242 (or equivalent ) glue on the installed 8
screws,
2. Torque the installed flat head screws(1/4 inch) to 9.9 N-m (7.3
lbs-ft) each with torque wrench and 2.9 Nm for each HEXAGON
SOCKET(M4) screws .
1 2
1. Mount collimator ring 2. CONE RETAINER 5241490

3 4
3. Put CONE RETAINER to the surface 4. Fix the CONE RETAINER
114
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: Apply LOTITE 242 to 8 screws, the torque requirement refer to below illustration
115
PROTEUS XR/a
7. Be careful not to damage the collimator fingers. Position the collimator on the X-ray tube. Be sure the detent
lever is not preventing the collimator from seating fully. There should be a gap between the lever and
collimator collar when the collimator rotation lever is fully depressed. After the installation, the collimator
should be rotated freely.
The collimator rotation lever must be fully depressed when mounting/installing the
collimator to the tube/collimator interface plate. Failure to do so could cause the
collimator to mount improperly and fall from the unit.
CAUTION
Note: Apply grease supplied to collimator mount flange and the tube/collimator interface plate (see picture
below) for easy movement.
Apply grease on the

inside surface of adapter
8. Tighten the 3 collimator mounting screws in equal number of turns until they lock securely and can not be
turned anymore. Then back out each screw equally by maximum 1/2 turn, so that collimator can rotate
freely. Verify that when the collimator is not in a detent location, the minimum rotate force is 20N.
CAUTION
116
PROTEUS XR/a
WARNING
The set screw tail should not projecting outside and have a recess about a couple of millimeters to the
screw hole when the collimator mounting/installing correctly to the flange
9. Turn the X-ray tube back into normal position.
WARNING
CHECK THAT THE MOUNTING IS CORRECT BEFORE TURNING THE TUBE BACK TO NORMAL POSITION.
BE SURE THAT THREE THRUST BUSHINGS ARE SYMMETRIC TO THE CENTER AND HOLD THE FLANGE
FIRMLY.
10. Loosen the X-ray tube. Use level gauge to check that the tube and collimator are in level position, then fasten
the tube using trunion handle securely.
11. Connect the Collimator Power & CAN cable (GPCP No., 2391024).
Note: For MX100 X-ray tube, if the X-ray field and light field of Collimator are not aligned after mounting,
the performing of Job Card IST 032 “MX100 X-ray tube-Collimator Interface Plate Alignment” in
Chapter 3 can calibrate and ensure the alignment of X-ray field and light field of Collimator.
117
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Mount Eclipse Proteus Collimator to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube

Date: 15/12/06
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for RAD 14,21 X-ray tube. For the mounting of Eclipse Proteus Collimator to
MX100 X-ray tube, please refer to Job Card IST 017 in this Chapter.
2. Mount the collimator mounting flange and the OTS console bracket with four provided screws.
Note: If the flange has been mounted in the factory, skip this step.
WARNING
USE SOME MATERIAL TO PROTECT TUBE
WINDOW WHEN FASTENING SCREWS.
PAY ATTENTION TO THE DIRECTION OF
FLANGE. THE SLOT SHOULD BE ALIGNED
WITH OTS CONSOLE BRACKET.
WARNING
Note: Apply locktite 242 to flange mount screws.
The force fastening screws is between 10~13 N.m
118
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Loosen the screw (1), put the two clamps outwards to the max opening position. Put the locking Block (3) inside
the holder.
Illustration: Eclipse Proteus Collimator Top View
2
3
4. Position the collimator on the X-ray tube.
WARNING: Be sure the Locking Block is inside the holder.
Note: Apply grease supplied to collimator mount flange, collimator adapter and locking tongue for easy
movement.
Apply grease Apply grease on

underneath the the inside surface
flange edge of adapter and the
locking tongue
5. Put the two clamps closed. Make sure that collimator is properly connected with the flange.
119
PROTEUS XR/a
WARNING:
Tighten the screw (1) in Illustration Eclipse Proteus Collimator Top View with torque of 5.6 Nm.
120
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Loosen the locking screw, rotate the collimator to the normal position,
and then, tighten the locking screw.
Note: The collimator is in normal position only after a click is heard.
Note: After measuring HVL of x-ray source, if the HVL is larger/smaller than requirement, deinstall the
collimator, remove/add 1 piece of AL plate on the entrance of the collimator. Follow the above steps to
reinstall collimator.
WARNING
8. Loosen the X-ray tube. Use level gauge to check that the tube and collimator are in level position, and then
fasten the tube using trunion handle securely.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, there is no trunion handle.
Just need to fasten clamp screws.
Apply locktite to mount screws.
9. Mount the OTS Console.
10. Connect the collimator cable (GPCP No., 2391024).
11. Fix the cable on the strain relief screw with M5 nut.
121
PROTEUS XR/a
122
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Mount Eclipse Proteus Collimator to MX100 X-ray Tube

Date: 15/12/06
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for MX100 X-ray tube. For the mounting of Eclipse Proteus Collimator to RAD
14,21 X-ray tube, please refer to Job Card IST 016 in this Chapter.
Note: Step 4 to 5 should be performed only when the OTS
console bracket and collimator interface plate are not
assembled with the MX100 X-ray tube when arriving
at the install site. Otherwise, if the OTS console
bracket and collimator interface plate are already
assembled at the factory, skip to step 6 directly. OTS
console
bracket
2. Mount the OTS console bracket.
Note: Apply locktite to OTS console bracket mount screws when mounting.
3. Mount the tube/collimator interface plate.
WARNING
USE SOME MATERIAL TO PROTECT TUBE WINDOW WHEN FASTENING SCREWS.
PAY ATTENTION TO THE DIRECTION OF PLATE. THE SLOT SHOULD BE ALIGNED WITH OTS CONSOLE
BRACKET.
WARNING
IN ORDER TO ENSURE MEETING THE SECURITY REQUIREMENT, BELOW STEPS MUST BE PERFORMED
WHILE INSTALLATION AND FRU REPLACEMENT,
1. DAUB THE LOCTITE 242 (OR EQUATE ) GLUE ON THE INSTALLED 8 SCREWS,
2. TORQUE THE INSTALLED FLAT HEAD SCREWS(1/4 INCH) TO 4.3 N-M (7.3 LBS-FT) EACH WITH
TORQUE WRENCH AND 2.9 NM FOR HEXAGON SOCKET(M4) SCREWS .
WARNING
Apply LOTITE 242 to tube/collimator interface plate mount
screws when mounting. The torque requirement refers to
below.
123
PROTEUS XR/a
Apply grease underneath the

tube/collimator interface plate edge
4. Loosen the screw (1), put the two clamps outwards to the max opening position. Put the locking Block (3)
inside the holder.
Illustration: Eclipse Proteus Collimator Top View
2
3
5. Position the collimator on the X-ray tube.
WARNING: Be sure the Locking Block is inside the holder.

Note: If the replaced collimator is Siemens unit, remove the lead cup on tube side before new collimator
installation.
Note: Apply grease supplied to collimator mount flange, the tube/collimator interface plate and locking
tongue (see picture below) for easy movement.
Apply grease Apply grease on the

underneath the inside surface of
flange edge adapter and the
locking tongue
124
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Put the two clamps closed. Make sure that Eclipse Proteus Collimator is properly connected with the flange.
WARNING
Tighten the screw (1) in Illustration Eclipse Proteus Collimator Top View with torque of 5.6 Nm.
125
PROTEUS XR/a
7. Loosen the locking screw, rotate the collimator to the normal position,
and then, tighten the locking screw.
Note: The collimator is in normal position only after a click is heard.
Note: After measuring HVL of x-ray source, if the HVL is larger/smaller than requirement, deinstall the
collimator, remove/add 1 piece of AL plate on the entrance of the collimator. Follow the above steps to
reinstall collimator.
WARNING
9. Loosen the X-ray tube. Use level gauge to check that the tube and Eclipse Proteus Collimator are in level
position, then fasten the tube using trunion handle securely.
10. Connect the Collimator Power & CAN cable (GPCP No., 2391024).
11. Fix the cable on the strain relief screw with M5 nut.
126
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: For MX100 X-ray tube, if the X-ray field and light field of Eclipse Proteus Collimator are not aligned
after mounting, the performing of Job Card IST 032 “MX100 X-ray tube-Collimator Interface Plate
Alignment” in Chapter 3 can calibrate and ensure the alignment of X-ray field and light field of
Eclipse Proteus Collimator.
127
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/A SYSTEM 1/6 IST 018
Subassembly: Assemble Tube Cover to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube

Date: 20/12/99
From / / From Time: 1 hours
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for assembling the tube cover to
RAD 14,21 X-ray tube. For the assembling of the tube
cover to MX100 X-ray tube, please refer to Job Card IST
1. Mount cable support bracket with two screws.
Note: If Tomo-link function is selected, please use the

bracket marked with “For Tomo”.
2. Insert all cables into cable support.
3.Insert HV cables into HV cable (2269002-3 or 2269002)

socket.
APPLY SILICON GREASE ON BOTH SIDES
WARNING OF PLUGS BEFORE CONNECTING THE
HIGH VOLTAGE PLUG!!
USE HV CABLE WRENCH TO TIGHTEN HV

CABLE SECURELY.
4. Connect stator (2258386 or 2258386-2) and Thermal SW

cables (2258384 or 2258384-2) to X-ray tube. Refer to Job
Card IST 020.
5. Mount cable support onto bracket with two screws.

Hazardous voltage on the Internal Shield of
CAUTION Anode Rotation Cable. It can cause severe
injury, death.Turn off power before any
manipulation of the cable.
128
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Connect OTS Console CAN (2259867), OTS Console Lock

PWR (2258381) and Collimator Power & CAN (2391024)
cables. Refer to Jobcard IST 020.Then use ty-rap to fasten
the two cables.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, these two cables go

through the top of X-ray tube.
Note: Route the Collimator Cable according to the

picture shown here.
Collimator Cable
7. Connect Angulation lock cable. See Illustration.
8. Mount two tube cover adapters to X-ray tube.

Note: This step is for RAD 21 X-ray tube. For RAD 14
X-ray tube, skip to step 9.
129
PROTEUS XR/a
9. Mount two tube cover brackets onto X-ray tube.

Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, mount the tube cover
brackets onto the adapter.
10. Mount bottom cover under the OTS Console bracket.

Note: When mounting the console onto the bracket:
1). Apply LOCTITE 242 or 243 onto mounting
screws, this requirement is only performed by
Service, ignore it in MFG.
2). The torque fastening screws is 10.5Nm.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, mount bottom cover onto

the OTS Console bracket.
11. Mount Tube Angulation meter.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, skip this step.
130
PROTEUS XR/a

12. Locate the focal spot label on the tube.
13. Lower the tube and collimator to the table top until the
bottom of the collimator rests on the table top. The bottom
of the collimator should remain flush with the table when the
locks are engaged.
14. Make a reference measurement from the table top to the
center of the focal spot label and record this dimension
(See Figure 1 and Figure 2). It is recommended to use
a steel scale (as shown) with 0.5mm divisions.
15. Mount the front cover.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube, there has no angulation

meter window.
131
PROTEUS XR/a
16. Mount two steel straps on both sides of front cover.
Steel Strap
17. Adjust the Angulation meter to 0. Then fasten screws.
18. Use ty-rap to fasten all cables.
Note: For RAD 21 X-ray tube.
132
PROTEUS XR/a
19. Mount both side covers and fasten screws.
If screw holes don’t match, loosen the four screws in side

cover a little.
Re-adjust the bracket position. Then mount the side cover.
20. Using same gage as in step 3 to determine the location of

the focal spot label on the tube cover, roughly in the center
of the cover in the system Lateral direction.
21. Apply the focal spot label (46-239720P2) such that the
center of the focal spot label coincides with
the dimension recorded in step 13.
133
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Assemble Tube Cover to MX100 X-ray Tube

Date: 03/01/03
To / / To
Note: This Job Card is only for assembling the tube cover to MX100 X-ray tube. For the assembling of
the tube cover to RAD 14,21 X-ray tube, please refer to Job Card IST 018 in this Chapter.
1. Insert HV cables into HV cable (2269002-3 or 2269002)

socket.
Apply silicon grease on both sides of
WARNING plugs before connecting the High Voltage
plug!!
Use HV cable wrench to tighten HV cable
securely.
2. Connect Rotation cable (2380062 or 2380062-2), Thermal
SW cable (2403008 or 2403008-2) , and other tube cables
to X-ray tube. Refer to Job Card IST 020.
Tube
fan
cover
134
PROTEUS XR/a
5. Secure cables to cable entrance cover with clamp.
Note: Because of the size of cables is larger than the clamp,
you can use the clamp to secure the single largest
cable only. And make other cables accompany with
the clamped cable when exiting from the hole on the
cable entrance cover.
6. Mount cable support onto bracket with two screws.
Hazardous voltage on the Internal Shield of

CAUTION Anode Rotation Cable. It can cause severe
injury, death.Turn off power before any
manipulation of the cable.
7. Mount the OTS console. Apply Loctite 242 or 243.
In order to ensure meeting the security requirement,

below steps must be performed while installation and
FRU replacement,
1. Daub the Loctite 242 glue on the bolts,
2. Torque the bolts to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) each with torque
wrench.
135
PROTEUS XR/a
8. Connect OTS Console CAN (2391017), OTS Console Lock PWR (2391020) to the back of OTS Console.
9. Connect Angulation lock cable. See Illustration.

11. Locate the focal spot label on the X-ray tube.
12. Lower the tube and collimator until the bottom of the
collimator rests on the table top and engage the vertical lock.
13. Using a steel scale, measure and record the distance from
the table top to the focal spot.
Note: Refer to Illustration “LOWER TUBE COVER INSTALLATION” on the next page while performing
the following steps.
14. Install the end cover mounting brackets (1&2) on both ends of the tube using three (3) screws for each bracket.
15. Install the bottom cover (4) using 2 screws and washers (5).
136
PROTEUS XR/a
LOWER TUBE COVER INSTALLATION
16. Install the tube indicator.

1) Connect the tube indicator with tube indicator cable (indicator end: 2318489), and put the pin on.
Frontal of Rear of
indicator indicator
137
PROTEUS XR/a
pin
2) Insert the two pins (indicator end and tube end).
Insert
17. Install one screw on each side of top cover. Engage each screw only a few turns to allow the tab on bottom
cover to slide under the screw head.
138
PROTEUS XR/a
18. Install the top cover (6) and secure using 2 screws (7) on the upper back.
19. Squeeze the top and bottom cover together and tighten the two screws (8) that were started in step 16. When
complete, the cover gap should look like Illustration below.
20. Install 2 end cover mounting screws (9) in each end cover mounting bracket. One from the bottom and one
from the back. Engage each screw only a few turns leaving room for the end cover internal bracket to slide
between the screw head and the end cover mounting bracket (1&2).
21. Position the end covers (10&11) by sliding the slots on the internal bracket under the screw heads on the end
cover mounting brackets.
22. Tighten the four screws (9) that were only started in step 17. The bottom screw is accessed through a hole in
the end cover.
23. Secure the end covers (10&11) by installing two screws (12&13) through each end cap and into the top cover.
139
PROTEUS XR/a
24. If necessary, adjust the counterpoise spring to eliminate any vertical drift of the OTS.
25. Using the same metal scale and the dimension recorded earlier, determine the location of the focal spot and
apply the new focal spot decal in the center of the anode X-ray tube cover.
140
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Electrical Connections

Date: 12/12/05
From / / From Time: 1and half hours
To / / To
THE PDU CONTAINS TWO POWER TRANSFORMERS. THE FACTORY DEFAULT INPUT
WARNING IS SET TO 380V. THE FIELD ENGINEER MUST ADJUST INPUT VOLTAGE ACCORDING
TO LOCAL POWER.
The transformer schematics are shown as follows.
Jumper VB
Jumper VA
Default Factory Setting
1. Adjust the jumper VB and jumper VA according to local power voltage.

2. Connect all cables according to following table.
3. Apply silicon grease on both sides of plugs before connecting the High Voltage plug!!
4. Pay attention to the polarity of the X-ray tube. Incorrect connection will destroy the X-ray
tube.
5. Connect system power cable.
WARNING
ALL COMPONENTS MUST BE SECURELY GROUNDED.

MAKE SURE THAT PLUGS ARE NOT LOOSE!
CHECK WHETHER ALL CABLES ARE CONNECTED CORRECTLY.
THE EXCESS SHOULD BE PUT IN PROPER PLACE. IF NEEDED, COIL THE EXCESS CABLE. FOR
SAFETY AND MAINTENANCE, ALL CABLES SHOULD BE WRAPPED AND FIXED.
6. After checking components grounding and cable connections, power on the system.
141
PROTEUS XR/a

Item Cable Name Cable Parts Supplier Plug or Connector Fini
Num- Number Number sh
ber One End The Other End
1 OTS power cable (2m) 2258387 OTS J100 PDU CN19
1-1 OTS power cable (3m) 2258387-2 OTS J100 PDU CN19
2 OTS Grounding Cable 46-315243G3 OTS PDU GND
3 OTS SID & tomo I/O Cable (2m) 2258388 OTS J101 Connector 3 (on the
top of OTS)
I/F Board J111
3-1 OTS SID & tomo I/O Cable (3m) 2258388-2 OTS J101 Connector 3 (on the
top of OTS)
I/F Board J111
4 *2 OTS CAN Cable (2m) 2258389 OTS CN3 I/F Board J116
4-1 OTS CAN Cable (3m) 2258389-2 OTS CN3 I/F Board J116
*2
5 Rotor control Cable (2m) 2258386 Jedi Tube
5-1 Rotor control Cable (3m) 2258386-2 Jedi Tube
5-2 Rotor control Cable (2m) for MX100 2380062 Jedi Tube
5-3 Rotor control Cable (3m) for MX100 2380062-2 Jedi Tube
6 Thermal SW Cable (2m) 2258384 Jedi Tube
6-1 Thermal SW Cable (3m) 2258384-2 Jedi Tube
6-2 Thermal SW Cable (2m) for MX100 2403008 Jedi Tube
6-3 Thermal SW Cable (3m) for MX100 2403008-2 Jedi Tube
7 HV Cable (20m) 2269002-3 Tube Jedi
7-1 HV Cable (24m) 2269002 Tube Jedi
8 *2 Collimator power & CAN Cable 2391024 OTS CN1 Proteus XR/a
Collimator/Eclipse
Proteus Collimator
9 *2 OTS Console Power & CAN Cable 2259867 OTS CN4 OTS console
9-1 OTS Console Power & CAN Cable 2391017 OTS CN4 OTS console
for MX100 tube
10 *1 OTS Console Locks Power Cable 2258381 OTS power board OTS console
Lower connector
10-1 OTS Console Locks Power Cable 2391020 OTS power board OTS console
for MX100 Lower connector
11 OTS Long SID Switch Cable (2m) 46-329249G3
11-1 OTS Long SID Switch Cable (3m) 46-329249G4
12 Ground Lead 15.5 Foot 46-216211G16
13 OTS I/F PCB To PWR Supply Cable 2268131 OTS power board OTS J1
Higher connector
14 OTS Angulation Lock Cable 46-329256G4
15 Table height sensing Cable 2259298-56 221-2726 I/F Board J110 Table
16 AEC(1) Jedi AEC1 Ion chamber
17 Table cassette size sensing Cable
2259298-58 221-2727 I/F Board J112 Cassette tray
18 Table bucky control Cable 2259298-63 M720092- Jedi Table bucky Bucky
1
19 Table power Cable 2259298-57 221-2725 PDU CN20 Table
20 Table grounding Cable 2259298-66 221-2738 PDU GND Table
21 AEC(2) Jedi AEC2 Ion chamber
22 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) 2259298-58 221-2727 I/F Board J113 Bucky
cassette size sensing Cable
142
PROTEUS XR/a
23 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) 2259298-63 M720092- Jedi Wall bucky Bucky
bucky control Cable 2
24 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) 2259298-65 600-3025 PDU CN17 Wall Stand
power Cable
25 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) 2259298-73 221-2738 PDU GND Wall Stand
grounding Cable
26 SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2145644-2 System I/F Board SG100 Wall
2225849) Auto Tray Cable connector J124 Stand
27 SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2145641-2 Jedi Wall Bucky (J6) SG100 Wall
2225849) Bucky Cable connector Stand
28 SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2140362-2 PDU GND SG100 Wall
2225849) Ground Cable Stand
29 SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2145642-2 Jedi AEC2 SG100 Wall
2225849) Ion Chamber Cable Stand
30 SG100 (GPCP No. 2225849) Power 2151729-2 PDU connector TM4 SG100 Wall
Supply Cable SG100 Power Stand
Note: On PDU end of the SG100 Power
Supply cable, connect the wire
marked “10” to the connector
marked “1” of TM4 SG100 Power,
connect the wire “11” to connector
“2”, connect the yellow-green wire
to connector in yellow-green color.
31 SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2145644-2 System I/F Board SG120 Wall
2402562) Auto Tray Cable connector J124 Stand
32 SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2145641-2 Jedi Wall Bucky (J6) SG120 Wall
2402562) Bucky Cable connector Stand
33 SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2140362-2 PDU GND SG120 Wall
2402562) Ground Cable Stand
34 SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2145642-2 Jedi AEC2 SG120 Wall
2402562) Ion Chamber Cable Stand
35 SG120 (GPCP No. 2402562) Power 2410108-2 PDU connector TM4 SG120 Wall
Supply Cable SG120 Power Stand
Note: On PDU end of the SG120 Power
Supply cable, connect the wire marked
“10” to the connector marked “1” of TM4
SG100 Power, connect the wire “11” to
connector “2”, connect the yellow-green
wire to connector in yellow-green color.
143
PROTEUS XR/a

36 Tube fan power cable (from tube fan 2365706 PDU connector CN21 Tube terminal
to cabinet) for RAD21 tube Tube fan power strip
Note: Pay attention to ensure the
grounding of the Tube fan power
cable with the P-clamp on cabinet.
Use the same one P-clamp to
ground the Wall Stand power cable
(Item Number 24 in this table)
together with the Tube fan power
cable if the Wall Stand (GPCP No.
600-0301), not SG100 Wall Stand, is
selected.
P-clamp for Tube fan power

cable grounding.
37-1 Tube fan power cable for MX100 2403009 PDU connector CN21 Tube terminal
tube Tube fan power strip
37-2 Tube fan power cable for MX100 2403009-2 PDU connector CN21 Tube terminal
tube Tube fan power strip
38 System Console Signal Cable 2259298-60 2259977 I/F Board J119 Console
39 PDU power Cable BK(LU, LV, LW) 3 phase power
40 PDU grounding Cable PDU GND Power GND
144
PROTEUS XR/a
PDU HAS 380-480V POWER EVEN WHEN THE CONSOLE TURNED OFF BUT CIRCUIT
WARNING BREAKER ON.
Note: To install OTS SID cable, unplug the

old cable from connector 3 on the
top of OTS, then plug in the new
SID cable come from OTS J101.
Note: The following pictures show cable

connector location.
Refer to OTS service manual for
detailed OTS schematics.
*1: *2:
Note: If use manual collimator, FE needs

to connect Collimator power & CAN
Cable to Manual Port (CN2), at the
same time, plug the CAN signal
terminal to Auto Port (CN1). Collimator Cable
CAN signal Terminal
145
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: Use P-clamps to hold the shield

piece of AEC cable and fasten the
two P-clamps on the bottom of the
cabinet.
ANODE ROTATION STARTUP CABLE CONNECTION

Note: Grounding wire must be connected properly.
VARIAN X-RAY TUBE RAD-12, 14 KOUSHAL X-RAY TUBE MX100
Anode rotation cable and Tube anode terminals Connect point Anode rotation Tube
Thermal Protection cable (count from cable and Thermal terminals
the right side Protection cable
when facing
the OTS)
C 5 1 Black (M) Black
M 4 2 Green (A) Green
A 3 3 White (C) White
SW 1 4 TB1-4 (Black) Brown, Black
(group from
pilot light),
Black (group
outing from
the front hole)
SW 2 5 TB1-5 (White) Five, Black
(group from
pilot light),
Black
Rotation Cable outer Housing Clamp 6 - Six, Black
Shield (group outing
from the front
hole), Black
Thermal Protection Housing Clamp 7 THR2 Red
Cable Shield
E Housing Ground 8 THR1 Black
146
PROTEUS XR/a
VARIAN X-RAY TUBE RAD-21

Anode rotation cable and Tube anode terminals
Thermal Protection cable
White ( C ) White
Black ( M ) Black
Green ( A ) Red
SW Brown
SW Brown-Orange
Rotation Cable outer Housing Clamp
Shield
Thermal Protection Housing Clamp
Cable Shield
E Housing Ground
DC BUS (+) IS ACTING AS INNER

WARNING SHIELD, WHICH IS PROTECTED BY
HEAT SHRINK TUBE. DON'T
SHORTEN THE LENGTH OF
ROTATION CABLE. MAKE SURE ALL
THE CONNECTIONS AT TUBE HEAD
ARE FASTENED ENOUGH TO
SEPARATE THE INNER SHIELD AND
GROUNDING.
Note: For MX100 X-ray tube, pay attention to ground the tube grounding cable (Green-Yellow
group) and tube fan shield grounding cable (labeled with “F3”) to the tube casing. Refer to
the illustration on prior page.
Note: For Rad 14,21 X-ray tube, to avoid possible slipping, clamps must not be put over the plastic
labels wrapped around the end of the stator cable. Remove the plastic labels when
necessary. (See figures below)
Note: For Rad 14,21 X-ray tube, when replacing the old tube with new one, the stator cable strain
relief parts and Cable clamps used to fix the cables should be retained and re-installed to
the new X-ray tube. (See figures below)
Figure 1: RAD 14 X-ray Tube Figure 2: RAD 21 X-ray Tube 3x M4

Cable strap
Cable Clamp screws.
1xM4 screw,
2xM4 flat washers.
Thermal cable Apply Loctite
242(46-170686P1)
clamp
mounting
block
Stator cable
Attach P-clamp Copper
using M4 hex. nut strap
147
PROTEUS XR/a
ANODE ROTATION STARTUP CABLE CONNECTION

Note: Grounding wire must be connected properly.
Jedi Generator Side
Anode rotation cable and Thermal Protection cable Jedi Generator Connector
2 J3 (2)
1 J3 (1)
3 J3 (3)
15 J2 (15)
16 J2 (16)
Rotation Cable outer Shield E2
Thermal Protection Cable Shield E1
Rotation Cable inner Shield J3 (4) DC BUS plus (+)
Note: Please use the P-clamp (on the top of Jedi) to grounding the shield layer of the tube rotor
cable and thermal cable.
Make sure that cables should be placed at inner sides of the P-clamps, or else it will be
difficult to fasten the bolts.
Make sure the P-clamps are tight enough so that they can contact with cable shield well.
Heat protection Anode rotation

cable start up cable
16 15
5 4 3 2 1
Bus DC A C M
- +
Note: Make sure the brown wire from inner shield is connected to J3 (4) DC BUS (+)"
148
PROTEUS XR/a

BUCKY CABLE CONNECTION
Table
Bucky (J5)
PIN1
Wall Bucky (J6)

(also for SG100
PIN1 or SG120)
SAFETY DOOR AND LIGHT SWITCH
For the Safety Door, connect the connector J7’s pin1
Safety Door
and pin2; for door light, connect the connector J7’s
and Light
pin4 and pin6. Refer to page 10-32 for details.
Switch (J7)
Maximum Ratings for Door Light Power: 250V/2A PIN1
Service
We suggest to use the shield Terminal (J8)
NOTICE
cables as the Safety Door and
Light Switch cables, and their
shield layer should grounded Inside Comm-
to the system ground. unication (J9)
AEC CABLES CONNECTION

AEC1
• AEC1: Table Ion Chamber
• AEC2: Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) Ion Chamber AEC2
(or SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849) Ion Chamber

or SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2402562) Ion Chamber)
149
PROTEUS XR/a
CABLE HOSES CONNECTION

1. Use ty-rap to attach the cable and hose to the telescopic
column.
2. Put excess cables back into cable hose.
Cable hose
3. Hang the cable hose along stationary rail and make sure
OTS bridge can move freely.
4.Put the excess cables into floor duct or ceiling.
150
PROTEUS XR/a
PRINTER CABLES CONNECTION (UPGRADE)

1. Unplug the connector on the socket J120 on the I/F board, plug the connector of the cable 221-2872.
Cable 221-2872
2. Unplug the connector on the socket J15 of the PDU, plug the other connector of the cable 221-2872.
3. Connect the cable 221-2872 with the cable 221-2871. Cable 221-2872
Connect the cable 221-2871 with the printer.
Cable 221-2871 Cable 221-2872 Cable 221-2871
151
PROTEUS XR/a

SYSTEM I/F BOARD (GPCP NO. 2375230) ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
Connector # 1
Connector # 9
Connector # 2
Connector # 10
Connector # 3, 4
Connector # 5 Connector # 11
Connector # 6
Connector # 12
Connector # 7
Connector # 13
Connector # 8 Connector # 14
Connector # Cable Name GPCP No. Connector Mark Other end

System I/F Power 221-2886 J114 PDU CN16
1
Cable
Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2259298-58 J113 Wall Stand
2 600-0301) cassette
size sensing Cable
SG100 Wall Stand 2145644-2 J124 SG100 Wall
3 (GPCP No. 2225849) Stand
Auto Tray Cable
SG120 Wall Stand 2145644-2 J124 SG120 Wall
4 (GPCP No. 2402562) Stand
Auto Tray Cable
Table cassette size 2259298-58 J112 Table Cassette
5
sensing Cable Tray
Table height sensing 2259298-56 J110 Table
6
Cable
OTS SID & TOMO I/O 2258388/2258388-2 J111 OTS J101
7
Cable (2m/3m)
8 (optional) J123 (CAN port)
OTS CAN Cable 2258389/2258389-2 J116 XT CN3
9
(2m/3m)
System I/F Board 221-2893 J120 PDU CN15
10 J120-PDU CN15
Cable
System Console Signal 2259298-60 J119 System
11 -Power Cable (Supplier Console
No. :2259977)
System I/F Board – 221-2888 J118 Jedi CAN
12
Jedi CAN Cable
System I/F 221-2734 J115 Tomo I/F Board
13
Board-TOMO Cable P2
System I/F Board – 221-2887 J117 Jedi I/F J1
14
Jedi Signal Cable
152
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Align Table Bucky with Proteus XR/a Collimator / Eclipse Proteus Collimator
Date: 20/12/1999
From / From Time: 1h
/ To
To /
/
Table Bucky and Proteus XR/a Collimator/Eclipse Proteus Collimator Alignment
Note: The front panel of the wall stand is removable, so before this step, perform wall stand
panel alignment calibration first.
Note: The following procedures for Table Bucky/Collimator Alignment may require slight
repositioning of the table base. This movement may affect the position or arrangement of
the levelling plates, requiring an additional check prior to the final table mounting.
Note: Collimator calibration, OTS/collimator alignments and collimator light field to x-ray field
adjustments, as described in their respective manuals, must be performed prior to the
following procedure.
MAKE SURE ALL CABLE CONNECTIONS ARE CORRECT AND ALL GROUND WIRES
WARNING ARE FASTENED. DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT COULD OCCUR IF COMPONENTS ARE
NOT PROPERLY SET BEFORE INITIAL UP.
1. If the table top is installed, remove the table top (keep
table top frame on) by removing the two screws at each
end of the table top underside. Then take the table top
out of the frame.
2. With the collimator parallel to the table top, turn on the

collimator light, and using the light field adjusting knobs
on the collimator, reduce the light field to a narrow beam Proteus XR/a Collimator/Eclipse Collimator Light
of light along the length of the table.
3. Position the collimator to approximately 24"

SID. (Source-to-Image- Distance).
4. Move the entire table so that the longitudinal center of

field beam is properly aligned with the two center marks Light field Knob
on the bucky.
5. Move the OTS and bucky simultaneously to check for

continuous alignment of the narrow beam of light to the
center marks.
Note: Since the bucky has previously been “squared” to the bucky rails, any deviation from
alignment may be due to inaccurate alignment of either the OTS or collimator. If necessary,
repeat alignment procedures.
Note: Light field to x-ray field alignment should be performed before this step.
153
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Align Wall Bucky with Proteus XR/a Collimator (for Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301) and
SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849)), Eclipse Proteus Collimator (for SG120 Wall
Stand (GPCP No. 2402562))
Date: 20/12/99
From / From Time: 30 min
/ To
To /
/
Note: Proteus XR/a Collimator, Eclipse Proteus Collimator, SG100 Wall stand and SG120 Wall
Stand should follow the below contents.
Wall Bucky and Proteus XR/a Collimator/Eclipse Proteus Collimator Alignment
Note: The following procedures for Wall Bucky/Collimator Alignment may require slight
repositioning of the wall stand. This movement may affect the position or arrangement of
the levelling plates, requiring an additional check prior to the final wall stand mounting.
Collimator calibration, OTS/collimator alignments and collimator light field to x-ray field
adjustments, as described in their respective manuals, must be performed prior to the
following procedure.
Note: For SG100 and SG120 Wall Stand, ensure the Bucky to be in vertical position before
performing the following steps.
1. Rotate the collimator towards wall bucky by pressing

Ang. key on the OTS console.
2. With the collimator parallel to the wall bucky panel, turn

on the collimator light and, using the light field adjusting
knobs on the collimator, reduce the light field to a narrow
beam of light along the length of the table.
3. Position the collimator to approximately 40" SID.

(Source-to-Image-Distance).
Beam of
light
4. Move and shim the wall stand so that the vertical
centerline on the panel is properly aligned with the
narrow beam of light.
5. Move the OTS to approximately 72" SID to check for

continuous alignment of the narrow beam of light to the
panel centerline.
Note: Light field to x-ray field alignment should be performed before this step.
154
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Mount Anchor bolts

Date: 20/12/99
From / From Time: 20 min
/ To
To /
/
AVOID POSSIBLE SEVERE INJURY!
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE SEVERE INJURY, AT LEAST TWO PEOPLE ARE
WARNING
REQUIRED TO MOVE THE TABLE OR WALL STAND.
1. Remove four table upper covers, from table

base. If needed, remove lower covers too.
2. Drill four anchor holes for fasten table base.

Mount expanding bolts in the table-base anchor
holes. Use expanding bolts supplied in shipping Anchor
bag. holes
3. Leave the bolts loose for levelling and shimming later.

4. Level the table base and shim as necessary with provided shims. If possible place shims close to the
anchor bolts. Check longitudinal and transversal levelling with an extended level (such as a 3-foot or
1meter level) placed over table top.
Note: If shims added, be sure to add shims to foot pedal also.
Note: For SG100 Wall Stand, please skip to step 11 for the Anchor bolt mounting.
Note: For SG120 Wall Stand, please skip to step 17 for the Anchor bolt mounting.
5. Level the wall Bucky and shim as necessary with provided shims. After the table base levelling is
verified, fasten the anchor bolts, then re-check levelling again and make final adjustments.
6. Fasten the wall stand to wall by supplied bracket. Refer to page

4-4 in Proteus XR/a Pre-installation manual for wall mount
dimension.
7. Open the back cover of the wall stand.
155
PROTEUS XR/a
8. Insert the cassette tray

9. Balance the counter weight of the cabinet
10. Assemble the back cover.
Note: For SG 100 Wall Stand, the Anchor bolt mounting should follow the steps from 11 to 16,
instead of step 5 to 10.
Note: The procedures in following steps are concerted with the revision 6 of SG 100 Wall Stand
Service Manual. For the reason of the update and change in that manual, it is
recommended to see also the latest Service Manual of SG 100 Wall Stand for reference.
11. Using two people, carefully raise the SG 100 to an upright position.
12. Stand the SG100 against the wall and attach to the wall using the locally provided (6) wall anchors.
13. Align the SG100 laterally across the wall, to the X-Ray Tube Suspension beam or table centerline
using the centerline marks on the wall and floor or the Laser Alignment Tool.
Note: The SG100 must be level on the wall with no more than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) deflection to
ensure that the anchors holding the SG100 to the wall does not come loose over time.
Use the shims provided with the SG100 to ensure this requirement.
14. Verify the SG100 level across wall to ensure that no more than 1/16 in.(1.5mm) deflection exists,
laterally or vertically. See following Illustration for recommended placement of the levels.
15. Insert supplied shims, as required, between the SG100 and the wall.
16. Tighten the six SG100 anchor bolts according to the torque specifications for the anchors.
156
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: For SG120 Wall Stand, the Anchor bolt mounting should follow the steps from 17 to 23,
instead of step 5 to 10.
Note: The procedures in following steps are concerted with SG120 Wall Stand Service Manual
(P/N: S0012532). For the reason of the update and change in that manual, it is
recommended to see also the latest Service Manual of SG120 Wall Stand for reference.
17. Place SG120 at the distance focal dependant to the anti-diffusion grid.
18. Align SG120 laterally using the collimator light or the laser alignment tool.
19. Using the base template of SG120, mark the holes.
20. Move SG120 and drill the holes. Place the anchors.
21. Replace SG120 and place the anchor bolts.
22. Level the equipment using the 3 levelling screws and tight the bolts.
Levelling screws
23. Recheck the alignment of SG120.
157
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Tomo-Link Assembly

Date: 20/12/99
To / / To
Note: For Tomo-Link installed with the system, refer to Job card IST 025 “Tomo-Link
installation” in Chaper3.
Step 4 to 8 are for Tomo-link updating procedure.
158
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Installation Check

Date: 20/12/99
To / / To
1. If table top was already installed, remove it first.

2. Mount the table lower covers, and then mount
upper covers on.
Note: Lower side cover mount screws are OTS
attached to the table bottom plate. Cover
Note: When mounting right and left upper

side cover, loosen the mount screws,
then insert the side cover along the
mount slot.
Upper
Cover Lower
Cover
Note: Adjust the upper covers’ position to make

sure upper covers will not scratch with
lower covers when elevating the table.
Then tighten all screws.
3. Mount the table top and fasten the four screws
under the table top.
Console
4. Mount OTS carriage cover, with applying Loctite label
222 to screws, torque it to 2.5Nm.
5. Clean table, console, wall stand (GPCP No.: 600-0301) (or SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No.: 2225849), or
SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No.: 2402562)) and OTS suspension surfaces.
159
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Paste the console label provided with the equipment according to local regulation.
Note: After completing installation, remove vinyl protective films from table top and
pedals.
7. Abdomen Compression Band Installation
Adapting screw
Safety
screw
Lock Lock
⚫ Depress the lock, then release clamp.

⚫ Position the clamp, then depress the handle.
⚫ Fasten the compression band.
8. Patient Hand Grips
The patient hand grip installation is as same as compression band clamp.
Lock
160
PROTEUS XR/a
9. Adjusting
⚫ Depress the lock, then release clamp or grip.

⚫ Position the clamp or grip, then depress the
handle.
⚫ Release two safety screws.
⚫ Use M2.5 allen key adjust two adapting
screws until clamp is firmly attached to table
top
⚫ Fasten safety screws. Safety screw
Adapting
screw
10. Collimator Cone
Note: The following contents fit to both Proteus XR/a Collimator and Eclipse Proteus Collimator.
Note: The purpose of the collimator cone is to collimate the beam and image to a cylinder shape
when doing certain procedures. Mainly used for sinuses, head, hip etc.
Procedure of attach and removal:

I. Insert the edge of the collimator cone into the Accessory Rails beside the collimator window.
CAUTION Insert collimator cone into the upper accessory rail.
Note: Adjust the alignment of the collimator cone with the collimator to ensure the concentricity of
the collimator cone and collimator window.
When taking exposure using the collimator cone, pay attention to choose correct
CAUTION cassette size to avoid the X-ray field to beyond the film size.
Accessory Rail
161
PROTEUS XR/a
Collimator Cone
Proteus XR/a Collimator Eclipse Proteus Collimator
ii. For removal, push in the Accessory Locking Spring and remove the collimator cone.
Accessory
Locking Spring
For Proteus XR/a Collimator For Eclipse Proteus Collimator
Note: If choose SG120 Wall Stand, please refer to the following contents.
11. Patient Support
Installation
Tools required:
- Standard service person tool kit.
Procedure
1) Do not discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes, bags until all parts are compared
against the packing list.
2) Check the general condition and external appearance of all parts for possible damage or missing
items. Notify the distribution center immediately of any damage or missing parts.
162
PROTEUS XR/a
3) Remove the back covers of the bucky support assembly.
4) Install patient handgrips.

Assembly with the supplied screws in the kit the 2 hand grips (one on each side) in the holes marked
in the figure below.
5) Install lateral bar.

a. Assembly the sheet metal support to the bucky support assembly (6 screws).
Sheet Metal Support
163
PROTEUS XR/a
b. Assembly the slide track to the sheet metal support.
c. Take the lateral bar steel weldment assembly and the Teflon strip that is supplied with the
kit and apply it with adhesive along the contact surface between the steel weldment
assembly and the slide track.
d. Fit the steel weldment assembly to the slide track and make sure it can be displaced along
the whole track.
164
PROTEUS XR/a
e. Assembly the two magnets (one on each side) included in the kit to the bucky support. The
magnets will lock the inertial sliding movement when the bucky assembly is rotated, in the
case of SG120.
f. Put the lower back cover removed in step 3).

g. Assembly the upper back cover included in the kit.
h. Fit the lateral bar assembly in the steel weldment assembly on the left of the figure below.
i. To remove the lateral bar, press the key on the lateral bar assembly and extract it by pulling
up on the right of the figure above.
6) Add the needed counterweight included in the kit and proceed to counterbalance the bucky and bucky
carriage as described in step 5 in Jobcard IST 009.
165
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Spanish Language Labels

Purpose: System Installation Version no. 0
Date: 02/06/03
From / / From Time: 10minutes
To / / To
Note: For Systems installed at Spain, the Spanish language labels must be applied on
sites to cover the English description area on the English labels attached at the
factory.
1. Pick up the plastic package marked “2382506” from Accessories crate #4, box 4-6.
2. Attach the Spanish labels to cover the description area of the English labels on the subassemblies according
to the forms below.
Form1 Spanish Label Package (Part No. 2382506) Contents
Note: For backup, the quantity of the labels is more than the least number needed to be
applied.
Item Label Part Quantity Applied Subassembly
# Number
1 2382338 9 Table
Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301)
OTS
Cabinet
System Console
2 2382341 2 Proteus XR/a Auto Collimator
3 5116700 9 Eclipse Proteus Collimator
4 2382340 2 X-ray Tube (RAD-14/21)
5 2384005 2 X-ray Tube (MX 100)
6 2384006 2 SG100 Wall Stand （GPCP No. 2225849）
Form2 Spanish Label Designation

DESIGNATION System console Wall Stand SG 100 Wall Stand
(GPCP No. 600-0301）（GPCP No. 2225849）
SPANISH LANGUAGE 2382338 2382338 2384006
LABELS PART NO.
LOCATION OF NAME PLATE
LOCATION OF SPAIN
LANGUAGE LABELS
166
PROTEUS XR/a
DESIGNATION Cabinet OTS radiographic Proteus XR/a Auto

suspension (2/3m) Collimator
SPANISH 2382338 2382338 2382341
LANGUAGE LABELS
PART NO
LOCATION OF NAME
PLATE
LOCATION OF SPAIN
LANGUAGE LABELS
DESIGNATION X-ray Tube (RAD-14/21) X-ray Tube (MX 100) Table

SPANISH 2382340 2384005 2382338
LANGUAGE LABELS
PART NO
LOCATION OF NAME
PLATE
LOCATION OF SPAIN
LANGUAGE LABELS
167
PROTEUS XR/a
DESIGNATION
Eclipse Proteus Collimator
SPANISH 5116700
LANGUAGE LABELS
PART NO
LOCATION OF NAME
PLATE
LOCATION OF SPAIN
LANGUAGE LABELS
168
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: Korean Language Labels

Date: 30/11/07
To / / To
Note: For Systems installed at Korea, the Korean language rating plate must be applied
on sites.
1. Pick up the plastic package marked “5257355” from Accessories crate #4, box 4-6.
2. Attach the Korean rating plate to the location shown as below.
169
PROTEUS XR/a
Subassembly: FINAL CHECK

Date: 15/06/20
To / / To
SUPPLIER PROVIDE AN ADR PER GEHC 46-274914 OR IF “GEHC MAKE”, THEN RECORD DATA IN DHR
IDENTIFIER LOC ACCEPTANCE METHOD SAMPLING RATE
EC01 Chapter 2 IST 001 Procedure for 100%
Pre-Installation Check
EC02 Chapter 2 IST 004 Warning for Positioning 100%
The Table
EC03 Chapter 2 IST 007 Danger for Wall Stand 100%
Install
EC04 Chapter 2 IST 008 Danger for Wall Stand 100%
Install
EC05 Chapter 2 IST 009 Warning for tightness 100%
wallstand anchor
EC06 Chapter 2 IST 009 Warning for Wall Stand 100%
Install
EC07 Chapter 2 IST 012 Warning for Mount RAD 100%
14,21 X-Ray Tube
EC08 Chapter 2 IST 013 Warning for Mount MX100 100%
X-Ray Tube
EC09 Chapter 2 IST 020 Warning for Electrical 100%
Connections
EC10 Chapter 9 Section 1 Warning for continues 100%
protection against risk of
fire
170
PROTEUS XR/a
171
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM UPGRADE OR REPLACEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 TABLE OF JOBCARDS CONTENTS………………………………………… 173
SECTION 2 JOBCARDS CONTENTS………………………………………………………. 174

SW JEDI 41-3 AEC BOARD OPTION INSTALLATION……………………………………………….. 174
PROTEUS XR/A COLLIMATOR REPLACING THE COLLIMATOR D1 BOARD, D2 BOARD,
FUSE, TAPE MEASURE…………………………………………………………………………………… 177
ECLIPSE PROTEUS COLLIMATOR REPLACE THE WHOLE COLLIMATOR, COLLIMATOR

CONTROL BOARD, USER INTERFACE BOARD, BUCKY CENTERING LIGHT,
LCD DISPLAY, TAPE………………………………………………………………………………………. 183
Table Logical Board or Table Motor Replacement…………………………………………………... 190
IST023 Bucky Installation………………………………………………………………………………… 200
IST024 Ion Chamber Installation………………………………………………………………………... 201
IST025 Tomo-Link Installation…………………………………………………………………………… 202
IST026 Proteus XR/a Collimator Bulb, Fan Replacement………………………………………….. 210
IST027 APR Floppy Disk Recovery…………………………………………………………………….. 211
IST028 OTS Console Replacement……………………………………………………………………... 218
IST029 System Console Replacement…………………………………………………………………. 219
IST030 Proteus XR/a Collimator Eprom update……………………………………………………… 220
IST031 KV Control Board replacement………………………………………………………………... 225
IST032 MX100 X-ray tube-Collimator Interface Plate Alignment………………………………….. 226
IST035 Console Main Board Replacement……………………………………………………………. 228
172
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1 TABLE OF JOBCARDS CONTENTS
Jobcard Number Content Version

SW JEDI 41-3 AEC Board Option Installation 0
PROTEUS XR/A Replacing the collimator D1 board, D2 board, Fuse, 1
COLLIMATOR Tape Measure
ECLIPSE PROTEUS Replace the whole collimator, collimator control board, 1
COLLIMATOR user interface board, bucky centering light, LCD display,
tape
Table Logical Board or Table Motor Replacement 3
IST 023 Bucky Installation 0
IST 024 Ion Chamber Installation 0
IST 025 Tomo-Link Installation 1
IST 026 Proteus XR/a Collimator bulb, Fan replacement 0
IST 027 APR Floppy disk recovery 0
IST 028 OTS Console Replacement 0
IST 029 System Console Replacement 2
IST 030 Proteus XR/a Collimator Eprom update 0
IST 031 KV Control Board replacement 0
IST 032 MX100 X-ray tube-Collimator Interface Plate Alignment 0
IST 035 Console Main Board Replacement 1
173
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2 JOBCARDS CONTENTS
PROTEUS XR/a 1/3 SW JEDI 41-3
subassembly: AEC BOARD OPTION INSTALLATION

purpose: version no. 0
date: 20/12/99
from / / from Time: 0h 20 min
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
The following items are supplied:

• AEC board
• 1 flat cable
• 6 screws
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY
DANGER
LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING
INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED.
To protect the circuit boards, be sure to wear the antistatic bracelet.
4 PREREQUISITES
None.
174
PROTEUS XR/a
5 AEC BOARD INSTALLATION
The installation of the AEC Board can

NOTICE
be done without removing the
Interface Unit from the Cabinet.
Interface Unit
1. Unscrew twelve 5.5 mm screws that retain

1 the cover panel and remove the cover 1 .
2. Mount the AEC board to the plate with six

screws
3. Connect the flat cable to connector J5 on the

AEC board and to J3 on the I/F RAD Board.
4. Join connector J1 on AEC board to AEC 2 on

the left side of this module.
5. Join connector J2 on AEC board to AEC1 on

the left side of this module.
175
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Join connector P230 come from wiring harness J1 to

TP1 on AEC board
7. Join connector P230 come from wiring harness J2 to

TP2 on AEC board
8. Remember to connect cable from ionization chambers to AEC1 and AEC 2.
AEC board
J5
J1
J2
Rad I/F board
TP1
TP2
6 REASSEMBLY
Remount the Front cover. Reverse the disassembly procedure.
176
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/6 PROTEUS XR/A

COLLIMATOR
subassembly: Replacing the collimator D1 board, D2 board, Fuse, Tape Measure

date: 31/08/01
to / / to
1 THE D1 OR D2 DOARD ABNORMAL INDICATIONS

The Proteus automatic collimator AL01F is equipped with 2 electronic boards D1 and D2. In general,
- D1 board contains the CAN controller SW
- D2 board contains the lamp regulation system and is also dedicated to the user interface (digital display on the
collimator front panel)
Indications of a defect inside D1 board:

·LED V3 (red, mistake) constantly ON.
·LED V6 (green, CAN 5V supply) does not shine, although CAN power supply of 12 V is recognized in D1, plug
X3 exists.
· “Limit reached“ switch error for the height or width plates although no mechanical problems is visible - > light
barrier defect (LED V7 or LED V8) on D1.
·No communication with D2
- D2 error or
- Serial interface on D1 faulty.
Indications of a defect inside D2 board:

·LED V20 (green, µ controller) constantly ON or OFF - > error in µ controller
·LED V25 (green, 5 V for logic) OFF
·LED V26 (green, +12V for lamp regulation) OFF
·LED V27 (green, -12V for lamp regulation) OFF
·D1 reports no communication with D2
- Serial interface on D1 faulty or
- D2 error.
2 SPECIAL TOOLS
Hex wrench, 10 mm
Hex wrench, 11 mm
3 ORDERING INFORMATION
Refer to Chapter 9
177
PROTEUS XR/a

COLLIMATOR
4 PROCEDURE
Note: Before any action, please make sure that the collimator power is disconnected.
4-1 REPLACE THE D1
4-1-1. Remove the collimator cover:
The cover is fixed with 9 screws (2 mm allen wrench).

First open the srews on the left and on the right side of the collimator (2 on each side).
Next open the 5 screws on the back side of the collimator and remove the two parts of the cover.
4-1-2. Open the collimator front panel :
The front panel is fixed with 2 screws (2.5 mm allen wrench).

Open the 2 screws on the right side and open the front panel.
The board D1 of the collimator is now visible:
D1-Board:
4-1-3 Replace the defective D1-Board:
a) Pull the following plugs from the D1-Board

D1X8
D1X9
D1X5 (which is the connector to the D2-Board)
D1X3 (CAN-Bus)
D1X1.1 and D1X1.2 (Power Supply)
b) Open the 4 screws, which are used to fix the board

(2.5 mm allen wrench)
c) If necessary replace the EPROM (D1J10)
d) Fix the new D1-Board with 4 screws (2.5 mm allen wrench)
e) Replug the connectors similar to a)

178
PROTEUS XR/a

COLLIMATOR
4-1-4 Jumper settings and calibration:
Verify the setting of the DIP switch on the D1-Board. The DIP switch S2 on the D1-board must be set as follows:
S2.1 = ON
S2.2 = OFF
S2.3 = ON
S2.4 = OFF
S2.5 = OFF
S2.6 = ON
S2.7 = ON
S2.8 = ON
Start the collimator calibration mode to get the calibration data stored in the EEPROM.
Note: Without calibration data in the EEPROM of the board D1 the collimator startup may fail.
For collimator calibration carry out the following steps:
a) Verify the DIP switch S2 on D1 (see above). It’s important that switch S2.4 is set to OFF.
b) Close the lamellas in both levels (longitudinal and transversal) manually.
c) Connect the collimator to the power supply.
d) Set dip switch S2.4 to ON
e) The collimator will start a calibration run. The lamellas will fully open to the photoelectric barriers and then
close to the minimum opening.
The calibration data will be stored in the EEPROM.
f) Verify the setting of the DIP switch on the D1-Board again. The new settings are
S2.1 = ON
S2.2 = OFF
S2.3 = ON
S2.4 = ON
S2.5 = OFF
S2.6 = ON
S2.7 = ON
S2.8 = ON
g) Now the collimator is full working.
h) Disconnect the power supply before closing the collimator.
179
PROTEUS XR/a

COLLIMATOR
4-1-5 Close the collimator front panel:
Close the front panel and fix it with 2 screws (2.5 mm allen wrench).
4-1-6 Add the collimator cover
Add the two parts of the cover to the collimator and fix it with 9 screws
(2 mm allen wrench).
4-2 REPLACING THE D2
4-2-1. Removing the collimator cover:

First open the screws on the left and on the right side of the collimator (2 on each side).
Then open the 5 screws on the backside of the collimator and remove the two parts of the cover.
4-2-2. Removing the knobs on the front panel
Pull out the marker parts (2/Fig.1) towards the front and remove them.
Using an Allen wrench (3/Fig.1), loosen the 1.5 mm clamping screws on the knobs as shown and remove the
knobs (1/Fig.1).
Using an 11 mm hex wrench, remove the securing nuts on the potentiometer shafts and take off the snap rings.
Fig.1
180
PROTEUS XR/a

COLLIMATOR
4-2-3. Open the collimator front panel:
The board D2 on the front panel is now visible:
D2-Board: 1
Fig.2
Note: Observe ESD guidelines!
4-2-4. Replace the defective D2-Board:
a) Pull the following plugs from the D2-Board; when doing so, make sure that all connectors are labeled. If labels
are lost, label these connectors with appropriate tags.
D2X1 (connector to the D1-Board)

D2X2.1 and
D2X2.2 (lamp voltage from external power supply)
D2X4.1 and
D1X4.2 (lamp voltage to bulb)
D2X3 (fan)
D2X5 (laser)
D2X7 (display)
D2X8 (keyboard)
b) Remove the panel mounting (1/Fig.2) by removing the two 2.5 mm Allen screws (2/Fig.2), unhook the front
panel and put it down.
c) Remove the 5 cross-head screws, which are used to fix the board.
d) If necessary replace the EPROM (D2J9)
e) Remove the securing nuts and snap rings on the new D2 board.
Install the new D2 board. When doing so, make sure that the X11 pins (1/Fig.3) on the front panel are guided
exactly into the female connector on the D2. If the board is exactly installed, all the tips of the pins must be visible
from the component side of the D2X11.
181
PROTEUS XR/a

COLLIMATOR
Fig.3
f) Secure the D2 with the 5 mounting screws and replug the connectors similar to a). Install the snap rings and
securing nuts (11 mm hex).
g) Place the knobs on the potentiometer shafts and secure them using the 1.5 Allen wrench. When the knobs
are turned, they may not scratch against the front panel. Insert the marker parts.
h) Install the front panel and install the panel mounting (1/Fig.2)
4-3 REPLACE THE FUSE OR TAPE MEASURE

• Remove both side cover panels from the collimator.
• Replace the Fuse or Tape Measure
Fuse
1.6A 250V
Fuse
1.6A 250V
Tape
Measure
182
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/7 ECLIPSE PROTEUS

COLLIMATOR
subassembly: Replace the whole collimator, collimator control board, user interface board, collimator
lamp assembly, bucky centering light, LCD display, tape and Front Panel Assembly
date: 15/12/06
to / / to
BEFORE REPLACE THE FOLLOWING PARTS, MAKE SURE ECLIPSE PROTEUS

WARNING COLLIMATOR IS POWERED OFF, OTHERWISE IT MAY RESULT IN INJURY FROM
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR OTHER HAZARDS, OR DAMAGE TO THE COLLIMATOR.
1. Replace whole collimator

Note: If the Proteus XR/a collimator is replaced with Eclipse Proteus Collimator unit, remove the
lead cup on tube side before new collimator installation.
(1) Replace the Proteus XR/a Collimator AL10F

• Demount the defective collimator from the tube
• Demount the old flange from tube
• Mount the new flange below and the new collimator on tube. Refer to chapter 2, Eclipse Proteus
Collimator Installation0
(2) Replace the Eclipse Proteus Collimator
• Demount the defective collimator from the tube
• Mount the new collimator on tube flange. Refer to chapter 2, Eclipse Proteus Collimator Installation
183
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 2/7 eclipse proteus collimator
2. Replace collimator control board

(1) Removing the defective control board
• Open the collimator front cover by loosening the 2 screws, one is on the top of the collimator, the
other is at the bottom.
Control board
User interface board
Fig. 1 Collimator Electrical Boards
• Unplug all the plugs of the control board
Fig. 2 Collimator Control Board
• Loosen the 4 screws which are used to fix the control board
(2) Mounting the new control board

• Mount the new control board with the 4 screws
• Reconnect all the plugs
• Close the front cover and fix the 2 screws
184
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Replace collimator user interface board

(1) Removing the defective user interface board
• Open the collimator front cover by loosening the 2 screws, one is on the top of the collimator, the
other is at the bottom.
• Unplug all the plugs of the user interface board
• Unhook the front cover and put it down
Fig. 3 Collimator User Interface Board
• Remove the knob on front panel

➢ Loosen the screws from the knob hole
Fig. 4 Collimator Control Knob
➢ Take off the knobs

➢ Using an 11 mm hex wrench, remove the securing nuts on the encoder shafts and take off the
snap rings.
• Loosen the 4 screws which are used to fix the user interface board
(2) Mounting the new user interface board

• Remove the securing nuts and snap rings from the encoders shaft on the new user interface
board.
• Mount the new user interface board with the 4 screws
• Mount the securing nuts and snap rings on the new user interface board
185
PROTEUS XR/a

• Place the knobs on the encoder shafts and secure them using the 1.5 Allen wrench. When the
knobs are turned, they must not scratch against the front panel.
• Install the front cover on collimator
4. Replace collimator lamp assembly
ONLY THE LAMP OFFERED BY GEHL WITH THE HOLDER CAN BE USED AS
WARNING REPLACED PART. OTHERWISE IT MAY CAUSE ISSUE OF LIGHT ILLUMINANCE,
EDGE CONTRAST OR LIGHT/X-RAY FIELD ALIGNMENT.
(1) Removing the defective lamp assembly

• Move the collimator right cover (1/Fig.5) and the shielding for lamp mounting hole (2/Fig.5).
Fig. 5 Collimator Lamp Exchange Cover
• Unplug the connector of the lamp
IF THE LAMP OF THE LIGHT LOCALIZER REMAINS ILLUMINATED FOR A

WARNING LONGER PERIOD OF TIME, THE HOLDER MAY HEAT UP. PLEASE AVOID
TOUCHING THE LAMP HOUSING UNTIL IT COOLS DOWN.
• Loosen 2 mounting screws of the lamp assembly from the hole on read side of the collimator and
remove the defective lamp assembly from the right side of the collimator.
Lamp exchange Hole
186
PROTEUS XR/a

• Loosen 4 screws of lamp support, take out the failed lamp. See Figure 6.
Fig. 6 Lamp Exchage

(2) Mounting the new lamp assembly
• Mount the new lamp into lamp support
• Mount the new lamp assembly on collimator
• Reconnect the connector of the lamp
• Mount the right cover of the collimator and the shielding for lamp mounting hole
To avoid damage the lamp, do not touch the bulb or inside of the reflector with bare
CAUTION hands.
187
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1 6/7 eclipse proteus collimator
5. Replace collimator bucky centering light
Fig. 6 Collimator Bucky Centering Light Mounting
(1) Removing the defective bucky centering laser equipment

• Open the collimator front cover
• Unplug the connector (1/Fig. 6) of bucky centering laser equipment
• Loosening the mounting screws, Remove the laser equipment (2/Fig. 6) from the laser support
(2) Mounting the new bucky centering laser equipment
• Insert the laser equipment into the support, fix the screw
• Reconnect the connector to user interface board
(3) Align the laser beam with light field
• Power on the collimator
• Set SID=1m, FOV=200mmX200mm
• Verify if laser line is at the transverse center of the light field
• Adjust the 2 mounting screws until the laser beam deviation to the center of the light field < 2mm
• Close the front cover and fix it with the 2 screws
6. Replace collimator LCD display

(1) Removing the defective LCD display
• Open the collimator front cover.
• Remove the user interface board, referring to step (1) of Replace collimator user interface board
above. The LCD display is now visible.
• Loosen the 4 screws which are used to fix the LCD module.
Fig. 7 Collimator LCD Module
188
PROTEUS XR/a

(2) Mounting the new LCD display
• Mount the new LCD module with the 4 screws
• Mount the user interface board, referring to step (2) of Replace collimator user interface board
above.
7. Replace collimator tape

• Open the collimator front cover
• Remove the defective tape from the tape holder
• Put the new tape in the holder
• Close the front cover with the 2 screws
Fig. 8 Collimator Tape
8. Replace Front Panel Assembly (OTS FRU List item 70)

• Proteus Eclipse Collimator Front Panel Replacement Procedure Please refer to
DOC2016741_Rev1
189
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/10
subassembly: Table Logical Board or Table Motor Replacement

date: 10/10/06
to / / to
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING
To protect the circuit boards, be sure to wear the antistatic bracelet.

CAUTION Before removing the motor from under the table, or untie the motor chain, to avoid the
injury by the potential dropping table, put the blocks kit (5137108) over the rod.
To replace the motor or logical board, perform the following steps:

1. Raise the table to highest position.
2. Power off the system and apply LOTO to the main circuit breaker. Wait 3 minutes for discharge of the DC
Bus.
3. Remove the table covers.
4. Apply the mechanical LOTO blocks kit (5137108) to the table to avoid table movement.
Kit number: 5137108
5137108-1 5137108-2 5137108-3 5137108-4
Item Block Kit Length

5137108 210mm
1 5137108-1 15mm
2 5137108-2 30mm
3 5137108-3 60mm
4 5137108-4 105mm
190
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 2/10
Please get different length by using different blocks according to the table’s height by the below table.
Note: Table must not be driven up and down when the blocks are put over the rod.
Item Length (Max. to Min.) Related Parts
4+3+2+1 210mm 5137108
4+3+2 195mm 5137108-4/3/2

4+3+1 180mm 5137108-4/3/1
4+3 165mm 5137108-4/3
4+2+1 150mm 5137108-4/2/1
4+2 135mm 5137108-4/2
4+1 120mm 5137108-4/1
4 105mm 5137108-4
3+2+1 105mm 5137108-3/2/1
3+2 90mm 5137108-3/2
3+1 75mm 5137108-3/1
3 60mm 5137108-3
2+1 45mm 5137108-2/1
2 30mm 5137108-2
1 15mm 5137108-1
Please refer to following examples.
Example 1: All the blocks are over the rod.
4 3 2 1
191
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 3/10
Example 2: The blocks 5137108-3 and 5137108-4 are over the rod.
4 3
Example 3: The block 5137108-4 is over the rod.
192
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 4/10
3 2
1 2
193
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 5/10
5. Disassemble the old motor from the table.

1) Unplug the cable.
CAUTION The motor is very heavy. Please be careful when removing.
2) Demount the three screws on the motor chassis with wrench.
3) Take apart the chain from the gear.
4) Remove the old motor together with the motor chassis from the table.
194
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 6/10
5) Demount the screws which fixing the motor and motor chassis.
6. Assemble the new motor to the table.
Note: The new motor should be sent together with a gear. If it is, please go to step 2) to assemble
the motor chassis. Otherwise, please proceed to step 1).
1) Mount the gear onto the motor shaft with rubber or wood hammer. The gear should be hammered
very close to the motor. There may be a little adjustment while fixing the chain with the gear.
Note: The width of the two sides of the gear is not equal.
The narrow side of the gear should be placed outside.
Narrow Side Wide Side
Narrow Side Wide Side
195
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 7/10
2) Assemble the motor onto the motor chassis.
a) Place the rubber piece on the motor chassis.
b) Fix the motor onto the motor chassis with the rubber piece between the motor and
the motor chassis.
c) Mount the screws.
d) Use flat and spring washer when necessary.
196
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 8/10
3) Assemble the motor onto the table.
a) Place the rubber piece on the interface between the motor chassis and the table.
Place the Place the

rubber piece rubber piece
here. here.
b) Place the motor chassis onto the rubber piece.
c) Fix the chain with the gear.
197
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 9/10
d) Partly mount the screws which fixing the motor chassis and the table.
Note: Don’t mount the screws fully. And make the motor could be shaken slightly on the table.
e) Modify the angle and position of the motor to fasten the chain by shaking.
f) Mount the screws fully.

g) Plug the cable.
198
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 10/10
7. Remove the mechanical LOTO and re-apply power to the system.

8. Check the direction of table motion when presses down the foot pedal. If the table motion is opposite with the
foot pedal, exchange the two jumpers CS3-4 and CS4-4 on logical board.
199
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/1 IST 023
subassembly: Bucky Installation

purpose: Installation Procedure version no. 0
date: 20/12/99
to / / to
The following procedures describe how to install the Bucky/Grid option.
To install bucky, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the table top by unscrewing four screws under the
table top.
Bucky
Cable
Rail Seats
2. Remove the four bucky rail seats. Replace the old cassette
cabinet with new bucky.
3. Reassemble the rail seats.
4. Connect bucky cable and cassette sensing tray cable to

the connectors.
5. Route the bucky cable with Ion-chamber cable through the

hole in the middle of the table. Use ty-rap to fasten the
cables with adhesive disc and make sure the bucky move
freely without any cable scratching. Then tie the cables
along with table EM lock cable.
200
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Ion Chamber Installation

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
The following procedures describe how to install the Ion Chamber/Grid option.
Ion Chamber Insertion

To insert the Ion Chamber, proceed as follows:
1. Unpack the table top by unscrewing four screws under the
table top.
2. Insert the Ion chamber into bucky and locate the Ion
chamber on the mounting bracket.
Note: Make sure the Ion chamber detectors 1,3 are

towards table head end.
Mounting Bracket
3. Fasten the four lock screws
Lock Screws
201
PROTEUS XR/a
4. Mount the Ion chamber pre-amplifier or connector box with

provided screws.
pre-amplifier
or connector
box
5. Route the Ion-chamber cable with bucky cable through the Ion-
hole in the middle of the table. Use ty-rap to fasten the
chamber
cables with adhesive disc and make sure the bucky move cable
freely without any cable scratching.
202
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Tomo-Link Installation

date: 20/12/99
from / / from Time: 2 hours
to / / to
The following procedures in addition to the Tomo-link Service Manual (Direction: 2133821-100) describe how to
install the Tomo-Link option.
Note: The Tomo-Link assembly should be installed with the
Proteus table and XT suspension only. The system
software should be Rev1.84, or above.
1 Drive unit installation (Inboard bridge), refer to Tomo-Link
Service Manual (Direction: 2133821-100).
Note: The driver unit can only be installed on right side of
bridge.
Cut a slot
2 Cut a slot on the top of cable hose. Then insert two driver
cables (2124056 and 2132261) into hose.
Plug in these two cables and route in hose properly.
3 Tomo-link Yoke selection.

Note: There are two different Tomo-link Yokes optional for RAD 14,21 X-ray tube and MX100 X-ray tube
seperately both shipped to the sites. Pick up the matching Tomo-link Yoke according to the X-
ray tube type. (Refer to the form below)
Note: For RAD 14/21 X-ray tube, DO NOT dispose the Tomo-link Yoke 2109740-8 before finished STEP 4
in this Job Card.
X-ray tube Tomo-link Yoke matched Part Number
RAD 14/21 X-ray tube Extended Tomo-link Yoke 2352540
MX100 X-ray tube Tomo-link Yoke 2109740-8
4 For system with RAD 14 or RAD 21 X-ray tube, transfer the accessories (rubber spacer, top shim and all
screws) factory-mounted on the Tomo-link Yoke 2109740-8 to the Extended Tomo-link Yoke 2352540.
Note: For systems with MX100 tube, skip this step.
Note: The Proteus XR/a systems with Tomo are shipped with both the Tomo- link Yoke 2109740-8 and
the extended Tomo-link Yoke 2352540. But only the Tomo- link Yoke 2109740-8 is shipped with
the accessories (rubber spacer, top shim and all screws) mounted.
For systems equipped with RAD 14/ RAD 21 tube, apply the extended Tomo-link Yoke 2352540.
Remove the accessories from the Tomo-link Yoke 2109740-8 and mount the accessories to the
extended Tomo-link Yoke 2352540 before installing the Tomo-link Yoke. (See steps following)
203
PROTEUS XR/a
a) Demount the screws and remove the rubber spacer from the Tomo-link Yoke 2109740-8.
Transfer the accessories

(rubber spacer, top shim
and all screws) to the
Extended Tomo-link Yoke
2352540
Rubber spacer screws
top shims
b) Fit the rubber spacer to the Extended Tomo-link Yoke and mount the screws without fully fasten .
NOTE: Pay attention to leave loose the screws for Fulcrum arm alignment.
204
PROTEUS XR/a

c) Fix the top shim.
d) After aligned with the Fulcrum Arm (installed in step 14 of this Job Card), fasten fully the screws holding the
rubber spacer.
5 Tomo-link Yoke installation, refer to Tomo-Link Service

Manual (Direction: 2133821-100). (Selected in step 3: for
RAD 14, 21 X-ray tube, use Extended Tomo-link Yoke
GPCP No.2352540, for MX 100 X-ray tube, use Tomo-link
Yoke GPCP No.2109740-8)
Note: Remove end rubber before install Yoke.
6 Take off the table back covers and the lower right side
cover.
Note: For Tomo-link upgrade only.
Cut out two mounting slots on upper back cover.
Mount slots
205
PROTEUS XR/a
7 Mount Tomo control box into table base using four M4x8
screws, washers and lock washers.
8 Mount Tomo I/F board into cabinet using two socket-head

M4x10 screws, washers and lock washers.
Note: Find the Tomo I/F board in box # 6-8, crate #6.
9 Connect Tomo cables inside table base according to

“TOMO-LINK SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION
ILLUSTRATION” in page 10-21 and 10-22.
Route and ty-rap cable properly.

Tomo Cables
206
PROTEUS XR/a
10 Install bucky connector.

11 Install table rear cover.
12 Mount Fulcrum Tower bracket onto table using four socket-

head M8x25 screws, washers and lock washers.
13 Fulcrum Tower installation, refer to Tomo-Link Service
Manual (Direction: 2133821-100).
14 Fulcrum Arm installation, refer to Tomo-Link Service Manual

(Direction: 2133821-100).
15 Control box installation.

Mount control box on the foot end of table using socket-
head M6x16 screws and lock washers.
Note: There are two stop screws under control box.
Remove one of them to mount control box.
207
PROTEUS XR/a
16 Connect Tomo cables according to “TOMO-LINK SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION ILLUSTRATION” on

pages 10-21 and 22. Remove the head end table top bumper. Pull out
Route and ty-rap cable properly. the tabletop until you can see the cable entrance.
Route the cable (REA00057) according to the
Route the cable (REA00056) according to the following illustration. Use P-clamp and ty-wrap to
following illustration: fasten it.
Make sure the cable will not be broken when
you raise or lower the table.
REA00057 P-clamp Cable Entrance

REA00056
17 Tomo-link calibration, refer to Tomo-Link Service Manual

(Direction: 2133821-100).
Note: Generator Selection must be set to Advantx
Style Generator in Section 16.
208
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: If the X-ray beam and collimator light field are not aligned to the image receptor, you can
refer to Step 16 to adjust when necessary.
18 Tomo-link position adjustment by insertion of Adjustment

Plates.
1) Loosen the two screws on the same side of the Yoke
on which the plates should be fixed in.
2) Insert suitable sum of plates (1 to 4) into the space

between the Yoke and the rubber spacer.
Note: Please choose the proper pieces of plates to

adjust the alignment between the X-ray beam
and image receptor.
3) Fasten the screws.

19 Put the driver unit cover on.
20 Dispose the spare Tomo-link Yoke.
209
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Proteus XR/a Collimator Bulb, Fan Replacement

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Auto collimator
1. Power off the system.
2. Open the side window of collimator.
3. Replace the collimator bulb.
Note: Don’t touch bulb surface with fingers.
Use plastic cover on bulb to install it.
4. Open the left side cover of collimator, then replace the bulb
fan.
Note: This step is just used for Auto-collimator.
Manual collimator
2. Open the rear cover of collimator.
3. Replace the collimator bulb.
Note: Don’t touch bulb surface with fingers.
Use plastic cover on bulb to install it.
210
PROTEUS XR/a
Proteus XR/a Automatic Collimator Bulb Replacement Note

1. The Proteus XR/a Automatic Collimator uses a special Collimator light bulb. When the
collimator lamp burns out it MUST be replaced with the replacement bulb listed in the
Proteus XR/a renewal parts section. Part number 2271727 MUST be used as a
replacement bulb. DO NOT use any other lamp as a replacement bulb as X-ray field to
Light field alignment may not meet HHS requirements.
2. The Proteus XR/a Collimator bulb is selected to have the filament in the same place in
all bulbs, and the position of this filament impacts X-ray field to Light field alignment.
This selection process allows the bulb to be replaced by the end user with no alignment
required for X-ray to Light field.
3. X-ray field to Light field is adjusted in the factory and will not be affected by bulb
replacement if the specified bulb is used as are placement. There is no field adjustment
for X-ray field to Light field alignment if another bulb is used.
4. The Proteus XR/a Collimator lamp is designed to operate at 24vac for
150hrscontinuous, other replacement bulbs will burn out very quickly as they are only
designed for 50hours continuous use at 24vac.
5. The Laser light has been aligned in the Factory. If you find the laser light needs
alignment DO NOT attempt to align the Laser with a screwdriver in the light slot with
power applied as this can cause damage to the laser electronics. The Laser is not a
field replaceable part and a new collimator should be ordered if there are problems with
the alignment or functionality.
211
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: APR Floppy Disk Recovery

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Note: There are three types of APR recovery methods, please select the appropriate methods
according to the configuration of console on site.
APR Floppy Disk Recovery from console with floppy disk (2259976) to console with
floppy disk (2259976)
Introduction
This procedure is used when APR disk being lost or broken.
Procedure
1. Prepare a new formatted (Windows 95 or DOS6.22) data floppy disk.
Note: Don’t copy system files
2. Power on the system.
3. Press Procedure Edit button.
4. Insert the system console SW disk into the floppy Disk Drive.
5. Press OK to enter Procedure edit mode. See page 5-9 in Proteus XR/a Operator
Manual (Direction 2259724-100).
6. Press Save/Retrieve button to enter Save/Retrieve menu.
7. Take out the system console disk, then insert the new formatted disk.
8. Press Save Backup button.
9. Wait until “Retrieving APR data complete” is displayed.
10. Press EXIT button to exit this menu. APR disk recovery is done.
212
PROTEUS XR/a
APR Recovery from console with floppy disk (2259976) to console with USB disk (5462233)
Note: For console replacement, the APR files needed to be transferred to new console. Please refer
to instruction below to do so.
Introduction
This procedure is used when APR is being transferred from console with floppy disk to console with USB
disk.
Tools required
A floppy disk drive which could be connected to laptop via USB or other means.
A laptop from Field Service Personnel
Procedure
1) Prepare a new APR formatted (Windows 95 or DOS6.22) data floppy disk.
Note: Don’t copy system files

2) Power on the system.
3) Press Procedure Edit button.
4) Insert the new APR floppy disk into the floppy Disk Driver.
5) Press OK to enter Procedure edit mode. See page 5-9 in Proteus XR/a
Operator Manual (Direction 2259724-100).
213
PROTEUS XR/a

6) Press Save/Retrieve button to enter Save/Retrieve menu.
7) Backup the protocol by pressing “Save Backup”.
214
PROTEUS XR/a
8) Take out the APR floppy disk from old console and insert it to Floppy-USB Converter when APR Backup is
finished.
9) Floppy-USB Converter connecting to supplied laptop.

10) Insert the “APR & AEC” USB disk which use for the new console to the laptop USB port as well.
11) Open the Floppy drive icon from laptop “My Computer” screen, Copy all the files.
215
PROTEUS XR/a
12) Open the USB disk drive icon from laptop “My Computer” screen; Paste the files to the appropriate language
folder under the USB disk.
Note: The directory should depend on your language like French, English, German, Spanish,
Portugue(Portuguese) Italian, Japanese, Chinese or Russian.
13) Take out the USB disk and insert it to USB port of new console.
CAUTION Please DO NOT insert and take out the USB disk during the system is turned on
15) Press “Procedure edit” button
16) Press OK to enter Procedure edit mode. See page 5-9 in Proteus XR/a Operator Manual (Direction
2259724-100).
18) Retrieve the protocol from the “APR&AEC” USB disk to the new console by press “Retrieve Backup”.
19) Wait until “Retrieving APR data complete” is displayed.
20) Press EXIT button to exit this menu. APR disk recovery is done.
216
PROTEUS XR/a
APR Recovery from console with USB disk (5462233) to console with USB disk (5462233)
Note: For console replacement, the APR files needed to be transferred to new console. Please refer to
instruction below to do so.
Introduction
This procedure is used when APR is being transferred from console with USB disk to console with USB disk.
Procedure:
1) Power off the system

2) Insert the “APR&AEC” USB disk to old console.
4) Press “Procedure edit” button.
5) Press OK to enter Procedure edit mode. See page 5-9 in Proteus XR/a Operator Manual (Direction 2259724-
100).
7) Back up your old protocol info to the “APR&AEC” USB disk by press “Save/ Backup”.
8) Take out the USB disk and insert it to USB port of new console.
CAUTION Please DO NOT insert and take out the USB disk during the system is turned on.

10) Press “Procedure edit” to enter “Save/Retrieve” menu.
11) Retrieve the protocol from the “APR&AEC” USB disk to the new console by press “Retrieve Backup”.
12) Wait until “Retrieving APR data complete” is displayed.
13) Press EXIT button to exit this menu. APR disk recovery is done.
217
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: OTS Console Replacement

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Procedure
1. Remove both side covers and top cover on X-ray tube.
2. Disconnect two OTS Console cables (2259867 and 2258381 for RAD 14, 21 tube,
2391017 and 2391020 for MX100 tube, respectively).
3. Replace the OTS Console.
4. Connect two OTS Console cables.
6. Check the display on OTS Console match the System Console.
Note: Ensure the coherent reading is same between the System Console and the
OTS Console (Check should be performed with incrementing/decrementing
technique factors from the OTS Console).
8. Put on Tube covers.
218
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: System Console Replacement

date: 10/10/2006
to / / to
Procedure
1. Remove and disconnect the covers and cables. This procedure is a reversed procedure of the installation.
2. Replace the System Console.
3. Repeat the installation procedure. Reference to the Job Card IST 010 and IST 011.
5. Check the display on OTS Console match the System Console.
Note: Ensure the coherent reading is same between the System Console and
the OTS Console.
The Rev 2.17(2.17VA in VA site) or above version of the System Console Software
CAUTION can be used together with either the System I/F board 2375230 (Item #1 of Cabinet 1)
or the System I/F Board 2259298-45 and CAN I/F Board 2259298-46.
WARNING LABELS SHOULD BE INCLUDED IN “OPEN ME FIRST” BOX. IF THEY
WARNING ARE MISSING, PLEASE ORDER A NEW CONSOLE (2259976 WITH FLOPPY DISK OR
5462233 WITH USB) IN CONFORMITY WITH REGULATION REQUIREMENTS.
219
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Proteus XR/a Collimator Eprom update

purpose: Proteus XR/a collimator Eprom update version no. 0
date: 03/07/2001
to / / to
Before any action, please make sure that the collimator power is disconnected.
1. Remove the collimator cover:

First open the srews on the left and on the right side of the collimator (2 on each side).
Next open the 5 screws on the back side of the collimator and remove the two parts of the cover.
2. Open the collimator front panel:

The two boards (D1, D2) of the collimator are now visible:
D1-Board:
220
PROTEUS XR/a
2-Board (in the front panel)
3. Update the software of the D1-Board:
Pull the Eprom from socket J10 and plug the new one which is labeled J10-D1.
Note: The Eprom fits only in one position (look for the slant sides of the Eprom and the socket).
221
PROTEUS XR/a
4. Verify the setting of the DIP switch S2 on the D1-Board:
The DIP switch S2 on the D1-board must be set as follows:
S2.1 = ON
S2.2 = OFF
S2.3 = ON
S2.4 = ON
S2.5 = ON for AL01C
S2.5 = OFF for AL01F
S2.6 = ON
S2.7 = ON
S2.8 = ON
222
PROTEUS XR/a

5. Update the software of the D2-Board:
Pull the Eprom from socket J9 und plug the new one which is labeled J9-D2.
Note: The Eprom fits only in one position
(Look for the slant sides of the Eprom and the socket).
6. Verify the setting of the DIP switch S1 on the D2-Board:
The DIP switch S1 on the D2-board must be set as follows:

S1.1 = ON
S1.2 = OFF
S1.3 = ON
S1.4 = ON
223
PROTEUS XR/a
7. Close the collimator front panel:
Close the front panel and fix it with 2 screws (2.5 mm allen wrench).
8. Add the collimator cover
Add the two parts of the cover to the collimator and fix it with 9 screws
(2 mm allen wrench).
224
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Jedi Generator

purpose: KV Control Board replacement version no. 0
date: 23/01/03
to / / to
1. Load software file on Service Laptop (Refer to Job Card SW JEDI 7-4, Chapter 4).
2. If possible, download and save your local database (Refer to Job Card CAL JEDI 8-6, Chapter 4).
If you have a backup database on the site you can use it.
3. Replace the defective kV control board with the new one (Refer to Job Card D/R JEDI 17-48, Chapter 9).
Note: Pay attention to Write the existing number on the failed kV control board to the blank label, and
stick it on the new kV control board.
4. Restore Database (Refer to Job Card CAL JEDI 8-6, Chapter 4)

- Up-to-date database if available
- Most recent or originally saved Data Base if available
- Default one from the floppy delivered with the equipment in the Service Tool set.
Note: Pay attention to verify the software version and ensure its compliance with the KV control board
and X-ray tube type (refer to Job Card IST JEDI 5-2, Chapter 4).
Alternately, you may try to swap the NVRAM chip (U32) from the former to the new KV Control board to keep all
the parameters (Refer to Job Card PM JEDI 15-2, Chapter 8). If this chip is not involved in the failure or the cause
for replacement, it will allow to keep up-to-date data.
5. Calibrate:
- Perform several exposures on both focuses in several workstations, with exposure time longer than 12.5
ms
If default database was restored, it is necessary to resume room set up (refer to Job Card CAL JEDI 8-4, Chapter
4) and AEC calibration (if present) (refer to Job Card CAL JEDI 8-2, Chapter 4). Then perform the checksum
(refer to Job Card CAL JEDI 8-5,Chapter 4).
6. Save Database on the service floppy delivered with the equipment (refer to Job Card CAL JEDI 8-6, Chapter
4).
225
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: OTS
purpose: MX100 X-ray tube-Collimator Interface Plate Alignment version no. 0
date: 7/03/03
to / / to
1. Proceed Alignment between tube and tube/collimator
interface plate.
1) Obtain the following focal spot alignment tools:
- A Collimator Alignment Tool 46-166390G1
- Hex Wrench, 46-165137P1
- An alignment tool adapter 2296120.
2) Place the Alignment tool adapter (2296120) on the tube/collimator interface plate.
3) Place the Collimator Alignment Fixture (46-166390G1) into the tool adapter ring.
4) Rotate the Collimator Alignment Fixture (46-166390G1) until the grid axis (y or x) is parallel to
the axis of the tube’s cathode/anode.
226
PROTEUS XR/a
5) Take an exposure with both Xs and Xl focal spot.
6) Adjusts the position of the x-ray tube relative to the tube/collimator interface plate.
7) To make tube position adjustments, loosen the four socket head cap screws (See illustration on Page 2-
63 or Page 2-68.) 1/4 turn counterclockwise. The screws retain the x-ray tube to tube/collimator interface
plate.
8) Move the x-ray tube until the cross hairs in the alignment tool window are midway between the
two focal spots displayed.
9) Make certain the concentricity of tube/collimator interface plate, OTS console bracket and tube window.
10) After adjustment, torque each of the four mounting screws to the same force.
11) Remove the Alignment Fixtures.
Note: Apply locktite to tube/collimator interface plate mount screws.
Note: Apply grease supplied underneath the edge of tube/collimator interface plate and the
inside surface of the adapter on collimator for easy movement.
227
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Console Main Board Replacement

date: 27/5/2020
to / / to
Introduction
The procedure is to show how to uninstall the Proteus main board and install the Proteus main board in field.
Procedure
• Operation guideline of remove defect mainboard:
1. Make proper protections for the panel surface to avoid scratching during disassembly.
See picture 1.
Picture 1
2. Remove two side cover on both sides. See picture 2.
Side cover
Picture 2
3. Tear off warranty label on both sides. See picture 3.
Warranty label
Picture 3
4. Unscrew the six pcs M3*12 cross recessed pan head screws, remove back cover .See picture 4.
228
PROTEUS XR/a
M3*12
Back cover
Picture 4
229
PROTEUS XR/a
5. Remove red glue on all white sockets of power board. See picture 5
Picture 5
white sockets
Red glue
6. Pull out all cable on power board. See picture 6
Picture 6
230
PROTEUS XR/a
7. Take off two pcs M3*6 cross groove sunk head screws. See picture 7.
Picture 7
Power board
M3*6
8. Remove power board. See picture 8
Picture 8
9. Take off two pcs M3*6 cross groove small disc head screws, remove touch panel controller (RS232) from
touch card bracket. See picture 9
touch panel controller (RS232)
Picture 9
M3*6
231
PROTEUS XR/a
10. Take off two pcs M3*8 cross groove small disc head screws，remove touch card bracket from base plate.
See picture 10
M3*8
touch card bracket
Picture 10
11. Take off four pcs M3*6 cross groove small disc head screws, remove communication board from hexagonal
copper stud .See picture 11
Communication board
M3*6
Picture 11
232
PROTEUS XR/a
12. Take off four pcs M3*6 cross groove small disc head combination screws, remove mainboard from base plate,
then pull out all cables on mainboard. See picture 12
M3*6
Picture 12
main board
13. Remove the red glue on the M3 hexagonal nuts and remove the hexagonal copper stud. See picture 13
M3 hexagonal nuts
Picture 13
233
PROTEUS XR/a
14. Press the switch, then remove the CF card from the card socket. See picture 14
CF card
Picture 14
15. Open the clip as shown and remove the memory from the socket. See picture 15
memory
Picture 15
234
PROTEUS XR/a
• Operation guideline of install new mainboard

1. Take a new mainboard, and fix 4 pcs M3 hexagonal copper stud on mainboard with 4 pcs M3 nuts. See
picture 1
M3 hexagonal copper stud
Picture 1
2. Fix the communication board on mainboard with 4 pcs M3*6 cross groove small disc head screws combined.
See picture 2
communication board
M3*6
Picture 2
3. Turn over the mainboard, check the M3 nut is firmly fixed, and then put red glue around the nut. See picture
3
M3
hexagonal nu
ts
Picture 3
235
PROTEUS XR/a
4. Insert the memory card in the socket; insert the CF card into the CF card slot on mainboard See picture 4
memory
CF card
Picture 4
5. Fix mainboard on the base plate with four pcs M3*6 cross groove small disc head combined screws.
See picture 5
M3*6
Picture 5
6. Fix touch card bracket on base plate with 2 pcs M3*8 cross groove small disc head screws. See picture 6
M3*8
touch card bracket
Picture 6
236
PROTEUS XR/a
1. Fix the touch panel controller (RS232) to the touch card bracket with 2 pcs M3*6 cross groove small disc
head combined screws. See picture 7
touch screen controller (RS232)
Picture 7 M3*6
8. Insert the GPIO grey line, plug CN35 and CN36 on the key board into mainboard CN35 and CN36 respectively;
insert panel cable into mainboard CN9 socket. See picture 8
Panel cable
Picture 8
GPIO grey line
237
PROTEUS XR/a
9. Insert the RS232 serial connection into the mainboard CN41 socket; insert the white plug of DB15 female
connection socket into the main board CN25 socket; insert the gray line of the 15-pin male socket into the H1
socket of the CAN board; plug the power cord into the main board CN5 socket; Insert the USB cable into the main
board CN20 socket again. See picture 9
DB15 female USB cable
RS232 serial
Picture 9
power cord
15-pin male socket
238
PROTEUS XR/a
10. Plug the connection 3-plug into the power board touch panel connection (OUT) socket; one end of the touch
screen cable is inserted into the CN39 socket of the mainboard, and the other plug is inserted into the touch
screen connection (IN) socket of the power board; one end of the adapter inserted into the CN6 socket of the
main board, and the other plug is inserted into the backlight connection (IN) socket of the power board; insert the
backlight connector plug into the backlight connection (OUT) socket of the power board; plug the buzzer
connector into the power board buzzer connector socket; Insert the adapter plug into the connector board socket.
See picture 10
Picture10 touch panel cable
backlight cable
connector
connection 3-plug
buzzer connector
adapter
adapter plug
239
PROTEUS XR/a
11. Plug the fan connector into the CN8 socket on the power board, plug the power cord into the CN3 socket of
the power board. The DB15 male connector plug is inserted into the CN4 socket of the power board.
See picture 11
Note: the fan connection line passes through the bottom of the power board.
power cord
DB15 male
connector
Picture11
fan connector
240
PROTEUS XR/a
12. Fix the power board with 2 pcs M3*6 cross groove sunk head screws. See picture 12
Picture12
M3*6
241
PROTEUS XR/a
13. Assemble the back cover on the front frame, make sure all ports of the machine correct, and fix the back
cover with 6pcs M3*12 cross recessed pan head screws. See picture 13
M3*12
Picture13
14. Paste warranty label on both sides. See picture 14
Warranty label
Picture14
15. Install the side covers (front frame and the back shell)
Note: the hole on the left and right side cover is towards the outer connection off the hand brake.
Side cover
Picture15
16. Power on the console and check the functions.
242
PROTEUS XR/a
243
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 4 CALIBRATION AND CONFIGURATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 TABLE OF JOBCARDS CONTENTS………………………………………………………………245
SECTION 2 JOBCARDS CONTENTS…………………………………………………………………………….246
CAL001 Introduction………………………………………………………………………………………. 246

CAL002 Set system Configuration……………………………………………………………………… 247
CAL003 Table Inhibition Button Setting and Anti-collision Buzzer Function………………….. 251
CAL004 Adjust Anti-collision Switches……………………………………………………………….. 253
CAL005 Calibrate Table Height Limitation…………………………………………………………….. 255
CAL006 Calibrate SID Calibration………………………………………………………………………. 256
CAL007 Calibrate Cassette Size Display……………………………………………………………… 268
CAL008 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301), SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849), and
SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2402562)…………………………………………………….. 270

CAL009 Touch Screen Calibration……………………………………………………………………… 273
CAL010 HHS Test Calibration…………………………………………………………………………… 282
SW JEDI 7-4 SERVICE SOFTWARE USER GUIDE…………………………………………………… 283
SW JEDI 7-2 Software Download / Upgrade…………………………………………………………... 291
SW JEDI 7-3 TUBE REPLACEMENT SOFTWARE PROCEDURE………………………………….. 295
SW JEDI 5-2 TUBE CONFIGURATION………………………………………………………………….. 300
CAL JEDI 8-4 WORK STATION PARAMETER……………………………………………………….. 303
CAL011 X-ray Tube Warm Up…………………………………………………………………………… 310
CAL JEDI 8-2 Automated AEC Calibration……………………………………………………………. 311
CAL JEDI 8-5 Checksum Validation……………………………………………………………………. 334
CAL JEDI 8-6 Backup & Restore Database Setup Parameters……………………………………. 337
CAL012 DOSE Calibration………………………………………………………………………………...340
CAL013 Light field – X ray field alignment (For Proteus XR/a Collimator Only)……………….. 341
CAL014 Calibrate Proteus XR/a Collimator Bulb…………………………………………………….. 344
CAL015 Calibrate Proteus XR/a Manual Collimator Bulb and its Voltage……………………….. 345
CAL016 Calibrate SG120 Wall Stand Vertical Locks………………………………………………… 346
SW 001 CONSOLE BUZZER UPGRADE KIT INSTALLATION………………………………………. 347
244
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1 TABLE OF JOBCARDS CONTENTS
JOBCARD CONTENT VERSION

NUMBER
CAL 001 INTRODUCTION 0
CAL 002 SET SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2
CAL 003 TABLE INHIBITION BUTTON SETTING AND ANTI- 0
COLLISION BUZZER FUNCTION
CAL 004 ADJUST ANTI-COLLISION SWITCHES 0
CAL 005 CALIBRATE TABLE HEIGHT LIMITATION 0
CAL 006 CALIBRATE SID CALIBRATION 1
CAL 007 CALIBRATE CASSETTE SIZE DISPLAY 1
CAL 008 WALL STAND (GPCP No. 600-0301), SG100 WALL STAND 1
(GPCP No. 2225849), and SG120 WALL STAND (GPCP No.
2402562) COUNTERWEIGHT CALIBRATION
CAL 009 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION 0
CAL 010 HHS TEST CALIBRATION 1
SW JEDI 7-4 SERVICE SOFTWARE USER GUIDE 1
SW JEDI 7-2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD / UPGRADE 1
SW JEDI 7-3 TUBE REPLACEMENT SOFTWARE PROCEDURE 0
IST JEDI 5-2 TUBE CONFIGURATION 1
CAL JEDI 8-4 WORK STATION PARAMETER 0
CAL 011 X-RAY TUBE WARM UP 0
CAL JEDI 8-2 AUTOMATED AEC CALIBRATION 0
CAL JEDI 8-5 CHECKSUM VALIDATION 0
CAL JEDI 8-6 BACKUP & RESTORE DATABASE SETUP PARAMETERS 0
CAL 012 DOSE CALIBRATION 0
CAL 013 LIGHT FIELD – X-RAY FIELD ALIGNMENT 1
(FOR PROTEUS XR/A COLLIMATOR ONLY)
CAL 014 CALIBRATE PROTEUS XR/A COLLIMATOR BULB 0
CAL 015 CALIBRATE PROTEUS XR/A MANUAL COLLIMATOR BULB 0
AND ITS VOLTAGE
CAL 016 CALIBRATE SG120 WALL STAND VERTICAL LOCKS 0
SW 001 CONSOLE BUZZER UPGRADE KIT INSTALLATION 1
245
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2 JOBCARDS CONTENTS
PROTEUS XR/a 1/1 CAL 001
subassembly: Introduction
purpose: Calibration and Configuration version no. 0
date: 20/12/99
from / / from Time: 10 min
to / / to
Sequence
Calibration must be completed before functional checks to components can be performed.
Procedures
System Power On
Apply power to the Proteus XR/a system.
Document Modifications
Do not attempt to run Jedi Service Mode without first marking your Cal Users Guide manual to reflect
changes covered in the Proteus XR/a Release Notes. Failure to do so may cause some Service Mode
Units to operate incorrectly.
Note: Refer to Jedi Generator part of the Service manual.
Factory-Calibrated Proteus XR/a Systems
The majority of the system calibration was performed at the factory. Therefore, only the unchecked
procedures need to be run. Should there be any problems with any of the factory settings, we recommend
that only those units required to correct the problem be run.
246
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Set system Configuration

date: 30/11/07
to / / to
1 INTRODUCTION:
Test if system configuration is accordance with the system hardware setting.
2 TOUCH SCREEN CONFIGURATION:

1. Press and hold the quick up/down key, at the same time power on the system until the service mode
appear on the touch screen.
2. The initial parameters were set at factory. The field engineer needs to re-calibrate the system
configuration according to requirements.
Note: From this configuration UI, we can find the software version is 2.17.
The parameters shown in the illustration below are not the default configuration in
factory. The illustration is used only to show the interface.
247
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: From this configuration UI, we can find the software version is 2.17VA.
The parameters shown in the illustration below are not the default configuration in
factory. The illustration is used only to show the interface.
To check Anode Heat Integrator Function, please refer to section 8 in Chapter 5.
248
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Set the parameter according to following table.

No. Input/Action Remarks
1 Press Time & Date Use up/down key set system date and time.
2 Press collimator selection Select AUTO or MANUAL collimator.
3 Table selection Set table have or have not Bucky.
4 Wall Stand Set wall stand position: HEAD/ FOOT/FRONT/BACK;
Center or Offset.
5 Wall Stand Selection Set wall have (BUCKY) or have not Bucky (GRID) and sensor tray
(TRAY) or no sensor tray (NONE).
6 SID display mode Set SID unit: INCH or CM.
7 Wall Stand Select tilting Wall stand (SG100 or SG120) or non tilt Wall stand.
8 Film size display mode Set film unit is INCH OR CM, if SID unit in CM. But if SID unit is INCH,
film size unit must be INCH, film size unit on OTS must be accordance
with it.
9 High, low POS. distance Set distance between Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto
Exposure position of SG100 Wall Stand between 20-100cm (8-39inch).
(for auto exposure with Bucky in horizontal position). Default value is
40cm.
Note: The default value of High, low POS. distance set in System
Console is 40cm, which is different from the default distance
between Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto
Exposure position set on SG100 or SG120 Wall Stand (44cm).
So it’s a must to check and change the High, low POS.
distance value in System Console and ensure it to be the
same with the actual distance between Low Auto Exposure
position and High Auto Exposure position when installing the
SG100 or SG120 Wall Stand and performing the SG100 or
SG120 SID calibration, even if the positions of the Microswitch
S4 Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam are not
modified and be on the default positions. (refer to Job Card
IST008 in Chapter 2 and Job Card CAL006 in Chapter 4)
10 Wall Stand detent position Change the value can set wall stand detent SID display 50-200cm(20-
XT-Switch-A (B, C, D, E) set 78inch).
11 Set Table SID Detent value Set table detent value between 50-200cm(20-78inch).
12 Field Light On Time Set field light on time from 30s to 90s. (The step is 10s)
This is not applicable to the manual collimator.
13 Tomo Unit Set have or not have Tomo function.
14 Low Position Detent Set Low Auto Exposure position SID of SG100 or SG120 Wall Stand (for
auto exposure with Bucky in level) between 50-200cm (20-78inch).
15 High Position Detent Set High Auto Exposure position SID of SG100 or SG120 Wall Stand (for
auto exposure with Bucky in level) between 50-200cm (20-78inch).
16 Film Size Expand: 0.0%, Set film size increment. This function allows the FE to adjust the
1.0% or 1.5% collimator blades opening slightly.
17 Set Printer Unit Set have or not have print unit.
18 Language 9 languages can be selected. The relative APR data and APR name
should be displayed in console interface.
19 View and save error log Display error messages and save error.log to the floppy.
20 DOSE Calibration See Job Card CAL 012.
21 Press Default Display Default configuration value.
22 Press Cancel Not save the current configuration and exit this interface
23 Press Done Save the current configuration and exit the interface
249
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: From SW version 2.07, the Wall Stand allows to be placed in 90 degrees to the table, please select
the Wall Stand position as “Front” or “Back”. Be sure to place the Wall-XT Switches on the bridge instead
of on the rail, and place the Wall Center on the rail.
4. Press DONE to confirm the calibration then go to main screen.

Press CANCEL to cancel the calibration then go to main screen.
Press DEFAULT to recover initial value.
3 OTS DETENT CODE:

1. Mount the magnet bar onto stationary rail and bridge.
Note: Please refer to the room layout in Pre-Installation Manual (2260326-100).
the wall center and table center detent code is same: the wall center and table center detent code is different:
0 1 2 3 NOTE 0 1 2 3 NOTE
0 X 0 X X Table & Wall 0 X 0 X X Table center
0 0 X 0 X center
Wall-XT-Switch A 0 0 X X X Wall center
X 0 X 0 X Wall-XT-Switch B 0 0 X 0 X Wall-XT-Switch A
0 X X 0 X Wall-XT-Switch C X 0 X 0 X Wall-XT-Switch B
X X X 0 X Wall-XT-Switch D 0 X X 0 X Wall-XT-Switch C
X X 0 0 X Wall-XT-Switch E X X X 0 X Wall-XT-Switch D
X X 0 0 X Wall-XT-Switch E
Note: The magnet red face upwards.
250
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Table Inhibition Button Setting and Anti-collision Buzzer Function

purpose: Configuration version no. 0
date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Introduction
This Jobcard describes how to adjust initial setting of table inhibition button and anti-collision buzzer
function. (This function is available on Rev 01 or later version PCB)
Table Inhibition Button Setting
When power on the system, the default setting of table inhibition button is on. If you want to operate the
table, you will need to deselect this button.
The following procedures describe how to adjust the initial setting of table inhibition button.
1. Power on the elevating table.

2. Raise the table to its highest position.
3. Take off the right side table cover.
4. Now, you will see a PCB board.
5. Make the Jumper on JP1 connecting the
middle pin and the empty pin. (See
following design drawing)
251
PROTEUS XR/a
Inhibit Anti-collision Buzzer Function
The following procedures describe how to remove anti-collision buzzer function.

2. Raise the table to its highest position.
3. Take off the right side table cover.
4. Remove the Jumper on JP2.
JP2
JP1
Table logic control board 221-3010 Rev1
252
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Adjust Anti-collision Switches

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
The anti-collision switches have already been adjusted at the factory. The following procedure is needed to
perform when table downward motion is prohibited or anti-collision switches don’t work.
Malfunction Analyze
2. Lower the table height, at the same time, use a force gauge to hold back table motion under each
corner of table top frame.
3. When the force exceed 45lbs, the table should stop motion, otherwise, that anti-collision switch isn’t
working correctly.
253
PROTEUS XR/a

Procedure
Anti-
collision
switch
Supportive
screw
Bracket
screws
Top view Bottom view
Start
Yes
Table moves Yes anti-collision

downward switches can work
No No
Loosen two bracket screws Loosen two bracket screws

slightly, then fasten the supportive slightly, then move the switch
screw underneath the anti-collision downward a little distance.
switch slowly by a medium Philip
screw driver, until hear a “Click”
sound from anti-collision switch. Table moves
No
downward
Yes
No Table moves Yes anti-collision
downward switches can work No
Fasten two
bracket screws.
Anti-collision
switch adjust-
ment complete
254
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Calibrate Table Height Limitation

date: 20/12/99
NF No. Production date Serial No. Personnel:
to / / to
The table height limitation calibration was already performed at the factory and the table height is from 550mm
(560mm for table with Toe jam sensor) to 800mm. The following procedure should be performed in case table
height does not meet specification.
Procedures
1. Open the front cover of table base.
Safety
There are two sets of switches. One set is table height
switch Limitation
limitation switch; the other set is safety switch for
switch
limitation switch in case limitation switch can’t work.
The lowest
position detector
2. Analyze whether is the highest position or the lowest The highest position
position not correct, and then adjust the corresponding piece assembly
detector position of "position piece assembly".
The lowest
safety switch
3. If the adjustment doesn’t work, widen the corresponding
safety switch limitation scale. Keep the safety switch
limitation scale 10mm larger than table height The highest
specification to 550mm-810mm. safety switch
4. Adjust detector again. Then check whether table height

meets the specification. If not, do step 2 again.
5. Fasten both limitation detectors and safety switches
Note: In case the lower safety switch is tripped, remove the

side cover to reach and press the contactor to drive
the table up.
255
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Calibrate SID Calibration

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Section 1 SID calibration procedure: (For systems with Table)

Note: The inaccuracy between displayed SID and real value should less than 1.7%.
1. When the table is in its’ highest position, verify that the mark
on table height potentiometer is in alignment with mark on
the rack. System
2. Open the front cabinet cover by loosing two screws I/F Board
underneath the cover.
3. Disconnect the connector J110 in system I/F board and measure
the resistance between pin1 and pin2.
When the table is in the highest position, it should be 4010.
When the table is in the lowest position, it should be 765+/-
10Ohms for the table with Toe Jam Sensors, or 795+/-10Ohms
for the table without Toe Jam Sensors.
4. Check the cables are connected correctly. Refer to the
system MIS map in page 10-1.
5. Power on and check the +5VDC5%, +/-12VDC5% on the
system IF board.
+12V
-12V GND
+5V
+9V
TP2
TP1
256
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Set table top mode using OTS console or System console.
PA3
100K TP2
TP1
Note: Ensure the switch 1, 2 of the DIP Switch in red color to be on.
DIP Switch
257
PROTEUS XR/a
7. With the table in its lowest position drive to the highest position, verify the SID display
on the OTS console is changing during entire travel range without rolling over
(continuous pot).
Adjust PA1 if the SID doesn’t change.
Note: Raise the table to its highest position. Then adjust PA1 until TP1 is about 0.93V.
8. Verify the SID display on the OTS console is changing while driving the OTS up and
down.
Adjust PA3 if the SID doesn’t change.
Note: Raise the OTS to its highest position. Then adjust PA3 until TP2 is about 0.89V.
9. Drive the table to the height of 58cm and write down the SID value shown on OTS console. Drive the
table to the highest position. Adjust the PA1 so that the OTS console SID changes 22cm(Table height
is from 58cm to 80cm).
10. Repeat step 9 until SID changing is the same as actual moving distance.
11. Drive the OTS to the 100cm SID (from table top) using the measure tape on collimator and write
down the SID value shown on OTS console. Lower the OTS to 70cmSID (from table top) using
measure tape. Adjust the PA3 so that the OTS console SID changes 30cm.
12. Repeat step 11 until SID changing is same as real moving distance.
13. Repeat step 9 to 12 until both of table and OTS SID values changing reflect the real moving distance.
14. Adjust P5 until the right SID is displayed on the OTS console.
FOR SG100 WALL STAND SID CALIBRATION, CONTINUE WITH FOLLOWING STEPS. IF SG100 IS
NOT SELECTED, IT’S ENOUGH TO PERFORM THE STEP 1 TO 14 ONLY FOR SID CALIBRATION.
FOR SG120 WALL STAND SID CALIBRATION, SKIP TO STEP 20 DIRECTLY. IF SG120 IS NOT
SELECTED, IT’S ENOUGH TO PERFORM THE STEP 1 TO 14 ONLY FOR SID CALIBRATION.
15. Rotate the Bucky to 0°, and angulate it to 90°（horizontal）
258
PROTEUS XR/a
16. Modify the Microswitch S4 Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam to decide the distance
between the Low Auto Exposure position and the High Auto Exposure position, write down the value
of the distance (Distance1). (When the Bucky in horizontal, there are only two positions of Bucky on
the column at which the Auto exposure can be made. Of these two positions, the lower one is
defined as the “Low Auto Exposure position”, and the higher position is defined as the “High Auto
Exposure position”. And these two positions can be modified by adjusting the Microswitch S4
Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam. The default distance between these two positions
is 44cm.). (Refer to Job Card IST 008, Chapter2.)
Check and ensure the parameter value in System Console to be the same with the actual distance
between Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto Exposure position. (see parameter 9 “High, low
POS. distance”, Job Card CAL 002)
The default value of the distance between Low Auto Exposure position and High
CAUTION Auto Exposure position set in System Console (see parameter 9 “High, low POS.
distance”, Job Card CAL 002) is 40cm, which is different from the default distance
set on SG100 Wall Stand (44cm). So it’s a must to check and change the
parameter value in System Console to ensure it to be the same with the actual
distance between Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto Exposure position
before performing the SG100 SID calibration according to the following steps, even
if the positions of the Microswitch S4 Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator
Cam are not modified before and be on the default position.
17. Set Wall Stand mode using OTS console or System console. Drive the OTS console, and make it
vertically over the Bucky of SG100.
259
PROTEUS XR/a
18. Insert a cassette, lower the Bucky to the Low Auto Exposure position, pull out the tray and measure
the distance from OTS to the cassette top (actual SID value) using measure tape, then insert the
tray all the way into the Bucky and adjust P4 to make the display of SID on the OTS is the same
with the actual SID. (If there is no change of SID value displayed on OTS when the Bucky moving
up and down with the tray inserted all the way into the Bucky, adjust the P4 to make the SID value
displayed on the OTS.)
Note: When the tray is pulled out, it is preset to be no SID display on OTS, not a wrong.
To see the SID display on OTS, pay attention to insert the tray all the way into the Bucky
after measured the distance from OTS to the tray.
19. Use PA2 for auxiliary adjustment.
PA2
100K
P4
100K
FOR SG120 WALL STAND SID CALIBRATION, CONTINUE WITH FOLLOWING STEPS. IF SG120 IS
NOT SELECTED, IT’S ENOUGH TO PERFORM THE STEP 1 TO 14 ONLY FOR SID CALIBRATION.
20. Rotate the Bucky to 0°, and angulate it to 90°（horizontal）
260
PROTEUS XR/a
between the Low Auto Exposure position and the High Auto Exposure position, write down the value
of the distance (Distance1). (When the Bucky in horizontal, there are only two positions of Bucky on
the column at which the Auto exposure can be made. Of these two positions, the lower one is
defined as the “Low Auto Exposure position”, and the higher position is defined as the “High Auto
Exposure position”. And these two positions can be modified by adjusting the Microswitch S4
Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam. The default distance between these two positions
is 44cm.). (Refer to Job Card IST 008, Chapter2.)
The default value of the distance between Low Auto Exposure position and High
CAUTION Auto Exposure position set in System Console (see parameter 9 “High, low POS.
distance”, Job Card CAL 002) is 40cm, which is different from the default distance
set on SG100 Wall Stand (44cm). So it’s a must to check and change the
parameter value in System Console to ensure it to be the same with the actual
distance between Low Auto Exposure position and High Auto Exposure position
before performing the SG120 SID calibration according to the following steps, even
if the positions of the Microswitch S4 Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator
Cam are not modified before and be on the default position.
261
PROTEUS XR/a
23. Insert a cassette, lower the Bucky to the Low Auto Exposure position, pull out the tray and measure
the distance from OTS to the cassette top (actual SID value) using measure tape, then insert the
tray all the way into the Bucky and adjust P4 to make the display of SID on the OTS is the same
with the actual SID. (If there is no change of SID value displayed on OTS when the Bucky moving
up and down with the tray inserted all the way into the Bucky, adjust the P4 to make the SID value
PA2
100K
P4
100K
Section 2 SID calibration procedure: (For systems with SG100 or SG120 Wall Stand, without Table)
FOR SG100 WALL STAND, FOLLOW STEPS FROM 1 TO 8.

FOR SG120 WALL STAND, FOLLOW STEPS FROM 9 TO 16.
1. Move the SG100 Wall Stand Bucky to the High Auto Exposure position, Rotate the Bucky to 0°
and angulate it to 90°（horizontal）.
262
PROTEUS XR/a
between the Low Auto Exposure position and the High Auto Exposure position, write down the
value of the distance (Distance1). (When the Bucky in horizontal, there are only two positions of
Bucky on the column at which the Auto exposure can be made. Of these two positions, the lower
one is defined as the “Low Auto Exposure position”, and the higher position is defined as the “High
Auto Exposure position”. And these two positions can be modified by adjusting the Microswitch S4
Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam. The default distance between these two
positions is 44cm.). (Refer to Job Card IST 008, Chapter2.)
and High Auto Exposure position before performing the SG100 SID calibration according
to the following steps, even if the positions of the Microswitch S4 Activator Cam and
Microswitch S5 Activator Cam are not modified and be on the default position in the
upper step.
3. Insert the tray with a cassette all the way into the Bucky.
263
PROTEUS XR/a
5. Verify the SID display on the OTS console is changing while driving the OTS up and down.
Adjust P4 if the SID doesn’t change.
6. Lower the Bucky to the Low Auto Exposure position, drive the OTS to 100cm to the
cassette top (pull out the tray and measure the distance from OTS to the cassette
top using the measure tape on collimator) and write down the SID value shown on
OTS console. Lower the OTS to 70cm to the cassette top (pull out the tray and
measure the distance from OTS to the cassette top using the measure tape on
collimator). Adjust the PA3 so that the OTS console SID changes 30cm.
Repeat step 5 until SID changing is the same as actual moving distance.
Note: When the tray is pulled out, it is preset to be no SID display on OTS, not a wrong.
To see the SID display on OTS, pay attention to insert the tray all the way into the Bucky
after measured the distance from OTS to the tray.
7. Ensure the Bucky to be on the Low Auto Exposure position, pull out the tray and measure the
distance from OTS to the cassette top (actual SID value) using measure tape, then insert the tray
all the way into the Bucky and adjust P4 to make the display of SID on the OTS is the same with
the actual SID. (If there is no change of SID value displayed on OTS when the Bucky moving up
and down with the tray inserted all the way into the Bucky, adjust the P4 to make the SID value
PA2
100K
P4
100K
PA3
100K
264
PROTEUS XR/a
FOR SG120 WALL STAND, FOLLOW THE STEPS BELOW.
9. Move the SG120 Wall Stand Bucky to the High Auto Exposure position, Rotate the Bucky to 0°
and angulate it to 90°（horizontal）.
between the Low Auto Exposure position and the High Auto Exposure position, write down the
value of the distance (Distance1). (When the Bucky in horizontal, there are only two positions of
Bucky on the column at which the Auto exposure can be made. Of these two positions, the lower
one is defined as the “Low Auto Exposure position”, and the higher position is defined as the “High
Auto Exposure position”. And these two positions can be modified by adjusting the Microswitch S4
Activator Cam and Microswitch S5 Activator Cam. The default distance between these two
positions is 44cm.). (Refer to Job Card IST 008, Chapter2.)
and High Auto Exposure position before performing the SG100 SID calibration according
to the following steps, even if the positions of the Microswitch S4 Activator Cam and
Microswitch S5 Activator Cam are not modified and be on the default position in the
upper step.
265
PROTEUS XR/a
11. Insert the tray with a cassette all the way into the Bucky.
13. Verify the SID display on the OTS console is changing while driving the OTS up and down.
Adjust P4 if the SID doesn’t change.
14. Lower the Bucky to the Low Auto Exposure position, drive the OTS to 100cm to the cassette top
(pull out the tray and measure the distance from OTS to the cassette top using the measure tape
on collimator) and write down the SID value shown on OTS console. Lower the OTS to 70cm to the
cassette top (pull out the tray and measure the distance from OTS to the cassette top using the
measure tape on collimator). Adjust the PA3 so that the OTS console SID changes 30cm.
Repeat step 5 until SID changing is the same as actual moving distance.
15. Ensure the Bucky to be on the Low Auto Exposure position, pull out the tray and measure the
distance from OTS to the cassette top (actual SID value) using measure tape, then insert the tray
all the way into the Bucky and adjust P4 to make the display of SID on the OTS is the same with
the actual SID. (If there is no change of SID value displayed on OTS when the Bucky moving up
and down with the tray inserted all the way into the Bucky, adjust the P4 to make the SID value
266
PROTEUS XR/a
PA2
100K
P4
100K
PA3
100K
267
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Calibrate Cassette Size Display

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Cassette Size calibration procedure:
1. Verify the cassette sensing cable is connected correctly;
2. Verify the system communication is working and the SID display is working well;
3. Set the film size expanding to 0%. Refer to Job Card CAL 002 in page 4-4.
4. Switch the collimator mode to Auto Mode;
5. Select table bucky receptor or wall bucky receptor depending on which cassette tray is calibrating;
6. Open the front cabinet cover by loosening the two screws underneath the
cover.
7. Measure the Volt between TP5 and GND. Adjust P6 to make the Volt
being –0.840.01V. System
8. Measure the Volt between TP6 and GND. Adjust P7 to make the Volt I/F Board
being –0.840.01V.
9. Insert a 14inch(356mm) x 14inch(356mm) cassette into table bucky.
Note: Make sure the cassette is placed in correct position.
10. For calibrating longitudinal film size, adjust P10 to make Volt between
TP7 and GND being 3.330.01V.
11. For calibrating lateral film size, adjust P11 to make Volt between TP8
and GND being 3.330.01V.
Note: If there is only 14inch(356mm) x 17inch(432mm) cassette, use

14inch(356mm) side to do longitudinal film size calibration.
Then turn the cassette around and use14inch (356mm) side to
do lateral film size calibration.
R44 10K P13
100K
R41 10K P12
R40 10K 100K
TP8
P9 R45 10K P11
100K 100K
TP7
P8 P10
100K 100K
TP6
P7
100K
TP5
P6
100K
268
PROTEUS XR/a

12. Pull out the cassette, then re-insert it. Make sure the film size display is correct. If not, redo step 10 and
11. Adjust the Volt slightly, then try it again.
Try other size cassettes. If the film size displayed is not correct, redo step 10 and 11. Adjust the Volt
slightly, then try other cassettes.
13. Measure the Volt between TP9 and GND. Adjust P8 to make the Volt being –0.84V0.01V.
14. Measure the Volt between TP10 and GND. Adjust P9 to make the Volt being –0.84V0.01V.
Note: Make sure the cassette is placed in correct position.
Note: The following steps also suitable to SG 100 Wall Stand.

15. Insert a 14inch(356mm) x 14inch(356mm) cassette into wall bucky.
16. For calibrating longitudinal film size, adjust P12 to make Volt between TP11 and GND being 3.330.01V.
1 17. For calibrating lateral film size, adjust P13 to make Volt between TP12 and GND being 3.330.01V.
Note: If there is only 14inch(356mm) x 17inch(432mm) cassette, use 14inch(356mm) side to do

longitudinal film size calibration. Then turn the cassette around and use14inch (356mm) side
to do lateral film size calibration.
R54 10K
10K
P13
R50 10K 100K
P12
R55 10K 100K
R51
P11
100K
P10
P9 100K
100K
P8
100K TP12
P7
100K TP11
P6
100K
TP10
TP9
18. Pull out the cassette, then re-insert it. Make sure the film size display is correct. If not, redo step 16 and
17. Adjust the Volt slightly, then try it again.
Try other size cassettes. If the film size displayed is not correct, redo step 16 and 17. Adjust the Volt
slightly, then try other cassettes.
269
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301), SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849), and SG120 Wall
Stand (GPCP No. 2402562)
date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Wall Stand counterweight has been calibrated at factory. The following procedure is provided in case re-
calibration is needed.
Counterweight Calibration Procedure:
1. Open the back cover of the wall stand.
2. Open the back cover of the counterweight container.

3. Hold the counterweight container firmly and Insert the provided counterweight.
*Pull out the counterweight container with a provided puller, then change the counterweight in the container
Note: The content with a star is only for the wall stand with a knee spacer.*
4. Check the bucky up and down motion is smooth and operating force is less than 5kg when inserting a 14”x17”
cassette.
5. Mount the counterweight container cover and wall stand cover, fasten all screws.
WARNING
Keep the film cabinet and counterweight pieces under control, while you are taking the
calibration procedure. Any unexpected movement may result in body hurts.
270
PROTEUS XR/a

Counterweight Calibration Procedure For SG100 Wall Stand:
Note: The information in this page is concerted with the revision 6 of SG 100 Wall Stand Service Manual
(GPCP Number 2150297-100). For the reason of the updates and changes in that manual, it is
220/110v Caution Label
1. Raise the Bucky assembly to its top position.
2. Remove the two lower trim covers (3) screws.
3. Remove the lower (charcoal grey)
counterweight cover (6 screws).
Knurled Screws –
loosen to open
Bucky Front Panel
4. Add or remove counterweights until the Bucky carriage is balanced. Lower Trim Covers
Note: Extra counterweights are furnished as part of the Ion Chamber option.
5. Raise the Bucky assembly to 63” (1.6 m) from the floor

to enable installation of the lower charcoal grey cover
and the lower trim covers. Iron Counterweights
6. Replace the charcoal grey cover and ensure that the Bucky (1.9 kg)
harness is outside the cover.
7. Reinstall lower trim covers.
Iron Counterweights
271
PROTEUS XR/a
Counterweight Calibration Procedure For SG120 Wall Stand:
DURING THIS OPERATION, THE BUCKY CARRIAGE AND COUNTERWEIGHT

WARNING CARRIAGE CAN MOVE.
1) Move the carriage to the lowest position.
2) Remove the metal cover on the front of the column.
Metal cover
3) Remove the second metal cover to access the counterweights.
Metal cover
Counterweights
4) Place or remove the counterweights with care.
5) Reinstall the two sheet metal covers and the column lateral covers.
272
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Touch Screen Calibration

date: 14/08/01
to / / to
Touch Screen calibration has been performed at the factory. The following procedure is provided in case the
touch screen needs to be recalibarated.
Note: There are two different consoles in total. Please make sure which console you order.
(This Calibration method is for PN 2259976 WITH FLOPPY DISK).
1. Tools
- Proteus System Software Disk
- A PS2 type of computer keyboard
- A communication cable
Note: All systems are shipped with a keyboard cable. If the cable is missing, FE should make a
communication cable according to illustration.
2. Procedure
1. Power off.
2. Demount the printer if have.
3. Use the communication cable connecting the keyboard and the console connector CN1.
4. Insert the system software disk into the console.
5. Power on.
6. At the c:/ prompt type “Tbdriver.exe”
7. Type “Tbcal.exe”; enter the main menu of Touch Screen Calibration Program.
273
PROTEUS XR/a
8. Press “H” (Hard Calibrate).

9. Touch the extreme bottom left corner and right corner, and then press any key to return main menu.
10. Press “6” (640X480 graphics).
11. Touch the centre of the crosses twice then press any key to return main menu.
12. Press”7” (Test menu) then press”6”.
13. Touch the screen, there should be an “x” under the touch area. If “x” is away from the touch area, should
check the system console.
14. Press ”x” to exit the calibration program.
15. Power off and mount the printer.
274
PROTEUS XR/a

Note: There are two different consoles in total. Please make sure which console you order. (This
Calibration method is for PN 5462233 WITH USB).
1. Tools
- A USB type of computer keyboard (a PS2 type of computer keyboard can be used too. Nothing differ but
the connection method).
2. Procedure:
1. Power off.
2. Demount the printer if have.
3. Use a USB type of keyboard connect to the console USB port.
275
PROTEUS XR/a

4. Power on
5. Press “Ctrl+C” to stop “AUTOEXEC.bat” executed when MS-DOS in progress.
6. Terminate batch job by entering “Y”.
7. Input “set PENMOUNT=c:\pm2” and press “enter” button.
276
PROTEUS XR/a

8. Input “cd c:\pm2” and press “enter” button.
9. Input “pmunload” and press “enter” button to unloading Touch Screen Program.
277
PROTEUS XR/a

10. Input “pm2” and press “enter” button to upload and operate Touch Screen Program.
11. Select “Calibrate” in Touch Screen Program.
278
PROTEUS XR/a

12. Choose “640x480x256(101h)”
279
PROTEUS XR/a

13. Calibrate the Touch Screen by touching the arrow show in the screen.
14. Exit the calibration by press ”ENTER” when it’s done.
280
PROTEUS XR/a

15. Select “Exit” and press “ENTER” button to exit Touch Screen Program.
16. Reset the console.
281
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: HHS Test Calibration

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Installers must indicate that the combination of installed HHS Certified Components is compatible on Form
F3382 provided in Direction 46-013894, System Field-Test For HHS.
The result of kVp test is ok when the kVp error is less than or equial to +/-(3%+2 kV+kV meter accuracy).
Note: If measurement with non-invasive kV meter failed, turn to Dynlayzer for accurate measurement.
Proteus XR/a System HHS Compliance Compatibility List
PRODUCT CATEGORY PRODUCT DESCRIPTION MODEL NUMBER

X-RAY CONTROL SYSTEM CONSOLE 2259976
PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM CABINET/ 2259937
GEN. & PDU
X-RAY TUBE ASSEMBLY RAD 14 2259981
HOUSING (CASING) RAD 21 2271627
MX 100 D2301R
BEAM LIMITING DEVICE PROTEUS XR/A AUTO COLLIMATOR 2259298-54
ECLIPSE PROTEUS COLLIMATOR 2379827
CASSETTE TRAY CASSETTE TRAY 2176788
NON-CERTIFIED DEVICE OTS CONSOLE 2259974
282
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: SERVICE SOFTWARE USER GUIDE

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- Service laptop with floppy drive

- Service tools
- JEDI service software
- 9-wire serial cable
Not applicable.
4 PREREQUISITES
Basic knowledge of PC based computer laptop, DOS and usage of Microsoft WINDOWS.
283
PROTEUS XR/a
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Loading Service Software on Service Laptop
The service software can be used either from the calibration diskette or from the Hard Disk Drive. We recommend
to launch it from the Hard Disk Drive for speed performance.
It can operate under DOS or Windows 95; but for software download or database backup, it is required to
run asian.exe under DOS to avoid communication problem (with the mouse, click on START, SHUTDOWN,
RESTART COMPUTER UNDER DOS MODE; see page 4-40 ”Software Download / Upgrade” Job Card).
• Power ON Service laptop. Under Windows, run the File Manager (Explore)
• Create a specific directory (e.g.: JEDI) under C:\
• Insert into the floppy drive the ”Service Software” floppy delivered with the equipment in the Service Tool set.
• Copy the file SPX_X.EXE from the floppy disk to that directory
(Double click on A:\, drag and drop on C:\ JEDI or whatever name of your directory)
5-2 Unzip software file
The floppy drive supplied with the equipment (or the upgrade kit) contains “Auto-zipped” files.
It is necessary to load those files on the hard disk drive and run them; they will unzip and create other files that
you will use.
• Double click on the SPX_X.EXE file, and verify that the new files are created:
appl.mx , boot.mx, asian.exe ,Asiane.msg and data base files.mx
5-3 Using Service Software

Safety Door
Connect Service laptop as follows: and Light
Switch (J7)
• Use the 9 pin Serial cable, part No 2207478, to connect
serial line of Service laptop to connector XJ8 on the I/F
board. Service
Terminal (J8)
• Switch on the Service laptop.
• To run the program:
Under Windows: Inside Comm-
unication (J9)
- double click on “asian.exe”
Under DOS:
- select Disk Drive from where you want to run the program: C: enter or A: enter
- enter the directory where “asian.exe” stays in.
- key in : “asian” enter
284
PROTEUS XR/a
The following screen appears:
• Power ON the generator

• Press function key F1
The following example screen appears:
The software will load the help screen information contained in Asiane .msg file.
285
PROTEUS XR/a

• Wait or press space bar to jump to screen.
This screen will appear:
5-4 Selecting Maintenance and Application Mode; major keys
FROM PROCEDURE TO
APPLICATION MODE Type <ALT> - <S> (Together) SETUP/MAINTENANCE MODE
MENU 3
APPLICATION MODE Type <ALT> - <D> (Together) SETUP/MAINTENANCE MODE
LAST MENU OR SUB-MENU
selected.
SETUP/MAINTENANCE MODE From any menu, type <R> (several APPLICATION MODE
types if necessary) or <Q>
Q Return to application mode

R Return to a higher level menu
W Validate
ALT & S (Together) Calibration mode (Menu 3)
ALT & D Calibration mode (Last menu called)
→ and  In maintenance mode, to move through menus
F1 to F0 Function keys with action based on context.
Other keys Based on context. Main function recalled in the screen
and also in Job Cards wherever used.
<ESC> Escape Service Menu
Note: It may cause JEDI communication problem to
directly use ESC key to quit Service mode.
286
PROTEUS XR/a
5-5 Service Menu breakdown tree
• Type [ALT] & S (Together) to go to Maintenance Menus (MENU 3)

• Type → and  keys to select a menu.
• Illustration 1 shows the relationship between the Maintenance Mode menus and the function keys used to
access those menus.
• To return to a higher level, key in R
The darkened menus are the ones used for Generator and room setup (Configuration and Calibration):
menu 3, 4, 5.
Menu 3 is used to Configure the system
Menu 4 is used to calibrate AEC mode (Automatic Exposure Control)
Menu 5 is used to perform Checksum
Menu 1 is used to perform generator test and diagnostics.
Menu 2 is used to enter Date and Time, visualize/clear error log, and visualize/clear tube and generator recorded
tracking Data.
287
PROTEUS XR/a
MENU 1
[F1] [F3] [F5] [F7]
HEAT ANOD HIGH AEC
AUTO AUTO,
, 3,4,5 3k, 9k
NoLD GATE ShC
CD INV
Tst Tst
MENU 2
[F3] [F5] [F7]
LIST NEXP DATE
MENU 3
[F1] [F5]
TECH MOD
E
MENU 4
[F5] [F7]
AEC CAL
[F1] [F3] [F5] [F9]

KVEF KG KTIME KF
MENU 5
[F1] [F7]
RAMS Vx Px.x DSPL
[F1] [F3]
CKSM MCL
R
Illustration 1 - Service menu Breakdown tree
288
PROTEUS XR/a
5-6 Sub-Menu summary description
1. Configuration - MENU3
TECH: programming workstation, technique parameters.
MODE: Select Renard or Normal scale for kV selection.
(See Page 4-52 “Workstation Parameter” Job Card ).
2. Calibration - MENU4
AEC: To set parameters if known, or modify them manually.
CAL: To calibrate Automatic Exposure Control, for each AEC chamber and Screen-film combination.
(See page 4-60 Job Card “Automated AEC calibration”)
3. Ram - MENU5
RAMS: NVRAm operation & display:
- CKSM: To update Checksum after configuration, calibration, parameter change. (See page 4-83, Job
Card “Checksum Validation”)
- MCLR: Clear NVRam memory. Normally not to be used, unless specifically instructed. (Do not use if
Data Base backup has not been performed previously)
Vx Px.x: Display generator software version (e.g. P3.4)
DSPL: In Maintenance Mode, to display parameter after exposure using key Z
4. Utilities - MENU2
LIST: To display last recorded error codes (up to 64)
- Last error is visualized with Date and Time
- Function keys allow to scroll down and up
- Z to get back to the last recorded error
- Same consecutive error are counted Up in the same line
- ^H , and W to clear error log
NEXP: To visualize/clear tube and generator recorded tracking Data. Clear must be performed only when
replacing X-Ray tube. Meaning of each parameter is found in page 4-44, ”Tube Replacement Software
Procedure” Job Card.
DATE: To enter / modify the date and time.
289
PROTEUS XR/a

5. Diagnostics - MENU1
HEAT: To exercise Heater/filament function.
- Auto: run fixed current on both filament (if 2 filaments) in sequence on selected tube (If more than 1).
- L or S: run 3, 4, or 5 Amps on Large or Small Focus.
ANOD: To exercise Rotor function.
- Auto: run rotation cycle in Low Speed then High Speed (If allowed by configuration) on selected tube.
(If more than 1)
- 3k: run one cycle acceleration, hold, break in Low Speed on selected tube (If more than 1)
- 9k: run one cycle acceleration, hold, break in High Speed (If allowed by configuration) on selected
tube (If more than 1)
HIGH: To exercise High Voltage function.
- NoLD: To troubleshoot HV problem, without mA nor rotation without X-Ray tube nor HV cable. Test is
run from 80 to max. kV, adjustable from 1 to 60 sec.
- Gate CD Test: to verify operation of the gate command board on the Inverter. Test is run during 10
sec. At 0 kV.
Note: Requires manual set up. Read related information in diagnostics section.
- ShC INV Tst: To verify operation of inverter with inverter in short circuit. Test is run during 100 msec.
At 0 kV.
Note: Requires manual set up. Read related information in diagnostics section.
AEC: To verify operation of AEC board. Refer to diagnostics section.
290
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Software Download / Upgrade

purpose: This Jobcard is needed only when FE replace new version no. 1
generator , KV control board or X-ray tube. date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- Service Laptop with floppy drive.

- Service tools
- JEDI Service Software
- 9-wire serial cable Part No. 2207478.
Not applicable.
4 PREREQUISITES
Database backup must have been performed.
291
PROTEUS XR/a

5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Load Software File on Service Laptop

The service software can be used either from the calibration diskette or from the laptop hard disk drive. We
recommend launching it from the Hard Disk Drive for speed performance. It can operate under DOS, Windows 95
or Windows 3.1.
If you do not have it on the laptop, refer to page 4-32, “Service Software User Guide” Job Card.
• Power ON service laptop
Under Windows, run the File Manager (Explore)
• Create a specific directory (e.g.: JEDI) under C:\
• Insert into the floppy drive the floppy delivered with the equipment in the service tool set (or with the upgrade)
• Copy the FILE “SPX_X.EXE” from the floppy disk to that directory
(Double click on A:\, drag and drop on C:\ JEDI or whatever name of your directory)
5-2 Unzip software file
The floppy drive supplied with the equipment (or the upgrade kit) contains “Auto-zipped” files.
It is necessary to load those files on the hard disk drive and run them; they will unzip and create other files that
you will use.
• Double click on the SPX_X.EXE file, and verify that the new files are created. (appl.mx and boot.mx)
5-3 Software download
1. Power off system.

Unplug the cable from system I/F board Connector J118.
Safety Door
Connect Service laptop as follows:
and Light
Use the 9-wire serial cable, part N. 2207478, to connect Switch (J7)
serial line of service laptop to connector XJ8 on the I/F
board. Service
2. Restart the computer in DOS mode (for software download Terminal
or database backup, it is required to run asian.exe under (J8)
DOS to avoid communication problem).
Inside
With the mouse, click on START, SHUTDOWN, RESTART Comm-
COMPUTER UNDER DOS MODE. unication
3. Run the program: (J9)
Under DOS: -select Disk drive from where you want to run the program: C: [enter] or A: [enter]
-enter the directory where “asian.exe” stays in.
-key in : “asian” [enter]
292
PROTEUS XR/a
The following screen appears:
7. From the laptop software mainscreen, type “F7 : restore memory”
8. Type “appl.mx”, then enter (or C:\JEDI\appl.mx)

Note: If the system is equipped with a Rad21 tube with tube
fan, type”F80ra21f.mx” or “F65ra21f.mx”then enter.
Please refer to R21 Tube Fan Installation Manual
(2301864).
If the system is equipped with a MX100 tube, type
“F65KOUSB.mx” or “F80KOUSB.mx” then enter.
Wait for the count to start. It may take 20 seconds before
starting. The software code transfer will take about 20 minutes.
Download is complete when all the LEDs on kV Control board
are ON and laptop indicates download is complete.
Normally, the kV Control board will reset at the end of transfer
and all the LEDs will scroll.
If not, reset the kV Control board.
293
PROTEUS XR/a

9. Verify the software version is V5.58.
From the main screen, type F1, then ALT S and select menu 5 with the arrows.
10. Select menu 2 with the arrows, select LIST, and clear generator error log. (^H, then W)
11. To exit program, press Q, or R to return then ESC, or ESC twice.
294
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: TUBE REPLACEMENT SOFTWARE PROCEDURE

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- Service laptop with floppy drive.

- Service tools
Not applicable.
4 PREREQUISITES
Knowledge of Service Software (refer to page 4-32, ”Service Software User Guide” Job Card).
295
PROTEUS XR/a
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Perform a Database backup
Refer to page 4-86 Job Card ”Backup & Restore Database Setup Parameters”.
1. Connect Service laptop as follows:
• Use the 9 pin Serial cable, part number 2207478, to
connect serial line of Service laptop to connector XJ8 on Safety Door
the I/F board. and Light
Switch (J7)
2. Restart the computer in DOS mode (for software download
or database backup, it is required to run asian.exe under
DOS to avoid communication problem). Service
Terminal (J8)
• With the mouse, click on START, SHUTDOWN,
RESTART COMPUTER UNDER DOS MODE.
3. Run the program: Inside Comm-
• select Disk Drive from where you want to run the unication (J9)
program: C:\JEDI enter or A: enter
• key in : “asian” enter
4. Save memory
• From the laptop software main screen, type “F6: save
memory”.
296
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2 Reset Tube Data tracking counter and error log.
1. Type ALT-S to jump to Service Menu.

2. Select menu 2 with the arrows.
3. Type F5 to select “NEXP”
Note: Before resetting all the memory, it is advised to record them on table ”Generator Counter
Reading Record” (Illustration 1).
297
PROTEUS XR/a

4. Enter ^H, press W to confirm.
All the tube related Data will be erased; only Generator related Data will be kept.
The filament aging parameter will be reset to default value.
5. Type Q to go back to main screen.
5-3 Verify new tube operation, clear error log

1. Run a dozen of exposures from low kV, mA, to high kV, mA in direct workstation.
2. Verify correct operation of the system.
3. Go in menu 2, LIST (F3); Clear the Error log.
4. Exit from laptop service software.
5. Run exposures from the Operating console.
6. Take necessary steps to ship the replaced tube. Include filled out table with tube information.
298
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1 - Generator Counter Reading Record
GENERATOR COUNTER READING RECORD

Date of reading: Date of install:
Address of installation: Generator identification:
Serial number:
Software version:
Options: (AEC)
X-Ray system description:
Counter name Tube data Explanation

NO WARMUP Number of skipped Warm-up (N/A on Tiger)
RXGSF H Cumulated exposure time on small focus
RXGLF H Cumulated exposure time on large focus
RXSCOP H Cumulated exposure time in fluoro (N/A on RAD.)
ROTANOD H Cumulated Anode rotation time
NEXPSF Cumulated Number of exposure on small focus
NEXPLF Cumulated Number of exposure on large focus
N100%SF Cumulated Number of exposure on small focus at 100 % Power (N/A on
Tiger)
N100%LF Cumulated Number of exposure on large focus (N/A on Tiger)
NAMOR Cumulated Number of spits
KJSF . E Cumulated dissipated power on Small focus
KJLF . E Cumulated dissipated power on Large focus
TIME_ON H Total generator Power On time (Not erasable)
N_EXP_G H Total generator number of exposure (Not erasable)
299
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/3 IST JEDI 5-2
subassembly: TUBE CONFIGURATION

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- Service laptop with floppy drive.

- Service tools
- 9-wire Serial cable Part No. 2207478.
Not applicable.
4 PREREQUISITES
The service laptop must be configured and software installed (refer to page 4-32 “Service Software User Guide”
Job Card).
300
PROTEUS XR/a
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Loading Software according to tube present in the installation
Two, four or six database are available on the JEDI Service Software supplied in Service Tools depending of the
configuration:
- one for 32 kW tube: type RAD 12,(Low speed) File = F32RAD12.mx
- one for 32 kW tube: type RAD 14,(Low speed) File = F32RAD14.mx
- one for 50 kW tube: type RAD 14,(High speed) File = F50RAD14.mx
Four database for the system equipped with tube fan:
- one for 65 kW tube: type RAD 21,(High speed) File = F65RA21F.mx
- one for 80 kW tube: type RAD 21,(High speed) File = F80RA21F.mx
- one for 65 kW tube: type MX 100,(High speed) File = F65KOUSB.mx
- one for 80 kW tube: type MX 100,(High speed) File = F80KOUSB.mx
Load from Service laptop the file corresponding to the tube present in the installation and the customer
configuration Refer to Job Card “Back-up and Restore Database Setup Parameters” CAL Jedi 8-6.
Note: When replacing the database file of RAD12, 14, 21 with database file of MX100 or in reverse,
pay attention to replace the Rotation Capacitor Set (refer to Job Card D/R JEDI 17-38 in
Section 3 of Chapter 9) and ensure its correct match with the X-ray tube type.
5-2 Verify
According to the tube used in the installation, verify:

1. If 32 kW database loaded for tube RAD 12 or RAD 14
- The maximum mA displayed on the console must be 400 mA for 80 kV.
2. If 50 kW database loaded for tube RAD 14
3. If 65kw data base loaded for tube RAD 14 or RAD 21
- The maximum mA displayed on the console must be 800mA for 80kV
4. If 80kw data base loaded for tube RAD 21
- The maximum mA displayed on the console must be 1000mA for 80kV
6. If 65 kW database loaded for tube MX100
7. If 80 kW database loaded for tube MX100
301
PROTEUS XR/a
DO NOT USE DATABASE DOESN’T MATCH, SUCH AS 32 KW FOR 50 KW TUBE OR 50

WARNING KW FOR 32 KW TUBE.
302
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/7 CAL JEDI 8-4
subassembly: WORK STATION PARAMETER

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- Service laptop with Floppy Drive

- Service tools
The JEDI is preprogrammed. Therefore, even if the program seems to correspond to the room parameters, it
must be double checked, for example, for AEC enable, wall Bucky enable.
4 PREREQUISITES
Service laptop must be configured and software installed (refer to page 4-32 “Service Software User Guide” Job
Card).
303
PROTEUS XR/a
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Introduction
Workstation programming uses function keys indicated on screen for the following :
• workstation select,
• tube select,
• define nominal number of exposures for 2-point mode operation,
• AEC : types of chamber and number of pickup fields in each,
• Film-screen combination select, (if only one Select A).
5-2 Calling the Subroutine
Call TECH (setup mode, menu 3, function key [F1]).
MENU3 TECH MODE

-> F1 F5
<-
R: Q:
Return Exit
***************** MENU3 *****************
TECH<tok_Tab>:<tok_Tab>Se
MODE<tok_Tab>:<tok
lect Workstation
_Tab>Renard
Illustration1 - Setup Mode, Menu 3
Resulting display is shown in Illustration 2.
304
PROTEUS XR/a
5-3 Parameter Selection
Note: Any new parameters created must be stored in the installation report (same as Illustration 3).
1. Workstation Selection
OFF No selection
SPE * Anatomic (for RF room)
DIR* Anatomic (for RAD room)
POMU Wall-mounted Bucky (i.e. SG50 or SG70)
SETE Spot-film device technique on remote-controlled table (i.e. Prestilix 1600)
TOPO Tomography Bucky
TOSE Tomography spot-film device technique
POTA Table-mounted Bucky
PULM Pulmorapid
CHAN Film changer
TOCO Special tomographic applications
SECO Spot-film device technique on conventional table
NUME Digital mode
TONU Digital tomography
Use the [ ! ] and [ z ] keys to select.

* For RAD
TECH 1 = DIR
TECH 2 = POTA (TABLE BUCKY with moving grid) or DIR (if fixed grid)
TECH 3 = POMU (with moving grid) or DIR (if fixed grid) or OFF (if no Wall Bucky)
TECH 4 = TOPO (if existing)
Note: For systems equipped with no Table configuration, TECH1 should be set DIR, TECH2 and
TECH4 should be set OFF.
305
PROTEUS XR/a
Nominal
Workstation Tube Tomo tech & time number of Type of AEC
exposures In
2-point mode
Illustration2 - Workstation Menu
2. Tube Selection
T1 Tube 1 only
3. Select the number of nominal exposures for 2-point mode operation.
Suggested values are given below:
DIR N = 2 POTA N = 2
POMU N = 2
Use function keys [F5] and [F6] to select.

4. Selection of Exposure Chamber
IN1 Ionization chamber 1 (for Table Bucky workstation POTA).

IN2 Ionization chamber 2 (for Wall Bucky Workstation on - POMU).
Select AEC in or out using function keys [F7] et [F8]. Each chamber corresponds to a specific technique, i.e.
POMU and POTA.
306
PROTEUS XR/a

5. Control Console Function Key assignment
Function keys are assigned using the alphanumeric keyboard ([1] corresponds to function key 1, etc., up to 8).
Use the shift key for numbers 0 to 9.
With the RAD Console only four techniques are available.
The technique selected is shown in reverse video in zone 3.

6. Selection of screen-film combination used
Keys [A], [B] and [C] are used to select the first, second and third screen-film combinations, respectively.
The combination selected is displayed in reverse video in zone 2.
Press the key again to cancel a selection.
One combination is always selected. Select Key A for the RAD used screen film combination.
7. Selection of Number of Pickup Fields
The number of pickup fields of the exposure chamber selected for AEC Mode with ionizing chamber or II must
be keyed in:
[D] middle pick-up field (one),

[F] three pick-up fields.
The number of pick-up fields is displayed in reverse video in zone 3.

8. Validation
Use [W] to validate all values for a given function appearing on the screen.
5-4 Renard or Normal Scale for kV Selection
1. Go to Service Mode, and call Menu 3 using the arrows on the keyboard.
2. Call MODE by pressing F5.
3. Select NORMAL or RENARD Scale by pressing F5.
4. Press W to confirm.
307
PROTEUS XR/a
5-5 Date & Time
To enter the Date and Time:

1. Go to Service Mode, and call Menu 2 using the arrows on the keyboard.
2. Call DATE by pressing F7.
3. Enter date (MM DD YYYY) via numeric keypad.
5. Press F1.
6. Enter time (HH MM) via numeric keypad.
When replacing the battery in the CPU Board, clear the year–counter display on the right hand side via F7 and F9
to confirm.
Anytime programming is modified, checksum must be validated (refer to page 4-83

NOTICE
Calibration Job Card “Checksum Validation”).
308
PROTEUS XR/a
WORKSTATION SELECT
FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WORKSTATION DIR POTA POMU TOPO OFF OFF OFF OFF
TUBE T1 T1 T1 TI
NUMBER OF
EXPOSURES IN 2 2 2 2
2-POINT MODE
TOMOGRAPHIC
UNIT USED:
Y1 T1
Y2 T2 N N N N
Y3 T3
Y4 T4
Y5 T5
TYPE
OF OUT IN1 IN2 IN1
CHAMBER
mA PLATEAU
TIME FOR - - - - -
1-POINT MODE
EXTERNAL -
WORKSTATION NO NO NO NO
COMMAND*
SCREEN-FILM
COMBINATIONS
1
A A A A
2
3
NUMBER OF
PICK-UP - 3 3 3 Number
FIELDS of cells
used
in AEC
MODE RENARD OR NORMAL kV SELECTION
ERGO FULL OR MINI ERGONOMY
Illustration3 - Workstation Parameters (Example for RAD with Wall Bucky and two Ion-chambers)
309
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: X-ray Tube Warm Up

date: 20/12/99
from / / from Time: 2min
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
None.
WARNING THE ROOM SHOULD BE FREE OF A PATIENT OR PERSONNEL
4 PROCEDURE
2. Close collimator blades or block x-ray output.
3. Take 2 exposures (30 seconds apart) with the following technique Parameters:
• Table top receptor
• Large focal spot
• 70 kV
• 200 mA at 1 sec
4. Once exposures are taken the system is ready for use.
310
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Automated AEC Calibration

date: 20/12/99
from / / from Time: 1h
to / / to
QUICK AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:

1. Open AECcal.xls in AEC fast Calibration disk.
2. Following the instruction in this file.
NORMAL AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:

1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- At least 2 cassettes of each screen (18x24 cm for Bucky or 24x30 cm)
- Sensitometer
- Densitometer
- Measuring tape
- Pocket calculator
- Plexiglass plates, 5 cm thick, to cover the range from 5 cm to 25 cm, or a plastic bucket to fill with water
- A lead sheet, 2mm thick, around 18 x 12 cm, will be useful to split 2 exposures on 1 film, or to mask a
measurement cell.
- 2 cassettes 36x43 and 18x24 for format correction.
AND
- Service tools
WARNING BE SURE TO PERFORM TUBE WARM PROCEDURE
Standard precautions for work with ionising radiation.

4 PREREQUISITES
AEC set-up is the last step of the system calibration. In consequence:
- The positioner and tube hanger should be operational.
- The collimator should be mechanically centered, and the eventual automatic collimator adjusted.
- The X-ray generator should be completely configured.
Note: Use handswitch to make exposure. Console will not Beep.
311
PROTEUS XR/a
5 PURPOSE
Application mode
7-1 Film screen

combination/identification
7-2 Films development

equipment
Service mode
7-3 AEC parameters already

known?
NO YES
MENU4/AEC/F7 MENU4/AEC/F5
7-4 Automatic: 7-6 Manual parameters
Fast calibration entry
7-5 Record AEC

parameters
Application mode
7-7 Checksum validation
Select a ionization
chamber
7-8Lateral check
YES
Other ionization chamber?
END
Illustration - OVERVIEW
312
PROTEUS XR/a
JOB CARD CAL JEDI 8-2 - Automated AEC Calibration has three purposes:
• Fast AEC film calibration menu (MENU4/AEC/F7)
The main purpose of this job card is to perform a quick AEC film calibration.
This job card explains in particular how to use the “Fast calibration” Service menu of JEDI software.
• Manual entering AEC parameters menu (MENU4/AEC/F5)
For already known screen-film combinations and/or ionization chambers, the corresponding parameters, (KVEF,
KTIME, KF) and/or (KG), could be entered directly without performing the Fast Calibration.
• AEC response check
Check the good response of ionization chambers and measuring circuitry.
6 OPERATING CONDITIONS
6-1 Definition and measurement of optical density
Optical density is measured over the based fog:

• process a non-exposed film,
• read its optical density: it is the “base fog”,
• set to 0 the densitometer on this base fog.
base fog
313
PROTEUS XR/a
6-2 For “AEC film calibration only”
6-2-1 Focal distance
Bucky Table Vertical Bucky
1.00 m SID normally used, according to the grid localization distance.

(most frequent:1.00, 1.50, or 1.80 m)
6-2-2 Incidence:
Orthogonal incidence.
6-2-3 X-ray field:
Minimum dimensions: Bucky: 12 x 18 cm.
Lateral
Phantom centered over the ionization central measurement cell.
6-2-4 Collimation
Automatic Collimation Manual Collimation

Action full field Open the collimator blades to cassette size
314
PROTEUS XR/a
7 PROCEDURE
The goal of this section is to identify the different film/screen combinations, and classify them by sensitivity: Slow,
Medium and Fast.
7-1 Film screen combinations identification
• Ask the customer which combinations of Screen / Film he is using, and their relative sensitivities: which one is
the fastest, which one is the slowest.
• Limit to 3 the number of combinations to be exposed with the Automatic Exposure Control.
Warn the customer to operate without AEC for the other combinations.
• Fill the following table:
Screen Film Film/screen combination
Manufacturer Name Manufacturer Name

A = slowest
B
C = fastest
• Declare the number of Film/Screen combinations into JEDI: A, A and B, or A,B and C: refer to Job card CAL
JEDI 8-4.
7-2 Films development equipment
• Check that the automatic processor is available

• Check that solution concentrations and temperatures comply with the manufacturer’s specifications.
• Plot a sensitometric curve.
- All gray scale levels should be visible, and the base fog should not exceed 0.2 for the development
equipment to be correct.
- Gamma should be between 2 and 3.
315
PROTEUS XR/a
SENSITOMETRIC CURVE
FIRST INSTALLATION PLANNED MAINTENANCE CHECK DATE:

FILM OPTICAL DENSITY
3.6 3.6
3.4 3.4
3.2 3.2
3.0 3.0
2.8 2.8
2.6 2.6
2.4 2.4
2.2 2.2
2.0 2.0
1.8 1.8
1.6 1.6
1.4 1.4
1.2 1.2
1.0 1.0
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
0.2 0.2
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS
316
PROTEUS XR/a
7-3 AEC parameters already known?
Known AEC parameters: Unknown AEC parameters
• For already known screen-film combinations • Perform the Fast Calibration.

and/or ionization chambers, the corresponding • Refer to section 7–4.
parameters, (KVEF, KTIME, KF) and/or (KG),
could be directly entered without performing
the Fast Calibration.
• Refer to section 7–6.
317
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4 AEC Fast Calibration Menu (MENU4/AEC/F7)
7-4-1 Preliminary for KTIME

Enter service modes, ENU4/AEC/F5/KTIME
7-4-2-2 Preselections:
Enter Service mod MENU4/AEC/F7
• Screen-film
combination
7-4-3 Run KVEF calibration

Run KVEF calibration
NO
7-4-3 All kV steps performed?
NO
All kV steps performed? YES
YES
7-4-4 Run KTIME calibration (if needed)
Run KTIME calibration (if needed) For each of the 4 time value
For each of the 4 time values
NO
All exposure times performed?
NO
All exposure times
YES
performed?
YES
7-4-5
Run KF calibration (if needed)
YES
YES
Other screen-film? Select screen-film
(2 more possible B, C) combination
NO
7-4-6-1
7-4-6-3
Other ionization chamber? YES
(3 more possible) Select ionization chamber
7-4-6-4
NO
Run KG calibration
END
318
PROTEUS XR/a
• If an error occurs
- To redo an exposure after an exposure, reset by pressing Z key.
- To redo an exposure after entering the optical density, enter “0” for optical density and redo the
exposure.
- To clear optical density, press CTRL + H keys and enter the new optical density.
• Loops
- In case of one ionization chamber:
Run the KVEF and KTIME calibration for each film screen combination for the ionization
chamber.
- In case of multiple ionization chambers:
Run the KVEF and KTIME calibration for each film screen combination for one ionization
chamber.
Run only the KG calibration for the other ionization chambers using the same screen film
combination.
7-4-1 Preliminary for KTIME
• Enter in Service mode, then MENU4/AEC/F5/KTIME

• Check T values are equal to T values in the table below:
N 0 1 2 3 4 5
T 10 ms 100 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 2000 ms 3200 ms
• Validate each changed value by pressing the V key

• Press R to return to MENU4/AEC.
7-4-2 Initialization
• Enter in Service mode, then MENU4 / F7
7-4-2-1 Keys description
• <- or -> keys to select the ionization chamber to be calibrated

• F1/F2 keys to select the exposure number
• F3/F4 keys to select the focus (generally Large Focus)
• F5/F6 keys to select the kV
• F7/F8 keys to select the mAs in Renard scale
• F9/F10 keys to select Plexiglass thickness
• 0 to 9 keys to enter the optical density (target or measured)
• T key to select and modify target density
319
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4-2-2 Preselection
• A, B or C key to select screen film type (slow, medium, fast) (if only one film-screen, select A key) The
selected film-screen key flickers.
7-4-3 KVEF parameter acquisition
AEC1 1 0,00V L 80kV 10mAs 15cm OD=0,00
Ionization Exposure AEC Focus Kilovolt Exposure Plexi Optical

Chamber Number Reference time Thickness Density
1 film, 1 exposure (bucky configuration)
• Run the first exposure proposed by the software with the 1st first value (80kV) of the kV series
• Develop the film
• Measure the optical density for the film
• Enter the associated read optical density
• Validate the value with the W key
• Run the next exposure with the new parameters calculated by the software
• Develop the film(s)
• Measure the optical density for each film or image
• Enter the associated read optical density
• Validate the value with the W key - Redo the next exposure and enter the density until the V button
flicker
• When the V button flickers, record in table para. 7–5 the mAs0 displayed and press V key
• Select the next kV step in the kV series (80kV, 100 kV, max kV, 40 kV and 60 kV). and repeat
operation
• Start the KT time calibration by pressing V key after V button lighted at the end of the first screen-film
KVEF calibration
320
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4-4 KTIME Parameter Calibration (Exposure Time Correction)
7-4-4-1 Auto calibration
The calibration can be by-passed by pressing V key again.

AEC1 1 0,00V L 80kV 0.500ms 25cm OD=0,00
Ionization Exposure AEC Focus Kilovolt Exposure Plexi Optical

Chamber Number Reference time Thickness Density
1 film, 1 exposure (Bucky configuration)
• Set the proposed Plexiglass thickness
• Run the exposure proposed by the software with 0.5s
• Measure the optical density for each film
• Enter the density measured. Validate the value with W key
• Set the proposed Plexiglass thickness
• Run the proposed exposure (1s)
• Measure the optical density
• Enter the associated read optical density. Redo the exposure for other exposure time, 2s, 3.2s, 10ms
• Validate the value with the W key, after entered density value
• Validate the software calculated KTIME parameter with V key
• Select the next screen/film combination if existing and start again the KVef + KTime setting procedure
from para 7–4–1
• Press the V key again to enter the KF calibration (bypass the KF calibration, if not required by hitting V
key again)
321
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4-4-2 Warning:
In case of film too dark, after calibration, for exposure time below 10ms, you must insert an additional step
between 0 and 10ms and remove the step at 2s.
How to proceed:
Write down manually the Kt values you obtained during automatic calibration for the step 10ms, 0.1s, 0.5s, 1s, 2s
and 3.2s in table below (see procedure to read the value in para 7.6).
Original values from the auto calibration :
Time T0=10ms T1=0.1s T2=0.5s T3=1s T4=2s T5=3.2s

Kt0 Kt1=1 Kt2 Kt3 Kt4 Kt5
Value
1/ Use the procedure in para 7.6.1.2 to change manually the T0 to T5 time values according to table below.
2/ enter in the table below the values already known (from auto calibration, table above). Note that the 2s value is
removed.
3/ Enter for T0=2ms a Kt new value which is lower than the one for T1=10ms.
4/ Run a manual exposure in application mode with an exposure time between 2ms and 10ms (ex: 120kV 10cm
of plexiglass or water).
5/ Check the film darkness and adjust the Ktnew value until the darkness result is good.
- If too dark, decrease the value.
- If too light, increase the value.
Time T0=2ms T1=10ms T2=0.1s T3=0.5s T4=1s T5=3.2s

Ktnew Kt0 Kt1=1 Kt2 Kt3 Kt5
Value
322
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4-5 KF Parameter Calibration (Format Correction)
This procedure has to be run for only 1 ionization chamber, only for one screen / film combination only in case of
Automatic collimation.
The phantom must cover the entire field for 36x43 format cassette.
• Format coding
X-ray field depends on the cassette size and the eventual division.
It is sensed and coded by the cassette tray and sent to JEDI.
Table top
Cassette l = lateral
L=
longitudinal
• Rad system: format coding by Automatic collimation device for bucky
Definition formula Example Format code in Suggested

L x l (cm x cm) included in L x l (cm x cm) Service laptop KF value
range area
171-250 13 x 18 4 1.08
381-570 18 x 24 6 1.05
571-850 24 x 30 7 1.04
851-1300 30 x 40 8 1.02
1301-2000 36 x 43 9 1.00
323
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4-5-1 Procedure
AEC1 xxxx L 60kV 10mAs 10cm CO=1,00
Ionization Format Focus Kilovolt mAs Plexi Coefficient KF

Chamber Thickness
• Load the first cassette of the list in table above

• Insert the cassette into the cassette tray
• Check the format code, if format is not recognized display is NO, load next cassette and check the format
code, if not recognized display is NO, reload the next cassette go on
• Enter the suggested KF value, in table above according to the cassette size
• Run the proposed exposure
• Modify KF according to the table below:
Optical density Multiply KF by

2.5 - 2 0.4
2 - 1.5 0.6
1.5 - 1.06 0.5
1.06 - 0.94 no change
0.94 - 0.5 1.5
0.5 - 0.3 2
• Repeat this procedure until optical density =1 ±6%

• Validate the value with the W key and the displayed format becomes ”NO” (no format)
• Repeat the sequence for the next cassette of the list.
324
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4-6 KG Parameter Calibration (Grid Correction)
7-4-6-1 Applicability
This procedure has to be performed for 2nd ionization chamber, if it is present., and with only one screen / film
combination (the slowest for example).
In case of only one ionization chamber: Press R key to by-pass KG calibration and go to section 7–4–6–5.
7-4-6-2 Procedure
AEC2 0.00V L 80kV xxmAs 15cm OD = 0.00
Ionization AEC Focus Kilovolt mAs Plexi Optical

Chamber Reference Thickness density
7-4-6-3 STEP 1
• Select the screen / film combination A

• Select the ionization chamber with the arrow keys (AEC2)
• Set the SID at the same distance used for KVEF on AEC1. If not possible, go to STEP 3.
7-4-6-4 STEP 2
• Run the proposed exposure

• Enter the optical density value
• Repeat the same operations for the next proposed exposures until the V key flickers
• When the V key flickers, press the V key (end of calibration)
• Press the R key.
325
PROTEUS XR/a
7-4-6-5 STEP 3
Application Mode • Hit R key to return to Application mode

• Put 15 cm Plexiglass plate in front of Wall Stand (AEC2)
• Set 2 Point Mode
• Set kV to 80
• Set the backup mAs: • mAs = mAs0 x (SID)2 x 2
• mAs0 = mAs at 80 kV for AEC1 found during
KVEF calibration (see table mAs0 7–5–1)
• SID = Wall Stand SID
• Run exposure in AEC
• Measure the density
Service Mode • If density < 0.94 or density > 1.06 then
• Go to MENU 4 AEC F5 (service mode)
• Select KG (Key F3)
• Select Grille 2 (Key F5/F6)
• Modify KG according to table below
• Repeat the procedure until density = 1 ±6%
• If 0.94 < density < 1.06 then
• KG value is good
• press the V key to validate
Optical density Multiply KG by

2.5 - 2 0.4
2 - 1.5 0.6
1.5 - 1.06 0.5
1.06 - 0.94 no change
0.94 - 0.5 1.5
0.5 - 0.3 2
326
PROTEUS XR/a
7-5 Record AEC parameters
7-5-1 Procedure for mAs0 recording
mAs0 records at the end of each kV step of KVEF calibration. Fill the table below.
mAs0 reporting table:
mAs0 AEC1
Sensitivity 40 kV 60 kV 80 kV 100 kV Max kV
A
B
C
mAs0 AEC2
A
B
C
7-5-2 Procedure for AEC parameters recording
Access to the AEC parameters, select the Service Mode, MENU4 / AEC / F5 and fill the table below.
AEC parameters reporting table:
KVEF [F1] key

A
B
C
KTIME [F5] key

10 ms 100 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 2000 ms 3200 ms
A
B
C
327
PROTEUS XR/a
Rad system KF [F9] key

Definition formula Example Format code in
L x l (cm x cm) included in range L x l (cm x cm) Service laptop KF value
area
171-250 13 x 18 4
381-570 18 x 24 6
571-850 24 x 30 7
851-1300 30 x 40 8
1301-2000 35 x 43 9
KG [F3] key
Image receptor #1 #2
Value
To continue the Automatic Fast Calibration, go to section 7–7, and then 7–8.
328
PROTEUS XR/a
7-6 Manual entering AEC parameters menu (MENU4/AEC/F5)
The goals of this section are:

• Explaining how to enter manually AEC parameters instead of performing the automatic fast calibration.
• KVEF, KTIME, KG and KF parameters can be entered separately.
7-6-1 Procedure
• Call the AEC menu (MENU4 / AEC / F5)
AEC KVEF KG KTIME KF

7-6-1-1 Set KVEF
• Use the function key F1 to select sub-routine KVEF
AECV 40KV 1 a.bc
KV step screen-film KVEF

combination
1, 2 or 3
• Select screen-film combination with A, B or C keys
• Select kV step 40, 60, 80, 100, or kV max with F3/F4 keys
• Set KVEF to known value with key pad
• Validate each new setting with W key
• Press the R key when settings have been completed.
329
PROTEUS XR/a
7-6-1-2 Set KTIME
• Use function key F5 to select sub-routine KG
AEC T N=0 T=0.5 1 a.bc
Time step # Time screen-film KTIME

combination
1, 2 or 3
• Use the following keys to select the screen-film combination: A for combination 1, B for combination 2, C
for combination3. The screen-film combination selected is displayed in reverse video
• Select time step number with F1/F2 keys. (N = 0 T = 10ms, N = 1 T = 100ms, N = 2 T = 500, N = 3 T =
1s, N = 4 T = 2s, N = 5 T = 3.2s)
• If necessary, select time with F3/F4 keys
• Set KTIME to the known value with F9/F10 keys
• Validate each new setting with the W key
• Press the R key when the settings have been completed.
7-6-1-3 Set KG
• Use the function key F3 to select sub-routine KG
AEC G GRILLE 1 KG=a.b
grid No. (from 1 to 4) KG (0.8 to 2)

• Use the function keys F5/F6 to scroll grid (grid number corresponds to the ionization chamber number).
Set KG to the known value using F9/F10 keys
330
PROTEUS XR/a
7-6-1-4 Set KF
• Use function key F9 to select sub-routine KF
AEC F FORMAT OI KV 1.2
Format code (00 to 16) KF (0.5 to 1.50)

• Use function key F5/6 to scroll format code. Set KF to the know value using F9/F10 keys
7-7 Checksum Validation
Before exiting service mode, the checksum must be validated after settings have been completed; refer to
Calibration Job Card “Checksum Validation” CAL JEDI 8-5.
7-8 Lateral cell check
7-8-1 Goal
Check that the 3 cells have the same response.
7-8-2 Principle
Repeat this procedure for each ionization chamber.

Select successively the different cells, and verify that the mAs maximum variation range does not exceed 40%.
7-8-3 Failure root causes
• Failure in the ionization chamber pre-amplifier.
7-8-4 Procedure
• Plexiglass thickness = 10 cm
• Select one image receptor
• X-ray field should be large enough to cover the 3 cells
• Application mode
• AEC on
• density correction = 0
• film screen /film key = fastest
• 3 point mode
331
PROTEUS XR/a
• kV = 60
• mA = 100
• mAs = 32
• Select the cell(s) and make exposure according the reporting table
• Compute the mAs variation
• Repeat the procedure for each image receptor equipped with ionization chamber.
7-8-5 If failure
• Replace the ionization chamber and restart the complete calibration process this ionization chamber.
7-9 Reporting table
7-9-1 Ionization chamber #1
Lateral cells check
Cells Post-displayed mAs variation range

mAs
C
C
C
L mAs (max) − mAs (min)
L mAs (min)
L
R Should be less than 26%
R
R
LR
LR
LR
LCR
LCR
LCR
332
PROTEUS XR/a
7-9-2 Ionization chamber #2
Lateral cells check
Cells Post-displayed mAs variation range

mAs
C
C
C
L mAs (max) − mAs (min)
L mAs (min)
L
R Should be less than 26%
R
R
LR
LR
LR
LCR
LCR
LCR
333
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Checksum Validation

date: 20/12/99
from / / from Time: 0h 05min
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- Service laptop with Floppy Drive
- Service tools Part
Not applicable.
4 PREREQUISITES
Service laptop must be configured and software installed (refer to ”Service Software User Guide” Job Card).
334
PROTEUS XR/a
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Preliminary Remarks
Checksums must be validated at end of generator setup or whenever a parameter is

NOTICE
changed.
In the checksum validation process, the processor computes a number which is a function of all the setup
parameters. When the generator is powered up, this number is computed, i.e. the sum is ”checked”.
If the two numbers differ, the generator displays error an code, indicating that one or more parameters have
been changed since the last time the sums were checked, or that a RAM-related incident has occurred.
Note: X-ray generation is inhibited if there is a checksum error.
Note: The display Va . b on menu 5 is for the software version in the CPU board EPROMS.
335
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2 Checksum Validation
Call RAMS (setup mode, menu 5, function key [F1]
Resulting display :
RAMS CKSM MCLR

Enter function key [F1] and [V] simultaneously.
A buzzer will sound, indicating that the sums have been checked
and OK on display screen.
MCLR is used to erase all setup parameters. Function key [F3] corresponding to this
NOTICE
function, should never be used.
336
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Backup & Restore Database Setup Parameters

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
- Service laptop
- Service tools
Not applicable.
4 PREREQUISITES
1. The service laptop must be configured and the software installed (refer to ”Service Software User Guide”
Job Card)
2. All calibrations must have been completed.
337
PROTEUS XR/a
5 APPLICABILITY
Setup parameters must be logged after the setup procedure has been completed, or whenever theses
parameters are changed. This enable service engineers to key in parameters rapidly, i.e. when changing the KV
Control Board, in the event of a battery outage.
6 PROCEDURE
6-1 CPU MEMORY BACKUP
The generator must be in application mode. The control console push buttons will be inactive during the transfer.
- Connect service laptop to XJ8 on the I/F Board.
- Power up.
- Insert the calibration floppy disk without write protection.
- From Laptop Dos, A: (It can also be run from Service Laptop Hard Disk Drive but in DOS mode).
- Type JEDI on the terminal.
- Hit [F6] to save memory.
The system ask for a file name. Default file name is A:\sv_var.mx.
- Type a file name or hit [ENTER].
During transfer, the number of sent trames is displayed.
When transfer ends, the message “Transfer successful” is displayed.
If any error is detected, the transfer stops and an error message is displayed.
See next page for list of error messages.
338
PROTEUS XR/a
6-2 CPU Memory Restore Error Messages
All parameters stored in CPU NVRAM memory have been saved on calibration floppy disk. Therefore, in case of
change of KV Control board you can initialize CPU NVRAM by transferring data from this floppy disk.
The procedure needs to Unplug the cable from system I/F board Connector J118. Then hit [F7] instead of [F6]
in service mode to restore memory.
This procedure is also used to down load new software (File type for Database or Software is automatically
recognized).
Note: In this case, calibration floppy disk can be write-protected.
Note: Error during memory restore may cause unpredictable result. A new transfer is required.
If generator is locked, power OFF and begin again the entire memory restore procedure.
6-2-1 Error Messages
MESSAGE ERROR
Cannot open file - No floppy disk.

- Floppy write protected (backup).
File contains data. The file already exists (backup).

Delete old (y,n): If you answer ”y”, the existing fole will be erased.
Error time out - Generator OFF.

- Service Terminal not connected to generator.
- Cable to system I/F board connector J118 is connected when
restore memory.
Error communication Error during transfer. Try a new transfer from the beginning.
Note: Ensure asian.exe software is run under DOS and not

WINDOWS.
339
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: DOSE Calibration

purpose: Set system configuration version no. 0
date: 20/2/2001
to / / to
Introduction
This is a sub-step to set system configuration
Procedures
1 See Job Card CAL 002, SET SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
2 Press DOSE CALIBRATION, enter the interface below.
3 Select the figure you want to change, and press the Up or Down arrow button to change it.
4 Press OK or CANCEL to save or not save the new configuration and return to the upper interface.
340
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Light field – X ray field alignment (For Proteus XR/a Collimator Only)
purpose: Calibration version no. 1
date: 18/4/2001
to / / to
Illustration 1: collimator cover

1
Illustration 2: light visor
341
PROTEUS XR/a
Introduction
The collimator had been calibrated in the factory before the shipment. The situation in shipment maybe will result
in some small variation. Therefore, if necessary, the collimator should be realigned.
Alignment light field – x-ray field
• Power off the system.

• Remove left collimator cover sheet (Illustration 1/, side cover with ventilation slits).
• Remove shielding piece (Illustration 2/, temperature shield above light visor).
• Loosen front counter nuts (Illustration 2/) and the two illustrated hexagon nuts (Illustration 2/).
• Adjust light field position with the screws (Illustration 1/) by Allen wrench (2mm).
Attention: Use only appropriate tools not to damage screws.
Indication: Final light field position is given after fixation of screws.
• Check light field / X-ray field superposition and brightness. Repeat adjustment if not OK.
Note: The overmuch adjustment of the screws (Illustration 1/) may affect the light intensity equality of
the light field. Apply Job Card CAL 014 to calibrate the collimator bulb to adjust the light intensity
equality when necessary.
• Fix counter nuts (Illustration 2/) and the hexagon nuts (Illustration 2/). Secure in the same time the screws
(Illustration 1/).
• Mount shielding piece (Illustration 2/). Apply it at first on the right side and swivel in the left side.
• Mount collimator cover (Illustration 1/).
Note: After adjustment of the light field, it may be necessary to readjust the line laser.
Caution: The line laser is already adjusted at the factory. Only under the specific situation that the
deviation between the light field center and line laser could not be limited within 3mm through
adjusting the light field should the line laser be readjusted at the install sites.
For the line laser readjustments, please refer to the procedures below.
• Line laser readjustment.
1) Open the collimator front panel with the 2 screws on the right side (2.5 mm allen wrench.)
Note: Observe ESD guidelines!
2) Adjust the laser line with the two screws (2.5 mm Allen wrench) (Illustration 3 resp.
Illustration 4) to the middle of the cross hair. The laser line must not differ for more than +/-
3mm from the middle of the crosshair.
342
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 3: line laser (old laser fixing)
Line Laser
1
Illustration 4: line laser (new laser fixing)
1
Line Laser
3) Close the front panel and fix it with 2 screws (2.5 mm Allen wrench).
343
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Calibrate Proteus XR/a Collimator Bulb

date: 18/4/2003
to / / to
Procedure
2b
1a
1b
2a
1a: adjustment screw for width

1b: clamping screw for width
2a: adjustment screw for height
2b: clamping screw for height
WARNING
DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB SOCKET CONTACTS TO AVOID SHORT CIRCUIT. TIGHTEN
THE SCREW 2B WHILE THE BULB IS SWITCHED OFF TO AVOID SHORT CIRCUIT.
344
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Calibrate Proteus XR/a Manual Collimator Bulb and its Voltage
date: 12/12/2005
to / / to
Introduction
Lamp voltage on Manual collimator is provided by OTS transformer, The main power situation on site maybe
result in improper voltage to Lamp on Collimator. The appropriate tap should be seleted on XT control board by
measuring voltage.
Tools
RMS Multimeter
Procedure
measure voltage between ground and J8 , J9, J10, J11, on XT control board, select the appropriate tap for
voltage is between 22.5VAC and 24VAC.
345
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Calibrate SG120 Wall Stand Vertical Locks

date: 30/9/2004
to / / to
Note: If you have chosen SG120 Wall Stand as an option, please refer to the following contents.
Even if the calibration of the vertical locks is performed when the equipment leaves the factory, they can be re-
calibrated when needed.
Procedure
1. Make sure the equipment is switched OFF.
2. To access the vertical lock assembly, remove the lateral and frontal covers from the column assembly.
3. The vertical lock assembly is located between the vertical carriage and the column stand and is
accessible from the bottom behind the bucky support assembly.
4. Set the bucky carriage at the appropriate height and adjust the brakes actuating on the 2 (1 for each
brake) adjustment screws marked on the right of the figures above.
1) Rotate the screws CCW (counter-clockwise) direction to approximate the brake to the brake
surface (column stand).
2) Rotate the screw CW (clockwise) direction to separate the brake from the brake surface.
Note: A distance of 0.5mm between the brake surface and the brake can be set as a start point
for the calibration.
Note: The calibration has to be made considering there is no friction between the brakes and the
brake surface (column stand) and the noise factor.
Check there is no collision between the brakes and the brake surface and the bucky
carriage can be displaced smoothly all along the vertical whole track. Just a slight friction
between the brakes and the brake surface at any point along the vertical track could be
accepted in order to minimize the noise of brake actuation.
5. Assembly the covers removed in step 2.
346
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/10 SW 001
subassembly: Console Buzzer Upgrade Kit Installation

date: 27/5/2020
to / / to
Introduction
The purpose of this Technical Bulletin is to introduce lower level FRU 5832177 to fix the low buzzer sound
issue on Proteus XR/a system console 5441870 (FRU 5462233). And the exposure aware beep lost
intermittently when the lowest mAs set.
Procedure
Preparation: Power down system. Detach and remove cables to access the system console.
1. Remove both side covers.
2. Remove label. Use clean rag to remove label residue from console.
3. Remove rear cover by removing 6 screws from the rear cover using a cross-screwdriver.
4. Cut Ty-Wrap from cable harness, taking care not to cut wiring.
5. Remove 2 screws holding buzzer to buzzer board.
6. Remove 2 countersunk screws holding power plate. Set aside for replacement of power plate.
7. Unplug all 9 cables, a through i, then remove power supply board. Take care not to damage plugs, sockets, and wiring.
347
PROTEUS XR/a
8. Remove 2 screws holding power plate to power supply board. Set aside for replacement of power plate to power
supply board.
9. Remove power plate. Set aside for reattachment to replacement power supply board.
10. Reusing 2 screws removed in Step 8, attach new power supply board to power plate.
348
PROTEUS XR/a
11. Check and verify the Mylar sheet of the power plate is aligned as shown.
12. Connect buzzer plug to new Buzzer board.
13. N/A.
14. Install Insulation Sheet to the cover as shown.
349
PROTEUS XR/a
15. Install buzzer board above insulation sheet.
16. Install buzzer to buzzer board using two screws included in kit.
17. Use 2 new screws to fix the buzzer.
18. Connect the buzzer plug

19. Connect the backlight attachment plug (OUT)
20. Connect the backlight attachment plug (IN)
21. Connect the touch screen attachment plug (IN)
350
PROTEUS XR/a
22. Connect the touch screen attachment plug (OUT)

23. Connect the keypad cable plug
24. Connect socket connection cable plug
25. Connect the power supply cable plug
26. Connect the fan attachment plug
27. Check the nine (a~i) plugs fixed tightly and dispensing fixed socket
28. Fix the power fixed plate tightly with two countersunk head screws by using a screwdriver.
29. Use Ty-Wrap to bundle cables together.

30. Remove excess Ty-Wrap flush.
351
PROTEUS XR/a
31. Route all wiring under power panel as shown, ensuring all wiring does not come in contact with the fan.
32. Make cables stay away from fan.
352
PROTEUS XR/a
33. Assemble back cover on the whole machine with 6 screws

34. Paste the disassembly prevention label on both sides.
35. Assemble side cover on both sides.
353
PROTEUS XR/a
36. Reattach and reconnect the system console.

37. Power up system.
38. Perform Functional Checks that include ensuring that the buzzer is functioning correctly.
software update Procedures

Caution: Please DO NOT insert and take out the USB disk during the system is on.
1. APR Record/Backup
Notice: Create APR backup need the "APR&AEC" USB disk (5437888)
According to the system power choose correct USB disk.
Make sure it is not read only.
a. Power off the system.

b. Insert the "APR&AEC" USB disk to console.
c. Power on the system.
d. Press "Procedure edit" button.
e. Press OK to enter Procedure edit mode.
f. Press Save/Retrieve button to enter Save/Retrieve menu.
g. Back up your protocol info to the "APR&AEC" USB disk by press "Save/Backup"
h. Power off the system
i. Take out the USB disk.
j. Verify the backup files is correct on your laptop.
354
PROTEUS XR/a
.
2. Software update procedure
Notice: Please install the correct software according to the relationship between the version display at the service
interface and the label on the USB.

b. Insert the "console software" USB disk to console.
c. Power on the system the software will install automatic and complete as photo.
d. Power off the system.

e. Take out the USB disk.
f. Power on the system and press and hold the increase/decrease button untill the service information display.
g. Confirm the software is 2.20 or 2.20VA
355
PROTEUS XR/a
h. Press Done and get into the operation interface.

3. APR Save/Retrieve
b. Insert the "APR&AEC" USB disk to console.
c. Power on the system.
d. Press "Procedure edit" to enter "Save/Retrieve" menu.
e. Retrieve the protocol from the "APR&AEC" USB disk to the console by press "Retrieve Backup".
f. Wait until "Retrieving APR data complete" is displayed.
g. Press EXIT button to exit this menu. APR disk recovery is done
h. Power off the system
i. Take out the USB disk.
Section 4 - System function check

Perform Functional Checks that include ensuring that the buzzer is functioning correctly.
356
PROTEUS XR/a
357
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONAL CHECK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION………………………………………………………………… 359

SECTION 2 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT……………………………………………… 360
SECTION 3 SYSTEM POWER ON…………………………………………………………… 360
SECTION 4 TABLE…………………………………………………………………………….. 361
SECTION 5 WALL STAND, SG100 WALL STAND, AND SG120 WALL STAND…….. 363
5-1 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301)………………………………………….. 363
5-2 SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849)………………………………….. 363
5-3 SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2402562)…………………………………… 371
SECTION 6 CASSETTE TRAY………………………………………………………………… 374
SECTION 7 OTS SUSPENSION………………………………………………………………. 374
SECTION 8 JEDI GENERATOR………………………………………………………………. 375
CHK JEDI 38-2 Performance Checks…………………………………………… 375
CHK JEDI 38-4 Invasive mA Measurement……………………………………. 390
SECTION 9 ANODE HEAT INTEGRATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST………………………… 394
SECTION 10 Dose indication…………………………………………………………………. 394
358
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
Functional Checks describes the procedures necessary to determine whether the
Proteus XR/a system (Refer to Illustration 5-1) is operating correctly and
performing within specifications.
All the Proteus XR/a system functions should be conform to safety regulations,
local codes or other applicable standards.
• Operational Checks.
• Performance Checks.
Operational Checks may be performed by the customer or trained personnel.

These checks only indicate that the unit is functioning correctly at an operational
level. They do not indicate that the unit is performing to specification.
Performance Checks must be performed by trained personnel only. These

checks verify that the unit is performing to specification. It is recommended to
complete these checks during and after installation, during periodic maintenance,
and when the equipment is replaced or modified.
Note: Before performing Functional Checks all calibrations must be

completed. (Refer to chapter 4 Calibration).
Illustration 5-1
PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM
359
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
In addition to the standard serviceman tool kit the following tools and test
equipment will be necessary to perform the functional checks described in this
chapter:
• DVM
• Metric Tape Measure
• KEITHLEY 35080A kV peak meter (or equivalent)
• RADCAL MDH2025 dosimeter (or equivalent) with 20x5-60 probe
SECTION 3
SYSTEM POWER ON
Note: Before this step, all electrical cable must be connected and examined
Power on the Proteus XR/a system, verify that system console’s booting
correctly.
360
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 4
TABLE
4-1 Operational Check
When the assembly and electrical connections have been completed, perform
the following tests to verify the table's travel and vertical operations. Tests for the
table's elevating function is required only for elevating table.
4-1-1 Check the Float Operation

Double click and depress the four-way float pedal. The tabletop should move
freely in either direction. Release the foot pedal. This energizes the four
longitudinal magnets, locking the tabletop securely.
Depressing the bucky switch should release the bucky magnet, and the bucky
should move freely in the longitudinal.
4-1-2 Check the Up/Down Pedals

Double click and depress the Up and then the Down foot pedal. The following
should occur while the foot pedal is depressed:
1. The tabletop should start to move either up or down according to which foot
pedal is depressed.
2. The four-way float foot pedal (the outside pedals) should be INACTIVE (the
table top four-way floating action should remain locked) while the table top is
in motion.
If the table can’t move when double click and depress the Up or Down foot pedal,
please check the switch backside in the sensor.
PLEASE ACTIVE THE EMERGENCY STOP OR INHIBITION BUTTON

WARNING BEFORE DOING ANY ADJUSTMENT UNDER THE TABLE.
There should
leave a gap
Switch backside
Sensor
Adjust each switch backside; insert it into the notch of the sensor. Make sure the
switch backside won’t touch the sensor when release the foot pedal. There
should leave a gap between the switch backside and the sensor.
361
PROTEUS XR/a
4-1-3 Check the Table Position

Position the tabletop into its approximate central position. Lower the tabletop until
it stops. The tabletop should measure approximately 550mm (560mm for table
with Toe jam sensor) from the floor. Now raise the tabletop until it stops. The
tabletop should measure approximately 800mm from the floor. Refer to
Illustration 5-2.
Illustration 5-2
Table Height
800+/-10mm
max
550mm+10mm min
If a modification in the height limits (lower and upper) is required to meet these
specifications, it is necessary to adjust the Up/Down Limit Board located at the
front of the base.
4-1-4 Adjusting the Up/Down Limit Board

See table height limitation calibration
362
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 5
WALL STAND, SG100 WALL STAND, AND SG120 WALL STAND
5-1 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301)
1. Depress the handle button, Wall Bucky should be able to move up and down
freely and locks in place when released.
2. Check the bucky up and down motion is smooth and operating force is less
than 5kg when inserting a 14”x17” cassette. If not, go to the Job Card CAL 008-
Wall Stand (GPCP No. 600-0301), SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849), and
SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2402562) counterweight calibration.
Illustration 5-1
5-2 SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849)
Note: The information in this section is concerted with the revision 6 of SG100 Wall Stand Service
Manual (GPCP Number 2150297-100). For the reason of the update and change in that manual, it is
5-2-1 Vertical Locks
With power on: using the vertical lock handle, release the mechanical and
electro-mechanical vertical locks, then verify that the carriage can move freely
and smoothly over its entire range of travel with minimum side play.
If the carriage remains locked when the mechanical lock is released, check the
lock board feeding the electro-mechanical lock (Refer to Form 1).
363
PROTEUS XR/a
Form - 1 Lock Board Functional Checks

LOCK FAILURE CHECK
Vertical Locks do not engage when releasing lock handle. 24 VDC between TP-9 and TP-10.
Locks remain engaged when operating lock handle. Handle microswitch or relay K11.
Locks release is delayed when operating lock handle. Relay K14.
Angulation Lock remains engaged when pressing pushbutton. 24 VDC between TP-9 and TP-10 or
pushbutton.
If carriage motion is not smooth and free, ensure that counterweights and trim
covers are installed correctly. Add or remove counterweights until
counterbalance is achieved. (Refer to Job card CAL 008, Wall Stand (GPCP No.
600-0301), SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849), and SG120 Wall Stand
(GPCP No.: 2402562) in Chapter 4.)
Note: The carriage is counterbalanced when leaving the factory, however, if necessary,
Apply further counterweights to achieve the counterbalance (Refer to Job Card
CAL 008, Chapter 4).
Release the lock handle partially to engage the electro-mechanical locks. Verify
that the electro-mechanical locks engage before the mechanical lock
(approximately 1 mm before the mechanical lock engages). If the locks do not
engage, check the lock board. (Refer to Form1).
Release the lock handle all the way and verify that the mechanical lock’s teeth
fully engage. If not, check for misalignment, wear etc., and perform the
appropriate corrective action.
5-2-2 Bucky Angulation
Push one of the angulation lock pushbuttons on either side of the Bucky support
(and slightly rock the Bucky assembly if necessary) to release the angulation lock.
Verify that the angulation lock releases and that the Bucky can tilt forward 20o and
backward 90o freely and smoothly.
Illustration 5-2
Bucky Vertical (0o) Position Bucky Horizontal (90o) Position
If angulation motion is not satisfactory, check the condition of the bearings at the
Bucky pivot point in the Bucky support assembly.
If the angulation lock does not release, check the lock board. (Refer to Form 1).
Release the angulation lock pushbutton and verify that the angulation lock
engages, preventing further angulation of the Bucky. If the lock does not hold or it
binds, check the lock hardware for misalignment, wear etc., and perform the
appropriate corrective action.
364
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2-2-1 Microswitch Actuation
Microswitch S1 should be actuated when the Bucky is within 10° of vertical.

Microswitch S3 should be actuated when the Bucky is within 10° of horizontal.
Illustration 5-3
Note: Vertical Bucky Stands not equipped with an automatic collimator do not have
microswitches S1 and S3.
5-2-3 Bucky Rotation

With the rotation lock lever, release the rotational lock and verify that the Bucky can
be easily ratated from 0o to 180o (upright to upside down).
Reapply the rotation lock and verify that Bucky rotation is not possible. If the lock
does not engage properly, check the lock hardware for misalignment, wear etc.,
and perform the appropriate corrective action.
365
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 5-4
If the lock mechanism slips, it allows the bucky to rotate. Use the following
procedure to adjust the arm assembly. If the brake pad is too worn and the lock
mechanism still moves after making several adjustment attempts, the whole arm
assembly must be replaced.
Adjustment Lock Procedure
The adjustment of the rotation lock mechanism is performed by adjusting the two
threaded rods located inside the rotation lock system. These two rods push
against the lock cam enabling the desired adjustment.
Remove the two screws that hold the lock arm assembly using a 2.5 mm Allen
key.
Illustration 5-5
2. Remove the arm assembly and brake pad.
DO NOT ROTATE ARM ASSEMBLY. REMOVE THE BRAKE PAD CAREFULLY AS IT CAN
WARNING FALL INTO THE SG RATATION BOX AND WOULD BE IMPOSSIBLE TO RECOVER.
366
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 5-6
3. Adjust the threaded rods so that there is only enough movement between the brake pad and the arm to be able
to lock the brake assembly. Use a 1.5 mm Allen key.
Illustration 5-7
4. Re-insert the brake pad and arm assembly in position and check to ensure there is no rotation movement. This
adjustment may have to be done several times until there is no movement.
5. Once adjusted, apply loctite to threaded rods and re-insert brake pad and arm assembly.
367
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 5-8
6. Re-insert the two screws removed in step 1 and retighten.
5-2-3-1 Microswitch Actuation
368
PROTEUS XR/a
Microswitch S2-1 should be actuated when the Bucky is at 0o.

Microswitch S2-2 should be actuated when the Bucky is at 180o.
Note: Vertical Bucky Stands not equipped with an automatic collimator do not have microswitches
S2-1 and S2-2.
Illustration 5-9
Position of microswitches S1, S2, S3 Detail, S3

S2-2 is found in an analogous position 180°from S1 is found in the same location on the other side of the
that shown (See also Illustration 5-10) notched plate. Its activator cam is at the other extreme
of the notched plate’s rotation.
5-2-4 Vertical SID Points/Sitting Position

Rotate the Bucky to 0. and angulate it to 90. (horizontal), then fold down the foldable legs and lower the Bucky to
the floor. Verify that microswitch S5 is actuated when the Bucky legs touch the floor. (The Bucky is at the far
vertical SID point).
Raise the Bucky and verify that microswitch S4 is actuated when the Bucky reaches the near vertical SID point
(normally the point at which the Bucky front panel surface is at the same height as the table).
(Refer to Illustration 5-10)
Note: Vertical Bucky Stands not equipped with an automatic collimator do not have microswitches S4
and S5.
Illustration 5-10
369
PROTEUS XR/a
370
PROTEUS XR/a
5-3 SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2402562)
5-3-1 Vertical Locks
5-3-1-1 With power on

Using the vertical lock handle, release the electromechanical vertical locks, then verify that the carriage can move
freely and smoothly over its entire range of travel with minimum side play.
If the carriage remains locked when the electromechanical lock is released, check the lock board feeding the
electromechanical lock (see Table 1 below).
If carriage motion is not smooth and free, ensure that counterweights and trim covers are installed correctly. Add
or remove counterweights until counterbalance is achieved.
Note: The carriage is counterbalanced on leaving the factory, however, if necessary add further
counterweights to achieve the counterbalance.
5-3-2 SG120 Buckyk Angulation
5-3-2-1 Angulation lock

Push one of the angulation lock push buttons behind the front panel to release the angulation lock. Verify that the
angulation lock releases and that the Bucky can tilt forward 20 degrees and backward 90 degrees freely and
smoothly (Illustration 5-11).
If angulation motion is not satisfactory, check the condition of the bearings at the Bucky pivot point in the Bucky
support assembly.
If the angulation lock does not release, check the lock board.
Release the angulation lock push button and verify that the angulation lock engages, preventing further angulation
of the Bucky. If the lock does not hold or it binds, check the lock hardware for misalignment, wear etc... and
perform the appropriate corrective action.
5-3-2-2 Micro switch Actuation

- Micro switch S1 should be actuated when the Bucky is within 10 degrees of vertical.
- Micro switch S3 should be actuated when the Bucky is within 10 degrees of horizontal.
Illustration 5-11
Bucky vertical (0 degree) position Bucky Horizontal (90 degree) position
371
PROTEUS XR/a
5-3-3 SG120 Bucky Rotation
5-3-3-1 Rotation Lock

With the rotation lock lever, release the rotational lock and verify that the Bucky can be easily rotated from 0
degrees to 180 degrees (upright to upside down, Illustration 5-12).
Re-apply the rotation lock and verify that Bucky rotation is not possible. If the lock does not engage properly,
check the lock hardware for misalignment, wear etc... and perform the appropriate corrective action.
5-3-3-2 Micro switch Actuation

- Micro switch S2-1 should be actuated when the Bucky is at 0 degrees.
- Micro switch S2-2 should be actuated when the Bucky is at 180 degrees.
POSITIONS OF MICROSWITCHES S1, S2, S3
5-3-3-3 Rotation way check
Note: To realize a Right hand configuration and correct rotation way, please refer to IST009 of
Bucky Reversal Procedure.
372
PROTEUS XR/a
5-3-4 Vertical SID Points / Sittings Position
Rotate the Bucky to 0 degrees and angulate it to 90 degrees (horizontal). Verify that micro switch S5 is actuated
when the Bucky is at the far vertical SID point.
Raise the Bucky and verify that micro switch S4 is actuated when the Bucky reaches the near vertical SID point
(normally the point at which the Bucky front panel surface is at the same height as the table).
POSITIONS OF MICROSWITCHES S4, S5
5-3-5 Bucky Grid Check
Take an exposure with the vertical bucky stand selected.

The bucky grid should oscillate. Oscillation is distinctly audible and causes slight vibration of the bucky support
assembly.
Observe the film for quality. If shading or objectionable grid lines appear, check alignment with the tube for proper
local distance setting.
5-3-6 Control Board Check
Check the control board only in the case of failure of the electromechanical locks. See Table 1 below for checks.
TABLE 1
LOCK BOARD FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
LOCK FAILURE CHECK
Locks do not engage when 24 VDC in D3 or Q2
equipment is switched on
Vertical Locks remain engaged when Handle switch
operating lock handle
Locks do not engage when Handle switch
releasing lock handle
Angulation Locks remain engaged when 24 VDC in D3 or Q1/Q3
operating lock handle
373
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 6
CASSETTE TRAY
1. Confirm the pull-out and pull –in movement is smooth.
2. Pull out the cassette tray, insert a film cassette, then fasten the cassette lock.
Check the cassette size displayed on OTS console and collimator is correct.
3. If not, see Chapter 3-“cassette size calibration”.
SECTION 7
OTS SUSPENSION
As part of the functional check of the Proteus XR/a system, also perform the
functional checks for the OTS Suspension as found in the OTS Suspension
Service Manual 2277285-100 chapter 3 Functional Checks.
374
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 8
JEDI GENERATOR
PROTEUS XR/a (JEDI 50Plus R 1T & JEDI 80R1T) 1/12 CHK JEDI 38-2
subassembly: Performance Checks

date: 27/ 3/ 2000
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
Not applicable.
2 TOOLS
Service tool.
KEITHLEY 35080A kV peak meter.
RADCAL MDH 2025 dosimeter with 20x5-60 probe.
Standard precautions for work with ionizing radiation.
4 PREREQUISITES
All calibrations must have been completed.
375
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 2/12 CHK JEDI 38-2
5 GENERATOR PARAMETER ACCURACY
The precision of setting of all parameters (kVp, mA, exposure times, mAs) is checked, at variable settings of kVp,
first in Three Point mode and then in Two Point mode.
Note: kVp values are measured using kV peak meter Keithley 35080A.
5-1 Post Display
Values for mA, exposure times, and mAs are displayed on the CONSOLE after each exposure.
5-2 Accuracy Checks
5-2-1 Summary
Test exposures are made at specified settings, first in Three Point mode, then in Two Point mode, (without the
use of AEC, Automatic exposure Control). The values of parameters read during the exposure are noted and
compared with specified limits.
In each mode, exposures are made first with the small focal spot, then with the large focal spot, at kVp values of
60, 80, and 120 kVp.
In Three Point mode, each exposure is made at 20 mAs, and exposures are made with different values of mA and
exposure time at each kVp value.
In Two Point mode, exposures are made with different values of mAs at each kVp value.
The parameters to be set for each exposure are specified in Illustrations 1, 2, 3, and 4 of this document.
5-2-2 Procedure
Refer to Illustrations 1, 2, 3, 4.
Make a series of exposures corresponding to the values specified in the tables, and note the actual parameters
displayed for each exposure in the spaces provided.
For each parameter and each exposure, the tables specify acceptable high and low values.
CAUTION The measurements of mA, mAs and ms must be made using the post display
of the Service laptop. For kVp values, use the Keithley 35080A.
376
PROTEUS XR/a
5-3 Reproducibility and Linearity of exposures
5-3-1 Summary
Reproducibility and linearity are checked by making a series of exposures, measuring the actual dose produced in
each case. The results are used to calculate coefficients of variation (C) and linearity (L).
Record values in Illustration 5.
Measurements are made using a RADCAL MDH 2025 dosimeter, with the probe (20x5-60) positioned at 100 cm
(39 inches) from the focal spot.
CAUTION The measurements of mAs must be made using the post display of the Console
5-3-2 Reproducibility checks - Procedure
1. Position the probe as specified above.

2. Make ten exposures with the following conditions:
- Three Point mode,
- no AEC
- Large focal spot
- kVp 70 kVp
exposure time 200 mS
mA 100 mA
Note: Take care not to saturate the ionization cell. The maximum output dose permitted with the 20x5-
60 probe is 3.3 mR/ms.
3. For each exposure, note the measured dose (mR), and the mAs value shown on the POST DISPLAY in the
space provided in Illustration 5.
5-3-3 Linearity checks - Procedure
1. Position the probe as specified above.

2. Make ten exposures with the following conditions:
- Three Point mode,
- no AEC
- Large focal spot
- kVp 70 kVp
exposure time 200 mS
mA 125 mA
Note: Take care not to saturate the ionization cell. The maximum output dose permitted with the 20x5-
60 probe is 3.3 mR/ms.
3. For each exposure, note the measured dose (mR), and the mAs value shown on the POST DISPLAY in the
space provided in Illustration 5.
377
PROTEUS XR/a
5-4 Coefficients of Variation and Linearity
5-4-1 Reproducibility - Coefficient of Variation C
The coefficient of Variation, C, is defined as:
1 n
(Ri − Rm) 2
C=
Rm

i =1 n −1
where:
Ri = dose measured during exposure i
Rm = average dose measured over ten successive exposures taken

under the same conditions in less than an hour
n = number of exposures (ten)

Make the calculation and enter it into Illustration 5.
5-4-2 Coefficient of linearity L
The coefficient of Variation, L, is defined as:

Xm1 − Xm2 Rm1 Rm2
L= Xm1 = and Xm2 =
Xm1 + Xm2 A1 A2
where:
Rm1 = average dose measured over ten successive exposures taken
under the same conditions (in particular with the same value of mA,
here 100 mA), in less than an hour
Rm2 = average dose measured over ten successive exposures taken

under the same conditions (in particular with the same value of mA,
here 125 mA), in less than an hour
A1 = the mAs value used during the exposures used to measure Rm1
(here 20 mAs)
A2 = the mAs value used during the exposures used to measure Rm2
(here 25 mAs)
Make the calculation and enter it into Illustration 5.
378
PROTEUS XR/a
5-4-3 Acceptance Criteria
The results should give:

- Reproducibility C < 0.05
- Linearity L < 0.1
6 AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL (AEC)
6-1 Reproducibility
Reproducibility is checked in Single Point, Two Point, and Three Point modes of operation. In each case, ten
exposures are made and the doses are recorded. A coefficient of variation is calculated, as defined in section 5–
4.
6-1-1 Two Point Mode
1. Select a workstation which uses AEC.
2. Select the large focal spot .

3. Using two point mode, set the kVp to 120 kVp, mAs to 20 mAs.
4. Select the central measurement cell.
5. Center a phantom under the X-ray tube (10 to 20 cm (4 to 8 inches) of Plexiglass or water).
6. Center the probe (20x5-60) of a RADCAL MDH 2025 dosimeter 100 cm (39 inches) from the focal spot.
7. Make ten exposures. After each exposure note the dose (mR) in the space provided in Illustration 6.
Note: Take care not to saturate the ionization cell. The maximum output dose permitted with the 20x5-60
probe is 3.3 mR/ms.
6-1-2 Three Point Mode
Repeat the complete procedure specified above for Two Point mode, but use Three Point mode at 70 kVp, 250
mA, and 1000 ms.
379
PROTEUS XR/a
6-2 Maximum mAs
This procedure checks the limitation on maximum mAs. When kVp is equal to or greater than 50 kVp, the mAs
value should not exceed 600 mAs.

3. Use Three Point mode, using values of 80 kVp, 160 mA, and 4000 ms (640 mAs).
4. Close the collimator.
5. Make an exposure.
6. Check that the exposure is interrupted after about four seconds; the buzzer should sound and the Inhibit
indicator should light.
7. Press the key on Service laptop to display the exposure parameters; check that the value for mAs is 600
mAs or less.
Pass Fail
6-3 Minimum Exposure Time
This procedure checks that the minimum exposure time is less than 16 ms.

3. Use Three Point mode, using values of 150 kVp, maximum mA, and 0.1 s.
4. Set the SID to approximately 1 m (39 inches).
5. Open the collimator.
6. Select each of the three measurement cell in turn. For each one:
- Center the X-ray tube on the chosen measurement cell.
- Make an exposure.
- Press the key on Service laptop to display the exposure parameters; check that the value for
exposure time is less than 16 ms.
Pass Fail
380
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1 A- JEDI 50Plus R 1T Accuracy - Small focal spot - Radiography - 3 points - Tube:
60 kVp 80 kVp 120 kVp
mA 54.55 Data Data 73.65 Data Data 121.4 Data Data

mA ms mA ms mA ms
65.45 limits limits 86.35 limits limits 138.6 limits limits
20 1000 20 1000 20 1000

15.87 945 15.87 945 15.87 945
20
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
24.12 1055 24.12 1055 24.12 1055
50 400 50 400 50 400
43.56 377 43.56 377 43.56 377
50
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
56.44 423 56.44 423 56.44 423
100 200 100 200 100 200
88.14 188.18 88.14 188.18 88.14 188.18
100
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111.86 211.82 111.86 211.82 111.86 211.82
160 125 160 125 160 125
140.64 117.31 140.64 117.31 140.64 117.31
*160
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
179.36 132.69 179.36 132.69 179.36 132.69
* for 50/65/80 kW only

Illustration 1 B- JEDI 50Plus R 1T Accuracy - Small focal spot - Radiography - 3 points - Tube:
381
PROTEUS XR/a

63.8 mA ms mA ms mA ms
limits limits 84.4 limits limits 125.6 limits limits
20 1000 20 1000 20 1000

17 949.5 17 949.5 17 949.5
20
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
23 1050.5 23 1050.5 23 1050.5
50 400 50 400 50 400
44 379.5 44 379.5 44 379.5
50
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
56 420.5 56 420.5 56 420.5
100 200 100 200 100 200
98 189.5 98 189.5 98 189.5
100
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 210.5 111 210.5 111 210.5
160 125 160 125 160 125
143 118.3 143 118.3 143 118.3
*160
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
177 131.8 177 131.8 177 131.8
* for 50/65/80 kW only
CAUTION
1- kVp values are measured using kV peak meter Keithley 35080A.
2- if mA, time and mAs measurements must be made using Keithley 35080A or
equivalent equipment, use Illustration 1A and Illustration 2A.
3- If mA, time and mAs will be made using the post display of Console, use Illustration
1B and Illustration 2B.
382
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 2A - JEDI 50Plus R 1T Accuracy - Large focal spot - Radiography - 3 points - Tube:

mA ms mA ms mA ms
20 1000 20 1000 20 1000

15.87 945 15.87 945 15.87 945
20
24.12 1055 24.12 1055 24.12 1055
50 400 50 400 50 400

43.56 377 43.56 377 43.56 377
50
56.44 423 56.44 423 56.44 423
100 200 100 200 100 200
88.14 188.18 88.14 188.18 88.14 188.18
100
111.86 211.82 111.86 211.82 111.86 211.82
200 100 200 100 200 100

177.07 93.68 177.07 93.68 177.07 93.68
200
222.93 106.31 222.93 106.31 222.93 106.31
320 63 320 63 320 63
283.44 59.66 283.44 59.66 283.44 59.66
* 320
For 50/65/80 356.56 68.34 356.56 68.34 356.56 68.34
kW only
500 10 500 10 500 10
396.6 8.63 396.6 8.63 396.6 8.63

** 500
For 65/80 kW 603.4 11.36 603.4 11.36 603.4 11.36
only
630 10 630 10 630 10
502.9 8.63 502.9 8.63 502.9 8.63

*** 630
For 80 kW only 757.14 11.36 757.14 11.36 757.14 11.36
383
PROTEUS XR/a
384
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 2B - JEDI 50Plus R 1T Accuracy - Large focal spot - Radiography - 3 points - Tube:

mA ms mA ms mA ms
20 1000 20 1000 20 1000

17 949.5 17 949.5 17 949.5
20
23 1050.5 23 1050.5 23 1050.5
50 400 50 400 50 400

56.2 379.5 56.2 379.5 56.2 379.5
50
63.8 420.5 63.8 420.5 63.8 420.5
100 200 100 200 100 200
98 189.5 98 189.5 98 189.5
100
111 210.5 111 210.5 111 210.5
200 100 200 100 200 100

179 94.5 179 94.5 179 94.5
200
221 105.5 221 105.5 221 105.5
320 63 320 63 320 63
287 59.4 287 59.4 287 59.4
* 320
For 50/65/80 353 66.7 353 66.7 353 66.7
kW only
500 10 500 10 500 10
449 9 449 9 449 9

** 500
For 65/80 kW 551 11 551 11 551 11
only
630 10 630 10 630 10
566 9 566 9 566 9

*** 630
For 80 kW 694 11 694 11 694 11
only
Illustration 3 - JEDI 50Plus R 1T Accuracy Small Focal spot - Radiography 2 points - Tube:
385
PROTEUS XR/a
mAs 60 kVp 80 kVp 120 kVp
Displays mAs mAs mAs
0.26 0.26 0.26
0.5
0.74 0.74 0.74
18.28 18.28 18.28
20
21.72 21.72 21.72
46 46 46
50
54 54 54
386
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 4 - JEDI 50Plus R 1T Accuracy Large focal spot - Radiography 2 points - tube:
mAs 60 kVp 80 kVp 120 kVp
Displayed mAs mAs mAs
0.26 0.26 0.26
0.5
0.74 0.74 0.74
18.28 18.28 18.28
20
21.72 21.72 21.72
73.72 73.72 73.72
80
86.28 86.28 86.28
387
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 5 - Reproducibility and Linearity of Exposures in 2 points mode - Tube:
70 kVp - 200 ms
20 mAs (100 mA) 25 mAs (125 mA)
mR (R1) mAs (A1) mR (R2) mAs (A2)
10
Rm
Xm
C
(< 0.05)
L
(< 0.1)
Refer to section 5–4 for C and L calculation formula.
Measurement of mAs must be made using the post display of

CAUTION
the Control Console.
388
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 6 - AEC: Reproducibility of Exposures
MODE 2–POINT 3–POINT
kVp =120 kVp = 70
mAs = 20 mA = 250
ms = 1000
DOSE cGy (mR) cGy (mR)
4
5
7
8
9
10
Rm
C
(< 0.05)
Refer to section 5–4 for C calculation formula.
389
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Invasive mA Measurement

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
Not applicable.
2 TOOLS
A multimeter and an oscilloscope with a filtering capability.
To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.
4 PREREQUISITES
DANGER
390
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
The Invasive mA Measure can be made on the both side of

the Inverter Unit.
Inverter
Unit
LEFT
ACCESS RIGHT
ACCESS
5-1 Disassembly - Right access
1. Remove the 5.5mm hex head screws which secure -

the right cover of the Power Unit.
Remove the cover.
1
1
391
PROTEUS XR/a
HV Tank KV Measure Board

J6 J2
KV+ measure
HV+ 2
46
sh3 sh4
10 ohms 10 ohms To KV Control Board
1% 1%
3 45
2 1
KV- measure
HV- 1
Measurement tool
(multimeter or
oscilloscope)
mA= V/(sh3//sh4)= V/5ohms
2. Put a probe inside the generator on the shunt SH3 (right side of the resistor) of KV Measure board on HV
Tank 1 .
3. Connect a second probe on the mechanical ground 2 .

4. Check the resistor value with a multimeter: it should be 5 ohms (+/- 0.05).
5-2 Disassembly - Left access
1. Unscrew the 5.5 mm screws securing the two EMC

cover panels 1 at the HV connections side and
remove them.
1
Take great care not to let screws fall into
NOTICE
the HV connector receptacles. Cover
them with plastic caps.
392
PROTEUS XR/a
HV Tank KV Measure Board

J6 J2
KV+ measure
HV+ 2
46
sh3 sh4
10 ohms 10 ohms To KV Control Board
1% 1%
3 45
KV- measure
HV- 1
Measurement tool
(multimeter or
oscilloscope)
mA= V/(sh3//sh4)= V/5ohms
2. Put a probe inside the generator on the shunt SH3 (right side of the resistor) of KV Measure board on HV
Tank 2 .
3. Connect a second probe on the mechanical ground 3 .

4. Check the resistor value with a multimeter: it should be 5 ohms (+/- 0.05).
6 mA MEASUREMENT
1. Power on the generator
2. Use a multimeter for mA <= 50 mA with a exposure time set to 1s minimum.
3. Use an oscilloscope for other mA, the signal must be filtered at f <= 10 kHz.
393
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 9
ANODE HEAT INTEGRATOR FUNCTIONAL TEST
Note: The test is only for VA inquisition or customer requirements, or else, do not need implement it.
1 TOOLS
- Proteus VA software site check tool (5241303)

- Service laptop with CD drive – service tools
- 9-wire serial cable
2 PROCEDURE
Note: Please follow the instruction in the Proteus VA software site check tool CD (5241303).
SECTION 10
Dose indication
1 Quantitative Information
The Dose value displayed on image viewer is got at the position of patient entrance.
The Dose/DAP is determined by mAs, kVp, additional filtration, SID, FOV and patient size.
Dose is 90µGy, DAP is 10.5µGy*m2 for typical use:
Chest 120kVp, 2mAs, 180cm SID, 41cmX41cm FOV, 25cm patient thickness
Increase on kVp, mAs will increase the value of Dose and DAP
Increase on FOV will increase the value of DAP
Decrease on SID will increase the value of Dose and DAP
A 20cm thick polymethyl-methacrylate (PMMA) rectangular block with sides equal to or exceeding 25cm could be
used to simulate an average patient (25cm thickness).
2 Dose indication method
The Dose/DAP value is predicted by calculation. They are displayed on the image viewer for each exposure.
Block diagram for Dose/DAP calculation:
394
PROTEUS XR/a
Input Calculation Output
Distance Scaling
SID Patient Entrance Dose
Tube angle
mAs
kVp Nominal Dose
Calculation
Filtration
FOV size Multiplication of

Dose Area Product
image area
The nominal Dose is calculated at the calibrated distance, based on exposure techniques, such as mAs, kVp and
additional filtration. The final patient entrance dose is got by correcting with SID and tube angle and the preset
patient thickness.
DAP is obtained by multiplying Patient entrance dose and the image area at that distance.
3 DOSE/DAP calculation algorithm:
3.1 Compute nominal DOSE value.
Dose ' = exp(a + ln(mAs ) + b * ln( kVp) + g * (ln( kVp))^2 + d * (ln( kVp ))^3 )
Where a, b, g, d are parameters related to exposure techniques
3.2 Output scaling
Vertical SID = SID*cos(TubeAngle)
PatientDistance = (Veritcal SID-OID-Patient Thickness)/cos(TubeAngle)
3.3 Collimator compensation. The value is 1 when the area is 20cm x 20cm. The parameters a1, a2, and a3 are
experimentally determined.
The X and Y Collimator variables in the following equations indicate the collimator sizes in a plane perpendicular
to the x-ray central ray at the detector plane.
Get DOSE after collimator area compensation, Tube angle compensation, and SID compensation
Compute Dose Area Production (DAP).
395
PROTEUS XR/a
4 Dose/DAP accuracy check procedure

Before conducting this procedure, make sure following items have been calibrated:
- Generator
- Tube
- HVL
- Collimator
- Positioner
- mR/mAs
Procedure:
1/ Set the dosimeter probe with the small ion chamber sensor at 25 cm above the Tabletop/Wallstand where the
prediction algorithm is performed.
Ensure the center of the probe is at the center of x-ray beam.
2/ Cover the detector with lead or other material, or move it out of the FOV if possible, so that the detector will not
be damaged from over exposure.
3/ Set Exposure technique:

FIXED (NON-AEC) mode
Table or Wallstand mode
100kV, 50mA, 3.2mAs
20×20 cm FOV
100cm SID
4/ Take exposure.
5/ Read and take note of the results on dosimeter DoseRef. (unit in mR or µGy), the Dose and DAP value on the
image viewer Doseviewer (mGy) and DAPviewer (µGy * m2).
6/ Convert dose unit if needed: 1 mR = 8.76µGy, 1µGy = 0.001 mGy

7/ Determine the reference field size (convert unit to m2 if needed) at the dosimeter position
Reference Field size = collimated FOV * (SOD/SID)2
where SOD is distance from tube focal spot to dosimeter upper surface.
8/ Calculate the Reference Dose Area Product DAPRef. = DoseRef. * Reference Field size
9/ Compare the DoseRef. and DAPRef. with Doseviewer and DAPviewer as following:
(DoseRef. - Doseviewer) / DoseRef.*100%
(DAPRef. - DAPviewer) / DAPRef.*100%
The acceptable error is less than ±30% when DAP ≥5µGy*m2 ( ±35% when DAP≥ 5µGy*m2 per IEC60601-2-54
clause 203.6.4.5)
Dose/DAP accuracy maintenance

In case the DAP error is larger than ±30% when DAP≥ 5µGy*m2, check if the SID, FOV calibration is good. If
there is no problem, run mR/mAs calibration then redo the accuracy check.
396
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 6 JEDI GENERATOR THEORY AND

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 THEORY OF OPERATION………………………………………………………. 398
1-1 GLOSSARY…………………………………………………………………………...398
1-2 JEdi High Level Block Diagram…………………………………………………. 399
SECTION 2 THEORY PRESENTATION……………………………………………………… 400
2-1 INTRODUCTION…………………………………………………………………… 400
2-2 Standard features………………………………………………………………….400
2-3 Applications……………………………………………………………………….. 401
2-4 Architecture……………………………………………………………………….. 402
397
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1
THEORY OF OPERATION
1-1 GLOSSARY
Glossary of terms used in this document:
Term Definition
ABC Automatic Brightness Control. Regulation loop which makes the measured
brightness equal to brightness demand
AEC Automatic Exposure Control. Exposure cut off technique which uses the
brightness signal to cut the exposure
CAN Controller Area Network. A network used for localized control.
CPU Control Processor Unit. Microprocessor and peripherals which run the
software/firmware
EPLD Erasable Programmable Logic Device.
EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility. The EMC function prevents the generator
from polluting the power source.
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array. It is programmed by the CPU core after
the reset and handles all the exposure control logic including the system
interface real–time lines.
HV Ripple High voltage variations due to inverter current pulses. Typically a few
percent.
State Machine Software or hardware function which handles the state of a system and
authorize to go to the next state upon reception of specific events.
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor. A type of power switch
Ilp HV power inverter parallel resonant current; current in the parallel inductor
Ilr HV power inverter serial resonant current; current in the serial inductor.
MOS Metal Oxide Semiconductor. A type of power switch

OGP On Gantry Processor. Unit which drives the generator in CT systems
PDU Power Distribution Unit
RMS Root Mean Square
398
1-2
REV 42
JEDI GENERATOR / FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURE
Illustration 1 -
System Control Bus
System Interface
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
Low Voltage
heater supply
kV Control Heater Power Rotation
bus
Supply
DC Bus
JEDI HIGH LEVEL BLOCK DIAGRAM
AC/DC
399
Jedi Generator / Functional Architecture
rotation phases
High Voltage High Voltage HV Cables

EMC Inverter Tank
Filter
X*Ray Tube 1
1 phase
3 phase power
tube cooling
input
input
DIRECTION 2273022-100
Service Manual
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2
THEORY PRESENTATION
2-1 INTRODUCTION
Jedi is the engineering name for a family of compact high frequency X-Ray generators. This generator family
covers a wide range of applications from mobile equipment up to vascular systems:
• JEDI 12-25 kW: Mobile applications
• JEDI 24-48 kW: CT applications
• JEDI 32-50 kW: RAD applications
• JEDI 50-65-80 kW: RF applications
• JEDI 100 kW: VASCULAR applications
2-2 STANDARD FEATURES
Jedi is a family of 150 kV generators operating from 12 kW up to 100 kW for all the major radiological,
fluoroscopic and CT applications. The family handles 1 ms to continuous exposures with tube currents ranging
from 0mA up to 1000 mA.
The generators feature the very latest technology available:
• Constant potential independent of line voltage variations
• Power generation by a high-frequency converter (High voltage ripple: 40 kHz-140 kHz)
• Distributed micro-processor controlled functions (CAN bus)
Other features include:
• Single phase, three phase or battery power source
• Very low kV and mA ripple, excellent accuracies and dose reproducibility
• Compatible with a wide range of tubes, high speed or low speed, can supply up to 3 different tubes. Thermal
load interactive integrator ensuring optimum use of the heat protection curve of the x-ray tube
• Available in various packaging configurations: gantry, under-table, cabinet
• Serviceability: high reliability, fast installation (no generator calibration), application error codes ensure fast
troubleshooting
• Meets CE marking (and in particular EMC), IEC, UL, CSA, MHW regulations (if required)
• Optional pulsed fluoroscopy
400
PROTEUS XR/a
2-3 APPLICATIONS
RAD Surgery RF Vascular/Car CT

diac
3 Points Mode x x x
2 Points Mode x x x
1 Point Mode x x x
0 Point Mode x x
AEC x x x
Tomography x x
AET x x
Continuous/Pulsed Fluoroscopy x x x
Rad Exposures x
Cinema 30 fr/s x
Cinema 90 fr/s x
ABC x x
Variable mA Scans x
Low mA Fluoroscopy x
Legend:
- AEC - Automatic Exposure Control
- AET - Automatic Tomographic Exposure
- ABC - Automatic Brightness Control in fluoroscopy
401
PROTEUS XR/a
2-4 ARCHITECTURE
Refer to Illustration 1: Jedi Generator / Functional Architecture

The Jedi family is composed of 3 elements:
2-4-1 A Kernel
• High voltage chain composed of kV control, HV power inverter and HV tank

• Anode rotation function
• Tube filaments heater function
• Control bus for communication between the functions
• DC bus for power distribution to each function
• Input voltage to DC conversion: AC/DC function
• Low voltage power supply
• Application software, running on the kV control board
These functions are the Jedi core. They are present in all versions of the generator.
A function can be unique for all products, or can have several different releases based on product specification.
Examples:
The anode rotation function is available in 2 releases:
• low speed rotation for applications where the tube has a max rotation of 3000 rpm
• high speed/low speed rotation for applications where at least one of the tubes can use
8000-10000 rpm
The control bus is unique.
2-4-2 Options Depending on the Application
• A System Interface which can be:

- CT interface
- RAD interface (console interface, room interface, AEC management present or not)
- ATLAS interface
• EMC function
• Grid function (RF, vascular)
• Bias function (RF, vascular)
• Tube management (2 tubes or 3 tubes option)
402
REV 42
JEDI GENERATOR / FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURE
Illustration 2 -
System Control Bus
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
System
Interface
heater supply Low Voltage

kV Control Heater Rotation
bus Power
Supply
preload (1 phase)
DC Bus
403
AC/DC
Jedi Generator / Functional Architecture
Tube Selection Tube
fil. drives
Management
HV measures
inverter controls
ans
phases
High Voltage High Voltage HV Cables

phases
rotation
rotation
EMC Inverter
+safeties+f
Tank
Filter
+safeties+fans
Grid/Bias X*Ray Tube 1 X*Ray Tube 2 Chiller

1 phase or 1 phase tube
3 phase power cooling
input input
Service Manual
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a
2-4-3 A Packaging Architecture
The packaging architecture consists in a set of boxes which can be put together in several ways to make Jedi fit
either in a cabinet, or a console foot, or a table foot. The boxes can also be split in 2 units distant of several
meters (example: CT gantry). Refer to Illustration 3.
The boxes normally consist of the following:
2-4-3-1 Auxiliaries Box
• Rotation function
• Heater function
• Low voltage power supply (which can also be in the AC/DC box)
This box is always present.
2-4-3-2 Power Box
• HV tank
• HV power inverter
• kV control
• System interface (for the less complex system interface)
2-4-3-3 AC/DC Box
• MC filter (optional)
• AC/DC function
• Low voltage power supply (which can also be in the auxiliaries box)
2-4-3-4 System Interface Box
• RAD interface
• AEC interface
This box is present in the RAD product.
2-4-3-5 Optional Boxes
• Tube selection
• Grid/Bias control
404
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 3 - Jedi Generator / Packaging Architecture
Inverter Assembly
Dual Snub LVPS Board
(for TIGER) AC/DC
Tube Board
Gate Command
HV Board
+-
KV Measure HV Tank Rectifier

Block
CT
Inter KV Control Board
face
EMC Filter (Optional)
Power Box AC/DC Box
LVPS Board RAD AEC

(for NP and Interface Interface
Emperor)
Heater Board
System Interface Box

Rotation Board for the rad product
Tube Grid/Bias
Selection Control
Rotation Rotation
Capacitor Capacitor
(optional)
Auxiliaries Box Optional Boxes
405
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 7 EXCEPTION HANDLING AND ERROR

CODES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 TABLE……………………………………………………………………………… 407

1-1 Theory of Operation………………………………………………………………………... 407
1-2 Vertical Travel (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)……………………………………… 408
1-3 Up-Down Motion Limitation (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)……………………… 408
1-4 Anti-collision (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)……………………………………….. 408
1-5 Pedal Operation……………………………………………………………………………... 408
1-6 SIX-WAY (HI-LO ELEVATING) TABLES………………………………………… ……….409
SECTION2 JEDI EXECPTION HANDLING………………………………………………….. 411
2-1 DIAGNOSTICS……………………………………………………………………................ 411
2-2 Error Code Structure……………………………………………………………………….. 412
SECTION 3 ERROR CODES, DIAGNOSTICS & TROUBLESHOOTING………………... 415
3-1 INTRODUCTION……………………………………………………………………………… 415
3-2 Power on Diagnostics…………………………………………………………...................415
3-3 Error Code List……………………………………………………………………................416
3-4 Error Reporting……………………………………………………………………………….421
3-5 Warning Errors……………………………………………………………………................422
3-6 Diagnostics…………………………………………………………………………………… 424
3-7 Other Failures……………………………………………………………………….. ……….438
3-8 Heating Function diagnostics……………………………………………………. ……….440
3-9 Rotation Function Diagnostics…………………………………………………………… 441
3-10 Inverter Gate Command Diagnostics………………………………………….. ……….442
3-11 Inverter in Short Circuit Diagnostics…………………………………………………… 444
3-12 No Load HV Diagnostics…………………………………………………………………..447
3-13 AEC Diagnostics…………………………………………………………………………… 448
406
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1
TABLE
1-1 Theory of Operation
407
PROTEUS XR/a
1-1-1 System Operation

The table top floats or rides on eight ball bearing assemblies located inside the
table top area. Each longitudinal bearing assembly consists of precision
machined steel blocks with three (3) bearings bolted to each block assembly
(totaling 12 ball-bearings for longitudinal table travel). Four linear bearings
translate on hardened and polished steel shafts which permit transverse travel of
the table top.
Four electro-magnets (24 VDC) are positioned extremely close to the rails that
the bearings ride on. These magnets “grab” the steel rails securely, locking the
longitudinal travel of the table. Four solenoid-operated fail-safe tilt locks are used
to grab the transverse shafts, locking the transverse travel of the table.
Depressing the four-way float pedal de-energizes the magnets and energizes the
solenoids, allowing the table top to float freely.
The bucky housing assembly rides on four linear ball-bearings mounted to

adjustable brackets attached to either side of the housing. These bearings travel
on the hardened and polished steel shafts of the bucky carriage. One electro-
magnet on the underside of the housing “locks” the bucky into place until the
bucky lock release switch is depressed, thereby releasing the magnet’s hold and
allowing free movement of the bucky.
1-2 Vertical Travel (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)

Vertical table travel is performed by an electric reducer motor and a lead screw
mechanism assembly inside the base.
1-3 Up-Down Motion Limitation (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)

Limitation of travel for the scissor assembly is accomplished by a link connected
to the scissors in such a way as to slide a flag along the Up/Down Limit Board
until the flag breaks the beam in the opto-interrupter (either up or medium or
down depending on direction of travel). The travel range is factory preset to
800mm table top to floor (upper limit) to 500mm table top to floor (lower limit).
1-4 Anti-collision (for Hi-lo Elevating Tables Only)

Anti-collision function is accomplished by four position switches. When a barrier
stop table top downward motion, table top may produce some degree distortion.
The position switch will work after the detector of position switches detect the
distortion and prohibit the table motion.
1-5 Pedal Operation
1-5-1 Four-Way Tables
These tables have only one foot pedal (four-way float) which operates an opto-
interrupter on the Lock Control Board.
1-5-2 Hi-Lo Elevating (Six-Way) Tables

The foot pedals have sheet metal tabs which ride in the open slot of the opto-
interrupter (one for each pedal) so that when a pedal is depressed, the tab
moves out of the beam of the opto-interrupter. The left four-way release, the Up
pedal and the Down pedal, work on the Limit Board shared with the Up/Down
limit switches. The right four-way release pedal has its own sense board. Both
boards are plugged into the Six-Way Logic Board via plug-in cables.
408
PROTEUS XR/a
1-6 SIX-WAY (HI-LO ELEVATING) TABLES

The table’s major electrical components include the AC transformer and fuse
block, printed circuit boards, magnetic locks and the associated wiring
harnesses, the motor and the Up-Down Limit Board. It is suggested that you refer
to chapter 10, Schematics, for the corresponding schematic diagram as you
review this section.
1-6-1 Pedal Interface Board
There are two sub-boards:
• Pedal Board No.1
There are five opto-interrupters interfacing with the first lock-pedal, down-pedal,
and up_lim-slider, down_lim-slider, respectively.
J3 and J4 for remote control (Optional), J2 connected to another Pedals I/F Board
No.2, and J1 to Table Logic Control Board.
Jumper X1 is used for removing the Inhibition SW function for all pedals, and
Jumper X2 only for adding the Inhibition SW function to the two Movement
Pedals
• Pedal I/F Board No.2
The opto-interrupter Q1 is for the second lock-pedals.
1-6-2 Table Logic Control Board
J1 is connected to the power supply: J1-1 and J1-2 to +24vdc switching power
supply, and J1-3 and J1-4 to the.
J2 is optional to the Tomo-link subsystem.
J3 and J4 are connected to front Pedal Interface Board and the back Pedal
Interface Board respectively.
J5 is connected to lateral lock-magnets, longitudinal lock-magnets and Bucky
lock-magnet.
J6-1 and J1-2 to the second safety mechanical switch, J6-3~6 to four anti-
collision switches, J6-7 and J6-8 to the Inhibition Switches(the two is located on
the front and back respectively), J6-11~14 to the lens on the Inhibition Switches.
J7 to the contactor &breaker for the AC motor.
• The Double-click Function (can be selected)
U1:A-U2:A, U1:B-U2:B, U5:A-6:A and related circuitry make up three Double-
click Function circuitry, corresponding to the Up, Down and Lock pedals
respectively. The jumper X1 and X2 are used for selection of the Single-click
or/and Double-click Function on the movement pedals and locks pedals
respectively. And the pedal actions have LED indicators.
• The Protection Circuitry
The U11:A used for inhibiting the simultaneity of the UP and Down.
The U11:B used for inhibiting the lock-pedal's activity as in motion.
U7 and its related circuitry form a Time Safety Protection circuitry (12 seconds,
adjustable) for the motor.
U8 and its related circuitry is another Time Safety Protection (1 minute,

adjustable) for the lateral lock-magnets.
• Pedals Inhibition Function(U15:A and its related circuitry)
There are two Pedals Inhibition Switches located on the front and back of the
table respectively, which are non latching, momentary switches with indicator.
The two indicators should always maintain the same status (ON/OFF) whenever
depressing either of the two switch.
• Anti-collision Function
U13:A and its related circuit will this function.
• The Second Safety Switch (U13:B and related circuit)
409
PROTEUS XR/a
• Lock-magnets Driver Circuit

Q1(MTP3055) and its related circuit is used for lateral lock-magnets, and the
+45VDC, diode D13(MBR1035), resistor R25 and capacitor E5(10000uF) build
up a Rapid Circuitry about 100 milliseconds for the lateral magnet’s start-up.
Q2(MTP2955) and its related circuitry is to drive the longitudinal lock-magets.
• Power Supply
1. +24VDC is supplied by a switching power supply with UL and EMC approved
and can be adjustable in the range from 21VDC to 28VDC.
2. +5VDC is supplied by the MAX726 and its related circuitry.
3. +45VDC supplier circuitry consists of the transformer T1, bridge CR2, etc.
410
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2
JEDI EXCEPTION HANDLING
JEDI software performs auto-test at power up and continuously monitors the
correct operation of its functions during application. Any malfunction is stored in
the JEDI error log and reported to the system through a protocol that transports
error code. Errors found can only be reported if the generator is powered on and
live.
2-1 DIAGNOSTICS
There are different levels of diagnostics.
2-1-1 Power-on Diagnostics
At power-up the kV control performs its own initialisation, checks its memory
integrity (checksum of program and NVRAM) and starts the communication with
its peripherals as well as the system. Communication is permanently checked
afterwards. It then initialises the Rotation board and Heater board with their
respective database parameters and loads kV control FPGA.
Eight LEDs (S7..S0) on kV the control board show the software status.
During power-on, the Heater board and the Rotation board CPUs are initialised
and check their memory integrity and hardware. If a problem is encountered, a
PRD error is reported to the kV control.
2-1-2 Live Diagnostics
1. Under application. Faults will be reported through an error code and

associated message. Some are straightforward and convey the root cause. Refer
to the recommended action in the error list.
2. Diagnostics run separately:
• heating function
• rotation function
• inverter gate command diagnostic;
• inverter in short circuit diagnostic;
• no load HV fucntion diagnostics.
3. Manual Diagnostics
Through a troubleshooting guide based on an error message or when the

generator does not reply.
411
PROTEUS XR/a
2-2 ERROR CODE STRUCTURE
The error code structure described in this chapter applies to JEDI error detection
and logging. The JEDI error log file can be accessed from the system through the
system console or a laptop (JEDI error log upload functionality).
When an error is detected, it is sent to the system and is logged in parallel in the
JEDI error log file. The file contains a maximum of sixty four logs.
Each log shows the following structure:
Simplified Generator Error Error Data associated Number of Date

error code Phase Class Code with the error code occurrences & time
The fields are described in the following paragraphs.
2-2-1 Simplified Error Code Definition
The simplified error code is a grouping of the JEDI error codes. This field gives a
rapid understanding of which part of JEDI is faulty.
Simplified Description
Error Code
30 Tube spits errors
40 Rotation errors
50 Heater errors
60 Exposure errors (HV inverter + mA measure + exposure control
70 Power supply errors (low voltage + DC bus)
80 Hardware errors (internal communications + cables)
90 Application errors (saved RAM + software)
100 External communication errors
110 Thermal errors
10 Rotation warnings (engineering use)
20 Heater warnings (engineering use)
25 LVPS warnings (engineering use)
27 Application warnings (mainly saved RAM battery change)
412
PROTEUS XR/a
2-2-2 Generator Phase Definition
The generator phase field contains the state of the generator when the error
occurred.
Generator Description
Phase
0 idle: entered in diagnostic mode
1 powered up; waiting for configuration
2 Stand by: configuration completed, waiting for a preparation
3 Preparation in progress: JEDI gets ready to take X-rays
command
4 Ready for exposures (rotation at speed; filament; HV inverter drive
5 High voltage
ready; no errors): waiting for anon
exposure command
6 Error detected and not yet cleared
2-2-3 Error Class Definition
There are five classes of errors that correspond to different levels of impact to the
system. The class of errors correspond to the seriousness of the error and the
system software will manage operations
Class Description
1 Errors which have no impact on the system operation.
Errors detected in background diagnostics during application. They are referred
as ”Warning” errors, to monitor drifts and used for engineering tracking.
The generator phase remains unchanged.
Errors are stored in the JEDI error log.
2 Errors which are detected by JEDI and that are recoverable automatically without
noticeable effect on the system, such as error related to recovered tube spits.
The generator phase remains unchanged.
Errors which usually occur during exposure.
3 Errors detected by JEDI during exposure. They stop the exposure and revert the
generator into a safe state.
Error will be reset on Exposure Command release. It will require another
Exposure Command to restart the sequence.
The generator phase is set to ”error” until the error is cleared.
4 Errors which are related to any hardware failures, software application or
communication errors.
JEDI will revert to a safe state.
If preparation is in progress, it is stopped.
Errors are cleared either by a reset error action from the system (for system
having a reset error mechanism) or by a prep release or by a new prep command.
The generator phase is set to ”error” until ther error is cleared.
Application cannot work if errors are persistent.
5 These codes may appear when the generator or tube temperature limits are
reached.
The application waits until the thermal information disappears. The error
information is temporary.
The generator phase is set to ”error” until the error is cleared.
413
PROTEUS XR/a
2-2-4 Error Code Definition
Each error code comprises two fields (which cannot be generated and used
separately);
• the first field describes the JEDI function which is faulty (referred to as the
function code)
• the second field describes the error detected.
Example: error code 0306 means:
• 03: high voltage generation function;
• 06: no kV feedback on anode.
Function Codes List
Function Description
Code
01 Rotation
02 heater
03 High voltage generation
04 mA control
05 Power supplies
06 System interface
07 Software
08 Application
09 Tube control
10 Tube management
11 Grid
12 Bias
13 AEC
14 Hardware
2-2-5 Data Associated with the Error Code

The field ”data associated with the error code” shows detailed information over
the state of the generator when the error occurred.
Examples: rotation high speed acceleration state, small focus preheat, tube
number 1 selected.
2-2-6 Number of Occurrences

The field ”number of occurrences” is used to log the same error occurring several
times consecutively. Instead of filling the error log file with the same error which
has occurred consecutively several times, the first error is logged and
successive errors are recorded through increasing the ”number of occurrences”
field.
2-2-7 Date & Time

The field ”date & time” stores the date and time when the error occurred. This is
the JEDI internal date and time which may be different form the system date and
time. In the case of logging the same error several times, the field indicates the
date and time of the first occurrence.
414
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 3
ERROR CODES, DIAGNOSTICS & TROUBLESHOOTING
3-1 INTRODUCTION
This diagnostics section is to introduce the JEDI generator with the following
information:
Power-On diagnostics LED indication.
List all the potential error codes that can be issued by JEDI Generator.
Provide error code explanation, potential cause and recommended action.
List of diagnostics aids and explanation of diagnostics.
This section also includes the Collimator error codes.
3-2 POWER ON DIAGNOSTICS

Refer to theory of operation for power-on sequence. This paragraph in this
section is to provide meaning of boards’ LED status. The LED display status is
offering useful information at a glance to proceed to error code based
troubleshooting. Whenever in doubt, a simple step is to watch the LED status
display on the kV control board, than the Rotation and Heater.
kV control LED status:
kV control board
- During Power On Diagnostics :
S0..................S7
_  
S0.........................S7
      
The 8 LED’s (S0...S7) are lit successively in both directions (Scrolling as

indicated by the arrows): the power up diagnostics are completed, kV control
board is up and running.
S0.....................S7
   
One out of two is lit: Application (Flash) problem. Reloaded the APPL. mx file.
- When an application error occurs (Not PRD)
        e.g: No communication
The simplified error code is displayed on the Leds. They blink; when the error is
cleared ( by a return to the standby mode for example ), the 8 LEDs are lit
successively.
Heater board LED status: (See central listing)
After the power on diagnostics, heater board LEDs DS1 and DS2 are lit
successively. Any different status correspond to an abnormal situation. An error
code is logged. Refer to error code description.
Rotation board LED status: (See central listing)
After the power on diagnostics, rotation board LED DS5 is blinking. Any different
status correspond to an abnormal situation. An error code is logged. Refer to
error code description.
415
PROTEUS XR/a
3-3 ERROR CODE LIST
The error code list and associated short description is presented below.
Jedi generator error codes

simplified Description Error Error Description
error Class Code
code
30 Tube Spits 2 0301H Tube spit (kV+ and kV- dropped)
2 0302H Tube spit (kV+ has dropped)
2 0303H Tube spit (kV- has dropped)
2 0304H Tube spit (kV regulation error)
2 0305H FPGA problem (restarting safety signal)
2 0324H SPITS(data=1:Anode,2:cathode,4:Both,8:kV
regul)
40 Rotation Error 4 0101H No CAN message received within 5 secs

4 0102H Database not correct
4 0103H Rotation current overload
4 0104H Rotation Openload
4 0105H Rotation Phases unbalanced
4 0106H Rotation Phases error
4 0107H Rotation Inverter permanent overcurrent
4 0108H Rotation command error
4 0109H MAINS_DROP has failed
4 0110H PRD error
4 0111H F0 main frequency problem
4 0149H Unknown Rotation error
50 Heater Error 4 0201H No CAN message received within 5 secs

4 0203H Heater inverter permanent overcurrent
4 0204H Filament permanent open circuit
4 0205H Heater Inverter permanent short circuit
4 0206H Filament too high for Pre-heat
4 0207H Filament too high for Boost
4 0208H Filament too high for Heat
4 0209H Heater command error
4 0210H Current under estimated fork
4 0211H Current over estimated fork
4 0212H MAINS_DROP detected
4 0213H PRD error
4 0214H Stay too long in Boost
4 0215H Filament selection error
4 0216H Measured current while inverter OFF
4 0221H Filament Database not correct
0222H
0223H
0224H
4 0248H Unknown Heater error
0249H
416
PROTEUS XR/a

error Class Code
code
60 Exposure 3 0306H No kV Feedback on anode
errors
3 0307H No kV Feedback on cathode
3 0308H No kV Feedback on anode and cathode
3 0309H kV detected during kV diag
3 0310H kV max detected
3 0311H ILP current not OK
3 0312H ILR current not OK
3 0313H ILR max current detected
3 0314H ILR current timeout
3 0316H Spit Max error
3 0317H Spit Ratio error
3 0318H kV did not reach 75% after 20ms
3 0319H kV unbalanced detected
3 0320H FPGA problem (safety signal)
3 0321H Spit retry failed
3 0323H ILP and ILR current not OK
3 0401H No mA feedback
3 0402H mA scale error
2 0403H mA accuracy exceeded 5%
3 0504H Inverter Gate Power Supply failed
3 0801H Exposure backup mAs exceeded
3 0802H Exposure backup time exceeded
3 0803H Exp cmd while gene not ready
3 1411H Time counter error
3 1407H mAs counter error
3 1408H AEC counter error
3 1409H mAs meter saturated
3 1410H FPGA Locked
3 1420H Tomo exposure cut by tomograph instead
generator
70 Power Supply 4 0501H DC bus out of range

errors
4 0503H Inverter Gate Power Supply error
4 0505H Mains power supply has dropped during exposure
4 0506H DC bus 1 phase precharge error
4 0507H DC bus 1 phase discharge error
4 0510H AEC Cell HV supply error
4 0549H Unknown LVPS error
4 0553H Detected +160V too high
4 0557H Detected +160V too low
4 0573H Detected -15V too strong
4 0577H Detected -15V too weak
417
PROTEUS XR/a

error Class code
code
80 Hardware error 4 0180H Rotor board communication problem
4 0181H Rotor board has reset
4 0280H Heater board communication problem
4 0281H Heater board has reset
4 0321H kV conversion error
4 0322H kV ref ADC / DAC failed
4 0601H RTL error
4 0602H External CAN bus off
4 0902H tube Fan supply error
4 1402H Internal CAN bus off
4 1403H Connectic Fault
4 1404H FPGA configuration problem
4 1405H Tank sensor problem
90 Application 4 0701H Saved RAM checksum pb

errors
4 0702H Software problem
4 0704H Rotor/Heater hold too long
100 Communicatio 4 0603H Debug screen com error

n errors
4 0604H Database download error
4 0605H TAV communication error
4 0606H MPC/Madrid communication error
4 1301H AEC communication error
110 Thermal error 5 0804H Tank Thermal Error

5 0903H Tube exceeded 70degC
120 Manipulation 5 1500H Tomo brightness error

error
5 1501H Exposure switch released during exposure
5 1502H AEC cut off error
10 Rotor Warning 1 0151H CAN Domain command number error

1 0152H CAN Domain request with no transfer init
1 0153H CAN Domain Toggle bit error
1 0154H CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download
1 0155H CAN Domain Abort received & applied
1 0156H Bad index in config upload
1 0157H Tube switch while rotor not off
1 0158H Acceleration cmd while no tube selected
1 0159H Acceleration cmd while database not OK
1 0160H Database download while rotor speeding
1 0161H Acceleration command not OK
1 0162H Rotor acceleration while in error
418
PROTEUS XR/a

error Class Code
code
1 0163H No CAN message received within 4 secs
1 0164H Rotation Inverter overcurrent (< 3 times)
1 0199H Unknown rotation warning
20 Heater Warning 1 0251H Received command is not OK

1 0252H Heater command not OK
1 0253H No CAN message received within 4 secs
1 0254H Heater inverter overcurrent (inverter1) (<3 times)
1 0255H Filament open circuit (inverter1) (<3 times)
1 0256H Heater Inverter short circuit (inverter1) (<3times)
1 0257H Tube switch while filaments not OFF
1 0258H CAN Domain command number error
1 0259H CAN Domain request with no transfer init
1 0260H CAN Domain Toggle bit error
1 0261H CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download
1 0262H CAN Domain Abort received & applied
1 0263H Database download while heater not cut
1 0299H Unknown Heater warning
25 Low Voltage 1 0550H No more warn +160V too low or too gigh
Power supply
Warnings
1 0560H No more warn +15V too low or too high
1 0570H No more warn -15V too low or too high
1 0571H Detected -15V too strong
1 0575H Detected -15V too weak
1 0599H Unknown LVPS warning
27 Application 1 1401H Saved RAM power supply limit reached

warnings
1 0703H Watchdog reset has just occurred
Proteus XR/a Collimator error codes

Error Code Description
Z00 RAM D1 error (fatal)
Z01 EEPROM D1 error (fatal)
Z02 CAN error (bus error, error overrun)
Z03 CAN error (receiver overrun)
Z04 No communication with D2
Z05 Calculation error - height
Z06 Calculation error - width
Z10 Stepping error - height leaves
Z11 Stepping error - width leaves
Z14 Limit switch - height leaves
Z15 Limit switch - width leaves
419
PROTEUS XR/a
Eclipse Proteus Collimator error codes

Error Code Description Recommended Reactions
Z00 Collimator UIF board error Restart system; if fail again, Change UIF board
Z01 Collimator Control Board error Restart system; if fail again, Change control board
Z02 Collimator Control board error Dismiss the error, check the local connection cable
Z03 Collimator UIF Error Dismiss the error, check the local connection cable
Z04 Collimator local communication error Check the local connection cable, then restart system;
if still fail, change the boards
Z05 Collimator LCD error Change the LCD.
Z06 Collimator Blade out of limit Restart the system.
Z10 Collimator internal error Reset collimator; if fail again, change collimator
Z11 Collimator internal error Reset collimator; if fail again, change collimator
Z14 Collimator Homing Error Reset collimator; if fail again, change collimator
If the lamp cannot be switched on when push the lamp button on front panel, refer to the following trouble
shooting.
1. Open the collimator front cover, assure stable cable connection on J4, J7 and J8 of user interface board.
2. Push ‘lamp’ button to light on lamp. Check the LED indicator status (DS7, DS10, DS13), as shown in following
Figure
Indicator
Error Recommended Reactions
DS13 DS10 DS7
on - - Lamp failure Exchange lamp
off on on UIF board failure Exchange lamp
off off - System lamp power failure Check power supply unit on system side
Exchange UIF board; if failure remains, change whole
off - off UIF board or UIF panel failure
collimator
420
PROTEUS XR/a
3-4 ERROR REPORTING

For Jedi generator error code, control console only displays the simplified error
code from the Jedi generator.
Whenever a generator error is displayed on the operator console, the Jedi
errorlog upload functionality is available to get more detailed information about
the error.
This function must be performed from the service laptop.
The simplified error code must be used to find the Jedi error code in the Jedi
errorlog file.
Having these two information, look at the Jedi trouble shooting table to find the
FRU to replace.
For Collimator error code, refer to diagnostic section afterwards for potential
cause and recommended action on Page 7-30
421
PROTEUS XR/a
3-5 WARNING ERRORS

Warning errors are the result of automated and regular background monitoring
for either software events or voltages threshold overtaking.
Those errors are merely for engineering usage and do not indicate any hardware
error failure.
However, as they are logged into the Generator Err_log file, just as the previous
list of error, they are listed here to help error sorting out.
Should too many of them are seen when viewing error log, it is advised to report
them via CQA, since the equipment is still operating.
10 Rotation Warning 0151H CAN Domain command number error

0152H CAN Domain request with no transfer init
0153H CAN Domain Toggle bit error
0154H CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download
0155H CAN Domain Abort received & applied
0156H Bad index in config upload
0157H Tube switch while rotor not off
0158H Acceleration cmd while no tube selected
0159H Acceleration cmd while database not OK
0160H Database download while rotor speeding
0161H Acceleration command not OK
0162H Rotor acceleration while in error
0163H No CAN message received within 4 secs
0164H Rotation Inverter overcurrent (< 3 times)
0199H Unknown rotation warning
20 Heater Warning 0251H Received command is not OK

0252H Heater command not OK
0253H No CAN message received within 4 secs
0254H Heater inverter overcurrent (inverter1) (<3 times)
0255H Filament open circuit (inverter1) (<3 times)
0256H Heater Inverter short circuit (inverter1) (<3times)
0257H Tube switch while filaments not OFF
0258H CAN Domain command number error
0259H CAN Domain request with no transfer init
0260H CAN Domain Toggle bit error
0261H CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download
0262H CAN Domain Abort received & applied
0263H Database download while heater not cut
0299H Unknown heater warning
422
PROTEUS XR/a
25 Low Voltage 0550H No more warn +160V too low or too high
Power Supply
Warnings
0555H Detected +160V too low
0560H No more warn +15V too low or too high
0561H Detected +15V too high
0565H Detected +15V too low
0570H No more warn -15V too low or too high
0571H Detected -15V too strong
0575H Detected -15V too weak
0599H Unknown LVPS warning
27 Application 1401H Saved RAM power supply limit reached

warnings This message is the result of a computation that is
made by the software based on the Date for a
period of approximately 7 years
423
PROTEUS XR/a
3-6 DIAGNOSTICS
This chapter describes diagnostics tools based on error codes and specific
diagnostics.
BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS
WARNING OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT-TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY
WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED.
3-6-1 Detailed Error Description & Troubleshooting Guide
The first part details errors, while the warning errors are listed in a second part of
this chapter.
The table below provides guidelines to troubleshoot Generator and Collimator
problems based on error code.
For each code, there is:
-Associated message and additional explanation related to the error
occurrence.
-List potential cause, in the order of expected probability.
Codes are sorted by ascending order both for simplified code and error code.
Refer to the theory of operation for error code structure for Generator error code.
Information about associated data structure is located at the end of each error
code subset whenever it applies.
Whenever wiring, cabling, LED check is mentioned in the recommended actions,
refer to the central listing.
3-6-1-1 Errors
Tube spits detection Errors (Code 30)
Class 2 Message/explanation Potential cause

Error code
30- Tube spit (kV+ and kV- dropped) x-ray tube spit.
0301H kV drop/spit detected
30- Tube spit (kV+ has dropped) 1. Anode side Tube spit.
0302H kV drop/spit detected on Anode side 2. Anode HV cable
3. HV tank
30- Tube spit (kV- has dropped) 1. Cathode side Tube spit.
0303H kV drop/spit detected on cathode side 2. Cathode HV cable
3. HV tank
30- kV regulation error 1. smooth HV tube spits
0304H This is a slow speed safety circuit in case of 2. kV control board (HV
“smooth” spits. regulation problem)
3. too much line impedance
4. half of AC/DC capacitors
open
5. Inverter (parallel inductor or
filtering capacitors)
6. HV tank
30- Re-starting safety. (unknown reason) 1. External unknown cause.
0305H Error occurring on safety line, while No root error 2. kV control board.
present at the error inputs (Err 0301 to 0304). This
is probably due to transient interference (Spikes).
424
PROTEUS XR/a
30- SPITS(data=1:Anode,2:cathode,4:Both,8:kV 1. Cathode spit if data =1/

0324H regul) anode spit if data=2 ,spits on
both if data =4
Cathode/anode HV cable
2. HV tank
3. IF data=8 run diagnostic for
error 0304H above
Anode Rotation errors (Code 40)

Error code
40- No CAN message 1. kV Control main
0101H received within 5 sec’s software lost
The rotation board has not 2. kV control or Rotation
received any signal from board driver failure
the kV control main 3. Bad contact on one of
software for the last 5 sec., the pin on the CAN bus
interpreted as a loss of line connector
communication
40- Database not correct. Wrong kV control Database.
0102H The firmware of the It can only happen at power
rotation board has up.
detected that the
Database received from
the kV control board has
wrong data.
40- Rotation current overload 1. Rotation board
0103H Rotation board has 2. Wrong Database
detected Main or auxiliary (improbable)
rotation current too high
compared to the max.
Tube motor current.
40- Rotation current openload 1. Tube stator winding is
0104H Rotation board detected open circuit: x-ray tube
that no current is flowing to 2. Incorrect wiring (Open)
the motor. 3. No DC bus on Rotation
board
4. Rotation board
40- Rotation phases 1. One rotation wire
0105H unbalanced missing
The amplitude difference 2. Rotation board
of the current between 3. Wrong tube
main and auxiliary is too configuration database
large.
40- Rotation phase error Rotation board
0106H The rotation board has
detected that the current in
the anode stator does not
show the correct phase
shift between main and
auxiliary.
425
PROTEUS XR/a
Error code Message/explanation Potential cause

40- Rotation Inverter 1. Rotation board
0107H permanent overcurrent 2. Tube stator winding in
An overcurrent has been short circuit -> x-ray tube
detected and 3 restart 3. Wiring incorrect
have been tried (shorted)
unsuccessfully within a
single rotation state
40- Rotation command error. No hardware failure
0108H Rotation board has
informed kV control board
that the command was
erroneous; this is a
DEBUG error.
40- MAINS_DROP has failed 1. Interference (spikes)
0109H The firmware of the 2. Mains drop
rotation board has 3. Cable or connector
detected the mains_drop contact in DC bus
signal activation and between power unit and
transmitted error to kV auxiliary unit
control 4. Rotation board
40- PRD error Rotation board
0110H Firmware checksum, RAM
test and EPLD access are
performed at power up or
reset.
40- F0 main frequency Rotation board
0111H problem.
EPLD has not applied the
inverter start command.
40- Unknown Rotation error. Software problem
0149H The main software
received an error from
rotation board with no
error code associated.
40- Error message from rotor Hardware/Software Conflict
111H firmware
Associated data structure:

PRD error:
component failure:
0001H=RAM
0002H=RAM stack
0200H=EPLD
8000H=program checksum
426
PROTEUS XR/a
Rotation database error:

2 bytes data, each value points to a specific parameter found as being erroneous
other errors:
rotation state:
0=inverter OFF
1=acceleration 0 to low speed
2=acceleration 0 to high speed
3=acceleration low speed to high
4=low speed run
5=high speed run
6=high speed to low speed brake
7=brake reverse
8=brake DC
Filament Heater errors (Code 50)

Error code
50- No CAN message received within 5 1. kV Control main
0201H sec’s software lost
The Heater board has not received 2. kV control or Heater
any command from the kV control board driver failure
main software for the last 5 sec., 3. Bad contact on one of
interpreted as a loss of the pin on the CAN bus
communication line connector
50- Heater inverter permanent Heater board
0203H overcurrent. (SW limit)
Issued by the heater board when an
overcurrent has been detected and 3
restarts have been tried without
success within 100 ms
50- Filament permanent open circuit. 1. X-ray tube filament open
0204H Issued by the heater board when an 2. Heater to HV tank cable
open has been detected and 3 3. Cathode HV cable or pin
restarts have been tried without contacts
success within 100 ms 4. Open circuit in filament
transformer inside HV
Tank.
50- Heater Inverter permanent short Heater board
0205H circuit (HW limit)
Issued by the heater board when a
short circuit has been detected and 3
restarts have been tried without
success within 100 ms
50- Filament current too high on inverter 1 1. Tube Database or
0206H for “Pre-Heat” calibration
This is the result of an integrated 2. Heater board
value of the RMS current
measurement on Heater board
comparison with max. Tube value in
Database.
427
PROTEUS XR/a
Error code Message/explanation Potential cause

50- Filament current too high on inverter 1. Tube Database or
0207H 1 for “Boost” calibration
Same as above 2. Heater board
50- Filament current too high on inverter 1. Tube Database or
0208H 1 for “Heat” calibration
Same as above 2. Heater board
50- Heater command error No hardware failure
0209H Heater board has informed kV
control board that the command was
erroneous; this is a DEBUG error.
50- Current under estimated fork/range Heater board
0210H RMS filament current measurement
(every 0.5 msec.) on heater board is
too high
50- Current under estimated fork range 1. Open circuit
0211H RMS filament current measurement 2. Heater board
(every 0.5 msec.) on heater board is
too low
50- MAINS_DROP detected. 1. Interference (spikes)
0212H The firmware of the Heater board 2. Mains drop
has detected the mains_drop signal 3. Cable or connector
activation and has transmitted error contact in DC bus
to kV control between AC/DC and
auxiliary unit
4. Heater board
50- PRD error 1. Heater board
0213H Firmware checksum, RAM test and 2. No -15V on Heater
EPLD access are performed at board
power up or reset.
50- Boost too long on inverter 1. May be a loss of
0214H Boost command stayed longer than communication during
400 ms boost.
50- Filament selection error. Heater board
0215H The relay on the Heater board
selecting the filament is in the wrong
position with respect to the selection
50- Measured current while inverter OFF Heater board
0216H Inverter current has been measured
while the inverter was not
commanded
50- Filament Database not correct Wrong kV control
0221H The firmware of the heater board has Database. It can only
0222H detected that the Received Database happen at power up.
0223H from kV control contains erroneous
0224H data for Tube 1, 2, 3, or 4.
50- Unknown heater error Software problem.
0248H The main software received an error
0249H from heater board with no error code
associated.
428
PROTEUS XR/a
Associated data structure:

PRD error:
component failure:
0001H=RAM
0002H=RAM stack
0200H=EPLD
8000H=program checksum
Filament database error:

2 bytes bitmap (LSByte=small focus, MSByte=large focus)
Each bit points to an erroneous parameter
other errors:
1 byte bitmap with the following structure:
bit7 (MSB) bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 (LSB)
focus selected tube selected small focus state large focus state
0=small focus selected 1=tube 1 selected 0=inverter OFF 0=inverter OFF
1=large focus selected 2=tube 2 1=preheat 1=preheat
3=tube 3 2=boost 2=boost
4=tube 4 3=heat 3=heat
Exposure errors (Code 60)

Error code
60- No kV feedback on anode 1. HV cable short circuit
0306H side 2. HV tank
kV measured <12 kV 0,5 ms 3. kV control board (less
after start of exposure on probable)
anode side only
60- No kV feedback on cathode 1. HV cable short circuit
0307H side 2. HV tank
kV measured <12kV 0,5ms 3. kV control board (less
after start of exposure on probable)
cathode side only
60- No kV Feedback (on anode 1. HV tank
0308H and cathode) 2. kV control board
kV measured <12 kV 0,5 ms
after start of exposure on both
anode and cathode.
60- kV detected during kV Improper setup before the
0309H diagnostics. diagnostic is run.
KV measured during inverter
diagnostics while no kV must
be generated.
60- kV MAX detected kV control
0310H kV reached 160 kV during
exposure
60- ILP current not OK. 1. Inverter LC resonant
0311H The current in the parallel circuit (Inverter coil assy,
resonant circuit of the inverter capa inverter assy.)
did not rise at the beginning 2. Inverter
of the exposure. 3. kV control
429
PROTEUS XR/a

Error code
60- ILR current not OK See above
0312H The current in the serial
resonant circuit of the inverter
did not rise at the beginning
of the exposure.
60- Inverter max. ILR current 1 HV tank
0313H detected. 2 kV control
This is a hardware detection
of maximum current in serial
resonant circuit.
60- ILR Current time out. 1. kV control
0314H The current resonant 2. Inverter
frequency is lower than 3. Current measurement
expected circuit.
60- Spit Max error. Reasonably x-ray tube
0316H kV control has detected the
number of tube spits during
exposure has reached the
limit (see theory of operation,
software section)
60- kV did not reach 75% after 20 kV control
0318H ms.
Indicates that there were no
HV ON signal generated for
exposure time count-up
60- kV unbalanced detected. HV tank
0319H Detects that there is more
than 12 kV difference
between kV+ and kV -
60- FPGA problem; Safety hit 1. This may be due to
0320H with unknown reason transient interference
No error at the inputs while (Spikes).
checking for error source. 2. SW bug
60- Spit retry failed Tube or HV cable
0321H
60- ILP and ILR current not OK 1. Inverter LC resonant
0323H No inverter current measures circuit. (Inverter coil
at the beginning of the assy, capa inverter assy,
exposure cabling)
2. Inverter
3. kV control board
60- No mA feedback 1. HV tank
0401H mA measurement function: 2. kV control board
kV control has detected no 3. x-ray tube (filament
mA feedback 20 ms after the open)
beginning of the exposure.
60- mA scale error 1. kV control board
0402H mA has been measured to be 2. default filament currents
either too low or too high with not correctly adjusted
respect to mA demand 20 ms 3. HV Tank (improbable)
after the beginning of the
exposure
430
PROTEUS XR/a

Error code
60- mA accuracy exceeded 5% Tube spit
0403H Measured mA every 50 msec
(Class 2 error) exceeded 5% of mA demand.
This error is logged, but does
not stop the exposure.
60- Inverter Gate Power Supply 1. Inverter (gate command
0504H error board)
gate supply voltage has 2. kV control board
dropped below the level 3. Generator input voltage
required to drive the IGBTs too low or line
properly impedance too high
60- Exposure backup mAs 1. Exposure command line
0801H exceeded stuck to the active state
The exposure command last 2. kV control board
so long that the maximum 3. Heater board
mAs allowed has been
reached.
60- Exposure backup time 1. System
0802H exceeded. 2. System-Generator cable
The exposure command last 3. I/F board: exposure line
longer than the duration that stuck to the active state
was loaded by the system
(Backup time + 5%.)
60- Exp cmd while gene not 1. Software bug/problem
0803H ready. 2. Cable / communication
generator received an problem
exposure command while not 3. External cause (Spikes)
in ready state
60- Time counter error. kV control board
1411H Error found in verifying the
counter normal operation.
60- mAs counter error kV control board
1407H Error found in verifying the
counter normal operation.
60- AEC counter error 1. ION chamber
1408H If there is no AEC feedback in 2. AEC cable, connection
AEC station exposure. 3. AEC board
4. kV control
60- mAs meter saturated. kV control
1409H A check is done on mAs
counter operation at the
beginning of exposure and
found the mAs meter with
unrealistic value.
60- FPGA locked. 1. Software problem
1410H FPGA detected an error and 2. kV control
did not allow start exposure
after exposure command
symbol was received
60- Tomo exposure cut by Check the TOMO angle
1420H Tomography
431
PROTEUS XR/a
Power supply (Code 70)

Error code
70- DC bus out if range (<400 1. mains problem (Too low
0501H or >850) or too high)
2. One phase missing at
Generator input
70- Inverter Gate Power 1. Mains
0503H Supply error (checked at 2. Cable pb
prep) 3. Gate command board
(Inverter)
4. kV control
70- Mains power supply has unknown
0505H dropped During exposure
70- DC Bus 1 phase Not Proteus
506H precharge error
70- DC Bus 1 phase discharge Not Proteus
507H error
70- AEC cell HV supply error Power supply 230Vdc for
510H AEC failed
70- Unknown LVPS error Software problem
0549H The main software
received an LVPS error
with no error code
associated.
70- Detected +160 V too high 1. LVPS
0553H +160 V is higher than 225 2. Heater board
V (measured on heater
board)
70- Detected +160 V too low 1. LVPS
0557H +160 V is lower than 110 2. Heater board
board)
Error code
70- Detected +15 V too high 1. LVPS open circuit
0563H +15 V is higher than 17.3 2. Heater board
board)
70- Detected +15 V too low 1. LVPS open circuit
0567H +15 V is lower than 13 V 2. Heater board
(measured on heater 3. rotation (short circuit)
board) kV control (short circuit)
(improbable)
70- Detected -15 V too high 1. LVPS open circuit
0573H -15 V is lower than -17.3 V 2. Heater board
(measured on heater
board)
70- Detected -15 V too low 1. LVPS (open circuit)
0577H -15 V is higher than -13 V 2. Heater board
(measured on heater 3. rotation (short circuit)
board) 4. kV control (short circuit)
(improbable)
432
PROTEUS XR/a
Hardware errors (Code 80)

Error code
80- Rotation board 1. Rotation board
0180H communication problem. 2. Control bus cable
kV control board 3. kV control
communication Watch Dog
with Rotation board
popped up because it did
not get reply from Rotation
board.
80- Rotation board has reset. 1. Rotation board
0181H kV control has detected 2. Interference (Spikes)
the Rotation board has
reset. KV control will
reload Rotation Database.
80- Heater board 1. Heater board
0280H communication problem 2. Control bus cable
kV control board 3. kV control
communication Watch Dog
with Heater board popped
up because it did not get
reply from Heater board.
80- KV conversion error KV control board
0321H KV feedback measured
while no KV generated
80- kV ref ADC / DAC failed KV control board
0322H kV control DAC and ADC
capability are permanently
tested for coherency.
80- RTL error (+ associated 1. system communication
0601H data to check which of the power supply (for isolated
4 RTL lines) communications)
Real Time Lines show a 2. system communication
wrong state. RTL’s are cable
tested on a regular basis 3. system interface board
in stand by. 4. system interface to kV
control flat cable
5. kV control board
80- External CAN bus off 1. system communication
0602H power supply (for isolated
communications)
2. system communication
cable
3. system interface board
4. system interface to kV
control flat cable
5. kV control board
80- Tube Fan supply error. 1. No 115 V tube cooling
0902H Rotation board has supply
detected that a wrong 2. Rotation board
voltage is applied to the
tube fan
433
PROTEUS XR/a

Error code
80- Internal CAN bus off 1. kV control
1402H Can device on kV control 2. Control bus cable
board detected abnormal 3. Heater or Rotation
level on it’s 2 line and sent
error to the CPU
80- Connection Fault Multiple, but likely
1403H One of the flat cable improbable.
connector is not connected
in Generator.
80- FPGA configuration kV control board.
1404H problem.
Detected during power up.
The kV control main
software cannot load the
FPGA.
80- Tank temperature sensor kV control
1405H problem. HV tank
Means that t°value of the
HV tank is < 10°C
Application errors (Code 90)

Error code
90- NV RAM checksum pb. 1. Database problem
0701H Generator kV control 2. External cause (Spikes)
board has detected 3. kV control
corruption in the NV Ram
verification (After power
up)
90- Software problem. 1. Software or Database
0702H problem.
2. kV control board failure.
90- Watchdog reset has just 1. Software or Database
0703H occurred. problem.
This error is logged when 2. kV control board failure.
the CPU of the kV control
board is reset by it’s
Watch Dog timer.
90- Rotation/Heater hold too Software problem.
0704H long.
Will pop up if preparation
command from the system
is maintained longer than
3 minutes.
90- Configuration error. Software/hardware conflict.
0705H
434
PROTEUS XR/a
Communication errors (code 100)

Error code
100- Debug screen com. error Engineering use
0603H
100- Database download error 1. Database file incorrect
0604H Generator has detected a 2. Transmission problem
problem during Database
download
100- TAV communication error. 1. Software / laptop
0605H Generator has detected a problem
communication problem 2. Cable problem
between the I/F and the
service laptop (When
generator is controlled by
the laptop)
100- MPC/Madrid 1. Cable, connection
0606H Communication error. problem between
No reply from the console. Generator and the
(This error message can console.
be seen using the service 2. Interface board
laptop) 3. kV control board
4. Cabling between kV
control board and IF
board
5. Console problem
Not Proteus
100- AEC communication error 1. AEC board
1301H KV Control has detected a 2. I/F board
communication problem 3. kV control
with AEC board. 4. Wiring
Thermal errors (code 110)

Error code
110- Tank Thermal Error 1. HV tank too hot; normal
0804H HV tank temperature error
measurement has reached 2. HV tank
60 degree C 3. kV control
110- 70 degree C thermal 1. X-ray tube too hot;
0903H safety error normal error
70°loop detected open 2. Wiring problem
3. Sensor problem (Tube)
4. rotation board
435
PROTEUS XR/a
Thermal errors (code 120)

Error code
120- Tomo brightness not good Technics (kV,mA) not set at
1500H the correct value. The
brightness signal is out
of range (+/-20%)
120- Exposure switch released Handswitch has been

1501H released before the end
of exposure
120- AEC CUT off error Backup time or mAs too
1502H short; AEC did not cut
the exposure
Proteus XR/a Collimator errors
Error Description Potential cause and recommended action

Code
Z00 RAM D1 error (fatal) Reboot System; If the error still occurs, change D1 board
Z01 EEPROM D1 error (fatal) Reboot System; If the error still occurs, change D1 board
Z02 CAN error (bus error, error overrun) Check CAN cabling (data, voltage) and CAN termination
Z03 CAN error (receiver overrun) Check CAN cabling (data, voltage) and CAN termination
and if heavy traffic on the CAN bus
Z04 No communication with D2 Reboot System; If the error still occurs, change D2 board
Z05 Calculation error - height Reboot System; If the error still occurs, change collimator
Z06 Calculation error - width Reboot System; If the error still occurs, change collimator
Z10 Stepping error - height leaves Observe the error; if it occurs always again in shorter time
intervals, change collimator
Z11 Stepping error - width leaves Observe the error; if it occurs always again in shorter time
intervals, change collimator
Z14 Limit switch - height leaves Reboot System; If the error still occurs, change collimator
Z15 Limit switch - width leaves Reboot System; If the error still occurs, change collimator
436
REV 42
Neon's
*
LEDs
DC bus, 400 ... 800 V

DC bus, 400 ... 800 V Heater Board
*
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
DS 1
DS 3
+ M -
1
F
*
INVERTER. & LLC. Circuit DS 1 DC bus, 160V
- 15V
(120 to 200V)
+ 15V
Gate Command Board
DS 300
*
* LVPS
I/F AC/DC NE 1 DS 2
437
Console PUPT-
or
DS7-6
DS 1, 2
Illustration1 - GENERATOR Visual Power Supply Distribution
-
- 15 V
+
-15V, +15V DS 3, 2, 1
AEC + 15 V Rotor +5, -15, +15
kV ctrl Board
*
- 15 V "VCC": +5V DS 7
N1 (230 V)
*
+ 15 V
EMC Flt.
3ph, 380 - 480 VAC
CB1
PDU K1
Service Manual
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a
3-7 OTHER FAILURES
Error Message / Potential cause Recommended action Troubleshooting guide

code explanation
System GENERATOR 1. No power on the Perform the troubleshooting in the following way:
does not reply Generator 1/ kV control Leds S0-S7 are lit successively:
to the system 2. EMC filter refer to system communication errors (code
3. AC/DC- Diode bridge 06xx H)
4. Cable between AC/DC
2/ Leds S0-S7 show a specific pattern: refer to
and LVPS
PRD errors section
5. LVPS down
6. CAN cable problem 3/ Led RESET is lit: board is maintained in reset
7. kV control either by the system or by a system I/F failure
8. RAD interface or kV control failure
9. AEC board 4/ Led HALT is lit: replace kV control
10. Rotation board 5/ No Led is lit: verify that +5 V on kV control
11. Heater board board (J6, pin 2).is present. If yes, replace kV
12. Inverter in short circuit control. If no:
13. Generator to system
6/ Verify if +15 V/-15 V is present (Leds
cable
DS1/DS2).
If yes:
Verify that mains_drop line is not stopping the kV
control software (mains_drop active):
6-1/ Check if DS1 LED on LVPS board is lit. If
yes, replace LVPS board.
6-2/ Disconnect Heater board control bus cable.
Check if kV control software starts. If yes,
replace Heater board.
6-3/ Disconnect Rotation board control bus cable
and connect it directly to LVPS board. Check
if kV control software starts. If yes, replace
rotation board.
6-4/ If AEC existing, disconnect AEC cable (J5)
from IF board (J3) cable. Check if kV control
software starts. If yes, disconnect AEC
chambers and connect AEC board to IF
board. If kV control starts, check AEC
chambers, else replace AEC board.
6-5/ Disconnect IF board cable (J10). Check if kV
control software starts. If yes, replace IF
board, else: replace kV control board.
if no:
7/ Verify if +15 V/-15 V is present on rotation
board (DS1/DS2) and the 160 V is present on
the heater board (DS3). If yes: check the
control bus cable to the kV control board. If no
error, change the kV control board. If no:
438
PROTEUS XR/a
Error Message / Potential cause Recommended action Troubleshooting guide

code explanation
GENERATOR 8/ Verify if the LVPS DC input is right. If no,
does not reply check AC/DC fuse and input line
to the system If yes:
(Cond‘t)
9/ disconnect all output cables from the LVPS
board. Verify the +15 V/-15 V/160 V output. If
right: reconnect each board successively to
find the one stucking the 15V to ground. If
wrong, replace LVPS board
3 phases CB1 1. Short circuit on 1/ Disconnect DC bus cables between AC/DC

breaker trips Generator: and inverter (on AC/DC side)
in PDU or AC - IGBT in short circuit 2/ Check if these cables are in short circuit. If
FUSES blown yes, replace inverter
- ACDC or bridge rectifier in
short circuit if no,
- EMC filter in short circuit 3/ Remove ACDC board
4/ Check between outputs pins then between
inputs of ACDC board. If short circuit, replace
AC/DC FRU
if no:
5/ Check bridge rectifier, between outputs, if yes,
replace ACDC FRU (including rectifier bridge)
if no:
6/ Check bridge rectifier, between inputs, if yes,
replace ACDC FRU (including rectifier bridge)
if no:
7/ Disconnect AC line input from EMC board.
Check EMC for short circuit between phases.
If short circuit, replace EMC board.
Software or 1. After software download: Retry download
Data base - Incorrect or uncompleted
corrupt download
- Checksum problem
439
PROTEUS XR/a
3-8 HEATING FUNCTION DIAGNOSTICS

Purpose:
The purpose of this test is to drive the heater inverter(s) on both filaments and all
the tubes connected to the Generator in order to identify a faulty heater FRU or a
wrong connection between heater board, HV Tank and tube(s).
Pre-requisites:
• kV control board alive and running: S0-S7 Leds are lit successively or a
combination of them blink
• heater board alive and running: DS1 and DS2 Leds are lit successively
• heater DC supply present: DS3 Led is lit
Test type: No manual interaction
Sequence:
Select the tube to run the test on, start the diagnostic.
The following sequence runs on the small focus and then on the large focus:
• 5 seconds preheat
• 0,4 s boost
• 5 s heat (focal spot max current - 1Amp)
There is 10 s stop time between each focal spot run
During the test, the heater safeties are checked the same way than in application
mode.
Error codes reporting:

Refer to the troubleshooting table.
440
PROTEUS XR/a
3-9 ROTATION FUNCTION DIAGNOSTICS

Purpose:
The purpose of this test is to drive the rotation inverter(s) in high speed mode (for
application supporting high speed mode) and low speed mode on all the tubes
connected to the Generator in order to identify a faulty rotation FRU or a faulty
dephasing capacitors FRU or a wrong connection between rotation board and
tube.
Pre-requisites:
• rotation board alive and running: DS5 Led blinking
• rotation DC supply present: DS7 neon is lit
• cabling between rotation board and tube checked
Test type:
No manual interaction, no loop on
Sequence:
Select the tube to run the test on, start the diagnostic.
The following sequence runs in low speed mode and then in high speed mode (if
high speed mode allowed):
• acceleration (time depends on tube type)
• s run
• brake (time depends on tube type)
There is 2 s stop time between each speed mode.
During the test, the rotation safeties are checked the same way than in
application mode.

Error code Associated data Conclusion
0103H Associated data points only to high Power-off. Check if rotation board K2 relay is short
0104H speed mode circuiting the rotor capacitors. If yes replace the rotation
0105H board. If no replace the rotation capacitors
0106H
0103H Associated data points to both high Replace the rotation board
0104H speed and low speed mode
0105H
0106H
For the other error codes, refer to the troubleshooting table.
441
PROTEUS XR/a
3-10 INVERTER GATE COMMAND DIAGNOSTICS

Purpose:
The purpose of this test is to verify that the HV power inverter drive is working
properly. The IGBTs gate drive supply and the IGBTs gate drive is verified. At the
same time verification is made that no inverter currents nor High voltage are
measured. This test is performed without DC voltage applied to the inverter so
that no Xray is generated. Anode rotation and filament drive are not activated
during this test.
Pre-requisites:
• generator input line in an acceptable range (380V-10% to 480V+10% for 3-
phase AC input)
• inverter gate_cmd board DC supply present: DS300 neon is lit
Test type: Manual operation is required.
Sequence:
1/ Switch the system OFF. Ensure there is no voltage on AC/DC board
2/ FOR SILHOUETTE VR / PROTEUS XR/a
- Remove DC BUS cable going to Inverter (refer to ”Inverter Power
Assembly” Disassembly/Reassembly procedure)
- Remove the EMC cover (refer to ”Inverter Power Assembly”
Disassembly/Reassembly procedure)
- Refer to Central Listing to ”GATE COMMAND BOARD” and to ”DUAL
SNUB BOARD” or “QUAD SNUB BOARD” for leds location.
3/ Power on the Generator
4/ Verify that the DS1 neon on inverter dual snubbers or quad snubbers board is
not lit
5/ Start the diagnostic and verify:
• error reported on the operator console
• inverter gate_cmd board Leds DS101, DS102, DS201, DS202 are lit: IGBTs
gate drive supply is working properly
6/ Press the exposure switch (10 s exposure is taken after a 10 sec. delay)
7/ During the “exposure”, verify:
• error reported on the operator console
• inverter gate_cmd board Leds DS100 and DS200 are lit: IGBTs gate drive is
working properly
8/ Release the exposure switch
9/ Power off the Generator
10/ Reconnect the 2 DC bus cables from the AC/DC board (see Central Listing).
442
PROTEUS XR/a
Error reporting:
Error Conclusion
DS1 neon lit Check that DC bus cables have been removed
DS300 neon off Check the gate_cmd supply cable between AC/DC and gate_cmd
board
0301/0302/0303/0304/0309/ Check that DC bus cables have been removed.
0310/0311/0312/0313/0314/ If yes, replace kV control board
0319/0323 (H)
0320 if problem persists, replace Kv control board
0501 kV control or inverter fault, replace inverter first
one of Replace inverter
DS101/DS102/DS201/DS202
LEDs off while no error
reported
DS100 and/or DS200 LEDs Check cabling between kV control, HV Tank and gate_cmd board.
off If cabling is right, kV control or inverter fault, replace inverter first
443
PROTEUS XR/a
3-11 INVERTER IN SHORT CIRCUIT DIAGNOSTICS

Purpose:
The purpose of this test is to verify that the HV power inverter is working
properly. The inverter is commanded at a fixed frequency and is loaded with a
short circuit. Verification is made that the inverter currents are correctly set. At
the same time verification is made that no High voltage is measured. This test is
performed without connecting the HV Tank to the inverter so that no Xray is
generated. Anode rotation and filament drive are not activated during this test.
Pre-requisites:
• Generator input line in an acceptable range (380 V-10% to 480 V+10% for 3-
phase AC input)
• inverter quad snubber board DC supply present: DS1/DS2 neon is lit
• Inverter gate command diagnostic passed without failure
Sequence:
1. Disconnect the HV Tank primary cables 1 from the inverter (see HV Tank
D/R job card).
Take care not to disconnect at the same time the IGBT middle point 2
Put the short circuit cable 3 (included in the first aid kit) between the two middle
connections as shown:
2. Power on the Generator

3. Verify that the DS1/DS2 neon on inverter quad snubbers board is lit
4. Verify that the DS300 neon on inverter gate_cmd board is lit
5. Start the diagnostic and verify that no error is reported on the operator
console
6. Press the exposure switch (100 ms exposure is taken)
7. Release the exposure switch
8. Verify error reported on the console
9. After exiting the test, power off the Generator
10.Remove the short circuit cable, reconnect the HV Tank primary cables (see
HV Tank or Inverter Power Supply D/R job card). TAKE CARE OF THE
POSITION OF THE TWO CABLES WITH WHITE RINGS.
444
PROTEUS XR/a
Error reporting:
error Conclusion
DS1/DS2 neon off Check that DC bus cables between AC/DC and inverter
DS300 neon off Check the gate_cmd supply cable between AC/DC and gate_cmd
board
0301/0302/0303/0304/0309/ Check that HV Tank primary cables have been removed.
0310/0319 (H) If yes, replace kV control board
0311 No Ilp current detected. See note 2
0312 No Ilr current detected. See note 3
0313 replace kV control board
0314 Ilr current resonant frequency is lower than expected. See note 4
0320 if problem persists, replace kV control board
0323 Both Ilr and Ilp currents not detected. See note 1
0501 kV control or inverter can be faulty
0505 Isolation fault between inverter components and ground. Check inverter
inductors. If no faulty component, kV control or inverter can be faulty
NOTE 1: Ilp and Ilr currents not detected
1. Check the -15 V (Led DS1) on kV control board (see central listing).
If it is not lit, refer to “other failures” section. Else:
2. Power off the Generator. Wait until all neons are off
3. Check that the currents transformers (capacitor set) to gate_cmd board cable
is correctly connected.
If yes:
4. Check that the inverter inductors are correctly connected. If yes:
5. Check that the gate_cmd to HV Tank cable and HV Tank to kV control cables
are correctly connected.
If yes, replace the inverter
6. Reconnect all the cables
NOTE 2: Ilp current not detected
2. Check that the parallel inductor is correctly connected. If yes:
3. Check that the parallel inductor impedance is 0 Ohms. If no: replace inverter.
If yes:
4. Check that inverter capacitors (capacitors set) are not broken. If yes, replace
the capacitor set. Else:
5. Disconnect the currents transformers to gate_cmd board cable. Check that
the parallel current transformer impedance is 0. If no: replace the capacitor
set. Else:
are correctly connected. If yes:
7. Disconnect the HV Tank to kV control cable. Check that the impedance
between pin 20 and pin 21 of J2 of HV Tank is 3,3 Ohms. If no replace the
inverter. If yes replace kV control board.
8. Reconnect all the cables.
445
PROTEUS XR/a
NOTE 3: Ilr current not detected

2. Check that the inductors are correctly connected. If yes:
the serial current transformer impedance is 0. If no: change capacitor set.
Else:
4. Check that inverter capacitors (capacitors set) are not broken. If yes, replace
the capacitor set. Else:
are correctly connected. If yes:
6. Disconnect the HV Tank to kV control cable. Check that the impedance
between pin 20 and pin 21 of J2 of HV Tank is 5 Ohms. If no replace iverter. If
yes replace kV control board.
NOTE 4: Ilr current resonant frequency is lower than expected

2. Check that the inductors are correctly connected. If yes:
3. Check that the inverter capacitors (capacitors set) are not broken. If yes:
replace the capacitor set. Else:
the parallel current transformer impedance is 0. If no: change the capacitor
set. Else: replace kV control board.
446
PROTEUS XR/a
3-12 NO LOAD HV DIAGNOSTICS

Purpose:
The purpose of this test is to verify that the HV power inverter and HV tank are
working properly. The exposure is taken as in application mode except that no
filament drive nor anode rotation is running. Verification is made that the inverter
currents are correctly set and that kV regulation is operating properly. As no
filament drive is applied, no X-Ray are generated.
This test also allow to separate Generator from HV cable and x-ray tube problem
by running it without the HV cables plugged on the HV tank (*).
(*) HV Receptacles must be filled with oil before starting test.
Pre-requisites:
• Generator input line in an acceptable range (380 V -10% to 480 V +10% for
3-phase AC input)
• inverter quad snubber board DC supply present: DS1/DS2 neon is lit
• Inverter gate command diagnostic passed without failure
• Inverter in short circuit diagnostic passed without failure.
Sequence:
1. Power on the Generator
2. Start the diagnostic and verify:
- error reported on the operator console
- inverter gate_cmd board Leds DS101, DS102, DS201, DS202 are lit:
IGBTs gate drive supply is working properly
3. Select kV (default = 80 kV) and exposure time (default = 1 sec.).
4. Press the exposure switch
5. During the “exposure”, verify:
- error reported on the operator console
6. Release the exposure switch
7. Power off the Generator
Error reporting:
See Troubleshooting Table.
447
PROTEUS XR/a
3-13 AEC DIAGNOSTICS

Purpose:
The purpose of this test is to drive the AEC function in order to identify a faulty
AEC, IF or kV control board FRU or the wrong connection between the AEC
board and ion chambers.
Pre-requisites:
• application mode without AEC mode is running properly
• kV Control board alive and running: S0-S7 LEDs are lit successively or a
• cabling between IF board, AEC board and ionization chambers checked.
Test type:
Automated, with the use of Service Laptop
Sequence:
Select AEC function in menu 1 on Service Laptop.
Press V to run the test.
AEC function is verified through a series of 7 tests as follows:
• AEC return measurement test:
A voltage reference is switched to one input of the AEC select multiplex.
Nominal value of return voltage = 5.24 V
Test 1 is OK if: 4 V < measured value < 6 V
This test is also performed at lower frequency count up:
Test 2 is OK if: 4 V < measured value < 6 V.
• Switching Gain test (x10):
A voltage reference is switched to one input of the AEC select multiplex and
count up gain is applied.
Nominal value of return volatge = 4.76 V
Test 3 is OK if: 4 V < measured value < 6 V.
• AEC ion chamber HV power supply test:
A portion of HV power supply is switched to one input of the AEC select
multiplex:
- No cell selected, Test 4 is OK if return voltage measurement is 0 V.
- Select respectively one of the three cells, left, right, middle.
Test 5, 6, 7 are OK if: 1 V < measured value < 3 V.
448
PROTEUS XR/a
Error Code Associated Data Conclusion

1111111 (*) None Test OK
Any combination None Test KO = test failed; replace AEC
board
0001000 None Communication error:
- Replace AEC board
- If same problem, apart from a DOA
board, suspect IF board then KV
Control board.
(*) except for AEC board with serial number: 2184569-X: the resulting error code
must be 0001111 (test is OK on this board the HV power supply test is not
performed).
For the other error codes, refer to the troubleshooting table.
449
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 8 PLANNED MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ACTION LIST……………………………….. 451

SECTION 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE JOB CARDS………………………………… 455
PM001 General Cleaning and Painting………………………………………………………………… 455
PM002 Visual Inspection…………………………………………………………………………………. 456
PM003 Functional Checks……………………………………………………………………………….. 457
PM004 Table Base Maintenance………………………………………………………………………… 458
PM005 Patient Support Maintenance…………………………………………………………………... 460
PM006 Cassette Tray and Carriage Maintenance……………………………………………………. 462
PM007 Accessories Maintenance………………………………………………………………………. 464
PM008 Generator Functional Checks………………………………………………………………….. 465
PM JEDI 15-2 Replace Generator Non Volatile Parameters RAM…………………………………. 469
PM009 Wall Stand…………………………………………………………………………………………. 471
PM010 SG100 Wall Stand………………………………………………………………………………… 476
PM011 SG120 Wall Stand………………………………………………………………………………… 477
PM012 Collimator………………………………………………………………………………………….. 478
PM013 X-ray tube cables…………………………………………………………………………………. 479
PM014 Wall Stand…………………………………………………………………………………………. 480
PM015 WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 600-0301) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)……………………….. 517
PM016 WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 600-0300 OR 2260354 ) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)………. 518
PM017 SG120 WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 2402562) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)……………….. 519
PM018 X-Ray Tube/ OTS Console mounting check………………………………………………… 520
SECTION 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ACTION LIST IN MULTIPLE LANGUAGES

……………………………………………………………………………………………... 521
3.1 PORTUGUESE (BR)…………………………………………………………………………………… 521
3.2 FRENCH (CA)………………………………………………………………………………………….. 525
3.3 SPANISH (LA)………………………………………………………………………………………….. 529
450
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ACTION LIST
The Proteus System does not require any Planned Maintenance activities for the first 12 months after system
installation.
The following table lists the required planned maintenance activities and the associated Job Card for each task.
Note: For the planned maintenance to the OTS suspension use the Periodic Maintenance Chapter of
Direction 2277285-100, OTS Suspension Service Manual with the following exceptions:
·All tasks with a frequency of 13 months should be a frequency of 12 months
·All tasks with a frequency of 13 months after 1st install, then every 2 years should be a frequency of 12
months after 1st install, then every 2 years.
·SubSection 5. Counterpoise Assembly – the Counterpoise Main Cable is on 10 year replacement cycle
·SubSection 6. Safety System – the Safety Reel and Cable is on 10 year replacement cycle
OPERATION FREQUENCY JOB CARD DESCRIPTION

GENERAL
General cleaning and As required PM001 Keep all surfaces clean and touch-up paint chips
painting
Visual inspection 12 months PM002 Check for debris that would indicate abnormal wear
Functional checks 12 months PM003 Perform the tasks described in Chapter 5,
Functional Checks
TABLE BASE
movement inhibition buttons 12 months PM004 Check condition and functioning; ensure buttons
have free play without any obstruction
Emergency buttons 12 months Check condition and functioning; ensure buttons
have free play without any obstruction
Electrical cables 12 months Check condition of cable sheathing and correct
routing
Power and ground 12 months Check condition and connections
connections
Connector panel and cable 12 months Check condition and connections
connectors
Check/Replace lubricant - Check the Inspect if sufficient grease is present on the lead
boxes lubricant boxes screw, if sufficient/adequate amount grease is
every 1 year, present on the lead screw, do not replace lubricant
replace if box. Repeat the grease adequateness check
required during next PM Schedule.
- Mandatory
replacement
frequency 5
years.
Check bearing and shaft 12 months Clean the lubrication oil
Check the lateral lock 12 months Check whether the floating table can be pushed
laterally when it’s locked
Clean the foot pedal 12 months Clear up the foot pedals foreign matter (IV cap,
cosmetic tips)/debris periodically. check foot pedal
base contact with floor to make sure no clearance
Check anchor tightness 12 months Tighten the anchor to 24N-m with torque wrench
PATIENT SUPPORT
Surface finish 12 months PM005 Check condition and clean
Longitudinal bearings 12 months Check condition and lubricate with grease
Longitudinal bearing tracks 12 months Clean and wipe with light machine oil
and rails
Transversal rods and 12 months Clear up oil and dust on the rods
bearings
451
PROTEUS XR/a

Rubber bumper end stops 12 months Check condition of stops and tightness of
(Longitudinal & transversal) anchoring
CASSETTE TRAY AND CARRIAGE

Electrical connector and 12 months PM006 Ensure connector is in good condition and making
cable good contact; check condition of cable sheathing
Bearings and tracks (front 12 months Check condition; clean and wipe with light machine
and rear) oil and lubricate with grease
Rubber bumper end stops 12 months Check condition of stops and tightness of
anchoring
Cassette size marker and 12 months Check condition; clean and wipe with light machine
locking assembly oil
ACCESSORIES
Compression band 12 months PM007 Check condition
Patient hand grips 12 months Check condition
GENERATOR
Check generator functions 12 months PM008 Test exposure, including AEC if resent
Record last error codes
Record result on counters
Check technique factors
Tighten terminals and remove dust
Replace NonVolatile RAM - If the NVRAM PM Jedi 15-2 1. Upload database
on the kV Control Board was last 2. Battery replacement
replaced on or 3. Download database
before
December
2003, then
replace NVRAM
at 10 years.
- If the NVRAM
was last
replaced after
December
2003, then
replace NVRAM
at 20 years.
WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 600-0301) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)
painting
Functional Checks
Steel cables 12 months PM009 Inspect length of steel cables, replace if worn out;
Check the tightness of column rail’s bolts
Carriage roller bearing 12 months Clean roller bearings and tracks
inspection
Vertical lock 12 months Clean and inspect
LAT bar 12 months Replace grease between the flanges
Steel Cable Replacement 5 years PM014 Replacement Procedure for the steel cables
Anchor Tightness Check 12 months PM015 Tighten Anchor to 45 N-m with torque wrench.
WALLSTAND (GPCP NO. 600-0300 or 2260354) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)
painting
452
PROTEUS XR/a

Functional Checks
Steel cables 12 months PM009 Inspect length of steel cables; replace if worn out;
Check the tightness of column rail’s bolts
inspection
LAT bar 12 months Replace grease between the flanges
Steel Cable Replacement 15 years PM014 Replacement Procedure for the steel cables
SG100 WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 2225849) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)
painting
Functional Checks
Steel cables 12 months PM010 Inspect and grease length of steel cables; replace
if worn out
inspection
Counterweight Chain 12 months Inspect and grease length of chains. Replace if
Maintenance excessively worn or rusty.
Angulation Components 12 months Inspect and Replace if necessary
(lock & cable)
Bucky Rotation Lock Check 12 months Verify lock mechanism does not move
Electrical Checks 12 months Inspect and replace any damaged cables or

connectors.
Check grounding.
SG120 WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 2402562) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)
painting
Functional Checks 18 months Perform tasks described in Chapter 5,
Functional Checks
Carriage roller bearing 18 months PM011 Clean roller bearings and tracks
inspection
Counterweight Chain 18 months Inspect and grease length of chains. Replace if
Maintenance excessively worn or rusty.
Electrical Checks 12 months Inspect and replace any damaged cables or
connectors.
Check grounding.
COLLIMATOR
Check the collimator 12 months PM012 1. Check the flange.
mounting screws 2. If the collimator mounting screws are loose,
apply LOCTITE onto the screws.
X-Ray Tube/ OTS Console 12 months PM018 3. X-Ray Tube/ OTS Console mounting check
mounting check
X-RAY TUBE CABLES
CHECK
453
PROTEUS XR/a

Check the fixing and 12 months PM013 1. Check the fixing and intactness of Anode
intactness of Anode Rotation cable and Thermal Protection
Rotation cable and Thermal cable.
Protection cable 2. Check the stator cable strain relief.
OTS Cover
Check OTS Cover Mounting 12 months 1. Check front carriage cover Velcro straps and
screws. If the screw loose, then tighten them,
apply Loctite 222 and torque 2.5 Nm (2x)
2. Check rear cover screws. If the screw loose,
then tighten them, apply Loctite 222 and torque
2.5 Nm (2x)
Ground Resistance and Leakage Current Tests
Ground Resistance Checks 12 months Refer to Chapter 11 Ground and Leakage
and Leakage Current Tests
Checks
454
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE JOB CARDS
The following pages list the preventive maintenance Job Card detailed activities.
PROTEUS XR/a 1/1 PM 001
subassembly: General Cleaning and Painting

purpose: Maintenance Procedure version no. 0
date: 21/12/99
to / / to
SUPPLIES
Cleaning Liquids and compounds.

Touch-up paint.
TOOLS
None
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE
1)Remove power from the system.

2)Carefully clean all surfaces of the system. Note any paint damage as you clean the system.
3)Apply touch-up paint to any paint-damage areas.
4)Reapply power to the system.
455
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Visual Inspection

date: 21/12/99
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
None
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Remove power from the system before beginning work.
Check that power is off.
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE
1)Remove power from the system.

2)Visually check around the moving part of the system for any debris, wear or damage. This includes the table
top, table base, and wall stand if present.
3)If any debris, wear of damage is observed, replace or repair the affected areas.
4)Reapply power to the system.
456
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Functional Checks

date: 21/12/99
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
None
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
No specific precautions.
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE
Follow the functional checks specified in Chapter 5 of this Service Manual.
457
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Table Base Maintenance

date: 10/10/06
to / / to
SUPPLIES
Lubricant.
TOOLS
Measure tape, Oil-proofed gloves.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE
During the maintenances, before removing the motor from under the table, or untie the
CAUTION motor chain, to avoid the injury by the potential dropping table, put the blocks kit
(5137108) over the rod.
1)Movement Inhibition Buttons.

a) Confirm the inhibition button locks table motion when depressed and unlocks when released. Check the
circuit if there is inappropriate motion.
2)Emergency buttons
a) Confirm emergency button removes table power when depressed and applies table power when
released.
3)Electrical cables.
a) Remove power from system.
b) Check condition of all cables including cable sheathing, connectors and overall condition; if any cable
damage is noted, replace or repair affected cable.
c) Confirm that the cable is correctly routed.
458
PROTEUS XR/a

4)Power and ground cables.
a) Check that power is removed from system.
b) Check condition of all power and ground cables including cable sheathing, connectors and overall
condition; if any cable damage is noted, replace or repair affected cable.
5)Connector panel and cable connectors.

a) Check that power is removed from system.
b) Check condition of all power and ground cables including cable sheathing, connectors and overall
condition; if any cable damage is noted, replace or repair affected cable.
d) Reapply power when complete.
6)Check/Replace lubricant boxes.

The boxes(qty 2) are on a Mandatory replacement frequency of 5 years. Use the steps below to replace
lubricant box only if at 5 years schedule or inspection shows insufficient grease present on the lead screw.
a) Power off the system.
b) Raise the table base to its highest position.
c) Remove the table base cover.
d) Demount the two lubricant boxes.
e) Take off the blocks from new lubricant boxes.
f) Put two new lubricant boxes on.
Note: Lubricant box contains grease lubricant (Part No.

096-0020) inside, pls wear oil-proofed gloves
during replacement, Refer to Materal Safty Data
Sheet (MSDS) file attached for grease lubricant
info.
.
7)Check bearing and shaft.
a) Power off the system.
b) Use a soft cloth to clean the lubricant oil on the surface of the shaft.
c) Use a soft cloth to clean the lubricant oil on the groove of bearing assembly and bushing.
8)Check lateral lock.

Check that the floating table cannpt be pushed laterally when it’s lacked.
9)Clean the foot pedal.
10) Tighten the anchor to 24N-m with torque wrench.
459
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Patient Support Maintenance

date: 21/12/99
to / / to
SUPPLIES
Grease.
Light Machine Oil.
TOOLS
None.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PREREQUISITES
None.
460
PROTEUS XR/a
PROCEDURE
1)Surface finish
Remove the dust from the table top and table topside rails.
2)Longitudinal bearings
Remove the dust.
3)Longitudinal bearing tracks and rails

Remove the dust from the bearing tracks and rails. Add the light machine oil on the tracks and rails.
4)Transversal rods and bearings

Remove the dust.
5)Rubber bumper end stops (longitudinal and transversal)

Verify the bumper stops have no cracks and one fixed tightly.
Below photos shows some of the operations:
461
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Cassette Tray and Carriage Maintenance

date: 21/12/99
to / / to
SUPPLIES
Grease.
Light Machine Oil.
TOOLS
None.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Power should be removed from the system to perform all checks.
PREREQUISITES
None.
462
PROTEUS XR/a
PROCEDURE
1)Remove power from system and perform LOTO prior to continuing with remaining maintenance procedure
steps.
2)Electrical connector and cable

Confirm properly connected.
3)Bearings and tracks(front and rear)

Remove the dust and add grease or light machine oil.
4)Rubber bumper and stops

Confirm the bumper and stops have no cracks and one fixed tightly.
5)Rubber bumper end stops (longitudinal and transversal)

Verify the bumper stops have no cracks and one fixed tightly.
6)Cassette size marker and locking assembly

Check the cassette size marker is firmly set and the cassette locking assembly is functional.
463
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Accessories Maintenance

date: 21/12/99
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
None.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None specific precautions.
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE
1)Compression band
Mount and remove the compression band on the table top.
2)Hand grip
Mount and remove the hand grip on the table top.
464
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Generator Functional Checks

date: 21/12/99
to / / to
SUPPLIES
Film.
Error–code recording form.
X–ray counter recording form.
TOOLS
Laptop.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
No specific precautions.
PREREQUISITES
465
PROTEUS XR/a

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
PROCEDURE
1.1 Test exposure
Technique factors (mA, mAs and ms) are displayed after exposure on the console.
1.2 mA accuracy
Run the exposures in table below and check if the mA value on console after exposure is between the min
and max value.
If not , run the same exposure 10 times with exposure time set to 0.125s and then check again.
1.3 AEC functionality check (if existing)

Put 15cm of Plexiglas or a plastic bucket with 15 cm of water on the table top
Select Two point mode (mAs)
Set kV to 80 kV and mAs to 600
Run the exposure
Develop the film
Check that the density is 1 +/–10%. If not redo AEC calibration. (See Job card in chapter 3)
466
PROTEUS XR/a

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2. Record last error codes

Go to calibration mode by using keys “ALT and S”
Go to MENU 2 with arrow keys
Press (F3) to select LIST
Press (F5) to select the first error code
Fill the chart below with the error code number
Then use F5 key for following error code.
Simplified Error Generator Error Class Data associated with the Number of oc- Date and
Error Code Code Phase Error Code currences Time
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Refer to diagnostic section (Chapter 7) for fix error (if necessary).
Clear the Error Log after checking. (Use CTRL and H keys, then confirm with W key).
467
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Record results on counters

Go to calibration mode by using keys “ALT and S”
Go to MENU 2 with arrow keys
Press (F5) to select NEXP(Number of EXPosures)
Press (F5) to select the first counter
Fill the chart below with the counter number
4. Check technique factors

Run the Accuracy checks in “Functional Check procedure” in Chapter 4.
Make a copy of illustrations 3, 4, 5, and 6 and fill it with the results you get.
5. Tighten terminals and remove dust
– Tighten the inputs connections on generator , located near the labels on AC/DC module (refer to
illustration in disassembly / reassembly section).
– Tighten the DC bus connections on generator located on the upper side of the generator (refer to
illustration in disassembly / reassembly section).
– Verify if all connectors are correctly plugged in.
– Remove dust by using a vacuum-cleaner.
468
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/2 PM JEDI 15-2
subassembly: Replace Generator Non Volatile Parameters RAM

date: 21/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS

Check that the power is off.
4 PREREQUISITES
Upload the database that is stored in the RAM before starting the replacement procedure (refer to Job Card CAL
JEDI 8-6 ”Backup & Restore Database Setup Parameters”).
469
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 2/2 PM JEDI 15-2
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Remove and Replace the RAM
On the kV Control board, note the direction that the RAM faces. Insert the tip of a small screw driver underneath
left side of U32 and lever gently, then grasp it between your thumb and forefinger and pull it directly away from its
support on the board.
Insert the new Nonvolatile Parameters RAM in its place. Be careful to insert it facing in the same direction.
Refer to Central Listing section for more details.
This NV RAM contains a LITHIUM CARBON MonoFlouride (LiCFx) battery, used to

CAUTION provide the battery backup for the static RAM and the time keeper device. Electrical
Characteristics: 3 V - 49 mAh type BR 1225.Resend the former component to your local
GEMS representative for recycling.
5-2 Download Database
Reapply power.
Download the database (refer to Job Card CAL JEDI 8-6 ”Backup & Restore Database Setup Parameters” in
Chapter 4).
470
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Wall Stand

date: 05/04/01
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
Torque Wrench with 5mm Hex. Bit Socket

Allen Key
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PREREQUISITES
None.
1. PROCEDURE FOR VISUAL CHECK ON CABLES
1) Remove power from the system.

2) Inspect steel cables; please refer to the criteria of failure condition in below instruction, replace if the cable
satisfy the failure condition:
➢Good status of steel cable
1) Good steel cable without any lubricate 2) Good steel cable with lubricate 3) Good steel cable with some dusts
471
PROTEUS XR/a
➢ Failures status of steel cable
1) Expanded / twisted
2) Broken
Note: The steel cable will be determined as failure for one internal wire broken end.
472
PROTEUS XR/a
3) Clean carriage tracks.

4) Clean and inspect the vertical lock.
2. PROCEDURE TO CHECK TIGHTENESS ON COLUMN RAIL BOLTS
1) Remove the back cover of the wallstand column
473
PROTEUS XR/a
2) Move the wallstand bucky to various positions, the bolts appeared on the two sides of the
column inner rails. There are total of 22 bolts with 11 bolts on each side of the rails.
There are total of 11

bolts on each side of rail
474
PROTEUS XR/a
3) Use the 9Nm torque wrench to fasten on the bolt, until the required torque reached 9Nm.
Note: Use Allen key on systems where space is a constraint to access the bolts
4) Move the bucky to different position, repeat step 3 to check the torque for the rest of bolts
appeared else of the column.
5) Restore the column cover back to the column.
475
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: SG100 Wall Stand

date: 05/04/01
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
None
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE

2) Inspect steel cables; replace if worn out.
3) Clean carriage roller bearings and tracks.
5) Counter Weight Chain Maintenance.
6) Inspect Angulation Components (lock &cable).
7) Check Bucky Rotation Lock.
8) Electrical Checks.
Note: The procedures in this Job Card are concerted with the revision 6 of SG 100 Wall Stand Service
Manual (GPCP Number 2150297-100). For the reason of the update and change in that manual, it is
476
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: SG120 Wall Stand

date: 30/09/04
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
None
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE

2) Clean carriage roller bearings and tracks.
4) Counter Weight Chain Maintenance.
5) Electrical Checks.
477
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Collimator
date: 27/09/01
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
Allen Key
Calliper
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Eclipse
PREREQUISITES Proteus
Collimator
None. Flange
PROCEDURE
2) Check collimator mounting collar If the mounting collar
loose,please tighten the screws A with torque 2.9 Nm Flange Proteus
and apply Loctite 222 onto the screws，tighten the XR/a
screws B with torque 4.3 Nm and apply Loctite 243
onto the screws
Collimator
3) Check the collimator mounting screws. If they are
loose, please follow the Job Card IST015 or IST017
for MX100 X-ray tube in Chapter 2 to apply LOCTITE Screw B
onto the screws. Or please follow the Job Card
IST014 or IST016 for RAD 14,21 X-RAY in Chapter 2
to apply LOCTITE onto the screws.
4) Follow the Job Card IST015 or IST017 for MX100 X-
ray tube in Chapter 2 to securely mount the collimator.
Or please follow the Job Card IST014 or IST016 for
RAD 14,21 X-RAY in Chapter 2 to securely mount the
collimator.
5) Visual check to be sure set screw tail is not projecting

outside. If set screw tail is projecting outside screw
hole, angulate the tube assembly to let collimator
window point to ceiling, depress the lever fully, tighten Screw A
screw with T-shape Allen Key to keep the set screw
tail immerged inside screw hole as shown below
Rotate the collimator by hand while depress the lever, be

sure the collimator can rotate freely. Angulate the Tube
Assembly back to return to use.
478
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: X-ray tube cables

date: 12/12/05
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
None
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE

2) Check the fixing and intactness of Anode Rotation cable and Thermal Protection cable.
3) Check the stator cable strain relief marked in the illustration for RAD 14,21 X-ray tube.
4) Check the intactness of heat shrink tube, check the fastness of cable clamp and copper strap for RAD 14,
21 tube.
Note: Step 3) is only for RAD 14, 21 X-ray tube, not for MX100 X-ray tube.
Figure 1: RAD 14 X-ray Tube Figure 2: RAD 21 X-ray Tube

Cable strap 3x M4
Cable Clamp screws.
1xM4 screw,
2xM4 flat washers.
Thermal cable Apply Loctite
242(46-170686P1)
clamp
mounting
block
Stator cable
Attach P-clamp
using M4 hex. nut Copper strap
479
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Wall Stand

purpose: Replacement Procedure For Steel Cable version no. 0
date: 13/01/15
NF No. Production date Serial No. Personnel:2 or 3
to / / to
NOTE
For wallstand Model Number: 600-0301, the replacement frequency is 5 years; for wallstand Model Number 600-
0300 or 2260354, replacement frequency is 15 years.
Field Supplied Materials
- Metric Hex Bit Socket Set
- Socket Wrench
- Screw Driver
Note: For sites with Wallstand close to wall, an L-shaped screwdriver is needed to accommodate the extreme
condition where only 45mm distance is available to loose and re-tighten the screws. Therefore the L-shaped
screw driver’s length should not exceed 45mm.
- Torque Wrench set with minimum range is less than 12N.m or maximum range greater than 12N.m
- 8 Feet A-frame Step Ladder
RESOURCE PLANNING (Est.):

- This procedure requires 2 people. The primary FE must be trained to a XR Rad Full-Service or Level 3
qualification and other FE can be a basic skilled only for supporting. 180 minutes of operation time is required.
- This procedure will require 3 people only if FE choose to proceed with Lay Down Procedure
SPECIAL TOOLS
One of the special lifting tools is required
- Carriage Lifting Tool (GE PN: 5692703)
- Genie Counterpoise Lifting Fixture (GE PN: 5417996) with Aluminium Supporting Block Adapter (GE PN:
5692702)
480
PROTEUS XR/a
Prerequisites
- Verify that at least 175cm of free cable length is available between the bucky carriage and the point where the
cables exit from the wall. This is needed to allow successful removal of the carriage from the column.
1. Procedure
NOTE: Please procure one of the lifting tools (either Carriage Lifting Tool or Genie Lift Tool ) before
proceeding, the lift tool will be used when lifting/lowering the carriage from the wallstand column
NOTE: For sites which face the restriction on height or wallstand clearance to wall, i.e. the room ceiling
height is lower than 2450mm or space between wall and wallstand is less than 60mm, please
proceed with the Lay Down procedure to lay down the wallstand to perform the task in Page 8-59.
IMPORTANT:
• EHS RECOMMENDATION: SAFETY PPE – For safety please wear safety shoes, safety glasses
and gloves, while performing the FMI procedure.
• EHS CAUTION: Use of Ladder – For Personal safety please follow through below guidance before
proceed with FMI steps that will involve the use of ladder.
- Before using a ladder, check it carefully to ensure there are no visible defects and that it is in good
working condition.
- Place the ladder on stable and level ground. DO NOT place it on an uneven surface.
- Ensure that the ladder is fully extended before starting work.
- Do not work on top rung of the ladder.
- Maintain three points of contact with the ladder at all times.
Carriage Lift Tool Replacement Procedure
Installation of Carriage Lifting Tool (GE PN: 5692703)

NOTE: For usage of Genie Lift tool, please refer to the separate instruction in Page 8-47
1. Remove the package and lay down the component like below, connect the lower part of the
supporting column with the main body by fastening the bolts in the joints.
2. Install the diagonal supporting rods, and then make the main body stands up.
481
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Take the gearbox assembly from the package box and put it on the side of the top where it has
four rectangular holes,
4. Align the position of the gearbox on the top plate, ensure gap are shown to insert the 4 T-shaped
bolts provided, fasten the nut on the T-shaped bolt to fix the gearbox on the plate.
482
PROTEUS XR/a
5. Remove the gear box cover and insert shafts. When inserting shafts (racks) onto gear box ensure
the tops of the shafts are level with each other before re-attaching the covers to the gear box.
6. Install the handle and fasten the set screw on the holder
Replacement Procedure by Engineering Designed Lifting Tool
Before You Begin
WARNING
TAG AND LOCKOUT POWER WHEN REQUIRED TO DO SO IN THE STEPS.
483
PROTEUS XR/a
1. Remove the wallstand base plate and check the security of the floor mountings.
2. Remove the additional support brackets on the wallstand
3. Remove the cover in the back of wallstand column by unscrewing the 8 screws in the cover.
NOTE: For sites with limited distance clearance between wallstand back cover and wall,
please use a reduced length screw driver or L-shape driver.
484
PROTEUS XR/a
4. Cut the wiring clips for the wire connecting to the bucky and carriage. This is to prevent the wires
stretching when moving the bucky and carriage apart in later steps.
5. Remove the screws from the cable holder, and loosen the cables
6. Remove Bucky Tray by pushing on tab and pulling out the tray
7. Insert supplied aluminum block adapter under counterweights. Raise the bucky until counterweights
are supported by the block.
Note: There are 2 types of supporting column provided in the kit, the extra slim column is
provided to be inserted for the condition where clearance between wallstand and wall is
limited, please choose appropriate one to insert inside the cavity according to the site
condition.
485
PROTEUS XR/a
8. Move the lifting tool in front of the wall stand until the bucky rests on the platform, and then lock the
wheels of the table.
10. Remove the left side cover on the column and take off the ground wire by unscrewing the screw on
the wire end.
486
PROTEUS XR/a
Note: Additional cables will be required to be removed when there is Knee Spacer option.
11. Mount the support brackets on the table, which will support the bucky assembly. Mark the position
of the four bolts on the back of bucky by pencil. Remove the four bolts on the bucky. The bucky
weight should be supported by the lifting tool.
487
PROTEUS XR/a
12. Detach the bucky assembly from the carriage by moving the lifting tool away from the wallstand, in
the same time, pull out the ground wire from the carriage.
Pull out the

earth wire from
the carriage
13. Rotate the lifting tool clockwise for 90 degree, the lifting bar should now face the carriage, adjust
the height of the lifting handle bar and fix it with top of the carriage by fastening the 2 M8 screws
14. Raise the lifting tool a few centimeters, and loosen the nut that fastens the screw on the counter
balance, then loosen the two screws until the two cables detach from the counterweight.
NOTE: For wallstand with limited rear space to wall, crowfoot wrench is recommended to use to
loosen the nuts.
488
PROTEUS XR/a
15. Climb on the ladder and take off the wall stand column cover by removing the 2 screws on the top
of the cover.
16. Remove the screws which secure the cable tie in the back of the column, and remove the 2 End
Stops on top of the column.
489
PROTEUS XR/a
17. Climb on the ladder and remove the 3 bolts on the right, left & rear side of the column, pull out the
pulley-assembly & the two accompanying steel cables, Secure pulley assembly to lifting tool to
prevent falling.
CAUTION: Ensure the wheels are locked before performing next step
18. Lift the carriage up by rotating the driver handle, until the whole carriage is above the column and
can be split apart.
19. Release the wheels of the lifting tool, pull back the lifting tool away from the column for a distance,
this is to ensure the column will not interfere when the carriage is being lowered down.
20. Lock the wheels on the lifting tool and then rotate the handle to lower the carriage until the lifting
bars touch the ground
21. Loosen the 6 bolts on the cable holding plate inside the carriage and remove one cable from the
holding plate
CAUTION: DO NOT remove the fixation bolts out of the holding plate. This is to ensure the
pressing plate is NOT removed from the assembly
490
PROTEUS XR/a
NOTE: Take out only one cable out of two this time.
22. Remove the bolt that fixing the cable on the pulley, take out one steel cable completely
23. Insert the new cable to the pulley

NOTE: Be careful about the direction when insert the new steel cable into the pulley
24. Repeat the cable replacement step (Step 22~23) for the other cable
25. Install the bolts back onto the pulley

491
PROTEUS XR/a
26. Re-fasten the pressing plate in position with torque wrench. The required torque is 12 Nm.
NOTE: Please tension the bolts in a pattern and repeat the pattern for multiple times, in order to
make sure all bolts are correctly tensioned. Make sure the two cables placed in same length inside
the pressing plate
27. Lift up the carriage by rotating the lifting handle, raise it to a height position above the column
28. Unlock the wheels of the lifting tool and align the carriage on the top of the column and slide the
carriage down along the column. Lower the carriage to a height of around 180 cm
NOTE: During one FE lower the carriage by handle. Another FE should watch the alignment of
Carriage with column guide rails.
492
PROTEUS XR/a
29. Take the pulley from the lifting tool, throw the suspended cables into the column and then put it
back onto the top of the column. Fasten the 3 bolts which fix the pulley on the column put back the
column cover. Reinstall end stops on top of column guide rail.
30. Connect the other side of cables to the counterweights: Firstly round the screw until the screw pin
reach the bottom of the hole. Then fasten the nut onto the screw. Do the same operation for the other
cable.
NOTE: Make sure the cables are not twist together inside the column
31. Loosen the fixation between the carriage & lifting tool
32. Rotate the lifting tool for 90 degree, make the rear of bucky face the carriage, and wire the ground
cable into the carriage. After the ground cable is wired through the carriage, mount the 4 bolts to fix the
bucky onto the carriage.
493
PROTEUS XR/a
33. Power on the system and lower bucky. Remove aluminum supporting block adapter from under the
counterweight.
34. Install the Wallstand rear cover back by mounting the 6 screws back.
35. Redo wall stand alignment with OTS.
36. Re-tie the cable tie
37. Locate the Wallstand Cable Replacement Label on the wallstand bottom and record the cable
replacement date.
38. Proceed to Functional Checks on Page 8-68
494
PROTEUS XR/a
Genie Lift Tool Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the wallstand base plate and check the security of the floor mountings.
NOTE: For sites with limited distance clearance between wallstand back cover and wall,
please use a reduced length screw driver or L-shape driver.
495
PROTEUS XR/a
stretching when moving the bucky and carriage apart in later steps.
496
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Remove Bucky Tray by pushing on tab and pulling out the tray
7. Move crossbar back 3 inches on Genie Lifting fixture
8. Push the Genie Lift Tool toward the Wallstand base until it touches the base
9. Insert the supporting aluminum block adapter under counterweights. Raise the bucky until
counterweights are supported by the block. Lift the Genie tool until the bucky are support by the Genie
lift tool platform.
Note: There are 2 types of supporting column provided in the adapter kit, the extra slim column is
provided to be inserted for the condition where clearance between wallstand and wall is limited,
please choose appropriate one to insert inside the cavity according to the site condition.
497
PROTEUS XR/a
10. Power off the system
11. Remove the left side cover on the column and take off the ground wire by unscrewing the screw on
the wire end.
12. Mark the position of the four bolts on the back of bucky by pencil, and then remove the four bolts
on the Wallstand bucky, the bucky weight is now supported by the lifting tool.
Note: During one FE removing the bolts of bucky, another FE please make sure help support the
stability of bucky on the Genie lift platform
498
PROTEUS XR/a
13. Detach the bucky assembly from the carriage by pulling the bucky away from the wallstand, in the
same time, pull out the earth wire from the carriage.
Pull out the

earth wire from
the carriage
14. Slide bucky to the back of the Genie Lift Tool. Lower the Genie while supporting the bucky.
Remove the bucky from the lift tool platform and move it aside.
Note: Make sure the cable are not stretched when moving it aside
15. Place the extension column on the Genie lift tool.

16. Bolt it to the platform using the wrenches and the 4 Nuts/Bolts.
17. Raise the telescoping section of the Lift Tool Column to the third hole
499
PROTEUS XR/a
18. Place the aluminium supporting adapter provided onto the Genie Lift Tool Column
19. Insert shims provided along with the adapter to adjust the engagement of the aluminiun adapter to
the column, make sure the adapter is securely placed inside the extension column.
20. Check cable length to insure there is enough free cable slack to allow carriage to clear top of
column. Exposed cable length of 175 cm from bottom of carriage will be needed. If sufficient cable
length is not available the cables will need to be removed from the carriage.
500
PROTEUS XR/a
21. Push the lift tool toward the carriage and align the height of the lift tool adapter to the carriage by
adjusting the height of lift tool, fix the adapter to the carriage by fastening with 4 supplied bolts.
22. Raise the carriage up by rotating the lift tool handle until the cables are loose
Cables are loose
23. Loosen the locking nut securing the screw on the counterweight cables, then loosen the two
screws, the two cables will detach from the counterweight.
Note: For wallstand with limited rear space to wall, crowfoot wrench is recommended to use
to loosen the nuts.
501
PROTEUS XR/a
24. Climb on the ladder and take off the wall stand column cover by removing the 2 screws on top of
the cover. Then remove the screw on the wire clip and 2 End Stops on top of the column
25. Take out the pulley-assembly & the two accompanying steel cables from the column, lower it and
put it onto the lift tool adapter. Secure pulley assembly to lifting fixture to prevent falling.
502
PROTEUS XR/a
26. Raise the carriage using rotating handle, raise carriage to a height position above the column
27. Pull back the lifting tool away from the column, this is to ensure the column will not interfere when
the carriage is being lowered down.
28. Lower the carriage to a working height
29. Loosen the 6 bolts on the cable holding plate inside the carriage and remove one cable from the
holding plate
Caution: DO NOT remove the fixation bolt out of the holding plate. This is to ensure the
pressing plate is NOT removed from the assembly
Note: Take out only one cable out of two this time.
30. Remove the bolt that fixing the cable on the pulley, take out one steel cable completely
503
PROTEUS XR/a
31. Insert the new cable to the pulley

Note: Be careful about the direction when insert the new steel cable into the pulley
32. Repeat the cable replacement steps (Step 30~31) for the other cable
33. Install the bolts back onto the pulley
34. Re-fasten the pressing plate in position with torque wrench. The required torque is 12Nm
Note: Please tension the bolts in a pattern and repeat the pattern for multiple times, in order make
sure all bolts are correctly tensioned
Note: Make sure the two cable are placed in same length inside the pressing plate
35. Lift up the carriage by rotating the lifting handle, raise it to a height position above the column
504
PROTEUS XR/a
36. Align the carriage on the top of the column and slide the carriage down along the column. Watch for
potential hang-up on bearing mounting bolt. Lower the carriage to a height as shown in Fig. A
NOTE: During one FE lower the carriage by handle. Another FE should watch the alignment of
Carriage with column guide rails.
Fig. A
37. Take the pulley from the lifting tool, throw the suspended cables into the column and then put it
back onto the top of the column. Fasten the 3 bolts which fix the pulley on the column, put back the
column cover. Reinstall end stops on top of column guide rail.
38. Connect the other side of cables to the counterweights: Firstly round the screw until the screw pin
reach the bottom of the hole. Then fasten the nut onto the screw. Do the same operation for the other
cable.
NOTE: Make sure the cables are not twist together inside the column
505
PROTEUS XR/a
39. Loosen the fixation between the carriage & lifting tool
40. Place the bucky onto the Lift Tool and raise it to the position where it would align with the carriage,
wire the ground cable into the carriage. After the ground cable is wired through the carriage, mount the
4 bolts to fix the bucky onto the carriage.
41. Power on the system and lower bucky. Remove aluminum supporting block from under the
counterweight.
42. Install the Wallstand rear cover back by mounting the 6 screws back.
45. Locate the Wallstand Cable Replacement Label on the wallstand bottom and record the cable
replacement date.
46. Proceed to Functional Checks on Page 8-68
506
PROTEUS XR/a
Lay Down Procedure

NOTE: For sites which face the restriction on height or wallstand clearance to wall, i.e. the room ceiling
height is lower than 2450mm or space between wall and wallstand is less than 60mm, please
proceed with the procedure in this section to lay down the wallstand to perform the replacement.
Caution: Three FE must be on site to perform this replacement
2. For WDR1 Upgraded DR System, remove the detector and Bucky Tray by pushing on tab and pulling out the
tray.
507
PROTEUS XR/a
stretching when moving the bucky.
5. Move the wallstand bucky to the lowest position, then place a supporting wood in the space under the bucky.
508
PROTEUS XR/a
6. Power off the system
Note: For wallstand with Knee Spacer, please refer to Step 9 for next step, for wallstand without
Knee Spacer, please refer to Step 8 for next step.
509
PROTEUS XR/a
8. Remove the 4 bolts from the back of Bucky, then make the bucky sit on a supporting wood, pull out the
earth wire from the carriage meanwhile detach the bucky from the wallstand carriage and move it aside.
9. Remove the 4 bolts mounting the carriage to the knee spacer, make the knee spacer and bucky sit on the
supporting wood
10. With the system switched off, two persons stand on each side of the wallstand, lift the bar of the wallstand
carriage to bring the carriage to the top position.
510
PROTEUS XR/a
11. Remove the wallstand base cover and remove the 4 anchor bolts
Cover
12. Rotate the wallstand (if necessary) to make the front of the wallstand to face the ground. Put a supporting
column about 1.8 meters apart from the ground.
13. Two persons stand on each side of the wallstand, the third person stand in the back of the wallstand column,
with two persons together pull down the wallstand toward the open ground, the third person need to ensure
the wallstand base will not slip when the column being laid down. Place the Wallstand on the supporting
block.
Note: The weight of the assembly is between 110kg and 140kg, depends on whether the wallstand is
equipped with knee spacer or not.
Note: The weight force exert on each person will increase as wallstand being gradually laid down
Place the wallstand

on the supporting
block
511
PROTEUS XR/a
14. Remove the steel cable on the side of counterweight, by loose the nut that fastening the screw on the
counter balance, then loosen the two screws, the two cables will detach from the counterweight.
15. Take off the top cover by removing the 2 screws on the top.
16. Remove the 4 hex bolts in fastening the pulley from each side of the column.
Total 4 bolts on
each side of the
column
512
PROTEUS XR/a
17. Remove the screw on the cable tie and two shim placed on each side of the column rails
18. Grip the bar on the pulley to pull the pulley and accompanying cables out, and then pull out the carriage.
19. Lay down the carriage on the floor and loosen the 6 bolts to release the pressing plate and cables.
513
PROTEUS XR/a
20. Remove the bolt that preventing the cable jumping out of the pulley, take out the 2 cables completely
21. Take the new cables and insert into the carriage, re-fasten the pressing plate in position with torque
wrench. The required torque is 12 Nm.
NOTE: Please tension the bolts in a pattern and repeat the pattern for multiple times, in order make
sure all bolts are correctly tensioned
NOTE: Make sure the two cables placed in same length inside the pressing plate
514
PROTEUS XR/a
22. Wire the other end of the cable across the pulley; fasten the bolt that preventing the cable jumping out of
the pulley.
Fasten the bolt that

preventing the
cable jumping out
of the pulley.
23. Put the carriage and the cables back into the wallstand column, fastening the pulley back onto the
wallstand column.
24. Check the two cables are not tangled inside the column, and then connect the cable to the counterweights.
Check the
two cables
are not
tangled inside
the column
25. Reverse the steps above to re-install the top support and cover.
515
PROTEUS XR/a
26. Move the wall stand back and reverse the steps 1-5 to re-install the bucky and restore wire.
27. Re-install the cover in the back of the column.
29. Mount anchor bolts and wall mounting bolts.
31. Locate the Wallstand Cable Replacement Label on the wallstand bottom and record the cable replacement
date.
Functional Checks:
1. Check vertical travel of bucky by moving up and down, the travel range should between 460-1770
+/- 10mm.
2. Check the sounds of movement of bucky, the movement should be smooth and quiet with no
observable noise and conflicts.
3. For system integrated with WDR1 system, check detector QAP, if QAP fails please re-do detector
calibration.
516
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 600-0301) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)

date: 30/03/15
to / / to
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
PREREQUISITES
None.
TOOLS
Torque Wrench
PROCEDURE
1. Remove Wallstand Base Plate Cover

2. Use torque wrench to calibrate the anchor’s tightness to 45 N-m
3. Re-install the cover back.
517
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 600-0300 OR 2260354 ) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)

date: 30/03/15
to / / to
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
PREREQUISITES
None.
TOOLS
Torque Wrench
PROCEDURE

.
518
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: SG120 WALL STAND (GPCP NO. 2402562) (OPTIONAL COMPONENT)

date: 30/03/15
to / / to
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
PREREQUISITES
None.
TOOLS
Torque Wrench
PROCEDURE

.
519
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: X-Ray Tube/ OTS Console mounting check

date: 03/11/14
to / / to
SUPPLIES
None.
TOOLS
None
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PREREQUISITES
None.
PROCEDURE
a. RAD 14, 21 XR-Ray Tube mounting check, Refer to Subassembly: Mount RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube, Job Card IST 012.
b. MAX-100 Tube mounting check, Refer to Subassembly: Mount MX100 X-ray Tube, Job Card IST 013.
c. OTS Console mounting check, Refer to Subassembly: Mount Siemens collimator to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube Job Card IST 014
Subassembly: Mount Eclipse Proteus Collimator to RAD 14,21 X-ray Tube Job Card IST 016
Subassembly: Assemble Tube Cover to MX100 X-ray Tube Job Card IST 019
520
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 3
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ACTION LIST IN MULTIPLE LANGUAGES
3.1 PORTUGUESE (BR)
LISTA DE AÇÕES DE MANUTENÇÃO PREVENTIVA

O Sistema Proteus não exige nenhuma atividade de Manutenção Planejada nos primeiros 12 meses após a
instalação do sistema.
A tabela a seguir lista as atividades de manutenção planejada necessárias e o Cartão de Trabalho associado a
cada tarefa.
Observação: Para a manutenção planejada para a suspensão de OTS - consulte o Capítulo Manutenção
Periódica da Diretiva 2277285-100, Manual de Serviço de Suspensão de OTS. Exceto:
- Todas as tarefas com frequência de 13 meses devem ser realizadas a cada 12 meses.
- Todas as tarefas com frequência de 13 meses, e após a primeira instalação a cada 2 anos,
devem ser realizadas depois de 12 meses, e, após a primeira instalação, a cada 2 anos.
OPERAÇÃO FREQUÊNCIA CARTÃO DE DESCRIÇÃO

TRABALHO
GERAL
Limpeza e pintura geral Conforme PM001 Mantenha todas as superfícies limpas e retoque as
necessário falhas de pintura
Inspeção visual 12 meses PM002 Verifique se há sujeira que poderia indicar
desgaste anormal
Verificações funcionais 12 meses PM003 Execute as tarefas descritas no Capítulo 5,
Verificações Funcionais
BASE DA MESA
Botões de inibição de 12 meses PM004 Verifique a condição e o funcionamento; verifique
movimento se os botões têm liberdade de movimentos, sem
nenhuma obstrução
Botões de emergência 12 meses Verifique a condição e o funcionamento; verifique
se os botões têm liberdade de movimentos, sem
nenhuma obstrução
Cabos elétricos 12 meses Verifique a condição do revestimento do cabo e
corrija o roteamento
Conexões de alimentação e 12 meses Verifique condições e conexões
aterramento
Painel do conector e 12 meses Verifique condições e conexões
conectores de cabo
Verificar/Substituir caixa de - Verifique a Inspecione se há graxa o suficiente na proteção de
lubrificação caixa de chumbo. Se houver uma quantidade de graxa
lubrificação a suficiente/adequada na proteção de chumbo, não
cada 1 ano e substitua a caixa de lubrificação. Repita a
substitua, se verificação de adequação da graxa durante o
necessário. próximo Agendamento de MP.
- Frequência
obrigatória de
substituição: 5
anos.
Verificar rolamento e eixo 12 meses Limpe o óleo lubrificante
Verificar a trava lateral 12 meses Verifique se a mesa flutuante pode ser empurrada
lateralmente quando está travada
521
PROTEUS XR/a

TRABALHO
Limpar o pedal 12 meses Retire os corpos estranhos dos pedais (tampa IV,
pontas estéticas)/sujeiras periodicamente. Verifique
o contato da base do pedal com o chão para
assegurar que não haja nenhuma folga
Verificar o aperto da 12 meses Aperte a âncora a 24 N-m com um torquímetro
ancoragem
SUPORTE AO PACIENTE
Acabamento da superfície 12 meses PM005 Verifique condições e limpe
Rolamentos longitudinais 12 meses Verifique a condição e lubrifique com graxa
Faixas e trilhos de 12 meses Limpe com óleo de máquina
rolamento longitudinal
Hastes e rolamentos 12 meses Limpe o óleo e a poeira das hastes
transversais
Para-choques de borracha 12 meses Verifique a condição dos para-choques e o aperto
(Longitudinal e transversal) da ancoragem
BANDEJA E CARRINHO DE CASSETE

Conector e cabo elétrico 12 meses PM006 Verifique se o conector está em boas condições e
com bom contato; verifique a condição do
revestimento do cabo
Rolamentos e faixas 12 meses Verifique as condições; limpe com óleo de máquina
(dianteiros e traseiros) e lubrifique com graxa
Para-choques de borracha 12 meses Verifique a condição dos para-choques e o aperto
da ancoragem
Marcador de tamanho do 12 meses Verifique as condições; limpar com óleo de
cassete e conjunto de máquina
bloqueio
ACESSÓRIOS
Faixa de compressão 12 meses PM007 Verifique as condições
Empunhadura para o 12 meses Verifique as condições
paciente
GERADOR
Verificar funções do 12 meses PM008 Teste a exposição, incluindo AEC, se presente,
gerador Registre os últimos códigos de erro
Registre os resultados nos contadores
Verifique os fatores técnicos
Aperte terminais e remover poeira
Substituir RAM Não Volátil - Se o NVRAM PM Jedi 15-2 1. Carregue o banco de dados
na Placa de Controle kV foi substituído 2. Substitua a bateria
pela última vez 3. Baixe o banco de dados
em/ou antes de
dezembro de
2003, substitua
o NVRAM ao
atingir 10 anos.
- Se o NVRAM
foi substituído
pela última vez
depois de
dezembro de
2003, substitua
o NVRAM ao
atingir 20 anos.
522
PROTEUS XR/a

TRABALHO
SUPORTE DE PAREDE (GPCP NÚM. 600-0301) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
desgaste anormal
Cabos de aço 12 meses PM009 Inspecione o comprimento dos cabos de aço,
substitua se houver desgaste; verifique o torque
dos parafusos de trilho da coluna
Inspeção de rolamentos do 12 meses Limpe rolamentos e faixas
carrinho
Bloqueio vertical 12 meses Limpe e inspecione
Barra LAT 12 meses Substitua a graxa entre os flanges
Substituição do cabo de 5 anos PM014 Procedimento de substituição dos cabos de aço
aço
Verificação do aperto da 12 meses PM015 Aperte a âncora a 45 N-m com um torquímetro.
Âncora
SUPORTE DE PAREDE (GPCP NÚM. 600-0300 ou 2260354) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
Inspeção visual 12 meses PM002 Verifique se há sujeira que poderia indicar desgaste
anormal
Cabos de aço 12 meses PM009 Inspecione o comprimento dos cabos de aço;
substitua se houver desgaste; verifique o torque
dos parafusos de trilho da coluna
carrinho
Bloqueio vertical 12 meses Limpe e inspecionar
Barra LAT 12 meses Substitua a graxa entre os flanges
Substituição do cabo de 15 anos PM014 Procedimento de substituição dos cabos de aço
aço
Âncora
SUPORTE DE PAREDE SG100 (GPCP NÚM. 2225849) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
desgaste anormal
Cabos de aço 12 meses PM010 Inspecione e engraxe toda a extensão dos cabos
de aço; substitua se houver desgaste
carrinho
Manutenção da Correia de 12 meses Inspecione e engraxe toda a extensão das
Contrapeso correias. Substitua se houver desgaste excessivo
ou ferrugem.
Componentes de angulação 12 meses Inspecione e Substitua, se necessário
(bloqueio e cabo)
523
PROTEUS XR/a

TRABALHO
Verificação de Bloqueio de 12 meses Verifique se o mecanismo de trava não se move
Rotação do Receptáculo
Verificações Elétricas 12 meses Inspecione e substituir cabos ou conectores
danificados.
Verificar o aterramento.
SUPORTE DE PAREDE SG120 (GPCP NÚM. 2402562) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
desgaste anormal
Verificações Funcionais 18 meses Execute as tarefas descritas no Capítulo 5,
Inspeção de rolamentos do 18 meses PM011 Limpe rolamentos e faixas
carrinho
Manutenção da Correia de 18 meses Inspecione e engraxe toda a extensão das
Contrapeso correias. Substitua se houver desgaste excessivo
ou ferrugem.
Verificações Elétricas 12 meses Inspecione e substitua cabos ou conectores
danificados.
Verifique o aterramento.
Âncora
COLIMADOR
Verificar os parafusos de 12 meses PM012 1. Verifique o flange.
montagem do colimador 2. Se os parafusos de montagem do colimador
estiverem frouxos, aplique LOCTITE neles.
Verificação do tubo de 12 meses PM018 3. Verifique o tubo de raios x/suporte do console
raios x/suporte do console do OTS
do OTS
VERIFICAÇÃO DOS
CABOS DO TUBO DE
RAIO X
Verificar a fixação e a 12 meses PM013 1. Verifique a fixação e a integridade do cabo de
integridade do cabo de Rotação do Anodo e do cabo de Proteção
Rotação do Anodo e do Térmica.
cabo de Proteção Térmica 2. Verifique o alívio da resistência do cabo
estator.
Capa do OTS
Verificar o suporte da capa 12 meses 1. Verifique os parafusos e tiras de velcro da tampa
do OTS dianteira do carrinho. Se o parafuso estiver frouxo,
aperte-o; aplique o Loctite 222 e torque a 2.5 Nm
(2x)
2. Verifique os parafusos da tampa traseira. Se o
parafuso estiver frouxo, aperte-o; aplique o Loctite
222 e torque a 2.5 Nm (2x)
Testes de Resistência de Aterramento e Fuga de Corrente
Verificações de Resistência 12 meses Consulte o Capítulo 11, Testes de Aterramento
de Aterramento e de Fuga e Fuga de Corrente
de Corrente
524
PROTEUS XR/a
3.2 FRENCH (CA)
LISTE DES MESURES DE LA MAINTENANCE PRÉVENTIVE

Le système Proteus ne requiert aucune activité de maintenance planifiée pendant les 12 premiers mois après
l’installation.
Le tableau suivant énumère les activités de maintenance planifiée requises ainsi que la carte de travail associée
à chaque tâche.
Remarque : Pour la maintenance planifiée de la suspension du système OTS, consultez la directive

2277285-100 (Manuel d'entretien de la suspension du système OTS) :
Les tâches effectuées tous les 13 mois devraient se faire tous les 12 mois.
Les tâches effectuées 13 mois après la première installation, puis tous les 2 ans, devraient se faire
tous les 12 mois après la première installation, puis tous les 2 ans.
INTERVENTION FRÉQUENCE CARTE DE DESCRIPTION

TRAVAIL
GÉNÉRAL
Nettoyage et peinture Au besoin PM001 Gardez toutes les surfaces propres et retouchez la
peinture écaillée
Inspection visuelle 12 mois PM002 Recherchez des débris pouvant indiquer une usure
anormale
Vérifications du 12 mois PM003 Exécutez les tâches décrites au chapitre 5,
fonctionnement Vérifications du fonctionnement
BASE DE LA TABLE
Vérifiez les boutons 12 mois PM004 Vérifiez l'état et le bon fonctionnement, et assurez-
d'inhibition de mouvement vous que les boutons fonctionnent librement et
sans obstruction
Boutons d’urgence 12 mois Vérifiez l'état et le bon fonctionnement, et assurez-
vous que les boutons fonctionnent librement et
sans obstruction
Câbles électriques 12 mois Vérifiez l'état de la gaine des câbles et le bon
cheminement
Connexions d'alimentation 12 mois Vérifiez l'état et les connexions
et de masse
Panneau des connecteurs 12 mois Vérifiez l'état et les connexions
et connecteurs de câble
Vérifiez/remplacez des - Vérifiez les Vérifiez s'il y a assez de graisse sur la vis
boîtiers de lubrifiant boîtiers de principale, si c'est le cas, c'est-à-dire si la quantité
lubrifiant tous est suffisante/adéquate, ne remplacez pas le boîtier
les ans, de lubrifiant. Revérifiez la quantité de graisse lors
remplacez-le au de la maintenance planifiée suivante.
besoin
- Fréquence de
remplacement
obligatoire :
tous les 5 ans.
Vérifiez le roulement et 12 mois Retirez l'huile
l'arbre
Vérifiez le verrou latéral 12 mois Vérifiez s'il est possible de pousser latéralement la
table flottante une fois verrouillée
Nettoyez la pédale 12 mois Retirez les débris des pédales (recouvrement IV,
embouts enjoliveurs) périodiquement. Vérifiez qu'il
n'y a pas de jeu entre le plancher et la base des
pédales
525
PROTEUS XR/a

TRAVAIL
Vérifiez le serrage de 12 mois Serrez l'ancrage à 24 N.m à l'aide d'une clé
l'ancrage dynamométrique.
SUPPORT DU PATIENT
Qualité de la surface 12 mois PM005 Vérifiez l'état et nettoyez
Paliers longitudinaux 12 mois Vérifiez l'état et graissez
Glissières et rails de paliers 12 mois Nettoyez et essuyez avec de l'huile légère
longitudinaux
Tiges transversales et 12 mois Retirez l'huile et la poussière des tiges
paliers
Butées d'extrémité en 12 mois Vérifiez l'état et la solidité de montage des butées
caoutchouc
(longitudinales et
transversales)
PASSE-CASSETTE ET CHARIOT
Connecteur et câble 12 mois PM006 Vérifiez que le connecteur, les contacts et la gaine
électriques du câble sont en bon état
Paliers et glissières (avant 12 mois Vérifiez l'état, nettoyez et essuyez avec de l'huile
et arrière) légère et graissez
Butées d'extrémité en 12 mois Vérifiez l'état et la solidité de montage des butées
caoutchouc
Marqueur de taille et 12 mois Vérifiez l'état, nettoyez et essuyez avec de l'huile
dispositif de verrouillage de légère
la cassette
ACCESSOIRES
Bande de compression 12 mois PM007 Vérifiez l'état
Poignées pour le patient 12 mois Vérifiez l'état
GÉNÉRATEUR
Vérifiez les fonctions du 12 mois PM008 Test d'exposition, y compris l'AEC, le cas échéant
générateur Notez le dernier code d’erreur
Notez les résultats des compteurs
Vérifiez les facteurs techniques
Resserrez les bornes et retirez la poussière
Remplacez la mémoire vive - Si le dernier PM Jedi 15-2 1. Téléversez la base de données
non volatile sur la carte kV remplacement 2. Remplacez de la pile
de la RAM non 3. Téléchargez la base de données
volatile a été
effectué en
décembre 2003
ou avant,
remplacez alors
la RAM non
volatile après
10 ans.
- Si le dernier
remplacement
de la RAM non
volatile a été
effectué après
décembre
2003,
remplacez alors
la RAM non
volatile après
20 ans.
526
PROTEUS XR/a

TRAVAIL
SUPPORT MURAL (GPCP Nº600-0301) (COMPOSANT FACULTATIF)
peinture écaillée
anormale
Câbles en acier 12 mois PM009 Vérifiez la longueur des câbles en acier et
remplacez ceux qui sont usés. Vérifiez si les
boulons des rails de colonne sont bien serrés
Inspection des roulements à 12 mois Nettoyez les roulements à rouleaux et les rails
rouleaux du chariot
Verrou vertical 12 mois Nettoyez et vérifiez
Barre LAT 12 mois Remplacez la graisse entre les brides
Remplacement des câbles 5 ans PM014 Procédure de remplacement des câbles en acier
en acier
Vérification du serrage de 12 mois PM015 Serrez l'ancrage à 45 N.m à l'aide d'une clé
SUPPORT MURAL (GPCP Nº600-0300 ou 2260354) (COMPOSANT FACULTATIF)
peinture écaillée
anormale
Câbles en acier 12 mois PM009 Vérifiez la longueur des câbles en acier et
remplacez ceux qui sont usés. Vérifiez si les
boulons des rails de colonne sont bien serrés
rouleaux du chariot
Barre LAT 12 mois Remplacez la graisse entre les brides
Remplacement des câbles 15 ans PM014 Procédure de remplacement des câbles en acier
en acier
SUPPORT MURAL SG100 (GPCP Nº2225849) (COMPOSANT FACULTATIF)
peinture écaillée
anormale
Câbles en acier 12 mois PM010 Vérifiez la longueur des câbles en acier, graissez
les câbles et remplacez ceux qui sont usés
rouleaux du chariot
Entretien des chaînes de 12 mois Vérifiez la longueur des chaînes et graissez-les.
contrepoids Remplacez les chaînes très usées ou rouillées.
Composants d'angulation 12 mois Inspectez et remplacez au besoin
(verrou et câble)
Vérification du verrou de 12 mois Vérifiez que le mécanisme de verrouillage ne se
rotation de Bucky déverrouille pas
527
PROTEUS XR/a

TRAVAIL
Vérification des composants 12 mois Vérifiez et remplacez les câbles et connecteurs
électriques endommagés.
Vérifiez le point de masse.
SUPPORT MURAL SG120 (GPCP Nº2402562) (COMPOSANT FACULTATIF)
peinture écaillée
anormale
Vérifications du 18 mois Exécutez les tâches décrites au chapitre 5,
Inspection des roulements à 18 mois PM011 Nettoyez les roulement à rouleaux et les rails
rouleaux du chariot
Entretien des chaînes de 18 mois Vérifiez la longueur des chaînes et graissez-les.
contrepoids Remplacez les chaînes très usées ou rouillées.
Vérification des composants 12 mois Vérifiez et remplacez les câbles et connecteurs
électriques endommagés.
Vérifiez le point de masse.
COLLIMATEUR
Vérifiez si les vis de 12 mois PM012 1. Vérifiez la bride.
montage du collimateur 2. Si les vis de montage du collimateur sont
sont bien serrées desserrées, enduisez les vis de LOCTITE.
Vérification du tube à 12 mois PM018 3. Vérifiez le tube à rayons X/le montage de la
rayons X/du montage de la console du système OTS.
console du système de
tubes suspendus (OTS)
VÉRIFICATION DES
CÂBLES DU TUBE À
RAYONS X
Vérifiez le montage et l'état 12 mois PM013 1. Vérifiez le montage et l'état du câble de rotation
du câble de rotation de de l'anode et du câble de protection thermique.
l'anode et du câble de 2. Vérifiez l'état du réducteur de tension du câble
protection thermique de stator.
Couvercle du système
OTS
Vérifiez le montage du 12 mois 1. Vérifiez les sangles à Velcro et les vis à l’avant
couvercle du système OTS du couvercle du chariot. Si les vis sont desserrées,
serrez-les, enduisez-les de Loctite 222 et serrez au
couple de serrage de 2,5 Nm (2x)
2. Vérifiez les vis à l’arrière du couvercle. Si les vis
sont desserrées, serrez-les, enduisez-les de
Loctite 222 et serrez au couple de serrage de
2,5 Nm (2x)
Tests sur la résistance de terre et le courant de fuite
Vérifications de la 12 mois Consultez le chapitre 11, Tests sur la résistance de
résistance de terre et du terre et le courant de fuite
courant de fuite
528
PROTEUS XR/a
3.3 SPANISH (LA)
LISTA DE MEDIDAS DE MANTENIMIENTO PREVENTIVO

El sistema Proteus no necesita actividades de Mantenimiento planificado durante los primeros 12 meses después
de la instalación del sistema.
La siguiente tabla enumera las actividades necesarias de mantenimiento planificado y la Tarjeta de Trabajo
asociada a cada tarea.
Nota: Para el mantenimiento planificado de la suspensión de OTS, utilice el capítulo de mantenimiento

periódico de la Dirección 2277285-100, Manual de servicio de la Suspensión de OTS, con las
siguientes excepciones:
·Todas las tareas con una frecuencia de 13 meses deben tener una frecuencia de 12 meses
·Todas las tareas con una frecuencia de 13 meses después de la primera instalación y, después,
cada 2 años, deben tener una frecuencia de 12 meses después de la primera instalación y, después,
cada 2 años.
OPERACIÓN FRECUENCIA TARJETA DE DESCRIPCIÓN

TRABAJO
GENERAL
Limpieza y pintura Según sea PM001 Mantener todas las superficies limpias y retocar las
generales necesario astillas de pintura
Inspección visual 12 meses PM002 Compruebe si hay desechos que puedan indicar
desgaste anómalo
Verificaciones funcionales 12 meses PM003 Realice las tareas descritas en el capítulo 5,
Verificaciones funcionales
BASE DE LA MESA
Botones de inhibición de 12 meses PM004 Verificar el estado y funcionamiento; garantizar que
movimiento los pedales y los botones se pueden utilizar sin
ninguna obstrucción
Botones de emergencia 12 meses Verificar el estado y funcionamiento; garantizar que
los botones se pueden utilizar sin ninguna
obstrucción
Cables eléctricos 12 meses Verificar el estado del recubrimiento del cable y
que esté colocado en la posición correcta
Conexiones de suministro 12 meses Verificar el estado y las conexiones
de energía y a tierra
Panel de conexión y 12 meses Verificar el estado y las conexiones
conectores del cable
Revisar/Reemplazar las - Verifique las Inspeccione si hay suficiente grasa en el tornillo de
cajas del lubricante cajas del plomo; si hay una cantidad suficiente o adecuada
lubricante una de grasa en el tornillo de plomo, no reemplace la
vez al año. caja del lubricante. Repita esta verificación del nivel
Reemplace si adecuado de grasa durante el próximo programa
es necesario de mantenimiento planificado.
- Frecuencia de
reemplazo
obligatorio:
cada 5 años.
Revisar el cojinete y el eje 12 meses Limpie el aceite lubricante
Verificar el bloqueo lateral 12 meses Verificar si la mesa flotante se puede impulsar
lateralmente cuando está bloqueada
529
PROTEUS XR/a

TRABAJO
Limpiar el pedal 12 meses Limpiar periódicamente las materias extrañas y los
residuos de los pedales (Cap IV, sugerencias de
estética). Verificar que la base del pedal haga
contacto con el suelo para garantizar que no haya
espacio libre
Verificación de la 12 meses Resistencia el anclaje a 24 N-m con una llave de
resistencia del anclaje torque
SOPORTE DEL PACIENTE
Acabado superficial 12 meses PM005 Verificar el estado y la limpieza
Cojinetes longitudinales 12 meses Verificar el estado y lubricar con grasa
Vías y rieles de los 12 meses Limpiar y secar con aceite para maquinaria ligera
cojinetes longitudinales
Varillas y cojinetes 12 meses Limpiar el aceite y el polvo en las varillas
transversales
Topes finales para 12 meses Verificar el estado de los topes y la resistencia del
parachoques de goma anclaje
(longitudinal y transversal)
BANDEJA Y CARRO DEL CASETE
Conector y cable eléctrico 12 meses PM006 Garantizar que el conector esté en buen estado y
que haga contacto correctamente. Verificar el
estado de recubrimiento del cable
Vías y cojinetes (delanteros 12 meses Verificar el estado y limpiar y secar con aceite para
y traseros) maquinaria ligera. Lubricar con grasa
Topes finales para 12 meses Verificar el estado de los topes y la resistencia del
parachoques de goma anclaje
Marcador de tamaño y 12 meses Verificar el estado, limpiar y secar con aceite para
conjunto de bloqueo del maquinaria ligera
casete
ACCESORIOS
Banda de compresión 12 meses PM007 Verificar estado
Asas de agarre para el 12 meses Verificar estado
paciente
GENERADOR
Comprobar las funciones 12 meses PM008 Exposición a prueba, incluida la AEC si se reenvía
del generador Registrar los últimos códigos de error
Registrar el resultado en los contadores
Comprobar los factores técnicos
Ajustar los terminales y eliminar el polvo
530
PROTEUS XR/a

TRABAJO
Reemplazar la memoria - Si la NVRAM PM Jedi 15-2 1. Cargar la base de datos
RAM no volátil del panel de se reemplazó 2. Reemplazo de la batería
control kV antes de 3. Descargar la base de datos
diciembre de
2003 o en dicha
fecha,
reemplace la
NVRAM cuando
cumpla 10
años.
- Si la NVRAM
se reemplazó
por última vez
antes de
diciembre de
2003,
reemplace la
NVRAM cuando
cumpla 20
años.
SOPORTE PARA PARED (GPCP NO. 600-0301) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
desgaste anómalo
Cables de acero 12 meses PM009 Verificar la longitud de los cables de acero y
reemplazarlos si están gastados. Verificar la
resistencia de los tornillos de la columna del riel
Inspección del cojinete del 12 meses Limpiar los cojinetes y las vías del rodillo
rodillo transportador
Bloqueo vertical 12 meses Limpieza e inspección
Barra LAT 12 meses Reemplazar la grasa entre las bridas
Reemplazo del cable de 5 años PM014 Procedimiento de sustitución de los cables de
acero acero
Verificación de la 12 meses PM015 Resistencia del anclaje a 45 N-m con la llave de
resistencia del anclaje torque.
SOPORTE PARA PARED (GPCP NO. 600-0300 o 2260354) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
desgaste anómalo
Cables de acero 12 meses PM009 Verificar la longitud de los cables de acero y
reemplazarlos si están gastados. Verificar la
resistencia de columna de los tornillos del riel
Barra LAT 12 meses Reemplazar la grasa entre las bridas
531
PROTEUS XR/a

TRABAJO
Reemplazo del cable de 15 años PM014 Procedimiento de sustitución de los cables de
acero acero
SOPORTE PARA PARED SG100 (GPCP NO. 2225849) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
desgaste anómalo
Verificaciones funcionales 12 meses PM003 Realizar las tareas descritas en el capítulo 5,
Cables de acero 12 meses PM010 Verificar y engrasar la extensión de los cables de
acero. Reemplazarlos si están gastados
Mantenimiento de la 12 meses Verificar y engrasar la extensión de los cables de
cadena contrapeso acero. Reemplazarlo si está muy gastado u
oxidado.
Componentes de 12 meses Verificar y reemplazar si es necesario
angulación (bloqueo y
cable)
Verificación del bloqueo de 12 meses El mecanismo de verificación de bloqueo no se
rotación del Bucky mueve
Comprobaciones eléctricas 12 meses Verificar y reemplazar cualquier cable o conector

dañado.
Verificar la conexión a tierra.
SOPORTE PARA PARED SG120 (GPCP NO. 2402562) (COMPONENTE OPCIONAL)
desgaste anómalo
Comprobaciones 18 meses Realizar las tareas descritas en el capítulo 5,
funcionales Comprobaciones funcionales
Inspección del cojinete del 18 meses PM011 Limpiar los cojinetes y las vías del rodillo
Mantenimiento de la 18 meses Verificar y engrasar la extensión de los cables de
cadena contrapeso acero. Reemplazarlo si está muy gastado u
oxidado.
Comprobaciones eléctricas 12 meses Verificar y reemplazar cualquier cable o conector
dañado.
Verificar la conexión a tierra.
COLIMADOR
Verificar los tornillos de 12 meses PM012 1. Verificar la brida.
montaje del colimador 2. Si los tornillos de montaje del colimador están
sueltos, aplique LOCTITE sobre los tornillos.
Tubo de rayos X/Revisar el 12 meses PM018 3. Tubo de rayos X/Revisar el montaje de la
montaje de la consola de consola de OTS
OTS
532
PROTEUS XR/a

TRABAJO
REVISIÓN DE LOS
CABLES DEL TUBO DE
RAYOS X
Verificar la fijación y la 12 meses PM013 1. Verificar la fijación y la integridad del cable de
integridad del cable de rotación del ánodo y del cable de protección
rotación del ánodo y del térmica.
cable de protección térmica 2. Verificar la descarga del esfuerzo del cable del
estator.
Cubierta del OTS
Revise el montaje de la 12 meses 1. Revise las correas de velcro y los tornillos de la
cubierta del OTS cubierta del transportador frontal. Si los tornillos se
sueltan, apriételos, aplique Loctite 222 y apriete 2,5
Nm (2 veces)
2. Revise los tornillos de la cubierta trasera. Si los
tornillos se sueltan, apriételos, aplique Loctite 222 y
apriete 2,5 Nm (2 veces)
Pruebas de resistencia al suelo y de corriente de fuga
Revisiones de resistencia al 12 meses Consulte el Capítulo 11, Pruebas de resistencia al
suelo y revisiones de suelo y de fuga
corriente de fuga
533
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 9 RENEWAL PARTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION1 PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM RENEWAL PARTS LIST ………………………… 535

Table…………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 535
Cabinet 1……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 537
Cabinet 2……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 538
Wall Stand………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 539
Bucky………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 540
OTS…………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 540
CONSOLE…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 543
CABLES……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 543
Software Application……………………………………………………………………………………… 544
Table Illustrated Parts…………………………………………………………………………………….. 545
Cabinet 1 Illustrated Parts……………………………………………………………………………….. 552
Cabinet 2 Illustrated Parts……………………………………………………………………………….. 554
Wall Stand Illustrated Parts……………………………………………………………………………… 556
OTS Illustrated Parts……………………………………………………………………………………… 558
Console Illustrated Parts………………………………………………………………………………… 563
SECTION2 JEDI GENERATOR RENEWAL PARTS……………………………………….. 564
2-1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………………………. 564
2-2 FRU Information………………………………………………………………………………………. 565
2-3 Renewal Parts…………………………………………………………………………………………. 565
2-4 Cables……………………………………………………………………………………….………….. 569
SECTION3 JEDI GENERATION Disassembly/Reassembly……………………………… 572
3-1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………………………. 572
3-2 TOOLS………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 572
D/R JEDI 1 JEDI Modules Disassembly/Reassembly ………….…………………………………… 573
D/R JEDI 17-37 HV Tank or Inverter Power Supply………………………………………………….. 578
D/R JEDI 17-38 Rotation Capacitors Set 23/56
(Rotation Capacitor Set 23/23 for MX100 X-ray tube)……………………………………… 586
D/R JEDI 17-47 I/F Board RAD…………………………………………………………………………... 590
D/R JEDI 17-48 KV Control Board……………………………………………………………………… 593
D/R JEDI 17-39 EMC Board 3 Phases………………………………………………………………….. 598
D/R JEDI 17-40 AC/DC 3 PH Power Assembly……………………………………………………….. 602
D/R JEDI 17-43 LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board……………………………………………………. 606
D/R JEDI 17-44 Filament Board 1 INV…………………………………………………………………. 609
D/R JEDI 17-45 Rotor Board High Speed……………………………………………………………… 612
D/R JEDI 17-46 AEC Board (Option)……………………………………………………………………. 615
534
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1
PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM RENEWAL PARTS LIST (Not include Jedi Generator)
WARNING
FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH THE
SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.
Item # FRU GPCP NO. Description Quan.

Level
Table
1 2 2259298-14 Table top longitudinal move wheel 2
2 1 2226325-34 Table top bearing 4
3 2 612-3100 Table Top Frame Assy 1
5 1 2259298-5 EM lock 4
6 1 2259298-23 Micro-movement anti-collision switch 4
8 1 2259298-6 EM lock 4
9 1 2259298-9 Table elevating motor chain 1
11 1 2338145 (Localized) Cassette Tray-Size Sensing 1
12 2 46-286129p22 Fixed grid (12:1 100cm 60l/cm) 1
13 2 46-286129p1 Bucky grid (12:1 100cm 36l/cm) 1
14 2 2259298-15 Bucky movement bearing 4
15 1 2252611-3 Ion chamber 1
16 1 2259298-71 Table bucky handle 1
17 1 2259298-22 Bucky-lock button 1
18 2 2288705 Bucky handle 1
19 2 2288706 Bucky handle button 1
20 1 2259298-19 Safety button 2
21 1 2259298-27 Table height measure potentiometer 1
22 1 5336380 Pedal I/F board assy (Note: Refer to 5517052- 1
24 1 611-3022 1EN forpower
Switch FRU replacement)
supply 24VDC 6.5A 1
25 1 2259298-17 AC contactor 240VAC, 2.5kW 1

26 1 2259298-16 Transformer 220AC/30VDC 50W 1
27 1 2259298-26 Table logic control board assy 1
28 1 2259298-7 Table elevating motor 1
29 2 2364950 Table top 1
30 2 2259298-70 Table side cover 2
32 2 2259298-69 Table front & back cover 2
34 1 2259298-67 Bucky EM lock 1
35 1 2259298-68 Bucky power fuse 250V 160mA 2
535
PROTEUS XR/a

Level
Table
36 2 2259298-10 Table up/down spring 6
37 1 2348721 Lubricant box 2
38 1 2189553 Table Bucky (LH) 1
39 1 2362889 Bucky Bar Assembly 1
42 2 2259298-11 Table spring 2
43 1 2259298-12 Table top bumper 2
44 1 2259298-20 Inhibition button 2
45 2 2260192 Hand grip (pair) 1
46 1 612-3440 Lateral table lock plate assembly 4
47 2 611-3610 Table bottom front & back cover 2
48 2 611-3601 Table bottom side cover 2
49 1 2259298-21 Emergency stop switch 2
50 1 610-3100 Emergence OFF Switch Assy 2
51 1 2357655 Long sliding ribbon 2
52 1 2357656 Short sliding ribbon 2
53 1 2336280 Spring leaf 2
55 1 612-3408 Brake Vane 1
56 1 613-3400 Camera Bracket Assembly 1
57 1 613-3003 Linear bearing shaft 1
58 1 2284482 Condor table relay assembly 1
59 1 5137108 Table Brake Block 1
60 1 5159516-1 Reciprocating Bucky L/H 1
61 1 5159516-2 Reciprocating Bucky R/H 1
62 1 5166100 Step Motor 1
63 1 5166198 Circuit Board L/H 1
64 1 5166059 Circuit Board R/H 1
65 1 5166209 Rail Kit 1
66 1 5166188 250VAC, 315mA Fuse 1
67 1 5166307 250VAC, 160mA Fuse 1
68 1 5449033 AID Ion Chamber-RoHS 1
69 1 5167409-2 AID Ion Chamber with 24 meter cable 1
70 1 5166578-1 Rubber stopper (6) 1
72 1 5160837-1 Table top warning label 2
73 1 5310199 Table Endcap 1
74 1 2259298-25 Table limit IF board 1
75 1 5336373 Sensor Flag 1 (Note: Refer to 5517052-1EN 2
76 1 5336374 for FRUFlag
Sensor replacement)
2 (Note: Refer to 5517052-1EN 6
77 1 5337905 for for
jig FRU replacement)
sensor flag 1
78 1 5351755 Table front pedal assembly 1
536
PROTEUS XR/a

Level
Table
79 1 5352805 Table rear pedal assembly 1
80 1 5336382 Shim group 4
81 1 221-3004 FRONT PEDAL I/F CABLE 1
82 1 221-3005 BACK PEDAL I/F CABLE 1
83 1 5339135 Warning Label for FC table Inhibition Button 2
84 1 611-3102 LB SHORT RAIL 2
85 1 611-3133 LINEAR BEARING LONG RAIL 2
*1: Item 68 will replace item15. These two kinds of Ion-chamber have same installation procedures and
functions.
Note: If JEDI’s model number on it’s label (see the figure) is 2268970, you should follow the table
Cabinet 1. If the number is 2244165-2, you should follow the table Cabinet 2.

Level
Cabinet 1
1 1 2375230 System I/F Board (replace System I/F Board 1
2259298-45 and CAN I/F Board 2259298-46)
CAUTION
The System I/F board 2375230
can be used together with Rev2.14 or
above version of the System Console
Software.
2 1 5164678 No Fuse Breaker 690V 100A 1
3 2 2259298-113 Silhouette-FC contactor 150A/690V AC 100V 1
4 1 2259298-114 Spark Killer CR-50500 1
5 1 2259298-115 Fuse RS414-061 10A/500V 1
6 1 2259298-116 Fuse RS414-055 5A/500V 1
7 1 2259298-117 Fuse Holder FZRRAZ N091483 32A/690V 2
8 1 2259298-41 Fuse Holder 7
9 1 2259298-121 Fuse 61NM 6.3A/250V 1
537
PROTEUS XR/a
10 1 2226325-9 Fuse 61NM 2.5A/250V 3

11 1 2226325-10 Fuse 61NM 5A/250V 1
12 1 2226325-11 Fuse 61NM 8A/250V 2
13 2 2259298-118 Fuse Holder SI 000 DIN 80 3
14 1 2259298-119 Fuse 6.6gRB 000 DO8V/125 3

Level
15 1 2259298-123 Noise Filter 2
16 2 2259298-124 Terminal block SAK 2.5 EN Assy
17 1 2259298-122 Mov Board Assy 1
18 1 2226325-8 Spark Killer 150VAC 0.3F 150 1
19 2 2259298-120 Silhouette-FC contactor 20A/690V AC100V 1
20 1 2259298-127 Relay LY2 110VAC 1
21 1 2259298-128 Relay LY1 12VDC 1
22 1 2226325-6 Relay LY2 12VDC 1
23 2 2259298-39 Relay Socket 3
24 1 2259298-34 SW power supply 12V, 5A 1
25 1 5844452 FRU for Proteus 35W power 1
26 1 2259298-126 Noise Filter ZGB2202-01U 250V/2A 2
27 1 2259298-44 DC Power Board 1
28 2 2259298-32 Transformer 1.9kW Input:360/480V 1
Output:24/240V
29 2 2259298-112 Transformer 400VA Input:360V/480V 1
Output:100V
30 2 91651653 Bucky Connector 1
31 1 2281982 Tomo I/F PCB 1
32 1 2226325-9 Fuse (for MX100 X-ray tube fan and SG100 2
Wall Stand)
33 1 2372633 Power filter 1
34 2 221-2742 L side panel assy. 1
35 2 221-2744 R side panel assy. 1
36 2 221-2746 Back side panel assy. 1
37 2 221-2748 Front side panel assy. 1
39 2 2259973-1 Proteus System Cabinet (32KW) 1
43 2 2215674 Rotor Capacitor Set 1

Level
Cabinet 2
1 1 2226325-4 No fuse breaker 480V 50A 1
2 1 2226325-8 Spark killer 150VAC 0.3F 150 1
3 1 2226325-3 Contactor S-N50 600V 50A 1
4 2 2259298-41 Fuse holder 7
538
PROTEUS XR/a
5 1 2226325-11 Fuse 8A/250V 1

6 1 2226325-10 Fuse 5A/250V 2
7 1 2226325-9 Fuse 2.5A250V 4
8 2 2259298-40 Fuse holder 2
9 1 2259298-33 Fuse 10A500V 1
10 1 2226325-12 Fuse 2A/500V 1
11 2 2259298-43 Fuse holder 1
12 1 2259298-42 Fuse 125A/1000V 3
Level
15 1 2226325-7 Noise filter 2
16 1 2226325-6 Relay 220VAC 10A and 24VDC 10A 2
17 2 2259298-39 Relay socket 2
18 1 5844452 FRU for Proteus 35W power 1
19 1 2259298-34 SW power supply 12V, 5A 1
20 1 2259298-44 DC power board 1
21 2 2259298-32 Transformer 1.9kW Input:360-480V Output:24- 1
240V
22 2 2226325 Transformer 250VA Input:360/480V 1
Output:100V
23 1 2281982 Tomo I/F PCB 1
24 1 5816734 Wear Part Replacement Schedule-C 1

Level
Wall
Stand
1 1 2259298-47 EM locks ( pair ) 1
2 1 2259298-51 Hand grip switch 2
3 (1) 1 2189553-2 Bucky(RH) 1
3 (2) 1 2189553 Bucky(LH) is same as Table Bucky (LH) 1
4 1 2259298-30 Bearing 8
5 1 2259298-92 Steel Cable (For the wall stand Model 2
Number: 600-0300 OR 2260354 Equivalent))
6 2 2259298-93 Rail Bearings ( pair ) 1
7 2 2259298-96 Fixed grid (10:1 180cm 60l/cm) 1
8 2 2259298-49 Bucky grid (10:1 180cm 43l/cm) 1
9 2 080-1008-22 Grid 1
10 2 080-1009-22 Grid 1
11 1 603-3220 Steel Cable (For the wall stand Model 1
Number: 603-0301)
12 1 021-0291 Bearing (for the wall stand with a knee spacer) 1
13 1 021-0293 Bearing (for the wall stand with a knee spacer) 1
14 2 602-3339 Hand Rest Assy (for the wall stand with a knee 1
spacer)
15 2 096-0036 Plunger(for the wall stand with a knee spacer) 1
539
PROTEUS XR/a
16 1 601-3600 Power-off Protection Lock 1

17 2 604-3010 Wall Stand Bucky Cover 1
18 2 220-2125 Wall Stand Pedestal Cover 4
19 2 600-0027 Chin Rest 1
20 1 2338145 (Localized) Cassette Tray-Size Sensing 1
21 1 5159516-1 Reciprocating Bucky L/H 1
22 1 5159516-2 Reciprocating Bucky R/H 1
Level
23 1 5166100 Step Motor 1
24 1 5166198 Circuit Board L/H 1
25 1 5166059 Circuit Board R/H 1
26 1 5166209 Rail Kit 1
27 1 5166188 250VAC, 315mA Fuse 1
28 1 5166307 250VAC, 160mA Fuse 1
29 1 5449033 AID Ion Chamber-RoHS 1
30 1 5167409-2 AID Ion Chamber with 24 meter cable 1
Note: For SG100 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2225849) FRU, refer to SG100 Service Manual (2150297-100).
Note: For SG120 Wall Stand (GPCP No. 2402562) FRU, refer to SG120 Service Manual (Supplier Part No.
S0012532).
Note: For 2189553 and 2189553-2 Bucky FRU, refer to following table.

Level
BUCKY
1 1 2203332 MOTOR ASSY (LEFT HAND) 1
2 1 2207210 MOTOR ASSY (Right HAND) 1
3 1 2203422 BUCKY PWB LEFT HAND 1
4 1 2207209 BUCKY PWB RIGHT HAND 1
5 1 2203334 CAVO SENSING DEVICE 1
6 1 2203333 GUIDE 1
7 1 2203421 CAVO ALIMENTAZIONE 1
8 1 2189553 MB 2000 LH 1
9 1 2189553-2 MB 2000 RH 1
10 1 58079705 FUS T 5X20 0,25A 250V V 35A ULL 1

Level
540
PROTEUS XR/a
OTS
1 2 2273436 Anode cover assy. 1
2 2 2273439-2 Cathode cover assy. 1
3 2 2273442 Top cover assy. 1
4 1 2259298-54 Auto collimator 1
5 2 2273450 Trunion scale assy. 1
6 1 2320993 OCS console 1
7 2 2273439 Cathode cover assy. 1
8 2 2278757 Top cover assy. 1
9 1 2271727 Collimator Bulb (For Auto and Manual Collimator) 1
10 1 2271728 Fuse (1.6A 250V) 2
11 1 2271729 Tape Measure. 1
12 1 2271730 Bulb Fan 1
13 1 2307338 PCB D1 1
14 1 2307340 PCB D2 1
15(1) 1 2259981 X-ray Tube, Rad14 1
15(2) 1 2271627 X-ray Tube, Rad21 1
15(3) 1 2226680 X-ray Tube, Rad12 1
15(4) 1 D2301R (46- X-ray Tube, MX100 1
155400G281)
16 2 610-3150 Trunion used for 65, 80 kW (for Rad21) 1
17 2 2259298-95 Trunion used for 32, 50 kW 1
18 1 2259989 Manual collimator 1
19 1 241-0267 Auto collimator Terminator 1
20 1 2257211 OTS SW Power Supply 1
Level
21(1) 2 610-3099 Mounting Plate for Collimator for Rad 12 or 14 1
21(2) 2 610-3099-02 Mounting Plate for Collimator for Rad 21 1
22 2 610-3650 Tube- Connector 2
23 2 2272214-3 Tube Cover Kit (for 65, 80kW) (for Rad21) 1
24 2 2272214-2 Tube Cover Kit (for 32,50 kW) 1
25 2 610-3173 Tube cooling fan kit for FC 2 1
26 1 610-3175 Resistor Assembly For FC2 Tube Fan 1
27 2 610-3181 Fan Set 1
28 2 2301864 R21 Tube Fan Installation Manual 1
29 1 2318537 OCS Console Button Kit 1
30 2 221-2995 APR Back-up Floppy Disk (set) 1
31 2 241-2703 AEC Fast Calibration Floppy Disk 1
32 2 2303649 Jedi 80 R1T/Rad21 with Fan SW Disk 1
33 2 008-8002 M5X12 Socket Set Screw From Bossard 4
34 1 2325424 Collimator Plastic Front Cover 1
35 1 2345789 Collimator display 1
541
PROTEUS XR/a
36 1 2348513 Thermal Switch For Tube Rad 12,14&21 1

37 2 2273368 Condor/F.C. bottom tube Cover 1
38 2 2273371 Condor top tube cover ASM 1
39 2 2273365 Condor anode end bracket 2
40 2 2273366 Condor cathode end bracket 2
42 2 2364939 Spacer of tube mount 1
43 2 2352540 Extended Tomo-link Yoke 1
44 1 2372800 Cone Assembly with lable 1
45 1 2379458 Lead cup Assy. for MX100 X-ray tube N
46 1 2375334 Condor UIF to Tube (MX100) Mounting Bracket 1
47 1 2375342 Collimator Mount Ring for Condor (for MX100 1
tube)
48 1 2375344 Ring to Retain Collimator Mount Ring (for MX100 1
tube)
49 1 2375341 Collimator Mount Retainer Condor (for MX100 4
tube)
50 1 2375320 Spacer for Condor UIF Bracket (for MX100 tube) 1
51 N 2364938 Condor User Interface Condor BRKT (for MX100 1
tube)
52 2 2278999 FC2 Connecting Bracket 2
53 2 46-208765P36 Tube Cover clamp 1
54 2 2269030-10 GE logo 1
55 N 2383309 Aluminium Plate 1
56 1 2271734 Manual Collimator D7 Electronic Board 1
57 1 2399471 Auto Collimator AL-07F Detent Handle 1
Level
58 1 2278999 Tube Cover Adapter Bracket 1
59 1 2379827 Eclipse Proteus Collimator 1
60 1 2383312 Eclipse Proteus Collimator Control Board 1
61 1 2383313 Eclipse Proteus Collimator User Interface Board 1
62 1 2377082 Eclipse Proteus Collimator Lamp 1

63 1 2383804 Eclipse Proteus Collimator Bucky Centering Laser 1
64 1 2385357 Eclipse Proteus Collimator LCD Display 1
65 1 2383805 Eclipse Proteus Collimator Tape 1
66 1 5126798 APR backup floppy disk for 65kW and 80kW 1
67 1 610-3170 Tube ground clamp 1
68 1 2383799 Tube flange 1
69 1 5126970 Tube flange for Rad 14 1
70 1 5780238 Proteus Eclipse Collimator Front Panel Assembly 1
71 1 5772780 LAMP SET FRU Collector 1
72 1 5494683-1 New Lamp set FRU for Proteus collimator 1
542
PROTEUS XR/a
Note : When replace the failed Siemens collimator with Eclipse Proteus Collimator
(2379827), please order a tube flange (2383799 for Max100 or 5126970 for Rad14)
together with new collimator collimator.
Level
Console
1 1 2259976 System console(with floppy disk) 1
2 2 2260190 Console printer kit 1
3 1 5462233 Proteus System Console FRU 1
Package(with USB disk)
4 2 098-0031 System console exposure hand switch 1
5 1 5178302 System console warning label 1
6 1 2382506 FC Spanish label kit 1
7 1 5451149 Proteus Console Fan 1
8 1 5447539 Proteus Console USB Cable 1
9 1 5437888 Proteus Console USB Disk Package. 1
10 1 5761170 Buzzer upgrade kit for Proteus console 1
5441870 rev1 to rev3
11 2 5813460 Proteus Console Main Board FRU 1

Level
Cables
1 1 2259298-56 Table height cable SID cable 1
2 1 2259298-57 Table power cable 1
3 1 2259298-58 Cassette size sensing cable 1
4 1 2259298-60 System console cable kit 1
5 1 2259298-63 Bucky control cable 1
6 1 2259298-65 Wall stand power cable 1
7 1 2259298-73 Grounding Wire 2
8 2 221-2734 Tomo CAN & RTL Cable 1
9 2 221-2996 Tomo Interface Cable 1
10 2 221-2997 Table/Tomo Interface Cable 1
11 2 221-2999 Tomo-link Power Cable 1
Level
12 2 241-0266 Manual Collimator Cable 1
13 2 221-2736 WS Lock Power Cable 1
14 2 46-173995P11 Cable 1
15 2 46-173995P12 Cable 1
16 2 421-0001-02 Fan Cable 1
17 2 421-0001-03 Fan Earth Cable 1
18 2 221-3011 Table Inter SID Cable 1
19 2 221-3020 Table Inter Power Cable 1
20 2 221-3008 Lim_BD I/F Cable 1
21 2 221-3004 Front Peda1 I/F Cable 1
22 2 221-3005 Back Peda1 I/F Cable 1
23 2 221-3016 2nd Safety SW Cable 1
543
PROTEUS XR/a
24 2 221-3018 Logic_BD Power Cable 1

25 2 221-3012 Table Control Cable (1) 1
26 2 221-3017 Table Control Cable (2) 1
27 2 221-3013 Table Locks Cable (1) 1
28 2 221-3014 Table Locks Cable (2) 1
29 2 221-3015 Dis_SW Cable 1
30 2 221-3025 Emerg. SW Cable 1
31 1 600-3033 Wall Stand Power OFF Lock Power Cable 1
32 N 2365706 MX100 tube fan power cable 1
33 1 2259298-66 Table grounding cable 1
34 1 2267582 Cable Conceal Assembly (Long) 1
35 1 2267582-2 Cable Conceal Assembly (Short) 1
36 1 221-2892 Cabinet grounding cable (4) 1
37 1 5166224 Cassette Size Sensing cable 1
38 1 5166260 Power cable 1
39 1 5166654 24m Interconnecting cable for AID Ion 1
Chamber

Level
Software
Application
1 1 5252165 Proteus SW 2.15 update to 2.16 1
2 1 5234987 Proteus SW 2.15VA update to 2.16VA 1
3 1 5832176 Proteus Console USB Disk Package for 1
FRU
4 1 5832177 Buzzer board upgrade kit 1
544
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-1
Table Illustrated Parts (1)
Item# 1
Item# 7
Item# 9
Item#48,49
Item# 8 Item# 2 Item# 4

Item# 6 Item# 5
Item# 53 (the
spring leaf under
the button)
Item# 11
Item# 52
Item# 51
Item# 12
Item# 13
545
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-2
Item# 15
Item# 14
Item# 17 Item# 18 & 19 Item# 20

Item# 16
Item #22
Item# 21
Item# 74
546
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-3
Item# 24 Item# 25 Item# 26
Item# 27
Item# 28
547
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-4
Item# 29
Item# 3
Item# 30
Item# 32 Item# 48
Item# 47
Item# 79
Item# 34
Item# 35
Item# 38
Item# 36
Item# 73
Item#37
Item# 70
548
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-5
Item# 78
Item# 39
Item# 42
Item 83
Item# 44
Item# 43
Item# 72 Item # 58
549
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-6
Item# 45
Item# 46
Item # 56
Item # 68
Item # 55
Item # 59
Item # 69
Item # 57
550
PROTEUS XR/a
Item # 65
Illustration 1-7
Item # 62
Item # 60 Item # 61
Item # 66/67
Item # 63
Item # 66/67
Item # 64
551
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-8
Cabinet 1 Illustrated Parts (1)
Item# 1
Item# 6 Item# 5
Item#4
Item#7
Item# 2
Item# 3
Item# 13
Item# 8
Item# 14
Item #32
Item# 10 Item# 12
Item# 9 Item# 11
552
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-9
Item# 16
Item# 15 Item# 30
Item# 17
Item# 18
Item# 19
Item# 20
Item# 24
Item# 23
Item# 25
Item# 26
Item# 21 Item# 22
Item# 27
Item#31
Item#28
Item#29
Item# 33
553
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-10
Item# 2
Item# 1
Item# 3
Item# 5 Item# 6 Item# 7 Item# 9 Item# 10
Item# 11
Item# 12
Item# 4 Item# 8
554
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-11
Item# 15
Item# 18
Item# 19
Item# 16
Item# 20
Item# 17 Item# 22
Item# 23
Item# 21
555
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-12
Wall Stand Illustrated Parts (1)
Item # 3
Item# 1 Item # 2
Item # 12 Item # 13
Item# 4 Item# 5, 11 Item # 6
Item # 7, 8, 9, 10 Item # 15
Item # 14
Item # 19
Item# 19
Item # 16 Item # 20
Item # 18 Item # 17
556
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-13 Item # 26

Wall Stand Illustrated Parts (2) Item # 29
Item # 23
Item # 30
Item # 21 Item # 22
Item # 27/28
Item # 24
Item # 27/28
Item # 25
557
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-14
OTS Illustrated Parts (1)
Item# 1
Item# 2
Item# 3
Item# 5
Item# 54
Item#7
Item# 4 Item# 6
Item# 53
Item# 8
Item# 52
Item# 9
558
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-15
13
10
14
10
11
Item#19
Item# 60
Item# 61
12
Item# 63
Item# 59
Item# 64
Item# 15 Item# 16 & 17
Item# 65
Item# 70
559
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-16
Item 20
Item 33
Item# 21
Item# 22
Item# 24
Item# 23
Item# 34
Item# 29 Item# 55
Item# 35
560
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-17
Item #27
Item #25
Item #67
Item #26
Item #38
Item #39
Item #40
Item #37
561
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-18
Item #42
Item #43
Item #44
Item #45
Item #48
Item #47
Item #51
Item #49
Item #46
Item #50
562
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration 1-19
Item #58
Item #57
Illustration 1-20
Console Illustrated Parts
Item #6
Item #1
Item #2
Item #4
563
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2
JEDI GENERATOR RENEWAL PARTS
2-1 Introduction
This section provides information for the identification of Renewal Parts for the
Jedi 50Plus R1T generator
BEFORE ORDERING A SPARE PART, BE SURE TO KNOW THE JEDI
WARNING GENERATOR YOU HAVE ON SITE.
The model number of the Jedi generator is localized on rating plate on Auxiliary
module (see page 10-24 Jedi Generator Illustration: labelling)
If the model number is 2244165 you have a JEDI 50plus R 1T.
If the model number is 2268970 you have a JEDI 80 R 1T
Order the spare part according to the JEDI generator you have.
If only one part number is written order this one, otherwise order the spare part
according to your generator
When replacing the Jedi Generator, pay attention to check the GPCP No. of the Rotation
CAUTION
Capacitor Set of the Auxiliary Module of Jedi Generator (refer to Job Card D/R JEDI 1, D/R
JEDI 17-38) and ensure its correct match with the X-ray tube type. Pay attention to
download and upgrade the Jedi software (Refer to Job Card SW JEDI 7-2 in Chapter 4.).
For Rad 14,21 X-ray tube, the GPCP No. should be 2250002.
For MX100 X-ray tube, the GPCP No. should be 2215674.
Replace the Rotation Capacitor Set when necessary.
564
PROTEUS XR/a
2-2 FRU Information

Information shown for each FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) is explained below.
Wherever possible, the FRU or its position is illustrated for easy indentification.
2-3 Renewal Parts

The System I/F board 2375230 can be used together with Rev2.14 or above version of the
CAUTION System Console Software.
The Rev 2.14 or above version of the System Console Software can be used together
with either the System I/F board 2375230 (Item #1 of Cabinet 1) or the System I/F Board
2259298-45 and CAN I/F Board 2259298-46.
565
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration – JEDI 50Plus R 1T and JEDI 80R 1T Generator Location of Main Assemble FRU2: 2244165.
Miscellaneous Items:
First aid spares: (FRU: 1) GPCP No. 2217057 Services tools (FRU: 2)
1 PLASTIC ZIP LOCK BAG 160X220 10 TY-WRAPS D22/L99X2.5 Service software
10 SCREW HEX FLANGE HEAD M4X8 1 SHORT CIRCUIT CABLE 9-wire serial cable, No. 2207478
SCREW HEX FLANGE HEAD 4MM 8MM 1 CONNECTORS KIT FOR FC2 For JEDI 50Plus R 1T: 2244165-2
SCREW HEX FLANGE HEAD 5 MM 12 2 PLASTIC ZIP LOCK BAGS For JEDI 80R 1T: 2268970
MM 40X60
1 FUS FF 14X51 15A 700VDC C 50KA 3 PLASTIC ZIP LOCK BAGS
ULR 80X120
1 FUS FF 14X51 2A 700VDC C 50KA 1 RECT CONNEC 9C FEM
ULR AWG14 SCREW
1 SLOW BLOW FUSE HCP 6X32 10A 10 SCREW HEX FLANGE
250V UL HEAD 5 MM 12 MM
1 PADDED BAG W/ ADH CLOSURE
260X370
566
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration – JEDI 50Plus R 1T and JEDI 80R 1T AC/DC Unit, Interface Unit & Auxiliary Unit
AC/DC 3PH MID POWER ASSY

Jedi 50plus R 1 T:2214995
EMC FILTER TRI V2B
Jedi 80R 1T: 5126997-2
Jedi 50plus R 1 T:2209840 FRU: 1
Jedi 80R 1T: 2209840-2 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-40
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R JEDI 17-39
Bucky Connector
91651653 FRU: 2
ASIAN_IF_V2D AEC Board V2

2226456-3 2222253-3
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
Job Card D/R JEDI 17-47 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-46
Rotor Capacitor Set

2250002 (2215674 for MX
100 X-ray tube)
FRU: 2
Job Card D/R JEDI 17-38
567
PROTEUS XR/a
2265276
-2
Illustration – JEDI 50Plus R 1T and JEDI 80R 1T Power Unit
568
PROTEUS XR/a
2-4 Cables
1 CAN cable 5 Inter Modules cable

2249990 2249998 for JEDI 50Plus R 1T 2244165
2249998-2 for JEDI 80R 1T 2268970
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
2 Heater/AUX. Module AC-DC/Inverter DC bus cable
2215839 2249988
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
3 K VPS-Heater strap Supply Y/EMC Board cable
2215227 2221733
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
4 ROT/LVPS/Heater cable L VPS-Rotation strap
2215903 2215228
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
569
PROTEUS XR/a
1 CAN cable 5 KV Measure – Gate Comd 9 AC/DC – bus cable

cable
2249990 2198185 2249988
FRU: 2 FRU: 2 FRU: 2
2 KV Control – I/F RAD cable 6 Quad Snub / Gate Comd cable Inverter module cable
2202418 2249993 2249998 for JEDI 50Plus R 1T
2244165
2249998-2 for JEDI 80R 1T 2268970
3 AEC cable Assy 7 KV Meas. – Inv Filament cable I/F – AEC cable (option)
2208000 2249992 2202419
4 KV Meas. – KV Control cable 8 Inverter DC bus cable TAV cables
2250036 2249994 2207478
570
PROTEUS XR/a
This page intentionally left blank.
571
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 3
JEDI GENERATOR DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
3-1 Introduction
This section provides information to dismount and remount FRU (Field

Replaceable Unit).
3-2 TOOLS
Serviceability of Jedi Generator requires the following tools:
K
Digital multimeter (A)
Philips screwdriver (B)
Allen key (C) J
Screwdriver with interchangeable socket head (D)
Long extension for ratchet wrench (E) I
F
Short extension for ratchet wrench (F)
Cutting pliers (G)
High Voltage wrench (H)
Ratchet wrench (I) C
Socket wrench (J) E
A
Hexagonal head socket set (K).
D G
B H
572
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/5 D/R JEDI 1
subassembly: JEDI Modules Disassembly/Reassembly

date: 20/12/99
from / / from Time:
to / / to
1 INTRODUCTION
Jedi Generator are consist of four modules. Each module can be disassembled from the system.
AC/DC Auxiliary
Unit Unit
Power Interface
Unit Unit
573
PROTEUS XR/a
2 REMOVE THE AUXILIARY MODULE
1. Disconnect all cables on the system interface

board, then demount system interface board.
2. Disconnect the connectors and ground cables

on top of the Auxiliary module.
3. Disconnect the flat ribbon cable from Jedi kV

Control Board.
Flat Cable
Left Side Right Side
4. Remove the three fastening screws on both side

of the Interface Module.
5. Take out the Auxiliary module from the front side.
6. Reassemble the Auxiliary Module.
574 Screws
PROTEUS XR/a
3 REMOVE THE AC/DC MODULE

1. Remove the Auxiliary Module firstly.
2. Disconnect the connectors on top of the AC/DC

module.
3. Disconnect the power cables and ground cables.
4. Disconnect the DC-Bus cable on Inverter

Module.
Power and
Ground
Cables
5. Remove the 4 fastening screws on both side of

the AC/DC module.
6. Pull out the AC/DC. DC-Bus
7. Reassemble the Auxiliary and AC/DC Modules.

Screws
575
PROTEUS XR/a
3 REMOVE THE INTERFACE MODULE

1. Disconnect the connectors on left side. (AEC,
Bucky, Generator communication and Door light)
2. Remove the five screws from the left side of the

Interface module.
Screw
s
3. Disconnect the Power Cable and Communication

Cable from Jedi Interface Board.
Power Cable
Disconnect Jedi kV Control Board flat cable.
Communication KV Control
Cable Cable
4. Remove the four screws from the top of the Interface

module.
5. Remove the five screws from the right side of the

Interface module.
6. Pull the Interface module forwards to take out the

Interface module. Pull Forwards
Screws
7. Reassemble the Interface Module.
576
PROTEUS XR/a
4 REMOVE THE INVERTER MODULE

1. Disconnect all cables on the Interface module.
(AEC, Bucky, Generator communication and
Door light)
2. Disconnect DC power cable and ground cable

on left side of the Inverter module.
3. Unplug the HV Cables from the socket.
4. Remove the two screws from the bracket.
5. Remove the two screws from the bracket.
6. Remove the two screws from the front side of

main bracket.
7. Push Interface and Inverter modules forwards
and take out the unit.
8. Demount the screws fastening Interface module
with the Inverter module. (see 4/5)
9. Reassemble the Interface module and Inverter
module.
577
PROTEUS XR/a
PROTEUS XR/a 1/8 D/R JEDI 17-37
subassembly: HV Tank or Inverter Power Supply

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS

3 mm Allen wrench.
13 mm socket with ratchet.
C–clamp for HV connections.
Multimeter.
DANGER
Check with the Multimeter in DC mode that the voltage is below 10 V between “+” and “-”
CAUTION terminals on the Power Unit (see below). IF NOT, WAIT UNTIL VOLTAGE BECOME O V
BEFORE REMOVING CABLES.
578
PROTEUS XR/a
4 PREREQUISITES
THE WHOLE INVERTER UNIT WEIGHTS 30 KILOGRAMS (66 POUNDS). TWO PEOPLE
WARNING
ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT.
5 DISASSEMBLY
5-1 Remove the Inverter Unit
THE POWER UNIT WEIGHTS 30

WARNING KILOGRAMS (66 POUNDS). DO NOT
TRY TO LIFT IT WITHOUT
ASSISTANCE
1. Disconnect the HV cables, console, AEC and buckies

cables.
2. Disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable 1 from J1 on the Inverter

Unit
Auxiliary Unit.
3. Disconnect “+” and “-” cables 2 .
4. Disconnect the cable from J3A 3 and the cable from

J3 QUAD SNUB 4 .
5. Unscrew the 5.5 mm screw holding the Ground cable

5 .
6. Remove the Inverter Unit from the cabinet.
5 4
1
3
579
INVERTER UNIT
TOP VIEW
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2 Remove the Interface Unit box
1. Unscrew twelve 5.5 mm screws that retain the cover

panel and remove this one 1 .
1
2. Disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable 3 from J1 of the 2

KV Control Board 4 .
3. Unscrew twelve 5.5 mm screws 2 securing the

Interface Unit box to the Power box.
4. Remove the Interface Unit box.
3 J1 4
5-3 Remove the HV tank or the Inverter Power Supply
1. Unscrew the 5.5 mm screws securing the two EMC

cover panels 1 at the HV connections side and
remove them.
Take great care not to let screws fall into 1

NOTICE
the HV connector receptacles. Cover
them with plastic caps.
580
PROTEUS XR/a
2. Disconnect the cable 2 connected to J3 on the KV

Measure Board.
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable 3 connecting J2 on the

KV Control Board (Inverter Assembly) to J2 on the KV
Measure Board (HV Tank).
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable 4 connecting J3 on the 5 3

Gate Command Board to J1 on the KV Measure Board
(HV Tank).
5. Using a 13 mm socket wrench, remove the four nuts

5 holding the Primary coil flat cables.
4
6. Disengage the end of Primaries coil flat cables from

their screw and re-enter them towards the interior.
7. Remove the 5.5 mm screws: three at the front side 6

(two at right, one at left) and three at the right side 7 .
8. At the rear side, remove the eight 3 mm Allen screws

8
which secure the heat sink of the Inverter Power 6
Assembly to the HV Tank.
9. Remove carefully upwards the Power Unit. 8

7
581
PROTEUS XR/a
10. Take off the assembly constituted by: EMC covers, Coils Inverter Assy, Capa Inverter Assy, and KV Control
Board. The HV Tank 9 and the Inverter Power Assembly 10 are now free .
10
In case of change the Inverter Power Assembly, you must recover the KV control Board
NOTICE 11 and mount it in the new Inverter Power Assembly.
- Disconnect the Flat ribbon cable 12 J2.

- Remove the seven 5.5 mm screws 13 and recover the KV Control Board.
12
13
11
582
PROTEUS XR/a
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedure to reassemble and replace the unit.

1. Reassemble the HV Tank with the other elements of the Power Unit (refer to section 5–3 9 , 10 ).
2. Mount the flat cable J1 on the KV Measure Board of the HV Tank (refer to section 5–3 4 ).
3. Mount the eight 3 mm Allen screws to secure the heat sink of the Inverter Power Assembly to the HV Tank.
(refer to section 5–3 8 ).
Tighten to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm).
4. Put back the 3 front 5.5 mm hex head screws (refer to section 5–3 6 ), one at the left side, two at the right
side.
Tighten to torque between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
5. Reconnect the ribbon cable from J1 on the KV Measure Board to J3 on the Gate Command Board (refer to
section 5–3 4 ).
6. Using the 13 mm socket wrench, connect the primary coil flat cables to the four capacitors 1 .
Respect the position of the two flat cables with white bands on them (refer to illustration
CAUTION above).
Make sure the presence of the IGBT Middle point 2 .
White
BAND
White
BAND
583
PROTEUS XR/a
7. Reconnect the cable to J3 on the KV Measure Board (refer to section 5–3 2 ).

Tighten the nuts to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm).
8. Reconnect the wider short ribbon cable from J2 on the KV Control Board to J2 on the kV Measure Board
(refer to section 5–3 3 ).
9. Mount the 5.5 hex head screws securing the two EMC covers to the HV Tank on the HV outlet side (refer to
section 5–3 1 ) and the three screws on the other side (refer to section 5–3 7 ).
Tighten the screws to torque between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
10. If Inverter Power Assembly has been changed, reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the KV Control
Board (refer to section 5–3 11 ).
Tighten 5.5 mm screws to torque between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
THE POWER UNIT WEIGHTS 30 KG (66 POUNDS).

WARNING
11. Remount the Interface Unit following the inverse procedure indicated in section 5–2.
12. Remount the Module in the Cabinet following the inverse procedure indicated in section 5–1.
Be sure to place the Flat ribbon cable 3 J3 KV Control Board at the right position, see
NOTICE
illustration below.
584
PROTEUS XR/a
CAUTION Be sure to place the “+” and “-” DC BUS in the right connector.
13. Put 5 cl of oil into the HV receptacles. Reconnect Console, buckies and AEC cables.
7 VERIFY
Connect the service laptop (refer to page 4-26 ”Service Software User Guide” JOB CARD) and proceed to ”HV no
load diagnostics” to ensure correct operation.
Skip steps ”Gate Command and Inverter in Short Circuit” diagnostics.
585
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: Rotation Capacitors Set 23/56 (Rotation Capacitor Set 23/23 for MX100 X-ray tube)
date: 20/12/99
to / / to
Note: When installing the system, do not use the capacitors in accessories crate #4 (refer to form “Crate
dimensions & weight” on page 2-5 in Chapter 2) for installation. Pay attention to pick out and
dispose the capacitors in accessories crate #4. Ensure the eco-friendly disposal of the capacitors.
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm hex nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.

Cutting pliers.
DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
The Rotation Capacitors are in the Jedi Generator Auxiliary Unit (10 kg).
On the Auxiliary Unit, disconnect internal CAN cable, DC BUS, heater cable, and Tube cable.
586
PROTEUS XR/a
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit Cover
The removing of the Rotation

NOTICE
Capacitors can be done without
removing the Auxiliary Unit from the
Auxiliary
Cabinet. Unit
Unscrew the sixteen 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove

the cover on the Auxiliary Unit.
5-2 Remove the Rotation Capacitors
Rotation
Capacitors 2
1. Cut the tie-wraps 1 1
1
2. Disconnect both capacitors 2 2
3. Remove the two Rotor Capacitors.
587
PROTEUS XR/a
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the Rotor Capacitors.

Use the tie–wraps from the Accessory Spares Set to reattach the capacitors.
1 2
Ensure that the capacitors are correctly connected :

For Rad14,21 tube:
1
- connect the left capacitor 20 µF to the board with cable 2259373
connect the two cable terminals marked “C20 UF” to the below pins of the left capacitor 20 µF
connect the two cable terminals marked “CF 9” and “CF 10” to CF9 and CF10 on the board, respectively.
2
- connect the right capacitor 6.4 µF to the board with cable 2259372
connect the two cable terminals marked “C6.4 UF” to the upper pins of the right capacitor 6.4 µF
connect the two cable terminals marked “CF 11” and “CF 12” to CF11 and CF12 on the board,
respectively.
For MX 100 tube:
1
- connect the left capacitor 12.6 µF to the board with cable 2215658
connect the two cable terminals marked “C12.6 UF” to the below pins of the left capacitor 12.6 µF
2
- connect the right capacitor 10.5 µF to the board with cable 2215659
connect the two cable terminals marked “C10.5 UF” to the upper pins of the right capacitor 10.5 µF
588
PROTEUS XR/a
CAUTION Pay attention to check the GPCP No. of the Rotation Capacitor Set and ensure its correct
match with the different X-ray tube type.
For Rad 14,21 X-ray tube, the GPCP No. should be 2250002.
For MX100 X-ray tube, the GPCP No. should be 2215674.
Replace the Rotation Capacitor Set when necessary.
7 VERIFY
Verify that the system functions correctly.

Remount the cover. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
589
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: I/F Board RAD

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
WARNING
590
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
The I/F Board Rad is situated in the Interface Unit.
The removing of the I/F Board Rad can

NOTICE
Interface
Unit

2
2
2. Disconnect the flat ribbon cable and the two cables
3 , if existing, coming from the AEC Board (option).
3
3. Disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable J10 coming from

the KV Control Board 4 .
4
591
PROTEUS XR/a
4. Remove the four screws of connectors J8 and J9 5 .
5. Remove the ten 5.5 mm screws 6 securing the

Interface Board Rad; remove the board. 5
6 REASSEMBLY
1. Reverse the disassembly procedure to reassemble the unit. Tighten screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m
(15 to 20 kg.cm).
2. Power the system on and verify that the system functions properly.
592
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: KV Control Board

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS

10 mm Allen wrench.
13 mm socket with ratchet.
DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
WARNING
The KV Control board contains a saved memory Database with essentially the following parameters:
- Tube configuration parameters, AEC calibration parameters, and Room configuration (workstation, AEC,
screen film pairs).
- Filament aging variable
- Error Log
- Recorded parameter data
If it is possible, backup database first. Else, the diagram hereafter helps you to determine the action to take for
your situation.
593
PROTEUS XR/a
First
Installation
Configura* Calibration Save Non KV Control
tion Volatile RAM Out of Order
Database
DB Is
Upload Yes Upload No original DB No
Database Possible? saved?
(*)
Yes
Replace Replace Replace

KV Control KV Control KV Control
SW No Download Yes SW Yes SW

OK? Software OK? OK?
Yes No No
Download Download
Software Software
Download Configura-
Download Original
Database tion if appli-
Database cable
(*)
Calibrate if
applicable
Reset
Database:
* Date
* Time
*Clear Error
log
Operational
Checks
Save Non
Volatile RAM
Database
(*) or most recent END

backup
594
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
The KV Control Board spare is pre-loaded with NP/NP+ software.

NOTICE
It will be required to download the software that is on site.
DATABASE RESTORE IS MANDATORY.
The installation of the KV Control

NOTICE
Board can be done without removing
the Inverter Unit from the Cabinet.
Interface
Unit
595
PROTEUS XR/a
5-1 Remove the Interface Unit box

1
2. Disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable 3 from J1 of the 2

KV Control Board 4 .
3. Unscrew twelve 5.5 mm screws 2 securing the

Interface Unit box to the Power box.
4. Remove the Interface Unit box.
3 J1 4
5-2 Remove the kV Control Board
1. Disconnect the cables from J2 and J3 on the kV

Control Board 1 .
1
2. Remove the seven 5.5 mm hex head screws 2 which
secure the kV Control Board; remove the board .
2
596
PROTEUS XR/a
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the KV Control board and the Interface Unit.
Tighten 5.5 mm screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
7 VERIFY
1. Connect the Service Laptop (refer to page 4-32 ”Service Software User Guide” JOB CARD)
2. Reapply power and verify that the 8 LEDs on KV Control board are scrolling.
3. Verify software version (service floppy, menu 5)

- If it corresponds to the software version on the floppy delivered with the equipment (or upgraded by FMI),
proceed to Database Restore (refer to page 4-86 ”Backup & Restore Database Setup Parameters”
Calibration Job Card).
- If not, download the software and proceed to ”Software Download / Upgrade” Job Card.
4. Restore Database (refer to page 4-86”Backup & Restore Database Setup Parameters” Calibration Job Card)
- Up-to-date database if available
- Most recent or originally saved Data Base if available
- Default one from the floppy delivered with the equipment in the Service Tool set.
Alternately, you may try to swap the NVRAM chip (U32) from the former to the new KV Control board to keep all
the parameters. Refer to page 8-18”Replace Non Volatile Parameters RAM” Job Card. If this chip is not involved
in the failure or the cause for replacement, it will allow to keep up-to-date data.
5. Calibrate:
- Perform several exposures on both focus in several workstation, with exposure time longer than 12.5 ms
If default database was restored, it is necessary to resume room set up (refer to page 4-52”Workstation
parameter” Calibration Job Card) and AEC calibration (if present) (refer to page 4-60” Automated AEC
Calibration” Job Card”). Then perform the checksum (refer to page 4-83”Checksum Validation” Job Card).
6. Save Database on the service floppy delivered with the equipment (refer to page 4-80”Backup & Restore
Database Setup Parameters” Job Card).
597
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: EMC Board 3 Phases

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
None.
598
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
5-1 Remove AC/DC and Auxiliary Units Assy
1. Disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable 1 from J1 on the

Auxiliary Unit.
AC/DC and
Auxiliary Unit
2. Disconnect the cable 2 from J2 AUX.
3. Disconnect the cable 3 from J2 AC/DC.
4. Disconnect “+” and “-” cables from the Inverter Unit 5 .

5
4 .
6. Remove the AC/DC and Auxiliary Units assembly from

the Cabinet.
3
4
1 2
AC/DC and Auxiliary Units

ASSY
TOP VIEW
599
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2 Remove the AC/DC Unit
1. On the top of the AC/DC Unit, disconnect the cable 2

4
from J3R 1 and J1 AC/DC 2 .
2. Remove two 5.5 mm hex head screws at the right side

and two at the left side 3 . The AC/DC Unit 4 and
the Auxiliary Unit 5 are now free.
3 3
5 1

ASSY
TOP VIEW
5-3 Remove the EMC Board on AC/DC Unit
1. Remove twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws which retain

the cover. Remove that one.
1
2. Remove the three nuts 1 securing the phase cables
and three screws 2 retaining the EMC board to the
rectifier block.
3. Unscrew nine 5.5 mm hex head screws 3 , Standoff

4 and remove the EMC Board 5 .
3
5 4
2
600
PROTEUS XR/a
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the EMC board.

Tighten 5.5 mm screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
Ensure that U1 Standoff is tighten to the torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
CAUTION
Refer to section 5–3 4 .
Remount the AC/DC and Auxiliary Units Assembly inside the Cabinet.
CAUTION Be sure to place the “+” and “-” DC BUS in the right connector.
7 VERIFY
Reapply power and verify the presence of 3 phases.

601
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: AC/DC 3 PH Power Assembly

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
5.5 mm socket, with ratchet if possible (to remove cover and board)
10 mm socket with ratchet (to remove DC and rectifier cables)
Large Philips screw driver (to remove cables from the rectifier block).
DANGER
1. Insure that the neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on this board; some become very hot.
3. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.
4 PREREQUISITES
None.
602
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
Note: The AC/DC 3 Phases Power Assembly is made up of two main elements: AC/DC BOARD 3
Phases and RECTIFIER BLOCK 3 Phases.
5-1 Remove AC/DC and Auxiliary Units Assy
1. Disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable 1 from J1 on the

Auxiliary Unit.
2. Disconnect the cable 2 from J2 AUX. AC/DC and
Auxiliary
Units
3. Disconnect the cable 3 from J2 AC/DC.
4. Disconnect “+” and “-” cables from the Inverter Unit 5 .

4 . 5
6. Remove the AC/DC and Auxiliary Units assembly from

the Cabinet.
3
4
1 2

ASSY
TOP VIEW
603
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2 Remove the AC/DC Unit
1. On the top of the AC/DC Unit, disconnect the cable 1

4
from J3R 1 and J1 AC/DC 2 .
2. Remove two 5.5 mm hex head screws at the right side

and two at the left side 3 . The AC/DC Unit 4 and the
Auxiliary Unit 5 are now free. 3
3
5 2

ASSY
5-3 Remove the AC/DC Board on AC/DC Unit TOP VIEW
1. Remove twelve 5.5 mm hex head screws which retain - + 1

the cover. Remove that one.
2. Remove the two DC cables fastened with 10 mm nuts
1
on the board .
3. Remove two screws retaining the AC/DC board
2
to the rectifier block .
4. Remove seven 5.5 mm hex head screws 3 and lift out
the AC/DC Board 4 .
2
604
PROTEUS XR/a
5-4 Remove the Rectifier Block
1. The Rectifier Block 1 appears after removing the EMC

Board (refer to ”EMC Board 3 Phases”
Disassembly/Reassembly Job Card sections 5–3-2 to
5–3-3) and the AC/DC Board 2 1
1. With the Allen key 3 mm, unscrew the 2 screws 2
holding the rectifier to the chassis and remove the
block.
6 REASSEMBLY
1. Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the AC/DC 3 PH Mid Power Assembly and the EMC Board.
2. Tighten the 10 mm cable retaining nuts to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm), and the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m
(15 to 20 kg.cm).
CAUTION Ensure cables terminals are repositioned as noticed before.
Verify that the + and - DC Bus cables are not reversed to prevent damage to the Inverter
CAUTION 1
(Refer to section 5–3 ).
The Rectifier Block has to be placed with the two poles in regard of the AC/DC Board
CAUTION 1
(Refer to section 5–4 ).
Be careful to preserve the special grease that is spread between the Rectifier Block and
CAUTION the chassis. This grease, called: Conductive Surface Compound, provides both thermal
and electrical conductivity that is important in reducing failure of the rectifier.
Be sure to place the “+” and “-” DC BUS in

CAUTION
the right connector.
3. Remount the AC/DC and Auxiliary Units Assy inside the Cabinet.
7 VERIFY
Reapply power and verify that the system functions correctly.
605
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: :LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
DANGER
1. Insure that the Neon N1 (orange) indicator light on the LVPS Board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on the LVPS Board. Some become very hot.
4 PREREQUISITES
None.
606
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
The removing of the LV Power Supply

NOTICE
3-Phase Board can be done without
removing the Auxiliary Unit from the
Cabinet.
Auxiliary
Unit
5-1 Remove the LV Power Supply Board
1 2 3
1. Disconnect the 3 cables , ,
1 from the LV Power Supply 3 Phases
4
board .
4
2. Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head
screws and remove the LV Power
4
Supply 3 Phase Board .
3 2 607
PROTEUS XR/a
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the LV Power Supply 3 Phases Board.
Verify that the following cables are not reversed before power ON (refer to section 5–1):
CAUTION
2
1. Cables CF2 (+DC BUS) and CF1 (- DC BUS) .
3
2. Cables CF4 (160 V) and CF3 (0 V) .
Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
7 VERIFY
608
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: :Filament Board 1 INV

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
DANGER
1. Insure that the Neon DS3 (green) indicator light on the Filament Board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on the Filament Board . Some become very hot.
4 PREREQUISITES
None.
609
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
5-1 Remove LV Power Supply Cover

NOTICE
removing the Auxiliary Unit from the Auxiliary
Cabinet. Unit

5-2 Remove the Filament Board
1
1. Disconnect the ribbon cable
4
1 between the Filament Board and
5 2
the LVPS Board . Disconnect
3
5 and the connector J2 .
4 2. Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head

screws and remove the Filament
4
Board 1 INV .
2 3
610
PROTEUS XR/a
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the Filament Board 1 INV.
2
Verify that cables CF4 (160 V) and CF3 (0 V) are not reversed before power ON (refer
CAUTION to section 5–2).
7 VERIFY

Run Heater Function Diagnostics.
611
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: :Rotor Board High Speed

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
DANGER
1. Insure that the Neon DS7 (orange) indicator light on the Rotor Board has gone out.
2. Be careful touching components on the Rotor Board. Some become very hot.
4 PREREQUISITES
None.
612
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
5-1 Remove Auxiliary Unit Cover

NOTICE
removing the Auxiliary Unit from the Auxiliary
Unit
Cabinet.

613
PROTEUS XR/a
5-2 Remove the Rotor Board
1. The Auxiliary Unit being free, unscrew ten 5.5 hex head
screws and remove its cover.
1
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable between the Rotor
4 5
Board High Speed and the LVPS Board .
3
2
Disconnect cables CF1 and CF2 .
3. Disconnect Capacitor cables CF9, CF10, CF11, CF12
6 4
.
1
4. Unscrew two 5.5 mm hex head screws that are in holes
3
below the surface of the board and that secure an
IGBT.
5. Unscrew the eight 5.5 mm hex head screws and
4 5
remove the Rotor Board High Speed .
CAUTION
Be careful to preserve the special grease
that is spread between the IGBT and a
heat sink under the Rotation Board. This
grease, called ”Conductive Surface
Compound”, provides both thermal and
electrical conductivity that are important 2 6
in reducing failure of the IGBT.
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the Rotor Board High Speed.
CAUTION Ensure that cables are correctly connected. Ensure that marks on the cables match the
marks on the board.
7 VERIFY

Run Heater Function Diagnostics.
614
PROTEUS XR/a
subassembly: :AEC Board (Option)

date: 20/12/99
to / / to
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS
DANGER
4 PREREQUISITES
WARNING ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT.
615
PROTEUS XR/a
5 DISASSEMBLY
The installation of the AEC Board can

NOTICE
Interface
Unit
5-1 Remove the AEC Board

1
panel and remove this one . 1
616
PROTEUS XR/a
4
2. Disconnect the flat ribbon cable from J5 between
2 3 4
the I/F Board RAD and the AEC Board . 2
3
6 7
3. Disconnect the connectors J2 and J1 , and Test
5 5
Points TP1 and TP2 on the AEC Board.
4. Remove the six 5.5 mm screws securing the AEC 6
Board 3 .
7
6 REASSEMBLY
Reverse the disassembly procedure. Tighten screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).
7 VERIFY
Reapply power.
Proceed to ”AEC diagnostics” to ensure correct operation.
617
PROTEUS XR/a
CHAPTER 10 SCHEMATICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM MIS MAP……………………………………………………619

1-1 System Schematics (For systems with Wall Stand 600-0301)………………………………………….. 619
1-2 PDU Schematics………………………………………………………………………………………………… 621
1-3 Wall stand Schematics………………………………………………………………………………………… 622
1-4 SG100 Wall stand Schematics……………………………………………………………………………….. 623
1-5 SG120 Wall stand Schematics……………………………………………………………………………….. 625
1-6 System I/F Board………………………………………………………………………………………………... 628
1-7 Table Schematics……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 634
1-8 Pedal I/F Board………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 638
1-9 Tomo-link System Schematics………………………………………………………………………………. 640
1-10 Tomo I/F Board………………………………………………………………………………………………… 642
SECTION 2 JEDI GENERATOR ILLUSTRATIONS………………………………………………… 644
2-1 JEDI CABLING……………………………………………………………………………………………………644
2-2 JEDI LABELING PLAN…………………………………………………………………………………………. 648
2-3 Illustration - I/F Board V2 Electrical Schematics………………………………………………………….. 650
2-4 Illustration- KV control board _V2C…………………………………………………………………………..654
SECTION 3 JEDI GENERATOR CENTRAL LISTING……………………………………………… 672
3-1 KV MEASURE BOARD…………………………………………………………………………………………. 672
3-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV……………………………………………………………………………………… 673
3-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED……………………………………………………………………………. 674
3-4 LV Power Supply 3 Ph board…………………………………………………………………………………. 676
3-5 Gate Command Board…………………………………………………………………………………………. 677
3-6 Kv Control Board……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 678
3-7 AC/DC 3 Phase board………………………………………………………………………………………….. 680
3-8 I/F Board RAD v2……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 681
3-9 AEC Board V2…………………………………………………………………………………………………….682
3-10 Quad Snub Board………………………………………………………………………………………………683
SECTION 4 OTS CONSOLE ILLUSTRATIONS…………………………………………………….. 684
4-1 Release Handle Schematics………………………………………………………………………………….. 684
4-2 OTS Console Processor Board ……………………………………………………………………………… 685
4-3 OTS Console Display Board………………………………………………………………………………….. 687
SECTION 5 SYSTEM CONSOLE ILLUSTRATIONS……………………………………………….. 689
618
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 1 PROTEUS XR/a SYSTEM MIS MAP
1-1 System Schematics (1) (For systems with Wall Stand 600-0301)
619
PROTEUS XR/a
System Schematics (2) (For systems with SG100 Wall Stand 2225849)
620
PROTEUS XR/a
1-2 PDU Schematics
621
PROTEUS XR/a
1-3 Wall stand Schematics
622
PROTEUS XR/a
1-4 SG100 Wall stand Schematics (sheet 1 of 2)
623
PROTEUS XR/a
SG100 Wall stand Schematics (sheet 2 of 2)
624
PROTEUS XR/a
1-5 SG120 Wall stand Schematics (sheet 1 of 3)
625
PROTEUS XR/a
626
PROTEUS XR/a
627
PROTEUS XR/a
1-6 System I/F Board (1)
628
PROTEUS XR/a
System I/F Board (2)
629
PROTEUS XR/a
630
PROTEUS XR/a
631
PROTEUS XR/a
632
PROTEUS XR/a
633
PROTEUS XR/a
1-7 Table Schematics
634
PROTEUS XR/a
Table Logic Control Board (1)
635
PROTEUS XR/a
Table Logic Control Board (221-3010 for Rev0)
636
PROTEUS XR/a
Table Logic Control Board (221-3010 for Rev1 & Rev2)
637
PROTEUS XR/a
1-8 Pedal I/F Board
638
PROTEUS XR/a
639
PROTEUS XR/a
1-9 Tomo-link System Schematics
a Cables Illustration
221-3010
640
PROTEUS XR/a
b Interconnection.
System Console
TOMO-LINK SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION ILLUSTRATION
REA00057 TOWER
Tomo-Link I/F Board Tomo-Link Main
P1 J105
Elec.
Bus
CAN
VCC TOMO COM J1

8 8
8DEG 8 DEG J103 CAN BUS inter-
CAN BUS Controller

21 21
& I/F Circuitry

I/O PORTS
20DEG 9 20 DEG face Connector
9
Sys. I/F
J101
Board
40DEG 40 DEG J2
CAN BUS* 22 22 J104 REA00056
FAST FAST
1,2,14 10 10 J102
SLOW SLOW
*CAN-bus message content: 23 23 OPERATORS
Port 4
• Sweep angle:8,20,40degree; TOMO ON PANEL
•Sweep speed: fast, slow; 2 2
•Tomo ON 3 TOMO RDY
VCC (+5V) 3
•Tomo ready,Tomo start ; +24 TOMO
6 6
Isolated
DC-DC
•Prep. 80C592 DRIVE UNIT
CPU +24 TOMO
with CAN 7 7
TOMO ON RTN
J102
on chip
15 15
J11 P2 TOMO RDY RTN
J100 J101
1,2,14 I/F Circuitry 16 16
5
Generator
TOMO STROKE PREP

3 19 19
JEDI
3 I/
+12V 6 STROKESTART STROKE START
6 14 14
ORDO RX 4 F RX EXP
4 ORDERRX
11 11
ORDO RX RTN 5 5 ORDERRXR RX COM
24 24
ORDO LOCKR TOMO LOCK REL Bucky Lock
J101 25 25
n
Suspensio
12 P21V +21V(XT) Release

12 12 J107
XT
J6
11 XTOK TOMO XT OK FOR TOMO
Table Controller
13 13 1 4
16 +24V SEL TOMO
20 20 2 5
Sys. I/F
Board J3
MOTOR+ 1 1
MOTOR- P3
3 2
641 Disable table movement
PROTEUS XR/a
1-10 Tomo I/F Board (1)
642
PROTEUS XR/a
Tomo I/F Board (2)
643
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2
JEDI GENERATOR ILLUSTRATIONS
2-1 JEDI CABLING
Illustration - Jedi 50Plus R 1T Cabling (1/2)
644
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration - Jedi 50Plus R 1T Cabling (2/2)
645
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration - Jedi 80 R 1T SCH (2268970SCH Rev2 page1/2)
646
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration - Jedi 80 R 1T SCH (2268970SCH Rev2 page2/2)
647
PROTEUS XR/a
2-2 JEDI LABELING PLAN
Illustration - Jedi 50 R 1T labeling plan
1 6
2 7
2244165
648
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration - Jedi 80 R 1T labeling plan
649
PROTEUS XR/a
2-3 Illustration - I/F Board V2 Electrical Schematics, Sheet 1
650
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration - I/F Board RAD V2 Electrical Schematics, Sheet 2
651
PROTEUS XR/a
652
PROTEUS XR/a
10-18
653
PROTEUS XR/a
2 -4 Illustration- KV control board _V2C Sheet 1
654
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration- KV control board _V2C Sheet 2
655
PROTEUS XR/a
656
PROTEUS XR/a
657
PROTEUS XR/a
658
PROTEUS XR/a
659
PROTEUS XR/a
660
PROTEUS XR/a
661
PROTEUS XR/a
662
PROTEUS XR/a
Illustration- KV control board _V2C Sheet10
663
PROTEUS XR/a
664
PROTEUS XR/a
665
PROTEUS XR/a
666
PROTEUS XR/a
667
PROTEUS XR/a
668
PROTEUS XR/a
669
PROTEUS XR/a
670
PROTEUS XR/a
This page intentionally left blank
671
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 3
JEDI GENERATOR CENTRAL LISTING
3-1 kV MEASURE BOARD
This board forms part of the oil seal of the High Voltage Tank. It can only be removed at the factory.
CAUTION The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) is the complete HV Tank.
LF
C
SF
Illustration - kV Measure Board
672
PROTEUS XR/a
3-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV.
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS3 GOES OUT.
DANGER
DC
160v LF Common
SF
DS3 - Green - +160v

DC present
160v DS4 - Yellow - Inverter

DC Output Running
0
SF_LF - Yellow - Small ON - Yellow - Inverter

Focus / Large Focus Command ON
Relay Feedback
RST - Red - Board being
reset or powered up
DS2 - Yellow - Status

LED
DS1 - Yellow - Status

LED
Illustration - Filament Board 1 Inv.
673
PROTEUS XR/a
3-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS6 AND DS7 (NEON-ORANGE)
DANGER
GO OUT.
Auxiliary
DC bus Common
Main
DS6
DC bus
Illustration - Rotation Board High Speed
674
PROTEUS XR/a
3-3-1 Indicators
INDICATOR COLOR INDICATES:

RESET Red BOARD BEING RESET OR POWERED UP
INV_ON Yellow THE INVERTER IS RUNNING
DS1 Green PRESENCE OF +15 V SUPPLY
DS2 Green PRESENCE OF -15 V SUPPLY
DS3 Green PRESENCE OF +5 V SUPPLY
DS4-DS5 Yellow BOARD STATUS
DS6 Neon (orange) FAN VAC POWER SUPPLY PRESENT
DS7 Neon (orange) DC BUS PRESENT
3-3-2 J2 Wiring
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
115V
sense
Fan, 115V AC
Line input
Fan*, 115V AC
Line X-ray tube
output Thermal safety
* used in application with fan cooling

tube
675
PROTEUS XR/a
3-4 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PH BOARD
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE AND HOT SURFACE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL INDICATOR NE1 (NEON -
ORANGE) GOES OUT.
NE1 - Orange - indicates presence of DC Bus
+ 400
DC
bus
- 400
160V
DC
0
DS2 - Green - 160 VDC
DS1 - Red - Mains Drop
Illustration 4 - LV Power Supply 3 Ph Board
676
PROTEUS XR/a
3-5 GATE COMMAND BOARD
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL DS300 ON THIS BOARD AND DS1 ON DUAL SNUB
BOARD ARE OUT.
CAUTION Hot surface on transformer T300 and heat sink.
D
S3
00
DC bus DS300 - Neon (Orange) -

Presence of voltage on DC
bus for Flyback Converter to
create power supplies for
both Gate Commands
DS200 - Yellow - High

IGBT* (Q200) Gate D
S2
Command running 00
DS202 - Green - Pres ence

DS201 - Green - Presence of -10 V Supply on high
of +20 V Supply on high D D IGBT* Gate Command
IGBT* Gate Command S2 S2
01 02
Inverter ILP
current
feedback
ILR
DS100 -Yellow-Low IGBT*

D
(Q100) Gate Command running S1
00
DS102 - Green - Presence
D
DS101 - Green - Presence of D S1 of -10 V Supply on low
S1 02
+20 V Supply on low IGBT* 01 IGBT* Gate Command
Gate Command
* Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor
Illustration - Gate Command Board
677
PROTEUS XR/a
3-6 kV CONTROL BOARD
Illustration - kV Control Board
678
PROTEUS XR/a
3-6-1 Switches and Jumpers
SWITCH OR FUNCTION
JUMPER
RST RESET PUSH BUTTON
3-6-2 Indicators
INDICATOR COLOR INDICATES:

CONF Red FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAY
(FPGA) CONFIGURATION NOT
ACCOMPLISHED
OK Yellow INVERTER GATE POWER SUPPLY OK
TX_TAV Yellow TRANSMIT TO SERVICE LAPTOP
RX_TAV Yellow RECEIVE FROM SERVICE LAPTOP
TX_CONS Yellow TRANSMIT TO CONSOLE (IF EXISTING)
RX_CONS Yellow RECEIVE FROM CONSOLE (IF EXISTING)
T_CAN_X Yellow SYSTEM CAN BUS TRANSMIT
R_CAN_X Yellow SYSTEM CAN BUS RECEIVE
HALT Red MICROPROCESSOR HALTED
RESET Red BOARD BEING RESET
S0 TO S7 Yellow STATUS LED
IN APPLICATION MODE THESE LEDS
FLASH IN SEQUENCE CONTINUOUSLY
DS1 Green -15V SUPPLY
DS2 Green +15V SUPPLY
3-6-3 Non Volatile RAM
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
U32 NON VOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM (BATTERY
INCLUDED)
679
PROTEUS XR/a
3-7 AC/DC 3 PHASE BOARD
DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL DS1 (NEON - ORANGE) GOES OUT.
CAUTION Some components on this board can become very hot.

DC Bus to DC Bus out
inverter
F1 - Fuse -
DS1 - Neon Protects (on DC Bus):
(Orange) - Indi LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board
cates presence Rotor Board High Speed
of voltage on the Gate Command Board
DC Bus. Type: 15 A, 600 VDC
Illustration - AC/DC 3 Phase Board
680
PROTEUS XR/a
3-8 I/F BOARD RAD V2
ON & VAC N1 - Orange (neon) -

Indicates presence of
Pin 9 100 VAC for the Bucky
Table Bucky
Pin 1
Pin 9
Wall Bucky
Pin 1
To AEC board
Pin 9
Room Door & Light
I/F
Pin 1
DS4:CAN TRANSMIT
(yellow)
Service Laptop
DS5:EXT.CAN
TRANSMIT (yellow)
DS6: Receive Data
from console (yellow)
Console
OPTIONAL
DS7: DATA being sent to

console (TRANSMIT) No strap (engineering
(yellow) use)
Presence of strap -
TUBE 1
DS3:Reset led (red)
DS1, DS2: Status micro

processor (yellow)
Illustration - I/F Board RAD V2
681
PROTEUS XR/a
3-9 AEC BOARD V2
AEC4 AEC3 AEC1 AEC2 N1 - Orange (neon) -

Presence of 230 VDC
Illustration - AEC Board V2
3-9-1 Test Points
TESTPOINT MEASUREMENT
SIGNAL RANGE
TP1 230 VDC 230 VDC _5%
TP2 230 VDC 230 VDC _5%
TP3 230 VDC 230 VDC _5%
TP4 230 VDC 230 VDC _5%
TP5 AEC assignment reference 0 to 10 V
TP6 10 VDC (reference) 10 VDC _1%
TP7 AEC return voltage
TP8 AEC1 return voltage
682
PROTEUS XR/a
3-10 QUAD SNUB BOARD
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS1 (NEON - ORANGE) GOES
OUT.
DS1 / DS2 - LED (green) - Indicates presence of voltage on DC Bus
Illustration - Quad Snub Board
683
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 4 OTS CONSOLE ILLUSTRATIONS
4-1 Release Handle Schematics
SW1
2
1.3
A LL_IN 4
8
5.7
6
SW DPDT
SW2
2
A LL_OUT
1.3
4
8
5.7
A LL_V ERT_IN 6
A LL_V ERT_OUT
SW DPDT
J6
A LL_IN 1
A LL_V ERT_IN 2
A LL_OUT 3
A LL_V ERT_OUT 4
CONN_4
Title
ALL LOCK/RELEASE HANDLE
Size Document Number Rev
A
WDS-105-C-001
Date: Saturday, May 27, 2000 Sheet 1 of 1
684
PROTEUS XR/a
VCC

4-2 OTS Console Processor Board -1 R88
1 0K1 %0 .1 W
U7
1 8
2 NC.1 CATHODE VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC
VCC 3 NC.2
4 NC.3 C34 R13 2
5 NC.4
6 NC.5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5
R14 9 7 NC.6 4 R61 R60 R59 R58 R57 R56 R55 R46
NC.7 ANODE
1 0K1 %0 .1 W 0 .1u F50 V SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5
U1D L M2 8 5-2 .5
R5 R22 1 00 1 %0 .1W
9 8
SWITCH1 6
1 00 K1% 0 .1W C1 VCC
7 4HC14
R15 0
0 .1u F50 V 1 0K1 %0 .1 W
U1C R35
R19
VCC 5 6
SWITCH1 7
R49 R48 R47 R52 R51 R50 R54 R53
1 00 K1% 0 .1W
R15 1 1 00 1 %0 .1 W SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5
7 4HC14
1 0K1 %0 .1 W C4
0 .1u F50 V
U1A
R14 R34
1 2
SWITCH1 8
these pulldowns should not exceed 8k
1 00 K1% 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W
7 4HC14 VCC
C9
0 .1u F50 V
R15 2
1 0K1 %0 .1 W
U1B R23 VCC VCC VCC

R20
VCC 3 4
SWITCH1 9
1 00 K1% 0 .1W R16 8 R16 9
R15 3 7 4HC14 1 00 1 %0 .1W 1 K1 5 0.1 W 1 K1 % 0.1 W
1 0K1 %0 .1 W C10
0 .1u F50 V
U3D U8
R15 R31 R18 9 R18 3 3 1
+5V PWM PWM _INC
9 8
SWITCH2 0
7 6
RX TXEN TXEN_INC
1 00 K1% 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W VCC
7 4HC14 VCC 2
C5 SPARE-RC08 0 5 1 00 1 %0 .1W C37 5 NC-2
0 .1u F50 V 0 .1u F50 V NC-5 8
R15 4 4 TX
GND
1 0K1 %0 .1 W (7,21,40,53,61) VDD
SG1 0 40 0 1 VCC
U3E R18 2
R6 R32
11 10 U6
SWITCH2 1
VCC 40 R16 5
1 00 K15 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W VDD 8 1 00 1 %0 .1W 1 0K1 50 .1 W
VAREF 1 P3.4 /T3 EUD 9
7 4HC14 L ED_ I U3F
R15 5 C6 28 Vare f P3.6 /T3 IN 10
VPP VPP/_ EA P3.6 /T3 IN _ ENABL E_ LED R28 R11
1 0K1 50 .1 W 0 .1u F50 V 11
P3.9 /MTSR P3.9
M UX_ SIG0 37 12 KEYSW_ DB 12 13
POH.0 /AD8 P3.1 0 /TXD0 TXD KEYSW
U3B R24 M UX_ SIG1 38 13
POH.1 /AD9 P3.1 1 /RXD0 RXD
R8 M UX_ SIG2 39 14 1 00 K1% 0 .1W
POH.2 /AD1 0 P3.1 2 /_ BHE/_ WRH P3.1 2
3 4 M UX_ SIG3 42 15 1 00 1 50 .1 W
SWITCH2 3 POH.3 /AD1 1 P3.1 3 /SCL K P3.1 3
M UX_ SIG4 43 16 7 4HC14 C26
POH.4 /AD1 2 P3.1 5 /CL KOUT P3.1 5 0 .1u F50 V
1 00 K1% 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W M UX_ SIG5 44 VCC VCC
45 POH.5 /AD1 3 17 VCC
7 4HC14 M UX_ SIG6 P4.0
C11 VCC 46 POH.6 /AD1 4 P4.0 /A1 6 _ CS3 18 R42
DE1 0 _DB M UX_ SIG7 POH.7 /AD1 5 P4.1 /A1 7 /_CS2 P4.1 CAN_ RXD
0 .1u F50 V 19 SPARE
SW9 _ DB P4.2 /A1 8 /_CS1 P4.2 CAN_ TXD
SW8 _ DB M US_ SEL ECT0 29 22 R39 FB2 R16 6 R97
POL .0 /AD0 P4.3 /A1 9 /_CS0 P4.3 4 .99 K15 0 .1W 4 .99 K1% 0 .1 W
R15 6 SW2 2 _DB M US_ SEL ECT1 30 23 U4 C19
1 0K1 50 .1 W 31 POL .1 /AD1 P4.5 /A2 0 /CAN_ RXD 24 1 3 0 .1u F50 V
SW2 3 _DB M US_ SEL ECT2 POL .2 /AD2 P4.6 /A2 1 /CAN_ TXD TXD VCC CAN+
SW2 1 _DB M US_ SEL ECT3 32 _ NM I VPP
33 POL .3 /AD3 76 1 00 1 %0 .1W 8 7 BLM 2 1A6 01 S
U3C R33 SW2 0 _DB P0L .4 V5REF
VCC R17 34 POL .4 /AD4 P5.0 /AN0 77 RS CANH L1
SW1 9 _DB P0L .5 POL .5 /AD5 P5.1 /AN1 V21 REF FB1
5 6 SW1 8 _DB P0L .6 35 78 R41 4 6
SWITCH2 2 POL .6 /AD6 P5.2 /AN2 P5.2 RXD CANL PLM 3 21 6 K2 8 1 SJ 2
SW1 7 _DB P0L .7 36 79 4 75 1 50 .1 W
POL .7 /AD7 P5.3 /AN3 P5.3 _ ST CAN-
R15 7 1 00 K15 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W 2 2 5 VCC
SW1 6 _DB P5.4 /AN4 /T2 EUD P5.4 _ RSTIN GND VREF
1 0K1 %0 .1 W 7 4HC14 59 3 BLM 2 1A6 01 S
P1H.0 /_ CC6POS0 /EX0 IN P5.5 /AN5 /T4 EUD P5.5
C12 62 4 PCA8 2C2 5 0
0 .1u F50 V P1H.1 /_ CC6POS1 /EX1 IN P5.6 /AN6 /T2 IN P5.6
63 5 R40 R44
P1H.2 /_ CC6POS2 /EX2 IN P5.7 /AN7 /T4 IN P5.7
U2C R25 64 R18 4 SPARE
R7 65 P1H.3 /EX3 IN/T7IN 72
5 6 66 P1H.4 /CC2 4IO P8.0 /CC1 6 IO 73
SWITCH8 P1H.5 /CC2 5IO P8.1 /CC1 7 IO L ED_ EL ASH
67 74 1 00 1 %0 .1W 1 00 1 50 .1 W C50 C29 C31 C28 C30 +21 V
P1H.6 /CC2 6IO P8.2 /CC1 8 IO PWM _INC 0 .01 u F5 0 V 0 .01 u F5 0 V
1 00 K15 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W 68 75 0 .01 u F5 0 V 0 .01 u F5 0 V 0 .01 u f5 0 V VCC
P1H.7 /CC2 7IO P8.3 /CC1 9 IO TXEN_INC
7 4HC14 VCC DN1
C3 47 71 BAT5 4S
0 .1u F50 V P1L .0 /CC6 0 _ NM I _ NM I
48 69
R15 8 49 P1L .1 /COUT6 0 _ RSTIN 70 R91 1
P1L .2 /CC6 1 _ RSTOUT _ RSTOUT
1 0K1 %0 .1 W 50 25 VCC 1 00 K1% 0 .1W R90
P1L .3 /COUT6 1 _ RD _ RD ? 1 0K1 %0 .1 W
51 26 U5
P1L .4 /CC6 2 _ WR_ WRL _ WR
U2D R29 52 27 _ PBRST 2 15
P1L .5 /COUT6 2 ALE ALE _ RESET VCC
R16 57 13
VCC 9 8 58 P1L .6 /COUT6 3 VCC 6 _ ST 11 D7
SWITCH9 P1L .7 /_ CTRAP TOL _ RST V21 REF V5REF
SW1 5 _DB 55 VCC 4 9 C25 R89
XTAL 1 XTAL 1 TD RST RST_ WD 0 .1u F50 V UTP5 5V
1 00 K15 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W SW1 4 _DB VSS (6,20,41,56,60) 80
VAGND
1 0K1 %0 .1 W
R15 9 7 4HC14 SW1 3 _DB R4 VCC 16 R98 C36
1 0K1 %0 .1 W C2 60 54 R17 3 1 NC-1 6 14 C35 4 .99 K15 0 .1W 0 .1u F50 V
SW1 2 _DB VSS XTAL 2 NC-1 NC-1 4
0 .1u F50 V R43 3 12 0 .1u F50 V
SW1 1 _DB 1 K1 % 0.1 W NC-3 NC-1 2
U2B 1 .00 Me g 1 % SPARE 5 10
R13 R30 R45 7 NC-5 NC-1 0
C16 4 CI SPARE NC-7
3 4 8
SWITCH1 0 GND
Y1 U9
1 00 K1% 0 .1W 1 00 1 50 .1 W R1 1 0 M Hz DS1 2 32
7 4HC14 VCC XTAL 2 3 1
C8 VCC OSC EN R17 1
0 .1u F50 V 0 1 K1 % 0.1 W
1 0 M Hz R17 0
R16 0 C32 C33 1 K1 5 0.1 W
1 0K1 50 .1 W + C27 C51 C52 C53 C54 1 8p f5 0V 1 0p f5 0V
4 7u F16 V 0 .01 u F5 0 V 0 .01 u F5 0 V 0 .01 u F5 0 V 0 .01 u F5 0 V
U2A R26
R21 VCC
VCC 1 2
SWITCH1 1
1 00 K15 0 .1W 1 00 1 %0 .1W place caps near microcontroller
R16 1 7 4HC14
1 0K1 %0 .1 W C7
0 .1u F50 V R77 R17 5 R79 R66 R67 R68 R69 R70 R71 R17 6 R17 7 R82 R83 R72 R73 R74 R75 R17 8 R17 9 R18 0
U2E R36
R18 1 0K1 %0 .1 W SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 1 0K1 50 .1 W 1 0K1 %0 .1 W 1 0K1 50 .1 W 1 0K1 50 .1 W 1 0K1 50 .1 W 1 0K1 50 .1 W 1 0K1 50 .1 W SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 1 0K1 %0 .1 W 1 0K1 %0 .1 W 1 0K1 %0 .1 W 1 0K1 %0 .1 W 1 0K1 %0 .1 W 1 0K1 %0 .1 W SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5
11 10
SWITCH1 2
1 00 K1% 0 .1W 1 00 1 50 .1 W P3.1 5
P3.8
7 4HC14
C17 VCC P3.9
0 .1u F50 V P3.1 2
P3.1 3
R16 2 P4.0
1 0K1 %0 .1 W P4.1
P4.2
P4.3
U2F
R10 R27 P5.0
13 12 P5.1
SWITCH1 3 P5.2
VCC
1 00 K1% 0 .1W 1 00 1 50 .1 W P5.3
P5.4
7 4HC14
R16 3 C18 P5.5
1 0K1 %0 .1 W 0 .1u F50 V P5.6
P5.7
P8.1
U1E R37
R9 P8.2
11 10 P8.3
SWITCH1 4
1 00 K1% 0 .1W R11 2 R11 3 R11 4 R11 5 R11 6 R11 7 R11 8 R11 9 R12 0 R12 1 R12 2 R12 3 R12 4 R12 5 R12 6 R12 7 R12 8 R12 9 R13 0 R13 1
7 4HC14 1 00 1 %0 .1W
C23 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5
0 .1u F50 V VCC
R16 4
1 0K1 50 .1 W
VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC
U1F R38
R12
13 12
SWITCH1 5
1 00 K1% 0 .1W 1 00 1 50 .1 W R13 7 R13 6 R13 5 R13 4 R13 3 R14 8 R14 7 R13 8
C24 7 4HC14
0 .1u F50 V SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5
M UX_ SEL ECT0

M UX_ SEL ECT1
M UX_ SEL ECT2
M UX_ SEL ECT3
POL .4
VCC POL .5
U3A POL .6
R17 2 POL .7
1 2
TP1 7
R14 1 R14 0 R13 9 R14 4 R14 3 R14 2 R14 6 R14 5
1 K1 % 0.1 W C20 C21 C22
0 .1u F50 V 0 .1u F50 V 0 .1u F50 V SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 SPARE_ rc 08 0 5 Ti tl e
7 4HC14
spare
GE M EDICAL
Si ze Doc u me n t Nu mb e r Rev
D 1 .0
place caps near schmitt triggers OCS CONSOL E PROCRSSOR BOARD
these pulldowns should not exceed 8k Date : Tue s da y , Fe b rua ry 0 6 , 2 0 01 She e t 1 of 2
685
PROTEUS XR/a
OTS Console Processor Board -2 VCC
C45
VCC 0.1uF50V
+21V
ALL LOCK/RELEASE LONG TRANS
J4 FB3 FB4
SW3 SW4 SW5
SWIICH8 1 2
3 4 SWIICH9 ALL_INH LONG_SIG TRANS_SIG
SWIICH10 ALL_OUTH
5 6 SWIICH11 ALL_OUTH
SWIICH12 BLM21A601S
7 8 SWIICH13 VERT_SIG
SWIICH14 VCC VCC VCC BLM21A601S
9 10 SWIICH15
SWIICH16
11 12 SWIICH17
SWIICH18
13 14 SWIICH19
SWIICH20
15 16 SWIICH21
SWIICH23
17 18 SWIICH22
SW DPDT SW DPDT SW DPDT
19 20
CONN_20
R101 R102 R104
474 1% 0.1W 475 1% 0.1W 475 15 0.1W
VCC J2
LONG_SIG
R93 R95 TRANS_SIG 1
C38 C39 100K 1% 0.1W C41 100K 1% 0.1W DET_SIG 2
C44 VCC 0.1uF50V 0.1uF50V 0.1uF50V V_SIG 3
0.1uF50V D1 D2 D4 ANGLE_SIG 4
5
HLMP-15-1540 HLMP_1540 HLMP_1540 TP1 6
TP8 7
J5
TP9 8
RST_WD 1 2 TP10 9
MUX_SELECT0 3 4 _ENABLE_LED TP11 10
MUX_SELECT2 5 6 MUX_SELECT1 TP12 11
7 8 MUX_SELECT3 12
MUX_SIG0
MUX_SIG2 9 10 MUX_SIG1 THESE COMPONENTS WILL BE 13
MUX_SIG4 11
13
12
14
MUX_SIG3
MUX_SIG5
LOCATED ON A SEPARATE PCB 14
15
MUX_SIG6
LED_FLASA 15 16 MUX_SIG7 IN THE CONSOLE"S HANDLE" 16
17 18 LED_I 17
19 20 18
TP2 19
CONN_20
TP3 20
SW1
TP4 21
+21V TP5 22
TP6 23
24
25
C47 CONN_25
ALL_OUT R181
0.1uF50V
ALL_IN SW DPDT
SW2 VCC L2 SPARE_RC0805 +5V

FB8
4.7uH HI18127800R
+ C55 C49 C48

100uF 16V 0.1uF50V 0.1uF50V
ALL_VERT_IN
ALL_VERT_OUT
SW DPDT
J6 R174
ALL_IN 1
ALL_VERT_IN 2
ALL_OUT 3 SPARE_RC0805
ALL_VERT_OUT 4
J1
CONN_4 CAN+
CAN- 1
2
TP7 3
U6-2
VAREF TP13 4
P5.5 1 2 P5.4 TP14 5
3 4 P5.6 R167 6
P5.7
VDD 5 6 VSS 7
LED_I 7 8 KEYSW_DB 0_OHM 8
P3.9 9 10 _ENABLE_LED 9
RXD 11 12 TXD 10
P3.13 13 14 P3.12 TP15 11
P4.0 15 16 P3.15 TP16 12
P4.2 17 18 P4.1 13
19 20 VSS 14
15
CONN_20
PD5 CONN_15
PD7
PD6
U6-3 PD9
VDD
CAN_RXD 1 2 P4.3 +21V
VERT +21V
DETENT +21V
ANGLE PD8
PD2
3 4 CAN_TXD VERT_SIG
RD PD1 +21V
ALE 5 6 WR PD4
SW6 SW7 SW8
MUX_SELECI0 7 8 VPP PD3
9 10 MUX_SELECI1 FB5 FB6 FB7
MUX_SELECI2
POL.4 11 12 MUX_SELECI3
13 14 POL.5 V_SIG DET_SIG ANGLE_SIG
POL.6 VCC VCC VCC C46
MUX_SIG0 15 16 POL.7 0.1uF50V
MUX-SIG2 17 18 MUX_SIG1 BLM21A601S BLM21A601S BLM21A601S
19 20 VDD
CONN_20 J3
SW DPDT SW DPDT SW DPDT ALL_INH
1
ALL_OUTH 2
R103 R106 R105 VERT_SIG 3
U6-4
VSS 475 1% 0.1W 475 1% 0.1W 475 1% 0.1W 4
MUX_SIG4 1 2 MUX_SIG3
CONN_4
MUX_SUG6 3 4 MUX_SIG5
SW8_DB 5 6 MUX_SIG7 R92 R94 R96
SW10_DB 7 8 SW9_DB C40 100K 1% 0.1W C43 100K 1% 0.1W C42 100K 1% 0.1W
SW12_DB 9 10 SW11_DB 0.1uF50V 0.1uF50V 0.1uF50V
VDD 11 12 SW13_DB D3 D6 D5
XTAL1 13 14 XTAL2
J7
SW14_DB 15 16 VSS HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 _PBRST
SW16_DB 17 18 SW15_DB 1
19 20 VSS 2
CONN_20 CONN_2
JU6-5
VDD
SW18_DB 1 2 SW17_DB
J8
SW20_DB 3 4 SW19_DB KEYSW
SW23_DB 5 6 SW21_DB 1
_RSTIN 7 8 SW22_DB 2
_NMI 9 10 _RSTOUT
CONN_2
LED_FLASH 11 12 _ST
TXEN_INC 13 14 PWM_INC
V2IREF 15 16 V5REF
P5.3 17 18 P5.2
19 20 VSS
CONN_20
Title
GE MEDICAL
Size Document Number Rev
C OCS CONSOLE PROCESSOR BOARD 1.0
Date: Tuesday , February 06, 2001 Sheet 2 of 2
686
PROTEUS XR/a
4-3 OTS Console Display Board -1
VCC
VCC VCC VCC VCC
VCC
VCC VCC VCC VCC

R37 R41 R45 R49 C1
100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W R131 0.1uF50V
R7 R11 R15 R19 1K1%0.1W

Q24 C10 Q25 C9 Q26 C14 Q28 C12 U9D U9C U9B
FDV304P 0.1uF50V FDV304P 0.1uF50V FDV304P 0.1uF50V FDV304P 0.1uF50V U1 24 12 8 5
R6 100 1%0.1W R10 100 1%0.1W R14 100 1%0.1W R18 100 1%0.1W 2 11 11 10 4
MUX0 D1 S0 KV_LS TP4 TP3 TP2
Q5 Q7 Q9 Q11 3 9 13 9 6
MUX_SIG6 FDV303N MUX_SIG4 FDV303N MUX_SIG2 FDV303N MUX_SIG0 FDV303N MUX1 D2 S1 KV_MID
21 10
MUX2 D3 S2 KV_MS
100 1%0.1W 100 1%0.1W 100 1%0.1W 100 1%0.1W 22 8 14081 14081 14081
MUX3 D4 S3 MA_LS
7 VCC
S4 MA_MID
R38 R42 R46 R50 1 6
ST S5 MA_MS
100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 23 5 R139 R138 R137 R136 R135 R134
INH S6 SID_LS 1K1%0.1W 1K1%0.1W 1K1%0.1W 1K1%0.1W 1K1%0.1W 1K1%0.1W
4
S7 SID_MID
R132 18
S8 SID_MS
17 C23
1K1%0.1W S9 ANGLE_LS 0.1uF50V
20
S10 ANGLE_M ID
19
S11 ANGLE_OVER
14
S12 LED_GROUP1
VCC VCC VCC VCC 13
S13 LED_GROUP2
12
S14
16
LED_GROUP3 place Near AND gates
15
S15 TP1
VCC VCC VCC VCC
R35 R39 R43 R47 74HC4514
100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W
R5 R9 R13 R17
Q31 C11 Q30 C16 Q27 C15 Q29 C13
FDV304P 0.1uF50V FDV304P 0.1uF50V FDV304P 0.1uF50V FDV304P 0.1uF50V
R4 100 1%0.1W R8 100 1%0.1W R12 100 1%0.1W R16 100 1%0.1W
Q4 Q6 Q8 Q10
MUX_SIG7 FDV303N MUX_SIG5 FDV303N MUX_SIG3 FDV303N MUX_SIG1 FDV303N R63 R64 R65 R66 R67 R68 R69 R70
100 1%0.1W 100 1%0.1W 100 1%0.1W 100 1%0.1W 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1%
R36 R40 R44 R48

100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W 100K1%0.1W
D36 D35 D34 D33 D11 D10 D9 D8

VCC
HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540
+ C3 + C2 + C4 + C5 + C6
100uF16V 100uF16V 100uF16V 100uF16V 100uF16V
R1
Q1
LED_GROUP1 FDV303N
100
R32
100K
PROT
R91 R90 R89 R88 R87 R86 R85 R84 R107 R106 R105 R104 R103 R102 R101 R100
20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% KV DISPLAY 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% U2B
U4 ANGLE DISPLAY
11 12 11 13
7 A CATHODE_1 9 10 A CATHODE
4 B CATHOED_2 8 8 B
2 C CATHODE_3 R20 R21 R22 6 C
1 D Q12 Q13 Q14 5 D
E KV_LS FDV303N KV_MID FDV303N KV_MS FDV303N E
10 12
5 F 100 100 100 7 F
G R51 R52 R53 G
3 100K 9
DP 100K 100K DP R71 R72 R73 R74 R75 R76 R77 R78
LTC-571G LTD-6440G 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1%
PROT PROT PROT
R24
Q16
ANGLE_LS FDV303N D39 D40 D38 D37 D15 D14 D13 D12
100
R55 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540
100K
PROT
R99 R98 R97 R96 R95 R94 R93 R92 R115 R114 R113 R112 R111 R110 R109 R108
20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% mAs DISPLAY 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% U2A
U5 ANGLE DISPLAY
11 12 16 14 R2
7 A CATHODE_1 9 15 A CATHODE
4 B CATHOED_2 8 3 B Q2
C CATHODE_3 R23 C LED_GROUP2
2 R27 R26 2 FDV303N
1 D Q18 Q19 Q15 1 D 100
E MA_LS FDV303N MA_MID FDV303N MA_MS FDV303N E
10 18 R34
5 F 100 100 17 F 100K
G R57 R58 100 R54 G
3 100K 100K 4
DP 100K DP PROT
U9A R143
LTC-571G LTD-6440G 1
PROT PROT PROT LED_GROUP2
3 Q34
2 FDV303N
LED_FLASH
R25 100
14081 R148
Q17 100K
ANGLE_M ID FDV303N
PROT
100 R56
R123 R122 R121 R120 R119 R118 R117 R116 R128 R127 R126 R125 R124 100K
20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% SID DISPLAY 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1%
PROT
U6 U3
11 12 6 4
7 A CATHODE_1 9 3 B CAT_B/C/DP 7
4 B CATHOED_2 8 9 C CAT_B/C/DP
2 C CATHODE_3 R28 R29 R30 1 +
D -
1
E SID_LS
Q20
FDV303N SID_MID
Q21
FDV303N SID_MS
Q22
FDV303N CAT_+/-
2 ANGLE DISPLAY
10 5 8
5 F 100 100 100 DP CAT_+/- R79 R81 R83 R82 R80
G R59 R60 R61 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1% 20 1%
LTS-6495G
3 100K 100K 100K
DP
LTC-571G R31
PROT PROT PROT
Q23
ANGLE_OVER FDV303N D18 D19 D20 D17 D16
100
R62 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540 HLMP-1540
100K
PROT
VCC VCC VCC
R146 100K
PROT R3
R149 R145 Q3
VCC LED_GROUP3 FDV303N
100K 100K VCC 100
R140 R33
R144 Q35-1 Q35-2 C7 100K

IRF7301 IRF7301 0.1uF50V U7A
PROT
4
100K U7B
R130 R129 LM C6482A
4
R142 R141 100 2 -

6 - R133 1K 1%0.1W 1
Q33 Q32 7 3 + LED_I
ENABLE_LED RST_WD
FDV303N FDV303N 1K 1K 5 +
100 LM C6482A
8
100 R150
8
C24 VCC
0.5 1% 0.5W 0.1uF50V
FET_OFF
R151 R147
10K 1%0.1W
U8 100K
1 8
2 NC.1 CATHODE
3 NC.2 Title
4 NC.3 R152
5 NC.4 C8 GE MEDICAL
6 NC.5 0.1uF50V SPARE Siz e Document Number Rev
7 NC.6 4 D 1.0
NC.7 ANODE OCS CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD
LM 285-2.5 Date: Thursday , June 08, 2000 Sheet 1 of 2
687
PROTEUS XR/a
OTS Console Display Board –2 V CC
C17
0.1uF50V
V CC
S W8 S W16 J4
1 2
S WIT CH8 3 4 S WIT CH9
K SIO M410 V CC K SIO M410
S WIT CH8 S WIT CH16 S WIT CH18 13 14 S WIT CH19
C19
0.1uF50V S WIT CH20 15 16 S WIT CH21
19 20
S W9 S W17 CONN_20
K SIO M410 K SIO M410
S WIT CH9 S WIT CH17

V CC
S W10 S W18 V CC
C18
K SIO M410 V CC K SIO M410 0.1uF50V
S WIT CH10 S WIT CH18 J5

C20
0.1uF50V 1 2
RST _WD 3 4 E NA BLE _LE D
M UX 0 5 6 M UX 1
M UX 2 7 8 M UX 3
S W11 S W19
M UX _S IG0 9 10 M UX _S IG1
K SIO M410 K SIO M410 M UX _S IG6 15 16 M UX _S IG7
LED_FLA SH 17 18 LED_I
19 20
S WIT CH11 S WIT CH19 CONN_20
S W12 S W20
V CC
C21 J3
S WIT CH12 0.1uF50V S WIT CH20
1
FET _OFF 1
2
2
S W13 S W21 CONN2
S W14 S W23

V CC

C22
0.1uF50V
S W15 S W22
T itl e
GE MEDICAL
S ize Document Num ber Rev
C 1.0
OCS CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD
Date: T hursday, June 08, 2000 S heet 2 of 2
688
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 5 SYSTEM CONSOLE ILLUSTRATIONS

System Console Power Box Schematics
689
PROTEUS XR/a
System Diagram
690
PROTEUS XR/a
Embedded PC Board Diagram
Note: For reference only.

This page intentionally left blank
691
PROTEUS XR/a
Chapter 11 Ground and Leakage Tests

Note: This section is to be performed by the local field engineer.
SECTION 1.0 GROUNDING RESISTANCE TESTS
Ground Resistance testing is done as part of the system installation tasks, to ensure the continued
electrical safety of the system, the testing is then performed annually under the system Periodic
Maintenance tasks using the Fluke ES612 test meter or equivalent.
Note: The test procedures below contain the specific tool setup to use with the Fluke ESA612 test
meter and the test meter. Refer to device’s user manual for setup details if instead using an
equivalent testing device.
Note: “equivalent” means that the tool is designed to be capable of performing tests to the standard
of IEC 62353
1.1 Fluke ESA612
1.1.1 Personnel Requirements
1.1.2 Preliminary Requirements
1.1.2.1 Tools and Test Equipment
1.1.2.2 Safety
692
PROTEUS XR/a
1.1.2.3 Required Conditions
1.1.2.4 Setup the Tool

• How to connect the Tool
1.) Connect power cord
2.) Connect red test lead to red input jack (V/Ω/A)
3.) Connect black test lead to black input jack
• Power on the Tool

- Press the power switch on the left-side panel so the “I” side of the ac power switch is
depressed. The tool will perform a series of self tests and then display the message
shown as below picture when the self tests has completed successfully.
• Setting the test standard to IEC 62353

- The tool is designed to perform electrical safety testing based on a number of
different safety standards: AAMI ES1/NFPA99, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS 3551. AAMI is the
Analyzer’s default standard.
- To select the IEC 62353 standard:
693
PROTEUS XR/a
1.) Press “Setup”.
2.) From the setup menu, press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “More” to reveal additional
menu selections.
3.) Press “F2” button under the softkey labeled “Instrument” to reveal the instrumentsetup
selections.
4.) Press “F1” button under the softkey labeled “Standard” to open the scroll box above the
softkey label.
5.) Press button of UP or Down to scroll through the standard selections.
6.) When the desired standard is displayed, press “F1” button under the softkey
labeled“Standard” to confirm the standard.
7.) Press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “Done” to completed the standard setup.
694
PROTEUS XR/a
• Accessing the tool’s protective earth resistance test interface
1.) Press “POINT TO POINT” button to access below interface
2.) Press “F2” button under the softkey labeled “Resistance” to access resistance
3.) Zero out the test lead resistance. Connect the two alligator clips accessory as below.
Press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “Zero Leads”. The tool zeroes out the
measurement.
695
PROTEUS XR/a
1.1.3 Protective Earth Resistance Test Procedure

1.) Power off the system.
2.) Connect the alligator clip of the black test lead to cabinet earth terminal.
3.) Connect the alligator clip of the red test lead to each of the test points defined for
the system.
4.) Record each of the protective earth resistance values. The protective earth
resistance value should not be greater than 0.2 Ω (200 mΩ).
NO TEST POINT Expected Value (Ω) Measure Value (Ω) RESULT

1 Cabinet Cover 0.2
2 Screw of table foot pedal 0.2
3 Metal Cover inside housing of table 0.2
4 Housing tray of wallstand. Push tray into 0.2
housing until backstop is reached.
5 OTS console bracket 0.2
6 PC earth terminal 0.2
696
PROTEUS XR/a
1.) Cabinet cover
2.) Screw of table foot pedal
697
PROTEUS XR/a
3.) Metal cover inside housing of table
4.) Housing tray of wall stand. Push tray into housing until backstop is reached.
698
PROTEUS XR/a
5.) OTS console bracket
6.) PC earth terminal
699
PROTEUS XR/a
SECTION 2.0 LEAKAGE CURRENT MEASUREMENTS

When a system installation is completed, it must be inspected for leakage current levels by qualified
personnel. A record of the inspection should be made and kept. To ensure the continued electrical
safety of the system, the testing is then performed annually under the system Periodic Maintenance
tasks.
Specification for Chassis Leakage Current, Fixed Equipment:

The leakage current must not exceed the following limits:
• Patient Care Vicinity General and Critical Care – Not to exceed 500 microamps.
Note: The test procedures below contain the specific tool setup and procedure instructions to use
with the Fluke ESA612 test meter. Refer to device’s user manual for setup details if instead using an
equivalent testing device.
Note: “Equivalent” means that the tool is designed to be capable of performing tests to both the
standard of IEC 62353 and the earth leakage current of IEC 60601-1.
2.1 Personnel Requirements
700
PROTEUS XR/a
2.2 Prerequisites
TO SATISFY REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS, ALL SUB-SYSTEMS MUST BE INSTALLED

WHEN PERFORMING THE LEAKAGE CURRENT TESTING
This test MUST be performed under two specific conditions as follows:

1.) System Power OFF and Electrically Isolated from the hospital mains.
- System Cabinet Power Switch in the OFF position AND the A1 Panel Ground lead
disconnected in the System Cabinet.
2.) System Power ON.

- A1 Panel Ground CONNECTED in the System Cabinet.
3.) Complete room layout sketch to identify locations of tested components.
Common Prerequisites
1.) All System Covers have been installed.
2.) All electrical and ground connections have been verified and Grounding Resistance Testing
completed and within specifications of less than 0.2 ohms.
701
PROTEUS XR/a
702
PROTEUS XR/a
2.3 Procedure using Fluke ESA612
2.3.1 Test Equipment Setup – Fluke ESA612
• How to connect the Tool

1.) Connect power cord
2.) Connect red test lead to red input jack (V/Ω/A)
3.) Connect black test lead to black input jack
• Power on the Tool

- Press the power switch on the left-side panel so the “I” side of the ac power switch is
depressed. The tool will perform a series of self tests and then display the message
shown as below picture when the self test has completed successfully.
• Setting the test standard to IEC 62353

- The tool is designed to perform electrical safety testing based on a number of
different safety standards: AAMI ES1/NFPA99, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS 3551. AAMI is the
Analyzer’s default standard.
- To select the IEC 62353 standard:
703
PROTEUS XR/a
1.) Press “Setup”.

2.) From the setup menu, press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “More” to reveal
additional menu selections.
3.) Press “F2” button under the softkey labeled “Instrument” to reveal the instrument
setup selection
4.) Press “F1” button under the softkey labeled “Standard” to open the scroll box above
the softkey label.
5.) Press button of UP or Down to scroll through the standard selections.

6.) When the desired standard is displayed, press “F1” button under the softkey labeled
“Standard” to confirm the standard.
7.) Press “F4” button under the softkey labeled “Done” to completed the standard setup.
704
PROTEUS XR/a
• Accessing the tool’s Leakage current test interface
1.) Press “POINT TO POINT” button to access below interface
2.) Press “F3” button under the softkey labeled “Leakage” to access Leakage current
interface
705
PROTEUS XR/a
2.3.2 Test Procedure

• Earth Leakage Current Test
NO TEST POINT Expected Value(mA) Measure Value（mA） RESULT
1 System earth cable 10
1. System earth cable
2. Touch Leakage Current Test
• Touch / Patient Leakage Current Test

1.) Connect the alligator clip of the black test lead to system cabinet earth terminal.
2.) Power on the system.
3.) Connect the alligator clip of the red test lead to each of the test points defined for the
system.
4.) Record each of the leakage current values. The touch leakage current value should
not be greater than 100uA.
706
PROTEUS XR/a
NO TEST POINT RESULT Expected Value(uA) Measure Value（uA） RESULT
1 Cabinet Cover 100

2 Screw of table foot pedal 100
3 Metal Cover inside housing of table 100
4 Housing tray of wallstand. Push tray into 100

housing until backstop is reached.
5 OTS console bracket 100
6 PC earth terminal 100
1.) Cabinet door
2.) Screw of table foot pedal
707
PROTEUS XR/a
3.) Metal cover inside housing of table
708
PROTEUS XR/a
4.) Housing tray of wall stand. Push tray into housing until backstop is reached.
709
PROTEUS XR/a
5.) OTS console bracket
6.) PC earth terminal
710
PROTEUS XR/a
3. Patient Leakage Current Test
NO TEST POINT Expected Value(mA) Measure Value（mA） RESULT

1 Tabletop metal frame 100
1.) Tabletop metal frame
711

Proteus XRa S.M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Proteus XRa S.M

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Proteus XRa S.M

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions should be taken when working with x-ray equipment?

What safety precautions should be taken when working with x-ray equipment?

What standards does this equipment conform to regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)?

What standards does this equipment conform to regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)?

PROTEUS XR/a

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS Service Manual

Proteus XR/a System

Copyright © 2000~2020 by General Electric Co.

Preface Table of Contents

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)………………………………………... 06

LIST OF CHANGED PAGES…………..………………………………………… 26

CHAPTER TABLE OF CONTENTS……………………………………………..29

Proteus XR/a System

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

• Reorient or relocate the affected device(s).

• All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly

• All of those recommended guidance regarding electromagnetic environment shall be

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity (1)

Note: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity (2)

Recommended separation distance

Note: P is the power rating of the transmitter in

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equip-

Recommended Separation Distances for Portable and Mobile RF Communications

Note: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.

Product Essential Performance

Prob./Appl. Severity Test

Monitor unintended No unintended motion or motion

Check FOV size after

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ • ТОВА УПЪТВАНЕ ЗА РАБОТА Е НАЛИЧНО САМО НА АНГЛИЙСКИ

WAARSCHUWING • DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

ATTENTION • CE MANUEL DE SERVICE N'EST DISPONIBLE QU'EN ANGLAIS.

AÐVÖRUN • ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.

BRĪDINĀJUMS • ŠĪ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.

ATENÇÃO • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE

ОСТОРОЖНО! • ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ

(SR) • AKO KLIJENTOV SERVISER ZAHTEVA NEKI DRUGI JEZIK,

ATENCION • ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SOLO EXISTE EN INGLES.

REVISION DATE OF ISSUE REASON FOR CHANGE

• Update Job Card for Table motor replacement in Chapter 3

• Change 2 picture in Chapter 9

• Page 9-2~3 update FRU list.

40 31OCT • Page 49: Add note

41 22AUG2019 • Change copyright 2000-2018 to 2000-2019

42 28MAY2020 • Chapter 2 : Collimator waring icon update per INV;

LIST OF CHANGED PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

4-25 Revision 10 2-57 Revision 17

8-4,11-1 thru 11-20 Revision 41

Chapter Table of Contents

1 BEFORE YOU START

3 SYSTEM UPGRADE OR REPLACEMENT

4 CALIBRATION AND CONFIGURATION

SECTION 2 – JOBCARDS CONTENTS

6 JEDI GENERATOR THEORY AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

7 EXCEPTION HANDLING AND ERROR CODES